UC-NRLF 


$B    25    707 


m 


Ao 


■■^^^  "«~7'i^r'*" 


BERKELEY 

GENERAL 
LIERARY 

UNiVFRSITY    or 
CALIFORNIA 


CErCOOPSPltP 


(}l/T^ 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/americananglersgOObrowrich 


"Tia  sweet  to  view  the  limpid  waters  dance. 
As  o'er  their  pebbly  bed  they  eager  rush ; 
Or  in  the  sun's  effulgence  brightly  glance. 
As  through  the  mead  meandering  they  gush } 
Now  ringing  forth  rich  music,  now  all  hush, 
While  song-birds  chant  the  ever  varied  lay, 
From  out  the  willow  and  o'erhanging  bush : 
O,  sweet  it  is  to  thread  the  blithsome  way. 

Clad  in  an  angling  guise,  to,  spend  a  happy  day. 

"  O,  ever  healthful  is  the  mountain  air, 
And  ever  pleasant  is  the  verdant  glade ; 
'Tis  sweet  to  wander  through  the  greenwood,  wbem 
The  sparkling  current  hath  its  passage  made. 
I  love,  at  times,  the  cooling  stream  to  wade, 
Where  brushwood  dense  a  way  will  not  allow; 
I  love  tlie  arcning  bowers,  and  sylvan  shade, 
And  blossoms  sweet  that  wave  from  many  a  bough, 

As  cautiously  adown  the  rippling  path  I  go. 

"  How  meagre  seems  the  world  of  business  strife. 
Compared  with  pleasures  which  the  angler  knows; 
A  scene  of  toil  with  disappointment  rife. 
And  scarce  an  hour  of  calm  and  sweet  repose, 
This  lovely  world  is  made  a  world  of  woes. 
To  him  whose  soul  is  wrapped  in  selfish  gains; 
From  manhood's  prime,  till  life  ai  length  may  close, 
His  feelings  all  are  bound  in  Mammon's  chains. 

And  wealth  at  raost  he  hoards  for  all  his  pains.  " 


(I 


THE 


AMERICAN    ANGLER'S    GUIDE; 

OR, 

COMPLETE  FISHEK'S  MANUAL, 

FOR     THE 

UNITED    STATES: 

CONTAINING  THE   OPINIONS   AND   PRACTICES   OP 

EXPERIENCED    ANGLERS    OF    BOTH    HEMISPHERES; 

WITH  THE  VARIOUS  MODES  ADOPTED  IN  OCEAN,  RIVER,  LAKE,  AND  POND  FISHINa  ; 
THE   USUAL  TACKLE   AND  BAITS   REQUIRED  ;   INSTRUCTIONS  IN   THE  ART 
OF   MAKING  ARTIFICIAL   FLIES  ;   METHODS  OF   MAKING  FISH 
PONDS,  TRANSPORTATION  OF   FISH,  ETC.,   ETC.,   ETC. 


iTouttl)  Htiftfoti, 

REVISED,    CORRECTED,   AND   GREATLY  IMPROVED,  WITH  THB   ADDITION   OF 

A  SECOND   PART, 

C9NTAININa  OVER   ONE   HUNDRED    PAGES   OF  USEFUL  AND    INSTRUCTIVE   INFORMATIOK, 

HANDSOMELY  ILLUSTRATED  WITH  TWENTY  ENGRAVINGS 

OF  THE  PRINCIPAL  ANGLE  FISH  OF  AMERICA,  AND 

EMBELLISHED  WITH  NUMEROUS  ENGRAVINGS 

ON  STEEL,  STONE,  AND  WOOD,  BY 

THE  BEST  ARTISTS. 


NEW  YORK: 
D.   APPLETON  AND   COMPANY, 


846    &    S4S    BROADWAY. 
M.DOCO.LVII. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  J  845,  by 

JOHN  J.  BROWN, 

in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  for  the  Southern  District  of 

New-York. 


LIST   OP 

ILLUSTEATIONS  AND  EMBELLISHMENTS. 

PAOB 

FRONTISPIKCK    (STEKL   KNORAVINO),  TROUTINO. 

A   FRESH   WATER  MESS X 

BAITINO  NEEDLE  AND  DISQOROER XU 

PRIMITIVE     HOOK,    USED     BT     THE     NATIVES    Or    THE     SANDWICH 

ISLANDS 12 

BASSE   BASKET,   WITH   GAFF  HOOK,   ROD,  REEL,  &C 19 

LIMERICK  AND   GRISWOLD   SPRING   SNAP  HOOKS.     PLATE   1     .     .     .  26 

BLACK  FISH,  VIRGINIA,   SPRING   SNAP  HOOKS,   &C.     PLATE  2  .     .      .  28 

ARTIFICIAL  MINNOW 45 

BAIT,  OR   LANDING  NET 51 

THE   SALMON 52 

ARTIFICIAL  SALMON  FLY 63 

THE   LAKE   TROUT 61 

THE   HOLLOW  WOODEN  FLOAT 65 

THE   BROOK  TROUT 66 

TROUT  FISHING  IN  SULLIVAN   COUNTY 74 

THE   PICKEREL,  PIKE,   OR  JACK 1]5 

TROUT   BASKET 130 

THE   STRIPED  BASSE,  OR  ROCK  FISH 159 

THE   WEAK  FISH,  OR   SQUETKAQUB 170 

THE   KINO   FISH,  OR  BARB 174 

SWIVEL   SINKER 177 

THE   BLACK   FISH,   OR   TAUTOG 178 

THE   DRUM 187 

THE    BLACK   BASSE 189 

MULTIPLYING  BALANCE   HANDLE   REEL 194 

THE   SALT  WATER   SHEEFSHEAD 195 

CLEARING   RING 202 

THE   COD 

THE   FLOUNDER 207 

EEL   SPEAR 209 

THE   BLUE    FISH 210 

CORK  FLOAT   FOR   TROUT  AND  PERCH  ANGLING 213 

THE    SEA  BASSE 214 

LANDING  HOOKS,  OR  GAFFS 216 

THE   POROEB 216 

THE  PERCH,   CHUB,  AND   EEL 219 

FOLDING  MET  RING 224 


i_j.£Lc 


M842054 


LIST   OF 

ILLUSTRATIONS  AND  EMBELLISHMENTS. 

Part  IS. 


FAQB 

SNORAVCD   TITLE  PAGE   (ON  STONE) .,  325 

THE   RED   FISH,   OR   SPOTTED   BASSE 235 

SPOON  BAIT S36 

NATURAL   SQtJID 239 

MACKINAW  TROUT 240 

TROUT   CAUGHT «...  244 

O'SHAUGHNESSY  TROUT  HOOK 246 

THE    SMELT 247 

ARTIFICIAL   GREY   DRAKE   TROUT   FLY 249 

O'SHAUOHNESSY   SALMON  HOOK 251 

RED  HACKLE  TROUT   FLY * 256 

BAIT  KETTLE 257 

KNOTS,   LOOPS,   &.C.   (FIVE   ILLUSTRATIONS) 259,  260 

NATURAL    SALT  WATER   SHRIMP 261 

ARTIFICIAL   GRASSHOPPER   BAIT 263 

A  WHITE   PERCH 269 

SCENE   ON  HARLEM   RIVER,   N.  Y 271 

TROUT   COOKED 273 

A   CANADIAN   FISHING   SCENE 283 

AN   EEL  IN  A  FIX 287 

ARTIFICIAL  TIN   SQUID   FOR   BLUE   FISH  AND   SEA  TROLLING   .     .     .  291 

THE    SPEARING 297 

MAJOR  JACK  THOMAS,   OR   CHESTERTOWN  HOOK 308 

BAIT   BOX   FOR   WORMS,   GRASSHOPPERS,   &C 310 

THE   MACKEREL 3lJ 

THE   LUCKY   FISHERMAN'S   RETURN 312 

A  HAND   LINE   FOR  THE   FISHING  BANKS 314 

THE   KILL  DEVIL 318 

ARTIFICIAL  FROG  BAIT ....  323 

A  FAMILY   OF  ANGLERS .     .  331 


CONTENTS  TO  PART  I. 


PAO£. 

Preface 

Introduction      .        -                         .        •        .        .  9 

Introductory  Remarks  on  Angling      ...  13 

Chapter  I — On  the  Materials  used  in  Angling    -        -  20 

Chapter  II — On  Baits  used  in  Angling    -        -        .  34 

Chapter  III — Observations  on  the  Practice  of  Angling  46 

Chapter  IV — The  Salmon 52 

Chapter  V— Of  the  Salmon  Trout,  Lake  Trout,  or  Lake 

Salmon  ......  64 

Chapter  VI — Of  the  Trout        -        -                .        .  66 

Chapter  VII— Of  the  Pike,  Jack,  or  Muscalinga      -  115 

Chapter  VIII— Of  the  Perch 140 

Sun-Fish 149 

Chapter  IX — Of  the  Carp  or  Tench   -        -        -        .  151 

Chapter  X — Of  the  Striped  Basse,  or  Rock-Fish     -  159 
Chapter  XI— Of  the  Weak-Fish,  Wheat-Fish,  or  Sque- 

teague 170 

Chapter  XII — Of  the  King-Fish,  or  Barb        -        -  174 

Chapter  XIII — Of  the  Black-Fish,  or  Tautog      -        -  178 

Chapter  XIV — Of  the  Drum  -        -        .        -        .  iqq 

Chapter  XV — Of  the  Black,  or  Oswego  Basse    -        -  189 

CHAPTfiH  XVI— Of  the  Sheepshead  -        -        -        -  195 


X  CONTENTS. 

PAGE. 

Chapter  XVII— Of  the  Cod  and  Tom-Cod        -        -    203 
Chapter  XVIII— Of  the  Flounder  -        -        -        .        207 
Chapter  XIX— Of  the  Blue-Fish        -        -        -        -    210 

Chapter  XX — Of  the  Sea-Basse,  Porgee,  &c.        -        214 
Chapter  XXI — Of  some  of  the  other  Inhabitants  of  the 

Waters       -        -        -        -        -        -    217 

The  Eel  .....         217 

The  Chub 218 

The  Bull-Head,  Sucker,  Bream,  Roach, 

Dace,  Bleak,  Gudgeon  and  Herring    2 1 9 

The  White-Fish  and  Cat-Fish  220 

Chapter  XXII — Concluding  Remarks        -  221 


PREFACE  TO  PART  I. 


1  HE  author  of  the  following  pages  having  been  situated  tor  a 
number  of  years  where  the  necessity  of  some  general  inform- 
ation on  the  subject  of  the  art  of  Angling  was  daily  seen,  at 
first  conceived  the  idea  of  publishing  an  Americ^i  edition 
of  Walton's  Complete  Angler ;  but  on  a  later  and  more  care- 
ful perusal  of  its  pages,  and  that  of  other  writers,  it  was  foimd 
that  but  little,  comparatively,  real  practical  knowledge  could  be 
given  of  the  large  variety  of  the  fishes  of  our  own  country ;  he 
therefore  concluded  to  publish,  in  a  small  form,  the  opinions 
and  practice  of  the  various  English  authors,  with  remarks, 
thereon,  and  such  information  as  could  be  gathered  from 
American  books  and  American  sportsmen.  Of  the  former, 
very  few  could  be  obtained :  magazines  and  philosophical 
w^orks  were  searched  with  but  little  success ;  the  sportsmen 
were  consulted,  and  much  valuable  information  obtained; 
Btill  there  was  a  general  lack  of  proper  knowledge  of  the 
nature  and  habits  of  the  great  body  of  our  northern  and  west- 


Xll  PREFACE. 

em  fishes,  and  it  was  found  a  much  more  difficult  matter  than 
was  at  first  imagined ;  yet  the  necessity  of  the  case  seemed 
to  invite  a  continuation  of  the  task.  With  the  object  in 
view  of  a  small  pocket  edition,  of  150  pages,  the  work  was 
commenced  and  prosecuted  under  many  difficulties ;  but  it 
was  found  that  the  field  was  vast  and  almost  unlimited ;  that 
compared  with  England,  a  work  to  embrace  all  the  varieties 
of  the  subject  in  the  United  States,  would  require  the  labor 
of  many  years,  and  almost  countless  pages.  The  work  there- 
fore has  been  restricted  to  the  description  of  fishes  most  gen- 
erally angled  for  in  the  United  States.  The  writer  has  endea- 
vored to  give  in  plain  language,  and  as  far  as  could  be  ascer- 
tained, the  modes  adopted  by  the  anglers  and  experienced 
authors  of  both  hemispheres,  leaving  the  amateur,  in  many 
cases,  a  selection  of  all,  according  to  his  own  views,  as  occa- 
sion may  require. 

To  the  friends  who  have  assisted  him,  and  to  the  authors 
consulted,  he  considers  himself  under  many  obligations  for 
the  favors  bestowed  and  the  benefits  derived.  To  those  into 
whose  hands  the  work  may  fall,  he  submits  it  as  an  humble 
attempt  to  impart  practical  information  on  an  interesting 
subject. 


::0 


INTRODUCTION 


In  every  library  of  any  magnitude,  there  are  well  written 
histories  of  the  tenants  of  the  air,  from  the  smallest  insect  to 
the  "  feathered  King  "  that  sits  on  the  rocky  tops  of  our  ma- 
jestic hills,  and  emblems  our  glory  to  the  world:  and  of  that 
class,  also,  which  walk  the  earth,  from  those  that  minister  to 
or  oppose  our  comfort  and  happiness,  to  the  "  gigantic  un- 
known," whose  aute-deluvian  origin  appears  almost  fabulous. 
Man  has  analyzed  man ;  and  it  has  been  supposed  that  the 
intricate  machinery  of  the  greatest  work  of  the  Maker,  was 
well  understood,  yet  every  day  seems  to  give  new  and  con- 
vincing proofs  that  our  knowledge  is  yet  but  limited. 

The  sciences  of  Phrenology,  Electricity,  Magnetism,  and, 
more  latterly,  Mesmerism,  are  daily  opening  new  fields  to 
the  learned  and  curious;  and  regions  which  have  formerly 
been  considered  as  explored  to  their  utmost  depths,  now  prove 
mines  of  inexhaustible  inquiry.  Europe  has  furnished  a 
GrOLDSMiTH,  a  BuFFON,  E  LiNN^us,  and  a  CuviER,  and  our 
own  country  has  not  been  backward  in  scientific  researches. 


10 


INTRODUCTION 


Mr.  Audubon,  so  well  known  to  every  American,  has  explor- 
ed the  air,  and  opened  to  the  world  an  enlarged  and  faithful 
picture  of  the  feathered  songsters  of  the  Western  Hemisphere. 
His  History  of  Quadrupeds,  also,  promises  for  him  a  fame 
equal  to  that  accorded  any  who  have  preceded  him  in  this 
department. 

But  amidst  all  these  researches,  but  little,  comparatively 
speaking,  has  been  done  in  the  Natural  History  of  Fishes. 
The  boundless  ocean,  with  its  vast  waters,  and  numberless 
tributaries,  remains  miexplored :  and  the  fact,  that  scientific 
inquirers  of  all  ages,  have  neglected  to  penetrate  so  far  into 
the  philosophy  of  this  branch  of  Nature's  productions  as  into 
many  other  departments  of  her  wonderful  and  deep-hidden 
mysteries,  is  certainly  a  source  both  of  surprise  and  regret. 

The  objects  that  continually  present  themselves  in  our 
every  day  relations,  naturally  invite  the  attention  and  awaken 
an  interest  for  the  wonderful  creations  of  Nature.  Hence  we 
have  a  history  of  Birds,  Beasts,  Insects;  works  on  Botany, 
Geology,  and  Astronomy ;  but  as  yet  no  standard  treatise  on 
Ichthyology.  The  dangers  attending  navigation,  are  by  the 
aid  of  steam  power  becoming  daily  less  formidable;  and 
where  but  few  could  formerly  be  tempted,  thousands  now  are 
induced  to  view  the  sublimity  of  Nature  on  the  great  deep, 
and  will  consequently  be  led  to  study  the  natural  history  of 
its  inhabitants. 

LinnsBUS  has  defined  nearly  400  species  of  fishes  in  the 
Old  World,  while  our  own  country,  possessing  as  it  does  great 
advantages  over  any  other,  cannot  boast  of  a  single  treatise  on 
a  subject  so  fraught  with  interest  to  the  admirer  of  Nature. 


INTRODUCTION.  11 

The  late  Dr.  Mitchell,  of  New- York,  together  with  Governor 
De  Witt  Clinton,  have  furnished  to  the  Literary  and  Philoso- 
phical Society  of  tliis  city,  a  great  amount  of  valuable  scientific 
information  on  the  natural  history  of  the  Fishes  of  the  State  ol 
New-York.  Dr.  Smith,  of  Massachusetts,  has  written  a  very 
able  work  on  the  Fishes  of  his  own  State.  But  of  the  history 
of  the  fishes  of  our  boundless  western  rivers  and  lakes,  but  little 
is  known.  The  celebrated  BufFon  has  said,  "  that  in  America 
animated  nature  is  weaker,  less  active,  and  more  circumscrib- 
ed in  the  variety  of  its  productions,  than  in  the  old  world : 
that  there  is  some  combination  of  elements,  and  other  physi- 
cal causes,  something  that  opposes  its  amplification;  that 
there  are  obstacles  to  their  development,  and  perhaps  to  the 
formation  of  large  germs ;  and  that  even  those  which,  from 
the  kindly  influences  of  another  climate,  have  acquired  their 
complete  form  and  expansion,  shrink  and  diminish  under  a 
niggardly  air  and  unprolific  land  " ! !  How  absurd  and  foolish 
a  remark  from  a  person  whom  knowledge,  and  that  too  of  a 
great  general  character,  should  have  taught  better !  One  is 
almost  tempted  to  believe  that  it  is  tinged  with  envy.  It  is 
true,  that  at  the  time  it  was  uttered,  our  resources  were 
comparatively  small,  our  institutions  weak  and  enfeebled,  and 
in  fact  our  country  itself  but  little  known  abroad ;  yet  the  re 
proach,  even  were  the  facts  as  stated,  was  ill-timed,  and  not 
in  taste :  its  falsity  is  too  plain  to  need  comment. 

The  plan  adopted  by  many  of  our  State  Legislatures,  of 
ordering  geological  surveys,  bringing  to  its  aid  some  of  the 
best  talent  of  the  country,  is  well  calculated  to  advance  this 
science.     As  our  country  gradually  progresses  in  wealth  and 


12 


INTRODUCTIOU 


prosperity,  let  us  also  advance  in  the  culture  of  the  sciences 
and  arts ;  and  although  its  age  as  a  nation,  will  not  admit  oi 
as  great  perfection  in  literary  or  scientific  attainments  as  those 
of  the  old  world,  let  there  be  no  obstacles  to  the  full  devel- 
opment of  its  prolific  power ;  and  we  may  then  hop*  that  that 
day  is  not  far  distant,  when  the  Natxiral  History  of  America 
shall  be  as  thoroughly  explored  as  that  of  the  mother  coun- 
try, giving  valuable  and  important  scientific  information  to 
the  inquirer  after  knowledge  as  well  as  to  the  lover  of 
aquatic  sports. 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS  ON  ANGLING. 


Angling,  from  the  earliest  periods  of  the  world,  has  been 
considered  a  source  both  of  amusement  and  profit.  Walton, 
or  old  Izak,  as  he  is  more  familiarly  called,  in  his  remarks  on 
the  Antiquity  of  Angling,  goes  back  as  far  as  the  days  of  the 
sons  of  Adam,  and  the  Book  of  Job,  in  which  latter  he  proves 
the  first  mention  of  fish-hooks.  The  earliest  authentic  infor- 
mation, however,  we  have  of  Angling  as  an  amusement,  can 
be  dated  as  far  back  as  the  days  of  the  Romans.  Trajan,  the 
Roman  Emperor,  is  mentioned  as  one  who  loved  Angling,  and 
also,  if  we  may  credit  history,  of  eating  the  result  of  his  days' 
sport  in  epicurean  style.  Plutarch  also  speaks  of  Mark  An- 
tony and  Cleopatra  as  using  angling  as  a  principal  recreation ! 
We  know  little,  however,  of  any  perfection  in  the  art,  until 
the  year  1486,  when  a  treatise  on  the  subject  was  ptibli shed 
by  a  lady,  celebrated  at  that  time  for  her  beauty  and  ac- 
complishments, entitled  "  The  Treatyse  of  Fyssynge  with 
an  Angle,  by  Dame  .Tulyana  Berners,  Prioress  of  the  Nun- 
nery near  St.  Albans."  The  book  would  at  the  present  day 
be  considered  a  curiosity,  if  we  may  judge  from  the  follow- 
ing quaint  extract,  in  which  she  shows  the  superiority  of 
fishing  over  fowling : 

"  The  Angler  atte  the  leest,  hath  his  holsom  walke,  and 
raery  at  his  ease,  a  swete  ayre  of  the  swete  sauoure  of  the 
mede  floures,  that  makyth  him  hungry  ;  he  hereth  the  melo- 


14 


INTHODUCTORT  REMARKS  ON  ASOLHSQ. 


- — ■-■• 

^—rr-r^- 



-:^^ 

IvS- 

-_  r 

>--■ 

:.y^^ 

-^r=r: 

dyous  arraony  of  fowles ;  he  seeth  the  yonge  swannes,  hee- 
rous,  duckes,  cotes,  and  many  other  fowles,  wyth  theyr 
brodes ;  whyche  me  semyth  better  than  alle  the  noyse  of 
houndys,  the  blastes  of  hornys,  and  the  scrye  of  fouhs,  that 
hunters,  fawkeners,  and  fowlers  can  make.  And  if  the 
angler  take  fysshe  ;  surely,  thenne,  is  there  noo  man  merier 
than  he  is  in  his  spyryte." 

Walton  also  makes  mention  of  a  Dr.  No  well,  Dean  of  the 
Cathedral  of  St.  Paul's,  and  author  of  the  present  Church 
Catechism,  who  lived  in  the  reign  of  Henry  the  Eighth.  He 
is  represented  as  a  good  man,  a  constant  practiser  of  angling, 
and  as  employing  the  tenth  part  of  his  time  in  that  sport.  In 
an  ancient  picture,  (which  would,  by  the  way,  be  rather  more 
cmious  than  the  book  above-mentioned)  he  is  represented  as 
leaning  with  one  hand  on  a  desk,  holding  a  Bible,  whilst  at 
his  side  lie  his  lines,  hook,  and  other  tackle,  with  several  kinds 
of  rods ;  underneath  is  written  "  that  he  died  in  1601,  at  the 
age  of  95  years ;  that  age  had  neither  dimmed  his  eyes  nor 
weakened  his  memory ;  and  that  Angling  and  Temperance 
were  the  causes  of  these  blessings.''  Sir  Henry  Wotton,  who 
lived  about  the  same  period  says,  "  'twas  an  employment  for 
his  idle  time,  which  was  not  then  idly  spent ;  for  Angling  was 
after  tedious  study  a  rest  to  his  mind;  a  cheererof  his  spirits; 
a  diverter  of  sadness ;  a  calmer  of  unquiet  thoughts ;  a  mode- 
rator of  passions  ;  a  procurer  of  contentedness." 

Joe  Davors,*  who  wrote  about  the  same  time,  runs  prettily 
off  in  this  style  : 

"  Let  me  live  harmlessly ;  and  near  the  brink 
Of  Trent  or  Avon  have  a  dwelling  place ; 

Where  I  may  see  my  quill  or  cork  down  sink, 
With  eager  bite  of  perch,  or  roach,  or  dace ; 

And  on  the  world  and  my  Creator  think ; 

Whilst  some  men  strive  ill  gotten  goods  t'  embrace, 

*  John  Dennys,  Esq.,  author  of"  Secrets  of  Angling,"  A.  D.  1613. 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS  ON  ANGLINO.     J9 

And  others  spend  their  time  in  base  excess 
Of  wine,  or  worse,  in  war  and  wantonness. 

"  Let  them  that  list,  these  pastimes  still  pursue, 

And  in  such  pleasiug  fancies  feed  their  fill} 
So  I  the  fields  and  meadows  green  may  view, 

And  daily  by  fresh  rivers  walk  at  will, 
Among  the  daisies  and  the  violets  blue, 

Red  hyacinth,  and  yellow  daffodil, 
Purple  narcissus  like  the  morning  rays, 
Pale  gander-grass,  and  azure  culver-keys. 

» I  count  it  higher  pleasure  to  behold 

The  stately  compass  of  the  lofty  sky, 
And  in  the  mist  thereof,  like  burning  gold, 

The  flaming  chariot  of  the  world's  great  eye ; 
The  watery  clouds  that  in  the  air  up-roll'd. 

With  sundry  kinds  of  painted  colors  fly } 
And  fair  Aurora,  lifting  up  her  head, 
Still  blushing,  rise  from  old  Tithonus'  bed. 

'  The  hills  and  mountains  raised  from  the  plains, 

The  plains  extended  level  with  the  ground ; 
The  grounds  divided  into  sundry  veins, 

The  veins  enclosed  with  rivers  running  round} 
The  rivers  making  way  through  nature's  chains 

With  headlong  course  into  the  sea  profound; 
The  raging  sea,  beneath  the  valleys  low, 
Where  lakes,  and  rills,  and  rivulets  do  flow. 

"  The  lofty  woods,  the  forests  wide  and  long, 
Adorn'd  with  leaves  and  branches  fresh  and  green, 

In  whose  cold  bowers  the  birds  with  many  a  song, 
Do  welcome  with  their  choir  the  Summer's  queen; 

The  meadows  fair,  where  Floras  gifts  among 
Are  intermix'd  with  verdant  grass  between  ; 

The  silver  scaled  fish  that  softly  swim 

Within  the  sweet  brook's  chrystal,  watery  stream. 

"  All  these,  and  many  more  of  His  creation 
That  made  the  heavens,  the  Anjfler  oft  doth 


lo 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS    ON    ANGLINO. 


Taking  therein  no  little  delectation, 

To  think  how  strange,  how  wonderfiil  they  be  ; 

Framing  thereof  an  inward  contemplation 
To  set  his  heart  from  other  fancies  free  : 

And  whilst  he  looks  on  these  with  joyful  eye, 

His  mind  is  wrapt  above  the  starry  sky." 

If  Angling  can  give  birth  to  sucli  pleasant  and  wholesome 
thoughts  as  these,  who  will  deny  that  it  is  an  employment 
both  profitable  and  amusing  ? 

Walton  further  says,  that  "  it  is  the  contemplative  man's 
recreation ;  for  it  is  eminently  calculated  to  still  the  stormy 
passions  of  the  breast,  and  lead  to  the  calm  and  tranquil 
pleasures  ai'ising  from  frequent  meditation  of  the  beauties  of 
nature."  What  more  powerful  argument  can  the  Angler  have 
in  justification  of  this  amusement  ?  Volumes  could  not  have 
said  more. 

Sir  Humphrey  Davy  remarks  :  "  For  my  health,  I  may 
thank  my  ancestors,  after  my  God:  and  I  have  not  squandei'- 
dered  what  was  so  bountifully  given :  and  though  I  do  not 
expect,  like  our  Arch-Patriarch  Walton,  to  number  ninety 
years  and  upwards,  yet  I  hope  as  long  as  I  can  enjoy  a  vernal 
day,  the  warmth  and  light  of  the  sunbeams,  still  to  haunt  the 
streams,  following  the  example  of  our  late  venerable  friend, 
the  President  of  the  Royal  Academy,*  with  whom  I  have 
thrown  the  fly,  caught  ti'out,  and  enjoyed  a  delightful  day  of 
angling  and  social  amusement,  by  the  bright  clear  streams  of 
the  Waiidle." 

The  celebrated  Dr.  Paley  said,  in  reply  to  a  person  anx- 
ious about  the  completion  of  one  of  his  great  philosophical 
works,  that  "  it  would  be  finished  as  soon  as  the  fly-fishing 
was  over;"  evidently  considei-ing  this  diversion  of 
equal  importance  with  those  mental  efforts  that  have  render- 
ed his  name  almost  immortal. 

*  Benjamin  West. 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS    ON    ANGLING. 


17 


Gay,  Thompson,  John  Tobin,  S.  T.  Coleridge,  Pro- 
fessor Wilson,  Sir  Walter  Scott,  and  Sir  Francis  Chan- 
try, were  all  ardent  disciples  of  Walton;  and  Admiral  Lord 
Nelson  was  so  passionately  fond  of  the  sport,  that  he  fished 
with  his  left  hand  a  long  time  after  he  had  lost  his  right. 

Benjamin  West,  who  enjoyed  many  a  day's  sport  with 
Sir  Humphrey  Davy,  was  an  American  Painter ;  and  to  come 
down  to  our  own  day,  Hy.  Inman,  one  of  the  best  American 
Painters  living,  now  on  a  visit  to  Europe,  divides  his  time 
partly  in  painting  the  portraits  of  the  nobles  of  England,  and 
partly  in  the  noble  sport  of  trout  and  salmon  fishing,  in  the 
beautiful  lakes  and  rivers  of  Scotland. 

Daniel  Webster  finds  relief,  after  a  tedious  vdnter's 
session  of  Congress,  in  angling  for  salmon  in  the  Kennebec, 
and  for  trout  in  the  various  streams  of  Massachusetts.  It  is 
said,  moreover,  that  this  distinguished  statesman  is  quite  as 
much  at  home  in  preparing  a  kettle  of  chowder,  as  he  is  in 
the  halls  of  legislation  at  Washington;  and  Martin  Van 
BuREN  is  acknowledged  to  be  equally  successful  in  angling 
for  pickereU  as  in  the  cultivation  of  his  beautiful  farm. 

Many  other  names  of  distinguished  men,  who 

Oft  have  tried  with  baited  hook 
To  tempt  the  tenant  of  the  brook. 


could  be  added  to  this  list,  to  prove  that  angling  is  held  in  high 
regard  by  all  classes  of  people,  but  it  is  unnecessary.  The 
observant  reader  wiU  draw  his  own  conclusions. 

When,  however,  we  take  into  consideration  the  extent  ot 
our  country,  its  many  beautiful  streams  and  quiet  lakes,  where 
the  finny  tribe  abound,  we  will  find  that  the  number  of  an- 
glers, when  compared  with  that  of  England,  is  astonishingly 
small.  But  the  fact  is,  (and  a  deplorable  one  it  is,  too,)  that 
the  majority  of  the  American  people  are  so  much  engaged  in 
"  gettmg  rich,"  that  they  scarcelv  ever  think  of  enjoying  the 


18 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS    ON   ANGLING. 


.:~ii. 

- 

-"V — 

solid  pleasures  of  this  life,  until,  by  the  fatigues  and  perplexi 
ties  of  business,  they  are  better  fitted  for  the  grave,  than  for 
any  proper  and  healthy  recreation. 

An  eminent  divine  and  sound  philosopher  of  this  city,  in 
a  discourse  a  short  time  since,  remarking  on  the  habits  of  the 
people  of  this  comitiy,  said:  "that  they  alw^ays  seemed  to  be 
in  a  state  of  perpetual  excitement — one  continual  hurry  and 
bustle ;  and  that  it  would  not  be  surprising  to  him  to  see  half 
of  the  population  of  New-York  fall  down  in  its  streets  in  epi- 
leptic fits ;  and  that  chronic  diseases,  in  most  cases  caused  by 
excessive  mental  excitement,  close  application,  and  want  of 
air  and  proper  exercise,  w^ere  fearfully  on  the  increase." 

Walton  says,  "  And  for  you,  that  have  heard  many  grave 
and  serious  men  pity  anglei's,  let  me  tell  you  sir,  there  be 
many  men  that  are  by  others  taken  to  be  serious  and  grave 
men,  which  we  contemn  and  pity.  Men  that  are  taken  to  be 
grave  because  nature  hath  made  them  of  a  sour  complexion — 
money-getting  men — men  that  spend  all  their  time  first  in 
getting,  and  next  in  anxious  care  to  keep  it — men  that  are 
condemned  to  be  rich,  and  then  always  busy  or  discontented  ; 
for  these  poor  rich  men,  we  anglers  pity  them  perfectly,  and 
stand  in  no  need  to  borrow  their  thoughts  to  think  ourselves 
80  happy."  No,  troth,  we  should  be  very  sorry  to  borrow 
anything  from  persons  of  this  stamp,  much  less  their  thoughts, 
the  poorest-things  probably  by  far  in  their  possession.  Good 
Isaac,  verily  thou  didst  know  human  nature  ! 

It  is  true,  as  Walton  has  remarked,  that  many  have  ridi- 
culed this  noble  science  and  pitied  its  followers  ;  but  let  those 
whose  extreme  and  somewhat  morbid  sensibilities  have  ren- 
dered them  blind  to  the  beauties  of  nature,  remember  that  he 
"  who  went  about  doing  good,"  chose  a  number  of  his  apostles 
from  among  fishermen,  and  considered  them  worthy  objects 
of  his  confidence  and  love. 

It  seems,  in  fine,  a  work  of  supererogation  to  attempt  to 


I 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS    ON    ANGLING, 


19 


justify  this  agreeable  pastime,  after  the  expressed  opinions  of 
SO  many  learned  and  distinguished  men  of  every  age  ;  and  let 
us  ask  the  reader  if  there  is  any  recreation  at  once  so  harm- 
less, and  with  which  so  many  happy  associations  are  blended 
— which  combines  so  many  rational  inducements  to  health 
and  true  enjoyment,  as  Angling. 

"  Adieu !  ye  sports  of  Noise  and  Toil 
That  Crowds  in  senseless  strife  embroil ; 
The  Jockey's  Mirth,  the  Huntsman's  Train, 
Debauch  of  Health,  and  waste  of  Gain, 
More  mild  Delight  my  Life  employ, 
The  ANGLER'S  unexpensive  Joy. 
Here  I  can  sweeten  Fortune's  Frowns, 
Nor  envy  Kings  the  Bliss  of  Crowns." 

Bkookes  on  Angling,  1766. 


CHAPTER  I. 
ON    THE    MATERIALS    USED    IN    ANGLINO, 


"  My  rod  and  my  line,  my  float  and  my  lead, 

My  hook  and  my  plummet,  my  whetstone  and  knife, 
My  basket,  my  baits,  both  living  and  dead. 

My  net,  and  my  meat,  for  that  is  my  chief, 
Then  I  must  have  thread,  and  hairs  green  and  small. 
With  mine  '  Angling  Purse  '—and  so  you  have  all." 

Walton. 
•■  You  must  have  all  these,  and  twice  as  many  more,  with  which, 
you  mean  to  be  a  fisher,  you  must  store  yourself." — Idem. 


It  is  necessary,  in  order  to  become  a  successful  Angler,  to 
have  a  complete  assortment  of  tackle  ;  and  as  many  Anglers 
pefer  making  and  arranging  their  own  materials,  it  will  not 
be  improper  to  give  here  a  list  of  the  articles  which  con- 
stitute a  well  aiTanged  Angler's  establishment.  Therefore, 
let  the  sportsman  provide  himself  with  the  following  articles : 

Salmon  and  Tront  Rods  for  both  bait  and  fly-fishing  ;  rods 
for  bass  and  pickerel;  and  also  for  bridge  fishing  and  troll- 
ing ;  spare  tops  of  different  sizes. 

Lines  of  silk,  silk  and  hair,  twisted  and  platted,  silk- worm 
gut,  India  gi-ass ;  and  hemp,  or  flax  lines  for  trolling  or  sea 
fishing. 

Reels  or  Winches,  small  and  large,  for  light  or  heavy 
fishinsr. 


ALS  USED  IN  ANGLING  —  RODS, 


21 


Hooks  of  various  patterns,  from  No.  0  to  12,  on  silk-worm 
gilt,  hair,  gimp  or  wire,  snap-hooks  for  trolling,  hooks  on 
hemp  lines,  &c.,  loose  hooks  of  all  sizes. 

Floats  of  quill,  cork,  or  wood,  of  various  sizes. 

Sinkers,  plain,  swivel  and  hollow,  for  sea,  middle  or  bot- 
tom fishing,  split  shot,  and  swivels  for  fly-fishing. 

Leaders  of  hair,  gut  or  grass,  of  various  lengths,  loose  gut 
for  making  or  repairing  leaders  or  tying  on  hooks,  and  gimp 
or  wire  for  pickerel  tackle. 

Squids  of  pearl,  ivory,  bone,  tin  or  lead,  for  sea  or  river 
trolling,  artificial  flies,  minnows,  grasshoppers,  frogs,  mice, 
shrimp,  &x;. 

Disgorgers  of  vainous  sizes,  bait  needles,  clearing  rings, 
bait  and  landing  nets,  bait  box,  and  baskets. 

A  Book  containing  a  full  assortment  of  artificial  flies ;  a  box 
containing  a  variety  of  feathers,  worsted,  silks  of  all  colors, 
gold  thread,  shoemakers'  wax,  &c. ;  also,  a  book  for  general 
tackle. 

A  pair  of  plyers,  a  pair  of  scissors,  a  penknife,  hand  vice, 
and  a  file  for  sharpenmg  the  points  and  barbs  of  hooks. 

RODS. 

There  is  probably  no  article  of  tackle  upon  which  the  An- 
gler looks  with  so  much  pride  and  pleasure,  as  a  good  Rod; 
like  the  fowler's  gun,  or  the  jockey's  horse— next  to  his  wife, 
they  are  always  the  best.  They  are  made  of  various 
kinds  of  woods,  and  of  various  lengths,  for  the  different  spe- 
cies of  Angling.  The  best  rods  were  formerly  imported  from 
England,  and  made  of  hazel  or  hickory,  but  they  were  little 
adapted  to  our  modes  of  fishing,  and  have  consequently  grown 
into  disuse.  American  rod  makers  have  introduced  great  im 
provements  in  the  article  within  the  last  ten  years,  and  cau 
now  turn  out  rods  which,  for  workmanship  and  beauty  of 
finish,  cannot  be  sui-passed.     They  are  mnrle  to  i^vM  '1..-  <;,s  fs 


22 


of  all  Anglers,  from  the  single  ferruled  rod  for  the  novice,  at 
the  cost  of  from  $2  to  $5,  to  the  more  expensive  one  of  the 
scientific  Angler,  varying  from  $5  to  $50.  Those  now  in  ge- 
neral use  are  made  either  from  ash,  bamboo,  Calcutta  reed, 
or  lance  wood.  The  three  former  woods  are  preferred  by- 
good  Anglers  ;  the  latter  wood  is  objected  to  on  account  of 
its  weight,  and  as  it  is  the  main  object  of  the  sportsman  to 
have  his  tackle  as  light  as  strength  and  durability  wiU  permit, 
this  description  is  seldom  used.  There  are  three  requisites 
for  all  good  rods,  viz.  strength,  lightness  and  pliability;  and  it 
is  absolutely  necessary  that  the  wood  should  be  of  such  a  na- 
ture as  to  admit  of  a  uniform  flexibility  from  butt  to  top. 

Rods  for  salmon  are  usually  from  18  to  20  feet  in  length, 
the  butt  made  of  well  seasoned  maple,  the  second  and  third 
joints  of  ash,  and  the  fourth  joint,  or  top,  of  lance  wood ;  and 
if  for  fly-fishing,  the  top  should  be  in  diree  pieces,  neatly 
spHced,  say  in  equal  proportions  of  lance  wood,  bamboo,  and 
whalebone. 

For  striped,  or  black  bass,  and  pickerel,  a  rod  from  12  to 
15  feet  in  length  is  used;  the  butt  of  ash,  the  second  and 
third  joints  of  ash  or  bamboo,  (this  latter  wood  is  preferred  by 
many  Anglers  on  account  of  its  lightness  and  toughness,  and 
if  it  can  be  procured,  is  quite  as  good  ^s  the  best  ash,)  the 
last  joint,  or  top,  of  lance  wood.  The  Calcutta  reed  also 
makes  a  very  good  rod,  when  it  can  be  had  of  a  regular  taper, 
and  free  from  worm-holes,  or  other  imperfections,  and  is  used 
mounted  with  rings,  in  its  natural  state,  or  cut  up  into  joints, 
and  ferruled.  Some  country  Anglers  prefer  these  rods  in 
their  rough  state,  and  will  send  many  miles  to  procure  them. 
Those  of  the  city  sportsmen,  also,  who  have  their  regular 
fishing  grounds,  provide  an  extra  rod  of  this  description, 
which  they  generally  leave  at  the  tavern  where  they  stop. 
They  cost  but  little,  and  if  kept  in  a  proper  manner,  will  save 


the  Angler  much  trouble  ;  as,  in  case  of  accident,  his  rod.  i.^ 
always  at  the  place  of  destination. 

The  rods  used  for  Trout  are  from  12  to  16  feet  in  length; 
the  butt  of  maple,  the  second  and  third  joints  of  ash  or  lance 
wood,  and  the  last  joint,  or  top,  of  lance  wood,  for  bait ;  if  for 
fly-fishing,  of  spliced  lance  wood,  bamboo,  and  whale-bone, 
similar  to  the  salmon  rod :  in  fact,  a  trout  rod  may  be  called 
a  small  salmon  rod,  and  is  very  often  used  for  the  same  pur- 
pose. 

The  general  rod  is  very  useM  in  travelling  where  the 
Angler  expects  a  variety  of  sport.  It  is  composed  of  various 
kinds  of  woods,  with  a  hollow  butt,  commonly  of  maple,  and 
is  made  to  contain  several  spare  tops,  of  different  sizes,  by 
which  it  can  be  altered  to  suit  any  kind  of  fishing. 

The  walking-cane  rod,  if  well  made,  is  also  a  very  useful 
article  for  travelling,  or  where  the  Angler  does  not  wish  his 
business  or  profession  known.  Each  joint  is  made  to  slide 
into  another,  and  the  whole  is  contained  in  a  hollow  butt, 
similar  to  the  walking-cane.  This  rod  suits  very  well  for 
trout,  perch,  or  any  light  fishing,  but  will  not  answer  for 
heavy  fishing,  as  it  cannot  be  made  sufficiently  large  to  be 
strong.  Heavy  rods  have  been  made  to  slide  into  metal  cases, 
but  they  are  large,  and  more  inconvenient  to  carry  than  the 
ordinary  jointed  rod. 

The  true  Angler  should  if  possible  have  a  separate  rod  for 
each  kind  of  fishing.  AU  the  varieties  of  rods  above  men- 
tioned are  for  sale  at  the  principal  tackle  stores  in  the  Union, 
put  up  in  compact  form,  in  linen,  woollen,  and  canvas  bags. 
or  neat  leather  cases. 

The  Angler  will  therefore  bear  in  mind,  that  in  choosii 
a  rod  of  any  description,  it  is  necessary  to  observe  that  it 
perfectly  straight,  tight  in  the  joints,  without  shaking,  a  gi'ad 
ual  tapering  from  b"tt  to  end,  and  that  it  springs  equally  in  all 
its  parts. 


34 


REELS. 


Many  old-fashioned  Anglers  think  that  this  is  a  superfluous 
article  in  the  equipment  of  a  sportsman ;  but  to  any  one  who 
has  used  it,  it  is  almost  as  indispensable  as  the  rod  itself.  The 
main  object  of  the  reel  is  to  give  the  fish  a  sufficient  quantity 
of  line  to  tire  itself,  and  consequently  affords  more  sport  than 
could  be  obtained  by  the  rod.  alone.  By  means  also  of  this 
valuable  accessory,  fish  of  almost  incredible  weight,  may  be 
captured  where  the  rod.  would  prove  utterly  useless. 

They  are  generally  made  of  brass  or  German  silver,  and 
are  of  two  kinds,  simple  and  compound,  or  plain  and  multi- 


fishing,  are  mostly  imported  from  England,  and  hold  from  20 
to  50  yards  of  line.  The  majority  of  good  Anglers  prefer  a 
multiplying  reel,  because  they  can  wind  up  much  faster,  and 
consequently  enjoy  more  sport  in  the  same  length  of  time ; 
some  prefer  the  plain  reel  on  account  of  its  simpHcity,  and 
object  to  the  multiplier  on  opposite  grounds,  and  also  reason 
that  with  a  heavy  fish,  the  wheels  of  the  multiplier  are  apt  to 
be  clogged  by  friction,  or  bent  by  pressure.  This  may  apply 
to  the  cheap  imported  reels,  but  not  to  those  of  American 
manufacture,  which  have  almost  entirely  superseded  the  fo- 
reign; in  fact,  with  the  exception  of  artificial  baits,  all  articles 
of  tackle  made  in  this  countiy  are  equal,  if  not  superior,  to 
those  of  England ;  and  if  the  Angler  can  procure  the  Ameri- 
can, he  should  patriotically  avoid  any  thing  else. 

The  reels  used  in  bass  or  salmon  fishing,  are  manufactur- 
ed altogether  in  this  country,  and  are  calculated  to  hold  from 
50  to  200  yards  of  line  each.  They  are  made  of  the  best 
hammered  brass,  or  German  silver,  with  balance  handles, 
without  stops,  and  with  plain  or  steel  bushings.  They  run 
with  little  friction,  and  the  least  possible  noise,  and  when  in 
perfect  order  are  the  pride  of  the  scientific  Angler. 


LINES  —  HOOKS, 


29 


LINES. 


Lines  are  made  of  silk,  silk  and  hair,  gut,  India  grass,  flax, 
hemp,  and  cotton.  They  vary  in  size  and  length — coming 
from  the  size  of  a  hair  to  that  of  a  quarter  of  an  inch,  and 
in  some  cases  even  thicker,  and  being  from  12  to  200  yards 
long. 

A  line  for  trout,  should  be  either  of  silk,  silk  and  hair, 
India  grass,  or  fine  flax ;  the  most  common  one  in  use,  how- 
ever, for  this  fish,  is  the  India  grass,  which  is  to  be  had  in 
lengths  of  from  12  to  20  yards,  and  of  vai'ious  sizes.  The. 
silk  plaitted  line  has  an  extensive  reputation  in  England  for 
this  species  of  angling,  as  also  that  of  twisted  silk  and  hair. 
They  are  expensive,  but  considered  by  far  the  best  for  trout 
and  salmon  fishing. 

For  salmon,  lake  pickerel,  black  or  striped  bass,  the  lines 
in  general  use  are  made  of  flax,  hemp,  grass,  silk,  or  hair,  all 
of  which  can  be  obtained  in  lengths  of  from  50  to  200  yards. 

The  cotton  and  hemp  lines  (50  to  100  yards  long)  are  used 
in  trolling  for  blue  fish,  bass,  pickerel,  or  any  kind  of  sea 
fish. 

The  size  and  length  of  a  line  should  always  vary  in  pro- 
portion to  the  sport  anticipated.  For  instance,  you  cannot 
have  too  light  a  line  in  clear  trout  streams,  provided  it  is 
strong  enough  to  take  your  fish;  and  the  same  rule  may  also 
apply  to  striped  bass,  salmon,  and  other  timid  fish.  On  the 
subject  of  lines  generally,  much  must  be  left  to  the  discretion 
and  judgment  of  the  sportsman. 

HOOKS. 

There  is  no  article  of  tackle  of  so  much  importance  to  the 
Angler,  and  concerning  which  such  a  variety  of  opinion  exists, 
as  the  Hook. 


36 


The  most  common  Hook  in  use  in  this  country  is  the 
"  Kirby, "  which  the  reader  will  perceive  is  not  included  iu 
either  of  the  plates,  for  the  reason,  that  until  a  few  years 
since,  it  has  been  the  only  kind  in  use,  and  consequently 
its  shape  and  construction  are  well  known  to  every  sports- 
man. The  sizes  and  numbers  are  similar  to  the  "  Lim- 
erick," so  that  a  person  wishing  to  procure  a  Kirby  Hook, 
can  do  so  by  giving  the  number  of  the  Limerick  pattern. 
These  hooks  derive  their  name  from  one  Kirby,  who  first 
made  them,  according  to  instructions  given  him  by  Prince 
Rupert,  a  member  of  the  Royal  Society  of  London.  They 
vary  materially  in  shape,  being  more  or  less  kirb^d*  or  bent; 
high  or  low  in  the  point ;  with  long  or  short  shanks,  some 
marked,  and  others  flatted.  Those  with  flatted  shanks  are 
used  in  taking  salt  water  fish  onli/ — such  as  black-fish,  por- 
gies,  eels,  flounders,  &c.,  where  a  hemp  line  is  attached. 
Those  w^ith  marked  or  indented  shanks  are  tied  to  gut,  hair, 
or  other  light  materials,  and  are  used  in  all  kinds  of  fresh 
water  fishing.  There  are  many  cheap  hooks  of  the  Kirby 
description,  imported  and  sold  in  this  country.!  Within  a 
few  years,  an  inferior  quality,  made  in  Germany,  has  been 
sold  at  cheap  rates  and  in  large  quantities  to  the  country 
trade.  Hooks  of  this  latter  quality  may  always  be  tested  (as 
in  fact  may  any  hook)  by  merely  sticking  the  barb  into  a  pine 
board  and  pulling  moderately ;  it  will  be  found  as  brittle  as 
glass.  It  may  not  be  improper  to  state  here,  that  one  of  the 
reasons  w^hy  the  Kirby  hook  has  gone  into  comparative  dis- 
use, is  because  the  Limerick,  ioT  fine  fishing,  is  far  superior, 
and  has  consequently  superseded  them ;  although  the  former, 


*  A  phrase  denoting  the  peculiarity  in  all  Kirby  hooks,  derived  from 
the  name  of  the  inventor. 

t  There  are  many  goods  imported,  and  labelled  "  manufactured  ex- 
pressly for  the  American  market,^*  which  are  absolutely  unfit  for  any 
market. 


>o 


J? 


PLATE  1. 


Z> 


HOOKS.  27 

when  of  fine  quality,  are  still  preferred  by  many  scientific 
Anglers. 

Plate  No.  1,  represents  the  best  pattern  o[  Limerick  book 
now  m  use.  They  are,  as  the  reader  will  perceive,  perfectly 
straight,  without  the  shghtest*  kirb  or  bend,  the  point  and 
barb  delicately  finished,  and  the  hook  neatly  japanned  black, 
to  prevent  corrosion.  Its  great  superiority,  over  any  other 
hook,  consists  in  its  perfect  adaptation  to  artificial  fly-fishing ; 
in  fact,  it  is  rarely  the  case  that  any  other  hook  is  used  for 
that  purpose.  They  were  origmally  invented  and  made  by 
one  O'Shaughnessy,  of  Limerick.  Sir  Humphrey  Davy,  in 
his  "  Salmonia,''^  says :  "  I  never  use  any  hooks  for  salmon 
fishing,  except  those  I  am  sure  have  been  made  by 
O'Shaughnessy,  of  Limerick."t  He  also  gives  the  following 
method  of  tempering  hooks  :  "  It  is  requisite  that  the  iron  be 
pure  and  malleable,  such  as  is  procured  from  old  horse-shoe 
nails,  which  we  believe  to  be  generally  made  from  Swedish 
iron.  This  should  be  cemented  with  charcoal  into  good  soft 
steel,  and  that  into  wires  of  different  sizes."  The  original 
O'Shaughnessy  hook  thus  highly  spoken  of,  is  not  made  of 
wire  like  the  ordinary  hook,  but  is  forged  and  hammered  into 
shape  from  the  rough  steel,  which  gives  an  opportunity  of 
varying  the  foi-m,  and  of  throwing  proper  strength  into  those 
parts  of  the  hook  which  most  require  it.  This  latter  advant- 
age, it  will  be  remembered,  cannot  be  attained  in  the  ordi- 
nary wire  hooks.  Their  general  superiority,  as  Anglers  say, 
consists  in  their  excellence  of  temper,  perfection  of  the  barb, 
shape  of  the  bend,  and  position  of  strength.     The  price  of  the 

*  Some  Anglers  prefer  the  Limerick  slightly  kirb'd,  which  can  be 
easily  done  by  subjecting  them  to  a  moderate  heat  in  the  flame  of  a  cau- 
dle, and  bending  them  with  a  pair  of  plyers. 

t  Professor  Rcnnie  objects  to  Davy's  opinion,  and  says  that  inferior 
hooks  were  made  at  that  time,  but  good  hooks  could  be  had  both  ut 
London  and  Birmingham. 


O'Shaughnessy  hooks  in  Limerick,  vary  from  one-and-six- 
pence  to  four  shillings  sterling  per  dozen,  and  when  the  cost 
of  importation  is  added  thereto,  it  will  be  found  that  they  are 
rather  expensive.  The  style  and  shape  of  the  best  Limerick 
hook  described  in  Plate  No.  1,  when  well  made,  and  properly 
tempered,  however,  give  satisfaction  to  the  majority  of 
Anglers. 

Those  marked  "  Limerick  Trout  *'  are  in  general  use  for 
trout  or  perch ;  and 

Those  marked  "  Limerick  Salmon.'^  for  pickerell,  bass, 
weak-fish,  salmon,  or  salmon  trout. 

The  hooks  designated  in  Plate  No.  2,  as  numbers  1  and 
2,  are  the  kinds  used  for  black-fish,  eels,  and  flomiders. 
Number  1  represents  the  ordinary  round  bent  black-fish 
hook,  and  number  2  the  Virginia  hook.  This  latter  was 
originally  made  to  suit  the  fishing  south  of  the  Delaware, 
and  is  highly  esteemed  in  that  region  of  country,  where  it 
finds  a  large  and  ready  sale.  The  numbers  are  the  same  as 
those  of  the  Limerick  pattern. 

No.  3  represents  the  "  Aberdeen "  pattern,  which  is 
made  of  small  blued  steel  wire,  with  a  perfectly  round  bend, 
low  point  and  long  shank.  It  is  used  by  some  Anglers  for 
weak-fish,  trout,  salmon,  and  salmon  trout. 

Nos.  4  and  5  are  correct  drawings  of  the  "  Pickerell 
Spring  Snap  Hook,^^  which  the  reader  will  notice  consists  of 
three  hooks.  The  small  hook,  used  for  the  bait,  is  placed  at 
the  top,  whilst  the  two  larger  ones,  made  of  spring  steel,  are 
lower  down,  and  slide  in  a  groove.  No.  5  shows  the  hook 
at  rest.  The  exertions  used  by  the  fish,  when  finding  him- 
self caught,  will  naturally  cause  him  to  run,  (if  it  may  be  so 
called,)  and  in  so  doing  he  pulls  the  hooks  down,  and  thus 
spruigs  them,  securing  him  more  safely  than  could  be  done 
with  a  common  hook.  No.  4  presents  the  hook  in  a  state  of 
action,  and  one  too,  it  would  appear,  rather  uncomfortable  to 


PLATE  5. 


Co 


HOOKS  —  SINKERS,    AC.  29 

the  member  of  the  "  finny  family."     This  hook  is  mach  used 
in  Europe,  and  produces  good  sport. 

The  single  pickerell  hook  is  numbered  6,  on  Plate  2,  and 
is  a  stout  hook,  either  bent  or  straight. 

The  double  pickerell  hook  is  numbered  7  on  the  same 
plate,  and  is  made  of  a  single  piece  of  wire,  similar  to  the 
last.  It  has  been  found  necessary,  from  the  great  voracity  of 
this  fish,  to  attach  twisted  brass  wire,  or  gimp,  instead  of  gut 
or  line,  to  the  hook  used  in  angling  for  them. 

The  weak  trout  hook,  which  is  a  superior  quality  of  Kirby, 
made  of  slim  wire,  with  a  long  shank,  similar  to  the  Aber 
deen,  will  be  fomid  an  excellent  hook  for  trout,  salmon,  or 
bass. 

Since  the  establishment  of  a  manufactory  of  hooks  in  this 
country,  the  Angler  can  gratify  his  own  taste  in  selection,  but 
he  must  bear  in  mind  that  a  great  portion  of  his  success  de- 
pends upon  the  quality  of  these  small  articles  of  his  equip- 
ment, and  he  should  therefore  take  particular  care  to  choose 
those  that  are  well  tempered.  Let  him  test  every  hook  be- 
fore attaching  it  to  his  line,  and  see  that  the  barb  and  point 
are  perfect  and  sharp.  A  small  file  will  be  found  convenient 
for  this  latter  purpose. 

SINKERS,  DIPSIES,  OR  LEADS,  AND  SWIVELS,  &c 

These  articles  of  tackle  are  believed  to  be  peculiar  to  this 
country — no  mention  of  them  bemg  made  in  English  works 
on  Angling,  split  shot  and  bullets  being  used  in  their  stead. 

There  are  three  kinds  in  use,  the  Plain,  Slide,  and  Swivel 
Sinkers. 

The  first  of  these,  the  Plain  Sinker,  is  made  of  lead,  with 
brass  wire  loops  at  each  end,  and  of  various  sizes,  from  a 
quarter  of  an  ounce  in  weight,  for  trout  or  perch  fishing,  to 
that  of  one  or  two  pounds  for  sea  angling. 


30 


SINKERS,    &C.  —  FLOATS. 


The  Slide  Sinker,  is  notliing  more  or  less  than  a  thick 
lead  tiibe,  slightly  rounded  at  each  end.  It  is  used  princi- 
pally in  bottom  fishing ;  the  object  of  the  tube  being  to  allow 
the  Hne  to  pass  through  at  the  least  motion  of  the  fish,  which 
is  thus  immediately  felt.  It  is  considered  jnuch  better  than 
the  old  plan,  where  the  fish  moves  the  weight  of  the  sinker, 
before  the  Angler  has  notice  of  his  luck. 

The  Swivel  Sinker  is  decidedly  the  best  in  use  for  any 
kind  of  fishing,  and  is  made  similar  to  the  Plain,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  the  swivels  at  each  end,  instead  of  the  plain  sta- 
tionaiy  loops.  Tliis  arrangement  gives  the  double  advantage, 
both  of  "  spinning  "  the  bait  in  trolling,  and  of  preventing 
the  line  from  twisting,  and  consequent  entanglement  of  the 
leaders,  hooks,  &c. 

Split  Shot  are  used  almost  universally  for  trout  fishing. 
They  should  be  quite  small,  and  where  greater  weight  is  ne- 
cessary, should  be  used  in  larger  numbers  rather  than  of 
large  size,  as  these  latter  make  much  noise  when  the  line  is 
thrown,  and  are  apt  to  frighten  the  fish. 

Swivels  are  used  for  "  spinning  "  bait,  and  for  preventing 
entanglement  of  the  hne.  They  are  placed  in  various  parts 
of  the  tackle,  but  usually  on  the  gut-length,  or  leader,  and 
should  be  a  necessary  appendage  to  the  equipment. 

Should  this  chapter  prove  rather  heavy  for  the  patience  of 
the  reader,  it  is  to  be  hoped  that  the  buoyancy  of  the  next 
may  enable  him  to  recover  his  equihbrium. 

FLOATS. 

Floats  are  made  of  quills,  cork,  and  red  cedar,  of  various 
sizes,  adapted  to  the  current  of  water,  or  the  peculiar  descrip- 
tion of  angling,  and  are  of  two  shapes,  egg  and  oblong. 

The  float  used  for  trout  is  generally  made  of  quills  or 
cork,  and  cannot  be  too  light  for  fisliing  in  clear  streams ; 


SILK-WORM    GUT,    LEADERS,    &C. 


31 


where  the  current  is  strong  or  water  muddy,  a  larger  float 
may  be  used  without  inconvenience. 

For  bass,  pickerell,  or  salmon,  there  are  two  kinds  of 
floats  employed,  the  cork,  and  that  made  of  hollow  red  cedar, 
wliich  are  made  of  different  sizes,  varying  from  three  to  eight 
inches  in  length,  and  of  neat  proportions.  Those  of  red  cedar 
are  very  light,  and  much  preferred  in  angling  for  bass  and 
weak-fish,  in  the  viciuity  of  New-York. 

SILK-WORM  GUT,  LEADERS,  &c. 

This  extraordinaiy  substance  is  comparatively  little 
known,  except  among  dealers  and  scientific  anglers.  It  is 
manufactured  in  large  quantities  in  Spain,  and  sent  thence  to 
London,  Edinburgh,  and  the  United  States.*  It  is  a  source 
of  much  surprise,  and  by  many  viewed  as  incredible,  that  this 
gut  is  taken  from  the  siJk-worra,  at  the  time  when  it  is  about 
to  spin.  The  size  of  the  gut  varies  according  to  the  capacity 
of  the  worm,  some  strands  being  as  small  as  a  fine  hair,  while 
others  are  as  thick  as  the  1-32  part  of  an  inch.  It  is  a  beauti- 
ful, semi-ti-ansparent  substance,  and  is  in  strands  of  from 
twelve  to  twenty  inches  in  length,  but  usually  not  exceeding 
fifteen  inches.  When  used  by  the  Angler,  it  becomes  quite 
soft  and  pUable,  but  at  the  same  time  extremely  strong  and 
durable.      It  is  almost  imperceptible  in  the  water,  and  if  of 


*  Inferior  qualities  of  this  article  are  manufactured  in  China  and  Italy, 
but  the  best  is  imported  from  Alioant,  in  Spain.  No  mention  is  made 
of  its  ever  having  been  successfully  manufactured  in  any  other  country 
Mr.  Durand,  of  Jersey-City,  opposite  New-York,  succeeded  in  making 
Eome  a  few  years  ago,  but  the  strands  were  entirely  too  short  to  be  use- 
ful to  the  Angler.  Latterly,  however,  an  enterprising  American  in  the 
same  neighborhood,  has  had  still  better  success,  and  produced  some  al- 
most equal  to  the  Spanish.  He  is  still  experimenting,  and  will  no  doubt 
f^ucceed  to  ]»is  entire  satisfaction. 


32 


LANDING    AND    BAIT-NETS,    AC. 


good  quality,  and  carefully  used,  will  outlast  anything  of  the 
kind  which  can  be  procured. 

It  is  used  singly,  twisted,  and  plaitted  for  hnes,  leaders  or 
snells,  for  hooks.  The  smallest  sizes  are  used  for  trout,  and 
the  larger,  when  of  superior  quality,  are  highly  esteemed 
and  in  great  demand  for  salmon  or  bass. 

Leaders  are  made  from  the  above-mentioned  article, 
twisted  horse-hair,  and  India  grass,  and  should  always  be  83 
light  as  possible. 

LANDING  AND  BAIT-NETS,  GAFF-HOOKS,  AND 
CLEARING-RINGS. 


In  the  pleasure  of  anticipation,  the  enthusiastic  fisherman 
is  very  apt  to  forget  many  little  things  which  are  very  im- 
portant items  in  the  success  of  his  day's  sport ;  among  these 
are  the  articles  enumerated  above. 

The  Landing-Net  in  ordinary  use  is  made  of  linen  twine, 
or  fish-line,  sixteen  inches  in  diameter,  and  about  two  feet  in 
depth,  with  a  mesh  of  three-eighths  of  an  inch,  and  is  at- 
tached to  a  stout  wire  ring,  of  iron  or  brass.  The  latter  ma- 
terial is  better  adapted  to  the  purpose,  for  the  reason  that  it 
does  not  corrode  the  net,  whereas  with  almost  every  precau- 
tion, the  former  cannot  be  prevented  from  acting  on  the 
twine.  The  handle  should  be  made  of  stout  hickory  or  ash, 
and  not  less  than  five  feet  in  length.  A  very  convenient  form 
of  this  net  is  now  made,  and  which  occupies  about  half  the 
space  of  the  ordinary  net.  The  ring  or  hoop  is  composed  of 
three  joints  or  hinges,  by  which  it  is  folded  into  a  very  port- 
able shape.  The  handle  to  this  contrivance,  in  order  to  carry 
out  the  principles  of  its  space-economizing  inventor,  is  made 
of  three  joints,  which  slide  into  each  other  like  a  telescope, 
or,  as  Blaine,  in  his  "  Rural  Sports,"  calls  it,  "  a  swallowed- 
uv  handle.^* 


LANDING     AND    BAIT-NETS. 


33 


The  Bait-Net  is  made  in  a  similar  manner  to  the  Landing, 
but  of  small  size,  for  shrimp,  minnows,  spearing,  or  like  fish. 
It  should  be  about  twelve  inches  in  diameter  by  eighteen 
inches  deep,  with  a  quarter  inch  mesh. 

The  Gaff-HooTc  is  found  to  be  very  important  in  securing 
large  fish  after  their  strength  is  expended,  and  where  the 
landing-net  cannot  be.used.  The  hook  is  usually  about  four 
inches  in  length,  with  or  without  a  barb  ;  but  as  the  latter  is 
the  more  safe  hook  of  the  two,  it  is  preferred.  The  handle 
should  be  of  hickory  or  ash,  and  from  five  to  six  feet  in  length 

The  Clearing-Ring  is  a  useful  article  to  the  Angler  in 
difficulty,  (for  he  is  not  wholly  infallible,  and  will  occasionally 
have  some  trouble,)  and  as  Walton  says  the  fisher  should  be 
patient  and  not  swear,  his  disciples,  to  prevent  any  thing  of 
the  kind,  should  avail  themselves  of  this  valuable  implement 
The  most  simple  and  useful  is  made  of  iron,  or  stout  lead,  and 
is  in  the  form  of  a  ring  of  from  four  to  six  ounces  in  weight, 
and  about  three  inches  in  diameter,  with  a  joint  or  hinge 
similar  to  that  in  the  net  bow  before  described.  It  is  at- 
tached to  a  stout  line,  about  twelve  or  fifteen  yards  in  length, 
and  when  needed  is  opened,  placed  around  the  line,  and  sent 
down  as  a  messenger.  The  reader  can  probably  infer  from 
the  name,  the  use  to  which  this  ring  is  applied ;  it  is  found 
very  serviceable  in  removing  any  obstructions  which  the 
Angler  may  encounter  in  the  enjoyment  of  his  sport.  It  may 
be  well  to  observe  here  that  in  many  cases  this  little  appara- 
tus should  only  be  used  with  the  oil  of  "  patience,"  so  highly 
spoken  of  by  Walton. 


This  brings  us  to  the  last  item  of  the  materials  of  the  An- 
gler's equipment,  which  however  necessarily  tedious  in  the 
minutiae  of  explanation,  will,  we  trust,  be  reUeved  by  other 
more  interesting,  or  at  least  amusing,  parts  of  the  Angler's 
instructions. 


CHAPTER  II. 
ON  BAITS  USED  IN  ANGLING. 


The  most  common  Bait  used  in  this  country  for  ensnaiing 
almost  all  varieties  of  the  finny  tribe  that  inhabit  fresh  water, 
is  the  common  earth-worm,  or,  as  it  is  called,  dew-worm, 
dug- worm,  and  the  angle- worm;  which  latter,  from  its  univer- 
sal use  in  angling,  would  be  the  most  proper  name.  It  can 
generally  be  obtained  by  digging  a  foot  or  two  in  the  ground, 
except  in  sandy  soils,  which  produce  clear  streams,  and 
where  the  fly  will  be  found  the  better  bait.  Another  method, 
recommended  by  Blaine,  is  "  to  walk  cautiously  over  close 
cut  lawns,  or  clean  fed  meadows,  with  a  candle  or  lantern, 
during  the  night.  If  the  weather  be  moist,  and  the  search  be 
conducted  with  a  very  light  tread,  almost  any  quantity  may 
be  procured ;  for  as  they  are  blind,  it  is  not  the  light  but  the 
motion  which  disturbs  them."  When  they  are  not  wanted 
for  immediate  use,  a  good  plan  is,  to  wet  some  straw,  or  hay, 
and  lay  it  on  the  ground  for  a  few  days,  by  which  means  they 
will  be  brought  to  the  top,  and  can  be  easily  gathered.  An- 
other, and  a  more  expeditious  plan,  practised  by  Walton,  and 
others,  is  to  take  the  green  leaves  of  the  walnut-tree,  and 
squeeze  the  juice  into  fresh  or  salt  water,  and  pour  it  on  the 
ground,  which  will  make  them  rise  in  a  very  short  time. 

The  common  White  Grub-  Worm,  is  also  a  very  good  bait, 
and  will  often  take  trout  when  aU  others  have  failed.    They 


BAITS.  35 

can  be  procured  in  the  Spring  of  the  year,  underneath  decay- 
ed trees,  foliage,  stumps,  &c.,  and  sometimes  in  fresh  ploughed 
groimd. 

The  Grasshopper  is  an  excellent  bait  for  trout,  when  in 
season,  and  is  approved  by  all  Anglers. 

The  Minnow,  that  beautiful  little  fish  so  highly  esteemed 
among  all  English  sportsmen,  is  found  in  many  of  our  streams, 
under  a  variety  of  names,  and  makes  a  good  trout,  pickerell, 
or  salmon  bait. 

The  trout  or  salmon  Spawn,  hovs^ever,  takes  the  lead  as 
the  best  trout  bait  in  the  world ;  so  much  so,  that  many  An- 
glers in  Europe  deem  it  unworthy  a  sportsman  to  use  it. 

Wasps,  Beetles,  Flics,  Caterpillars,  Locusts,*  and  many 
other  insects,  also  make  very  good  trout  baits. 

The  Frog,  used  whole  or  in  parts,  is  one  of  the  best  baits 
for  pickerell.  The  hind  legs,  when  skinned,  which  operation 
leaves  them  perfectly  white,  is  preferred. 

The  Shiner  or  Mullet,  the  Gold-Fish,  and  in  fact  any 
small  fish,  is  acceptable  to  this  all-devouring  subject  of  the 
Angler's  toil. 

For  salt  water  angling,  the  Shrimp,  like  the  worm  in  fi'esh 
water,  takes  its  place  as  the  best  bait,  and  is  a  great  favorite 
with  all  anglers  for  striped  bass  or  weak-fish. 

The  Shedder-Crab,  when  it  can  be  procured,  is  a  dainty 
morsel  and  a  most  killing  bait  for  striped  bass-— many  of  the 
largest  fish  being  taken  with  it. 

The  Soft-Shell  Clam,  when  cut  up  into  small  pieces, 
makes  a  very  good  bait  for  black-fish,  floimders,  or  any  kind 
of  sea  fish. 

These  are  the  only  kinds  of  baits  in  general  use ;  many 
others  are  occasionally  used,  but  are  not  worthy  of  special 


*  In  the  summer  of  1843,  Locusts  were  used  as  a  bait  for  weak-fish,  in 
the  Hudson  river,  opposite  Hoboken,  with  great  success. 


notice.  The  Angler,  to  insure  success,  should  always  take  a 
variety  of  baits :  as  the  fish,  like  the  fisher,  in  his  tastes  is 
often  hard  to  please. 


In  addition  to  the  abovementioned  baits,  the  following, 
taken  from  *'  Hofland's  Angler's  Manual,"  and  used  with 
much  success  in  England,  may  be  found  useful  to  the  Angler. 

The  Marsh-  Worm,  is  smaller  than  the  dew-worm,  and  of 
a  paler  color,  with  a  broad  flat  tail.  It  is  an  excellent  bait  for 
trout,  when  well  scoured,  and  two  of  them  may  be  used  on 
a  hook. 

The  Brandling,  is  streaked  from  head  to  tail  in  round 
ringlets,  alternately  red  and  yellow,  and  is  found  in  old  dung- 
hills, but  chiefly  where  various  kmds  of  dung  are  mixed  to- 
gether, and  in  decayed  tanners'  bark.  It  is  considered  a  fine 
bait  for  trout,  perch,  or  eels. 

The  Little  Gilt-  Tail,  or  Tag-  Worm,  is  of  a  pale  yellow 
towards  the  tail,  and  knotted  like  the  dung-hiU  red-wonn, 
and  found  in  old  horse-dung. 

The  Red-  Worm.  This  worm  is  small,  and  of  a  bright  red. 
It  is  found  in  old  manure  heaps,  in  decayed  tanners'  bark,  and 
on  the  borders  of  old  drains,  and  is  highly  spoken  of  for  almost 
every  kind  of  fresh  water  fish. 

The  Peacock-Red,  or  Black-Headed  Red-  Worm,  is  fotmd 
under  cow  or  horse-dung,  three  parts  dried  in  the  fields,  but 
chiefly  under  cow-dung.  He  is  also  found  under  stones  in 
the  beds  of  rivers,  and  is  a  good  trout  worm. 

The  Gentle,  or  Maggot,  is  a  universal  bait,  and  will  take 
any  kind  of  fresh  water  fish,  save  salmon  and  pike.  It  is  a 
very  killing  bait  for  trout. 

The  Cadis,  or  Cad-Bait,  and  Straw-  Worm,  are  found  in 
tne  shallow,  sandy  parts  of  rivers,  small  brooks,  and  even 
ditches.  The  first  is  a  yellowish  grub,  with  a  reddish  head, 
and  is  covered  with  a  case  or  husk  of  straw,  bark,  bits  of 


37 


rushes,  particles  of  gravel,  &c.,  and  with  this  covering  to 
shelter  it,  is  enabled,  by  protruding  its  head,  to  creep  on  the 
bottom  of  the  stream  where  it  is  found.  There  is  another 
similar  kind,  of  several  varieties,  called  the  straw-worm, 
which  produce  different  sorts  of  flies.  They  are  all  excellent 
bait  for  trout. 

The  Cow-Dung,  Boh,  or  Clap-Bait,  is  found  in  the  fields, 
and  old  pastures,  under  cow-dung,  from  April  to  September. 
It  is  something  larger  than  the  gentle,  has  a  reddish  head, 
and  is  a  capital  bait  for  trout.  They  may  be  preserved  in  a 
tin  box,  v^dth  a  little  of  the  eai'th  from  which  they  were  taken 

The  Dock  Grub,  is  a  large  white  grub,  a  reddish  head, 
and  is  found  in  the  root  of  the  common  water-dock  from  April 
to  June.  A  killing  bait  for  trout,  by  dropping  into  a  gentle 
stream,  or  a  still  deep  hole. 

The  Oak  Grub  is  a  small  green  caterpillar,  and  may  be 
procured  in  the  months  of  June,  July,  and  August,  by  shaking 
the  branches  of  an  oak  tree  over  a  sheet  or  table-cloth.  They 
should  be  preserved  in  a  large  tin  box,  with  a  few  of  the  oak 
leaves  in  it.     A  most  successful  bait  for  trout. 

Bobs.  These  are  found  by  follovraig  the  plough  in  Spring 
and  Autumn;  they  are  twice  the  size  of  a  gentle,  and  have 
red  heads — are  good  bait  for  trout. 

The  Ash  Grub,  is  found  under  the  oak,  ash,  and  beach, 
when  filled,  and  when  they  have  lain  a  long  time  on  the 
ground ;  also  in  the  hollow  of  those  trees  when  rotten.  They 
are  very  tender,  require  careful  handling,  and  are  excellent 
for  trout. 

The  majority  of  these  baits  without  doubt  can  be  found  in 
similar  locations  in  this  country;  perhaps  not  in  the  same 
months  as  in  England,  but  in  as  great  perfection  and  numbers, 
and  possibly  as  tempting  baits  for  fish  of  the  same  description. 


How    to  scour   and   preserve   worms. — The    prfi 


38  BAITS. 

Bcouring  and  preserving  worms,  is  little  practised  in  this 
country  among  Anglers  generally ;  but  as  the  method  is  very 
simple,  it  should  be  followed  by  all  sportsmen,  on  account  of 
the  increased  activity,  brightness,  and  toughness  it  gives  to 
this  favorite  bait.  A  variety  of  modes  are  recommended  by 
different  writers.  The  best  method  is  to  take  a  quantity  of 
moss,  which  can  readily  be  procured  in  any  part  of  the  coun- 
try, wash  it  well,  and  squeeze  it  till  nearly  dry,  after  which 
place  it  m  an  earthern  pot  together  with  your  worms.  A  few 
days  will  be  sufficient  to  make  them  thoroughly  scoured,  and 
fit  for  use.  They  can  be  preserved  m  the  same  manner  for  a 
number  of  weeks,  by  changing  and  washing  the  moss  every 
three  or  four  days.  Should  any  of  them  be  found  sickly  or 
dead,  they  should  be  immediately  removed,  or  they  will 
eventually  destroy  the  others. 


The  mode  of  baiting  hooks  with  worms. — "  To  bait  with 

single  worm,  enter  the  pouit  of  the  hook  a  Uttle  below  the 

aead,  threading  it  carefully,  without  breaking  or  bruising  it, 

to  within  a  quarter  of  an  inch  of  the  tail ;  the  shank  of  the 

hook  must  be  well  covered  with  the  worm." 

"  To  bait  with  two  worms  on  a  hook,  enter  your  hook  at 
the  head  of  the  first  worm,  and  bring  it  out  at  the  middle,  and 
then  draw  it  over  the  arming*  of  your  hook  on  the  line,  then 
enter  the  hook  at  the  middle  of  the  second  worm,  and  brmg 
it  up  to  within  one  quarter  of  an  inch  of  the  head ;  draw  down 
the  first  worm  till  it  meet  the  second,  and  your  bait  will  then 
travel  freely  on  the  bottom." 

Another  mode  of  baiting  with  a  single  worm,  is  to  enter 
the  point  of  the  hook  at  the  head,  and  bring  it  carefully  down 
to  within  a  quarter  of  an  inch  of  the  tail ;  and  if  th3  worm  be 

*  The  place  where  the  hook  is  tied  or  whipped  on 


,  _M 


BAITS.  39 

very  large,  part  of  it  may  be  drawn  above  the  anxung  of  the 
hook  on  to  the  line. — Hqfland. 

"  To  bait  with  a  brandling.  The  point  of  your  hook  is 
to  be  put  in  at  the  very  tag  of  his  tail,  and  run  up  his  body 
quite  over  all  the  arming,  and  still  stripped  on  an  inch  at 
least  upon  the  gut,  the  head  and  remaining  part  hanging 
downward. 

"  Tlie  Grubs  are  to  be  baited  thus:  It  will  be  necessary 
to  wrap  on  a  piece  of  stiflf  hair  or  gut,  with  your  arming, 
leaving  it  standing  out  about  a  straw's  breadth  at  the  end  of 
your  hook.  The  hook  is  to  be  put  in  under  the  header  chaps 
of  the  bait,  and  guided  down  the  middle  of  the  belly,  without 
suffering  it  to  peep  out  of  the  way,  (for  then  the  ash-grub, 
especially,  will  issue  out  water  and  milk  till  nothing  but  the 
skin  shall  remain,  and  the  bend  of  the  hook  shall  appear  black 
through  it,)  till  the  point  of  your  hook  come  so  low  that  the 
head  of  your  bait  may  rest,  and  stick  upon  the  hair  or  gut  that 
stand  out  to  hold  it,  by  which  means  it  can  neither  slip  of  it 
self,  neither  will  the  force  of  the  stream,  nor  quick  pulling 
out  upon  any  mistake,  strip  it  off. 

"  The  Cadis  may  be  put  on  to  the  hook  two  or  three  to- 
gether, and  is  sometimes  (to  very  great  effect)  joined  to  a 
worm,  and  sometimes  to  an  artificial  fly,  to  cover  the  point  of 
the  hook,  but  is  always  to  be  angled  with,  (when  by  itself 
especially,)  with  the  finest  tackle,  and  is  the  most  holding 
bait  for  trout." — Cotton. 

OF  PASTES  FOR  BAIT. 


Pastes  are  considered  of  much  importance  in  England,  in 
taking  carp,  chub,  dace,  perch,  and  trout.  Some  of  them  have 
been  tried  with  success  in  many  of  our  own  brooks  and  ponds. 
The  following  wiU  tax  the  Angler's  ingenuity,  and  a  trial 
in  many  cases  more  than  compensate  him  for  his  trouble. 


40  BAITS. 

Salmon  Roe.  Barker,  author  of  a  work  on  angling,  was 
the  first  to  discover  this  most  tempting  bait.  In  a  letter  to  a 
*'  noble  lord,"  he  says:  "  I  have  an  experience  of  late  which 
you  may  angle  with,  and  take  great  store  of  this  kind  of  fish. 
First,  it  is  the  best  bait  that  I  have  seen  in,  all  my  time  ;  and 
will  take  great  store,  and  not  fail,  if  they  be  there.  Secondly, 
it  is  a  special  bait  for  dace,  or  dare,  good  for  chub,  or  bottlin, 
or  grayling.  The  bait  is  the  roe  of  a  salmon  or  trout  ;*  if  it 
be  a  large  trout,  that  the  spawns  be  any  thing  great,  you 
must  angle  for  the  trout  with  this  as  you  angle  with  the 
brandling,  taking  a  pair  of  scissors,  and  cut  as  much  as  a  large 
hazel  nut,  and  bait  your  hook,  so  fall  to  your  sport;  there  is 
no  doubt  of  pleasure.  If  I  had  known  it  but  twenty  years 
ago,  I  would  have  gained  a  hundred  pounds  only  with  that 
bait.  I  am  bound  in  duty  to  divulge  it  to  your  honor,  and 
not  carry  it  to  my  grave  with  me.  I  do  desire  that  men  of 
quality  should  have  it  that  dehght  in  that  pleasure.  The 
greedy  Angler  will  murmur  at  me,  but  for  that  I  care  not." 

Blaine  gives  the  following  most  approved  method  of  pre- 
serving this  spawn. 

"  A  pound  of  spawn  is  immersed  in  water,  as  hot  as  the 
hands  can  bear  it,  and  is  then  picked  from  membranous  films, 
&c.  It  is  now  to  be  rinsed  with  cold  water,  and  hung  up  to 
drain  for  24  hours ;  after  which,  put  to  it  two  ounces  of  rock 
or  bay  salt,  and  a  quarter  of  an  ounce  of  salt-peti-e,  and  again 
hang  it  up  for  24  hours  more.  Now  spread  it  on  a  dish,  and 
gently  dry  it  before  the  fire  or  in  the  sun,  and  when  it  be- 
comes stiif,  pot  it  down.  We  should,  however,  recommend 
that  the  potting  be  rot  in  one  mass,  but  that  it  be  divided  in 
small  pots,  pouring  over  each  some  melted  suet,  by  which 
method  a  part  can  be  opened  when  wanted,  instead  of  dis 

*  A  late  writer  in  the  "  Spirit  of  the  Times,"  says  he  has  used  this 
bait  for  trout,  in  the  vicinity  of  the  White  Mountains,  New-Hampshire, 
and  found  it  a  most  killing  bait. 


BAITS.  41 

turbing  the  general  store.  It  forms  an  additional  security  to 
cover  each  over  with  a  moistened  skin  or  bladder.  To  bait, 
first  put  on  the  hook  (which  should  be  sized  according  to  the 
fish  intended  to  be  tried  for)  a  mass  which  shall  fill  up  the 
hollow  of  the  bend  and  hide  the  steel.  On  the  point,  put  two 
or  more  firm  large  grains,  both  to  conceal  the  snare  and  tempt 
the  fish." 

Shrimp  Paste  is  used  by  some  Anglers  for  perch,  and  is 
prepared  and  used  in  a  similar  manner  to  the  salmon  roe 
paste. 

Cheese  Paste  is  a  favorite  with  some  Anglers.  It  is  made 
of  either  old  or  new  cheese,  grated,  and  worked  into  a  paste 
with  a  little  butter  and  saffron,  and  also  w^ith  stale  bread  if 
the  cheese  be  new,  and  new  bread  if  the  cheese  be  stale. 

Sweet  Paste,  is  made  by  mixing  a  proportion  of  bread  and 
honey  together,  until  they  become  thoroughly  incorporated, 
and  of  sufficient  tenacity  to  remain  well  on  the  hook.  When 
honey  cannot  be  procured,  white  sugar,  made  into  a  syrup, 
or  molasses,  will  be  found  equally  good. 

Bread  Paste.  The  following  simple  method  is  recom- 
mended by  Hofland.  Take  the  inside  of  a  French  roU,  or  a 
piece  of  fine  white  bread,  nearly  new,  soak  it  a  few  seconds 
in  water,  then  squeeze  from  it  with  very  clean  hands,  knead 
it,  and  work  it  patiently  tiU  it  becomes  a  perfect,  smooth,  and 
compact  paste. 

Pastes  are  sometimes  colored,  to  give  them  the  appearance 
of  fish  spawn.  For  this  purpose,  to  give  a  yellow  color,  use 
saffron  or  turmeric,  and  for  a  reddish,  vermillion  or  red  lead. 

Wheat,  Rye,  Barley,  and  other  gi-ains,  and  Malt,  are  also 
used  for  taking  small  fish  of  various  kinds,  in  stiU  water. 
They  should  be  soaked  in  water,  or  boiled  in  milk,  until  soft. 
The  Angler  will  find  them  useful  in  taking  minnows,  shiners, 
spearing,  and  other  small  fry  for  bait. 

Graves  or   Tallow-Chandlers''  Scratchings.     The  latest 


42 


English  writers  on  angling  highly  approve  of  this  bait  for 
barbel,  roach,  dace,  chub,  and  eels.  As  it  can  be  easily 
procured,  and  may  prove  a  good  bait  for  some  vai-ieties  of 
our  ow^n  fish,  we  conclude  our  Chapter  on  Baits,  by  giving 
Blaine  and  Hofland's  manner  of  prepaiing  it.  Blaine  says : 
"  To  prepare  them,  break  a  sufficient  quantity,  over  which 
first  pour  some  cold  water,  and  let  it  stand  by  all  night :  in 
the  next  morning,  pour  ofi"  the  cold,  and  in  lieu  of  it  pour 
some  warm,  but  not  very  hot  water ;  after  this  has  stood  an 
hour  or  two,  the  parts  of  the  greaves  will  separate,  from 
which  choose  as  baits  the  largest,  whitest,  and  most  connect- 
ed pieces,  which  cover  vdth  leaves,  or  wrap  in  a  moist  cloth 
for  use.  When  fisliing,  hang  one,  two,  or  three  of  the  whitest 
pieces  on  the  hook,  concealing  the  point."  Hofland  says : 
"  They  must  be  chopped  into  small  pieces,  placed  in  an 
earthen  pan,  and  boiling  water  poured  on  them  till  covered, 
when  in  one  hour,  the  slimy  particles  wiU  have  softened  and 
separated,  and  become  fit  for  use :  when  mixed  with  clay  and 
bran,  they  form  an  excellent  ground  bait.  Graves  should  be 
newly  scalded  for  every  day's  fishing,  for  if  stale,  they  do 
more  harm  than  good." 


The  following  beautiful  Hnes  by  Cotton,  the  celebrated 
Angler,  and  friend  of  Walton,  may  serve  to  remind  their  dis- 
ciples of  many  requisites  for  success,  wliich  put  in  plain  prose 
might  possibly  be  forgotten. 


Away  to  the  brook, 

All  your  tackle  out-look, 
Here's  a  day  that  is  worth  a  year's  wishing, 

See  that  all  things  be  right, 

For  'twould  be  a  spite 
To  want  tools  when  a  man  goes  a-fishing. 


Your  rod  with  tops  two, 

For  the  same  will  noi  do, 
If  your  manner  of  angling  you  vary ; 

And  full  well  may  you  think, 

If  you  troll  with  a  pink, 
One  too  weak  may  be  apt  to  miscarry. 

Then  basket,  neat  made 

By  a  master  in's  trade, 
In  a  belt  at  your  shoulders  must  dangle  ; 

For  none  e'er  was  so  vain 

To  wear  this  to  disdain 
Who  a  true  brother  was  of  the  angle. 

Next  pouch  must  not  fail, 

Stuflfd  as  full  as  a  mail, 
With  wax,  crewels,  silks,  hairs,  furs,  and  featheri, 

To  make  several  flies. 

For  the  several  skies, 
That  shall  kill  in  despite  of  all  weathers. 


The  boxes  and  books 

For  yo'ir  lines  and  your  hooks  ; 
And,  though  not  for  strict  need  notwithstanding, 

Jfour  scissors  and  hone 

To  adjust  your  points  on. 
With  a  net  to  be  sure  of  your  landing. 

All  these  being  on, 

'Tis  high  time  we  were  gone, 
Down  and  upward,  that  all  may  have  pleasure, 

Till,  here  meeting  at  night, 

We  shall  have  the  delight 
To  discourse  of  our  fortunes  at  leisure. 

The  day  's  not  too  bright. 

And  the  wind  hits  us  right 
And  all  nature  does  seem  to  invite  us ; 

We  have  all  things  at  will 

For  to  second  our  skill. 
As  they  all  did  conspire  to  delight  us. 


44 


AITS 


On  stream  now,  or  still, 

A  large  pannier  we'll  fill, 
Trout  and  Grayling  to  rise  are  so  willing; 

I  dare  venture  to  say, 

'Twill  be  a  bloody  day. 
And  we  all  shall  be  weary  of  killing. 

Away,  then,  away, 

We  lose  sport  by  delay ; 
But  first  leave  our  sorrow  behind  us: 

If  Miss  Fortune  should  come, 

We  are  all  gone  from  home. 
And  a-fishing  she  never  can  find  us. 

The  Angler  is  free 

From  the  cares  that  degree 
Finds  itself  with,  so  often,  tormented  ; 

And  although  we  should  slay 

Each  a  hundred  a-day, 
'Tis  a  slaughter  needs  ne'er  be  repented. 

And  although  we  display 

All  our  arts  to  betray 
What  were  made  for  man's  pleasure  and  die 

Yet  both  princes  and  states 

May  for  all  our  quaiut  baits, 
Rule  themselves  and  their  people  in  quiet 

We  scratch  not  our  pates, 

Nor  repine  at  the  rates 
Our  superiors  impose  on  our  living; 

But  do  frankly  submit, 

Knowing  they  have  more  wit. 
In  demanding  than  we  have  in  giving. 

While  quiet  we  sit. 

We  conclude  all  things  fit, 

Acquiescing  with  hearty  submission 
For,  though  simple,  we  know 
That  soft  murmurs  will  grow 

At  the  last,  unto  downright  sedition. 


BAITS.  45 

We  care  not  who  says, 

And  intends  it  dispraise, 
That  an  angler  to  a  fool  is  next  neighbor: 

Let  him  prate — what  care  we  ? 

We're  as  honest  as  he  ; 
And  so  let  him  take  that  for  his  labor. 

We  covet  no  wealth. 

But  the  blessing  of  health, 
And  that  greater  good  conscience  within  us 

Such  devotion  we  bring 

To  our  God  and  our  King, 
That  from  either  no  offers  can  win  us. 

While  we  sit  and  fish, 

We  pray  as  we  wish 
For  long  life  to  our  King,  James  the  Second 

Honest  anglers  then  may. 

Or  they  've  very  foul  play, 
With  the  best  of  good  subjects  be  reckon'd. 

Having  commenced  with  the  Rod,  and  finally  wormeA 
through  all  the  articles  necessary  to  the  equipment  of  the 
complete  Angler,  it  wiU  be  proper  in  our  next  chapter,  to 
make  some  observations  on  the  'practice  of  anglin". 


CHAPIERIIT. 
OBSERVATIONS  ON  THE  PRACTICE  OF  ANGLING. 


For  Angling  may  be  said  to  be  like  the  Mathematics,  that  it  can 
never  be  fully  learned  ;  at  least  not  so  fully  but  that  there  will  be  still 
more  experimenting  left  for  the  trial  of  other  men."    Walton. 


-- ^' 

L - 

-mm. 

=^ 

— 

='V;=:r 

.i:^:i^.rz:: 

^^^^'— r 

__. 

\ 



-r: 

— --■ 

Angling  generally,  in  this  country,  is  not  necessarily  so  sci- 
entific as  in  many  parts  of  Europe.  Our  streams  being  larger, 
more  numerous,  and  less  fished,  except  in  a  few  instances 
near  our  large  cities,  heavier  tackle  in  some  cases  may  be 
used,  and  less  skill  required.  In  angling  for  trout  in  the 
country  streams,  where  immense  quantities  are  found,  the 
less  skilful  angler,  with  coarse  tackle,  will  often  succeed  in 
filling  his  basket  in  a  very  short  time.  But  as  railroads  in- 
crease, and  access  becomes  more  easy  to  the  different  fishing 
grounds,  the  fish  will  become  more  shy,  greater  skill  be  re- 
quired, and  finer  tackle  indispensable,  to  complete  success. 
Hence  where  a  worm  for  trout,  a  piece  of  bread  for  perch,  or 
a  strip  of  pork  for  pickereU,  have  been  used,  natural  or  arti- 
ficial flies,  and  small  fish,  attached  to  the  finest  possible  kind 
of  materials,  will  be  needed.  Therefore  the  true  Angler 
should  make  himself  thoroughly  acquainted  with  the  most 
approved  modes  of  Angling,  and  the  best  materials  for  his 
proper  equipment. 


ON    THE    PRACTICE    OF    ANGLING. 


47 


The  Artificial  Fly,  so  much  used  in  England,  finds  but 
litde  favor  in  this  country,  not  because  it  is  not  as  good  a  bait, 
but  because  more  skill  is  required  in  using  it;  consequently- 
many  of  our  Anglers  only  fish  in  the  spring  months,  when  the 
water  is  thick  and  turbid,  and  the  worm  can  be  used,  while 
the  more  experienced  sportsman  from  foreign  parts,*  will 
astonish  the  native  by  his  dexterity  in  throwing  the  fly  and  kill- 
ing an  almost  incredible  number  of  fish,  where  the  unbeliever 
regarded  the  fly  as  a  useless  article  of  tackle.  There  are 
some  that  attain  to  greater  proficiency  in  fly-fishing  than 
othei's,  as  is  the  case  with  almost  any  kind  of  sport.  But  the 
skill  necessary  to  success  in  this  branch  of  our  subject,  is  not 
so  great  as  the  novice  imagines :  certainly  it  is  the  more  gen- 
teel, as  well  as  the  most  pleasant  mode,  as  those  who  have 
successfully  tided  it  can  testify.  It  is  therefore  to  be  hoped 
it  will  be  more  generally  adopted  by 

All  who  seek  the  lake  or  brook, 

With  rod  and  line,  and  float  and  hook. 

Great  improvements  have  been  made  within  a  few  years 
in  the  manufacture  of  artificial  baits.  Every  variety  of  fish 
and  insect  has  been  most  successfully  imitated,  defying  almost 
the  scrutiny  of  the  Angler,  and  certainly  the  object  of  liis 
sport.  These  improvements  every  brother  of  the  angle 
should  adopt,  and  thereby  remove  the  objections  of  the  few 
who  oppose  the  art  on  Bacon  and  Byronic  grounds.t 

As  the  enjoyment  of  angling  naturally  makes  the  sports- 
man a  keen  observer,  he  should  pay  particular  attention  to 
the  winds,  those 


*  Parties  are  often  made  up  in  England  for  fishing  in  the  Canadu 
and  the  United  States. 

t  Byron  and  Bacon  both  objected  to  angling  on  account  of  the'neces- 
sity  which  then  existed  of  using  various  live  animals  on  the  hook  as  baits 


48 


ON    THE    PRACTICE  OF    ANGLING 
«  Unseen  currents  of  the  air, 


as  Bryant  has  it.  Walton  says:  "  You  are  to  take  notice,  that 
of  the  winds,  the  south  wind  is  said  to  be  the  best.  One  ob 
serves,  that 

' When  the  wind  is  in  the  south, 

It  blows  the  bait  in  the  fish's  mouth.' 

Next  to  that,  the  west  wind  is  believed  to  be  the  best;  and 
having  told  you  that  the  east  wind  is  the  worst,  I  need  not 
tell  which  wind  is  the  worst  in  the  third  degree :  and  yet  (as 
Solomon  observes)  '  that  he  that  considers  the  wind  shall 
never  sow,'  so  he  that  busies  his  head  too  much  about  them, 
if  the  weather  be  not  made  extreme  cold  by  an  east  wind, 
shall  be  a  little  superstitious ;  for  as  it  is  observed  by  some 
that  there  is  no  good  horse  of  a  bad  color,  so  I  have  observed 
that  if  it  be  a  cloudy  day,  and  not  extreme  cold,  let  the  wind 
set  in  what  quarter  it  will,  and  do  its  worst,  I  heed  it  not,  and 
yet  take  this  for  a  rule,  that  I  would  willingly  fish  standing  on 
the  lee  shore ;  and  you  are  to  take  notice  that  the  fish  lies  or 
swims  nearer  the  bottom,  and  in  deeper  water  than  in  sum- 
mer ;  and  also  nearer  the  bottom  in  a  cold  day,  and  then  gets 
nearest  the  lee  side  of  the  water. 

Sir  Humphrey  Davy  says :  "  For  fly-fishing, 

A  day  with  not  too  bright  a  beam, 
A  warm  but  not  a  scorching  sun. 

Also,  "  never  fish  with  your  back  to  the  sun,  as  your  shadow 
is  thrown  on  the  water,  and  the  fish  are  frightened  at  your 
movements."  These  are  important  instructions  to  the  Angler, 
and  the  high  source  from  whence  they  come  should  be  con- 
sidered by  him  as  law.  It  would  be  well  to  notice  hero, 
also,  that  after  protracted  rains  or  severe  storms,  the  Angler 
should  fish  at  the  bottom  if  he  expect  sport,  and  that  it  is  use- 


ON    THE    PRACTICE    OF    ANGLING- 


49 


less  to  angle  after  a  long  drought  in  summer,  or  in  the  autumn 
or  spring,  when  the  high  east,  or  cold  north  winds  blow. 

In  fresh  water  angling  the  best  time  is  early  in  the  morn- 
ing, or  at  the  close  of  the  day.  The  proper  time  for  salt 
water  a:ngling  depends  upon  the  tide.  The  best  time  is  at 
the  last  of  the  ebb  or  the  first  of  the  flood,  whether  at  morn- 
ing, at  mid-day,  or  at  night. 

In  all  kinds  of  angling  it  is  necessary  to  be  very  cautious, 
but  particularly  in  taking  the  wily  trout.  Many  novices  hi 
the  art  wander  up  and  down  streams,  and  wade  creeks,  with 
little  or  no  success,  from  the  want  of  this — a  proper  requisite 
of  every  good  angler.  The  more  skilful,  also,  sometimes  fail 
from  the  same  fault. 

A  story  is  told,  which  serves  well  to  show  the  necessity 
of  caution.  An  Angler,  who  had  risen  with  the  sun,  and 
fished  till  near  noon-day  without  success,  was  outdone  by  a 
knowing  one,  who,  with  proper  precaution,  passed  his  rod 
and  line  betw^een  the  legs  of  the  Angler  (which  like  his  line 
were  pretty  well  stretched)  into  a  hole  underneath  the  bank. 
He  soon  had  a  bite,  and  succeeded  in  taking  a  two  pound 
trout,  almost  before  the  astonished  tyro  was  aware  of  his 
presence. 

Some  are  of  opinion  that  trout,  and  similar  fish,  can  hear* 
the  tread  on  the  ground.  It  is  certain  that  it  will  start 
at  the  least  noise,  when  nothing  can  be  seen.  Salter,  in  his 
"  Angler's  Guide,"  says:  "  Keep  as  far  from  the  water  as 
you  can,  and  go  quietly  and  slily  to  work,  for  fish  have  so 
many  enemies  that  they  are  suspicious  of  every  thing  they 
see,  feel,  or  hear ;  even  the  shaking  the  bank  of  a  river  (un- 


*  Smith,  in  his  "  History  of  the  Fishes  of  Massachusetts,"  says  that 
the  acoustic  apparatus  is  boxed  up  in  the  solid  bones  of  the  skull,  so  that 
sound  propagated  through  the  water,  gives  a  vibratory  motion  or  tremor 
to  the  whole  body,  and  which,  agitating  the  auditory  nerve,  produces 
hearing. 


50 


ON  THE  PRACTICE  OF  ANGLING. 


der  which  they  frequently  lie)  will  alarm  them,  and  spoil  the 
Angler's  sport,  &c. ;  and  also,  when  two  or  three  anglers  are 
fishing  near  each  other ;  therefore  avoid  agitating  the  water 
by  trampling  on  the  bank  unnecessarily  ;  drop  your  baited 
hook  in  the  water  gently,  and  you  will  kill  more  fish  than 
three  Anglers  who  act  differently." 

Blaine  also  says:  "  Avoid  every  thing  that  may  attract  the 
attention  of  the  fish  :  stand  so  far  from  the  water's  edge  aa 
you  can,  and  never  let  your  shadow  fall  on  the  water.  If 
possible,  take  the  advantage  of  a  bush,  tree,  &c.,  completely 
to  conceal  the  person.  When  an  Angler  fishes  near  home, 
an  artificial  screen  of  rushes,  twigs,  &c.,  may  be  employed 
for  that  purpose.  In  dropping  or  dipping  with  the  natural 
fly,  the  greatest  caution  is  necessary  to  keep  completely  out 
of  view  of  the  fish ;  not  only  the  shadow  of  the  person,  but 
that  of  the  rod  also,  should  be  kept  from  falling  on  the  water." 

The  dress  of  the  Angler  is  of  great  importance  in  trout 
angling.  If  it  be  true,  as  before  stated,  that  this  timid  inha- 
bitant of  the  brook  is  disturbed  by  the  least  motion,  certainly 
the  best  means  should  be  taken  to  render  any  motion  imper- 
ceptible. There  are  two  colors  of  dress  for  angling,  desirable 
on  different  occasions.  If  your  sport  be  in  the  summer,  and  lie 
mid  the  brilliant  green  foliage  of  the  trees,  bushes,  and  mead- 
ows, your  dress  should  undoubtedly  be  green  throughout.  On 
the  contrary,  should  you  be  pleased  to  enjoy  yourself  in  au- 
tumn, when  nature  has  changed  the  scene,  and  draped  herself 
in  sober  brow^n,  the  most  proper  uniform  is  a  drab  from  top  to 
toe.  A  disciple  of  Walton,  who  angles  on  Long-Island,  and 
takes  more  trout  than  any  ten  sportsmen  who  visit  that  delight- 
ful resort,  is  represented  as  standing  as  still  as  a  ghost,  his  rod 
extended  in  his  hand,  without  any  apparent  motion,  equipped 
in  drab  pantaloons,  drab  vest,  drab  coat,  and  drab  hat;  and 
so  quiet  is  he  in  his  movements,  that  he  will  take  a  mess  of 
trout,  when  a  person  but  a  few  yards  distant  would  hardly  be 


ON  THE  PRACTICE  OF  ANGLING. 


51 


aware  that  he  moved  a  muscle.  How  different  from  many 
who  profess  to  understand  the  art,  and  who  go  whipping  and 
splashing  the  w^ater  for  miles  around. 

As  health  is  of  great  importance,  the  lover  of  this  sport 
should  adopt  the  physician's  prescription,  and  "  keep  the 
head  cool  and  the  feet  warm."  To  this  end  he  should  pro- 
vide himself  with  a  pair  of  water-proof  boots,  to  be  ready 
should  he  wish  to  wade  the  stream,  or  cross  a  marsh.  He 
should  also  pay  strict  attention  to  all  laws  regarding  angling, 
and  all  rules  laid  down  for  bridge,  boat,  or  brook  fishing,  and 
on  no  account  transgress  the  laws  of  the  different  States  with 
respect  to  spawning  time,  and  the  size  of  the  fish  to  be  taken. 

It  is  much  to  be  regretted,  that  there  are  many  who  call 
themselves  anglers,  who  set  all  laws  at  defiance,  by  taking 
many  kinds  of  fish  out  of  season ;  such  conduct  is  unworthy  a 
sportsman,  and  should  meet  with  rebuke  from  every  member 
of  the  angling  community. 

Finally,  let  the  disciple  of  the  rod 


"  Use  all  gently," 

and  when  he  has  made  up  his  mind  to  pass  a  few  days,  or 
even  hours,  in  this  dehghtful  amusement,  let  him  be  fully 
prepared  with  everything  necessary,  and  everything  in  order 


ilifiLz 


CHAPTER  IV. 
THE     SALMON 


This  noble  fish  was  known  to  the  world  as  early  as  the  days 
of  the  Romans.  Pliny  speaks  of  them  as  being  in  the  rivers 
of  Aquitaine.  They  are  found  at  the  present  day  in  the 
waters  of  France,  England,  Ireland  and  Scotiand,  and  on  this 
continent  as  far  north  as  Greenland.  They  are  fomid  in  the 
greatest  abundance  in  Ireland  and  Scotland.  In  some  of  the 
rivers  of  the  latter  country,  large  rents  are  paid  for  these 
fisheries.  In  England  and  Wales,  at  certain  seasons,  they 
have  been  taken  by  thousands  in  a  day,  and  on  some  occa- 
sions in  such  abundance  that  they  have  been  fed  to  the  swine. 
"  In  Scotland,  they  have  been  so  plenty,  that  the  farmer's 
servants  have  stipulated  to  have  them  but  twice  a  week  for 
food ! " 

Smith,  in  his  "  History  of  the  Fishes  of  Massachusetts," 
relates  the  following :  "  Captain  Charles  Kendall,  a  respect- 
able and  intelligent  navigator  of  Boston,  assm-ed  us,  that 
when  on  the  northwest  coast  of  America,  withui  a  few  years, 
he  stood  in  a  small  stream  that  came  leaping  down  the  crags 
of  a  mountam,  m  which  these  delightful  fishes  were  urging 
their  way  in  such  astonishing  crowds,  with  hai'dly  water 
enough  to  cover  their  backs,  that  he  stood  with  an  axe  and 
killed  hundreds  of  them  as  they  passed  between  his  feet.  He 
saw  birds  of  prey  dive  down  from  the  long  branches  of  trees 


THE    SALMON 


53 


«hat  waved  over  the  falls,  and  pick  out  the  eyes  of  Several  at 
a  time,  before  they  flew  back  to  their  resting-places." 

The  Salmon  formerly  frequented  the  Hudson*"  and  Con- 
necticut, but  the  steamboat  navigation  on  these  beautiful 
rivers,  have  interfered  with  their  passage,  and  by  increasing 
interruption,  they  have  been  driven  farther  north,  and  like  the 
aboriginal  inhabitants  of  our  land,  seem  destined  to  find  a 
resting-place  far  beyond  the  home  of  their  fathers.  The 
Kennebec,  the  St.  Lawrence,  the  waters  of  California  and 
Oregon,  and  many  of  our  western  lakes,  now  furnish  large 
quantities,  equal  in  beauty  and  flavor  to  those  of  any  part 
of  the  world.  They  leap  up  the  falls  of  many  of  these 
rivers  with  astonishing  and  almost  incredible  velocity,  sur- 
mounting obstacles  of  great  magnitude  by  the  extraordinary 
muscular  power  of  their  tail.  Michael  Drayton,  an  English 
writer,  speaks  of  their  summersault,  or  leap,  in  the  following 
lines: 


"  As  when  the  salmon  seeks  a  fresher  stream  to  find, 
(Which  hither  from  the  sea  comes  yearly  by  his  kind,) 
As  he  towards  season  grows  :  and  stems  the  watery  tract 
Where  Tivy,  falling  down,  makes  a  high  cataract, 
Forced  by  the  rising  rocks  that  there  her  course  oppose, 
As  though  within  her  bounds  they  meant  her  to  enclose; 
Here,  when  the  laboring  fish  does  at  the  foot  arrive, 
And  finds  that  by  his  strength  he  does  but  vainly  strive  ; 
His  tail  takes  in  his  mouth,  and  bending  like  a  bow 
That's  to  full  compass  drawn,  aloft  himself  doth  throw, 
Then  springing  at  his  height,  as  doth  a  little  wand. 
That  bended  end  to  end,  and  started  from  man's  hand 
Far  off  itself  doth  cast;  so  does  the  salmon  vault; 
And  if  at  first  he  fail,  his  second  summersault 
He  instantly  essays,  and  from  his  nimble  ring 
Still  ycrking,  never  leaves  until  himself  he  fling 
Above  the  opposing  stream." 

*  A  number  were  taken  in   netts,  in  the  Bay  of  New-York,  in  the 
mouth  of  June,  1844. 


54 


THE    SALMON. 


Like  the  trout,  they  are  very  timid ;  and  if,  at  the  time  of 
their  advent,  they  are  suddenly  frightened  by  any  noise,  or 
splashing  of  the  water,  will  turn  and  swim  in  a  contrary  direc- 
tion at  a  surprising  rate  of  velocity.  It  has  been  ascertained 
by  calculation,  that  they  can  move  at  the  rate  of  30  miles  an 
hour.  They  run  up  the  rivers  from  the  sea,  to  deposit  their 
spawn,  from  April  to  July,  and  are  at  this  time  in  fine  condi- 
tion for  the  table  ;  after  which  they  return  again  to  the  sea. 
They  are  much  troubled  with  what  fishermen  call  the  salmon- 
louse,  and  are  known  in  some  instances  to  return  to  the  fresh 
water  in  the  months  of  September  and  October,  to  rid  them- 
selves of  these  aimoying  insects.  Smith  says:  '*  The  young 
are  about  two  inches  in  length  when  they  visit  the  sea  for  the 
first  time.  After  the  parent  fish  have  passed  up  the  rivers, 
the  spring  following,  the  young  ones  follow  at  a  respectable 
distance,  having  grown  about  six  inches.  At  the  end  of  two 
years,  they  weigh  five,  six,  and  seven  pounds ;  at  the  end  of 
six  years,  they  have  attained  their  ordinary  dimensions." 

An  English  writer,  called  the  "  North  Country  Angler," 
says :  "  The  roe  of  the  salmon  becomes  salmon  fry  in  March 
and  April,  and  they  veiy  soon  find  their  way  to  the  sea,  where 
they  grow  with  amazing  rapidity;  as  on  their  return  to  their 
native  streams  in  June  or  July  of  the  same  year,  they  weigh 
six  or  seven  pounds.  They  are  usually  called  grilse  until  they 
weigh  about  nine  pounds,  after  which  they  are  called 
salmon.' 

The  following  account  of  late  experiments  on  salmon  in 
Scotland,  taken  from  the  "  Kelso  Mail,"  a  Scotch  paper, 
rather  contradicts  the  opinions  of  former  writers  on  the  rapid 
increase  in  size  of  this  species  of  fish,  "  In  the  month  of 
April,  1843,  Mr.  James  Keras,  a  game-keeper  at  BowhHl, 
Selkirkshire,  took  from  the  Ettrick,  and  marked  from  six  to 
seven  dozen  of  the  salmon  fry  going  do\vn  to  the  sea,  by  in- 
serting a  piece  of  wke  through  the  tail  of  each,  and  twisting 


THE    SALMON, 


55 


it  at  both  ends.  In  the  last  week  of  July  last,  (1844,)  a  grilse 
of  from  five  to  six  pounds  weight,  was  caught  at  the  shore- 
side  fishery  near  Berwick,  by  James  M'Queen,  fisherman, 
and  in  the  tail  was  a  piece  of  wire  twisted  at  both  ends,  as 
described.  M'Queen  did  not  preserve  the  wire,  but  is  satis- 
fied in  his  own  mind  that  it  was  brass,  and  of  the  description 
inserted  m  the  fry  by  Mr.  Keras.  There  can  therefore 
scarcely  be  a  doubt  that  it  was  one  of  the  fry  marked  by  the 
latter,  and  proves  to  a  demonstration,  that  the  fry  occupy  a 
much  longer  period  in  arriving  at  a  state  of  maturity  than  has 
been  generally  supposed." 

This  extraordinary  fish  grows  to  a  very  large  size.  Hof- 
land  says,  the  largest  ever  heard  of  in  England  was  sold  in  the 
London  market,  and  weighed  83  pounds.  He  also  tells  a  story 
of  a  Scotch  Highlander,  who,  whilst  fishing  in  the  river  Awe, 
struck  a  salmon,  which  he  played  with  great  skill  and  patience 
until  night  came,  when  the  fish  sulked  at  the  bottom.  The 
persevering  fisher,  not  to  be  subdued,  took  the  line  in  his 
mouth  and  lay  down  for  a  snooze,  when  he  sulked  until  three 
o'clock  in  the  morning,  when  his  angling  friends  aroused  him, 
and  the  fish,  after  a  further  run,  was  brought  to  land,  and 
weighed  73  pounds.  Sir  J.  Hawkins  says  that  the  largest 
salmon  ever  taken  in  England  was  caught  in  April,  1789  ;  "  it 
measured  upwards  of  four  feet  in  length,  three  feet  around  the 
body,  and  weighed  nearly  seventy  pounds."  There  may  be 
some  in  this  country  of  like  size  and  weight  among  our  undis- 
covered waters  and  virgin  streams  where  yet  the  angler's  line 
*s  to  be  thrown.  The  largest  on  record  at  present  remembered 
weighed  about  forty  pounds. 

The  common  length  of  the  salmon  is  from  two  to  three  and 
a  half  feet,  except  when  of  the  extraordinary  English  weight 
mentioned,  when  they  would  probably  measure  five  or  six  feet. 
They  are  of  a  beautiful  silver  gray  color,  running  into  white  on 
the  belly  and  blue  on  the  back,  and  are  marked  with  numerous 
irregular  dark  and  copper  colored  spots.     The  uimIc  is  tunn-r 


50 


THE    SALMOK. 


ally  of  a  larger  and  more  slender  shape  than  the  female,  with 
a  slight  difference  in  the  shape  and  color  of  the  spots.  The 
upper  jaw  is  larger  than  the  lower,  and  in  the  males  the  under 
jaw  is  cur\'ed  upward.  Considered  as  a  whole,  he  may  be 
called  the  most  extraordinary  and  most  beautiful  fish  in  the 
world ;  and  whether  we  admire  him  as  leaping  the  cataract, 
fresh  floored  from  his  native  element  on  the  green  carpet  of 
the  meadow,  or  in  smoking  anticipation  as  a  viand  on 
the  table,  he  well  deserves  the  appellation  of  king  of  the 
watery  course,  or,  as  WiUis  in  his  quaint  way  would  proba- 
bly call  him,  the  prince  o^fish-dom. 

The  sport  in  taking  him  is  of  the  most  exciting  kind,  re- 
quiring the  utmost  skill  of  the  truly  scientific  Angler.  Sir 
Walter  Scott  says :  "  Salmon  fishing  is  to  all  other  kinds  of 
angling,  as  buck  shooting  to  shooting  of  any  meaner  descrip- 
tion. The  salmon  is  in  this  particular  the  king  of  fish.  It 
requires  a  dexterous  hand  and  an  accurate  eye  to  raise  aud 
strike  him ;  and  when  this  is  achieved,  the  sport  is  only  be- 
gun where,  even  in  trout  angling,  unless  in  case  of  an  unusually 
lively  and  strong  fish,  it  is  at  once  commenced  and  ended. 
Indeed  the  most  sprightly  trout  that  ever  was  hooked,  shows 
mere  child's  play  in  comparison  to  a  fresh  run-salmon.  There 
is  all  the  difference  which  exists  between  coursing  the  hare 
and  running  the  fox.  The  pleasure  and  suspense  ai'e  of 
twenty  times  the  duration — the  address  and  strength  required 
infinitely  greater — the  prize  when  attained,  not  only  more 
honorable  but  more  valuable.  The  hazeu-ds  of  failure  are  also 
an  hundred-fold  multiplied ;  the  instinct  of  the  salmon  leads 
to  the  most  singular  efforts  to  escape,  which  must  be  met  and 
foiled  by  equal  promptitude  on  the  part  of  the  angler  " 

They  love  to  haunt  the  rapid  rivers  or  large  lakes,  with 
sandy  or  pebbly  bottoms,  that  run  into  the  sea,  and  are  usually, 
when  on  the  feed,  found  In  the  roughest  and  boldest  parts, 
rhey  will  best  take  the  bait  early  in  the  morning  or  late  in 


THE     SALMON.  57 

the  afternoon,  when  there  is  a  light  breeze  on  the  water. 
When  not  on  feed  they  retreat  to  deep  water,  and  also  under 
banks,  bushes,  &c.  The  best  time  for  angling  for  them  is 
from  May  until  August.  In  July  and  August  they  will  often 
take  the  fly  freely ;  for  the  months  of  May  and  June,  worms, 
shrimp,  or  small  fish,  will  be  found  the  best  baits. 

Bait-fishing  for  Salmon  is  generally  practised  with  a  rod 
of  from  sixteen  to  eighteen  feet  in  length,  with  a  hollow  butt 
and  spare  tops,  either  for  worm  or  minnow  fishing.  Some 
sportsmen  prefer  a  lighter  top  for  worm  fishing  than  for  spin- 
ning the  minnow ;  the  hollow  butt  allows  him  to  use  his 
taste,  and  also  the  advantage  of  extra  tops  against  breakage. 
There  are  two  ways  of  rigging  the  rod  for  the  line — the  old- 
fashioned  plan  of  rings,  whipped  on  with  thread,  is  preferred 
by  some,  and  the  patent  guide,  a  solid  stationary  ring,  (a  new 
invention)  by  others.  Attached  to  tlie  rod  should  be  a  multi- 
plying reel,  capable  of  holding  from  three  to  six  hundred 
feet  of  line ;  to  insure  success  with  large  game,  the  largest 
sized  reel,  with  six  hundred  feet  of  line,  should  be  used.  The 
line  adapted  to  the  reel  should  be  either  of  silk,  hair,  silk  and 
hair,  or  grass.  The  two  former  descriptions  ai'e  most  in  use, 
but  the  latter  is  now  preferred  by  many  on  account  of  its 
strength,  durability,  and  lightness.  Affixed  to  the  line  should 
be  a  swivel  sinker,  and  a  leader,  either  of  single  or  twisted  gut, 
of  from  three  to  six  feet  in  length,  according  to  the  depth  of 
water.  For  middle  fishing,  use  a  large  size  float  of  cork  or 
red  cedar.  The  proper  size  of  hook  should  be  No.  0,  1,  2,  3, 
of  the  Kirby  or  Limerick  pattern,  attached  to  single  or  twisted 
gut.  A  very  few  Anglers  use  gimp  instead  of  gut,  but  the 
show  it  makes  in  the  water,  both  from  its  size  and  color,  pre- 
clude the  idea  of  much  success.  From  the  timid  nature  of 
the  object  of  your  sport,  your  tackle  should  combine  strength 
with  imperceptibility. 

For  Fly-Fishing  for  Salmon,  the  customary  rod  used  is 


58 


TH  E    8  ALMON. 


from  sixteen  to  twenty  feet  long,  with  a  gradual  taper,  and 
uniform  from  the  end  of  tlie  first  or  butt  joint  to  the  end  of 
the  top,  which  latter  should  be  of  the  most  elastic  substance, 
and  brought  almost  to  a  point :  in  fact  the  proper  form  of  a 
fly  rod,  is  a  perfectly  whip  taper.  The  rings  should  be  of  the 
lightest  kind,  and  wound  on  with  thread  or  silk,  and  the 
whole  apparatus  as  light  as  the  necessary  strength  will  allow. 
In  some  instances  they  are  provided  with  a  spike  or  spear, 
which  screws  into  the  butt,  and  which  is  found  very  useful 
to  the  Angler  on  many  occasions,  for  sticking  the  rod  in  an 
upright  position,  for  the  purpose  of  altering  or  arranging 
the  line  or  other  tackle.  The  same  arrangement  of  tackle 
is  required  for  the  fly  rod  as  for  the  bait  rod,  with  the 
exception  of  substituting  a  swivel,  instead  of  a  swivel 
sinker. 


Worm  fishing  for  Salmon.  For  worm  bait,  use  a  Salmon 
Limerick  hook,  from  No.  0  to  4,  as  the  size  of  the  game  may 
indicate.  Attach  the  worms  according  to  the  method  de- 
scribed in  Chapter  TI. ;  throw  them  gently  in  the  current ; 
let  them  flow  easily  down  a  few  yards ;  then  draw  them 
back;  then  to  the  right  and  left;  keeping  up  a  continual 
motion  of  the  bait.  By  this  method,  if  you  are  cautious,  and 
keep  out  of  sight — and  if  there  he  fish,  as  Walton  would  say 
— you  will  be  sure  to  have  your  share  of  good  luck.  In  bright 
clear  weather,  a  hook  of  either  No.  3,  4,  or  5,  will  be  large 
enougTi.  It  will  also  be  necessary,  if  the  stream  be  clear,  on 
some  occasions  to  use  only  one  large  worm. 

When  the  halt  is  taken,  the  premonitory  symptoms  are  a 
distended  line,  and  sometimes  a  sudden  jerk.  In  either  case 
keep  a  tight  line :  the  former  admonition  generally  promises 
success,  and  when  it  is  well  understood,  will  give  the  most 
pleasure.  After  allowing  a  short  time  for  gorging,  you  should 
give  a  sharp  strike,  and  if  done  with  precision,  and  not  too 


THESALMON.  59 

violent,  you  will  rarely  fail  to  hook  your  fish.  On  the  con- 
trary, the  sudden  jerk  is  seldom  more  or  less  than  a  nibble ; 
you  should  therefore  give  a  moderate  pull,  which  will  rather 
excite  your  game,  and  induce  him  to  call  again  for  worms! 
The  following  practical  information,  taken  from  "  Fisher's 
Angler's  Souvenir,"  will  give  the  reader  some  idea  of  the 
manner  of  taking  a  large  fish,  after  he  is  hooked  ;  for  as  it  is 
one  thing  to  catch  a  fish  and  another  to  cook  it,  so  it  is  one 
thing  to  hook  a  fish  and  another  thing  to  take  him  after  you 
get  him  on.  "  Judging  from  his  pull,  you  estimate  his  weight 
at  30  pounds,  the  largest  and  sti'ongest,  you  verily  believe, 
you  ever  have  hooked.  With  that  headlong  plunge,  as  if  he 
meant  to  bury  his  head  in  the  gravelly  bottom,  he  has  hooked 
himself.  Your  hook,  which  will  hold  30  pounds  dead  weight, 
is  buried  in  his  jaws  to  the  bend,  and  now  that  he  feels  the 
barb,  he  shoots  up  the  stream  with  the  swiftness  of  an  arrow, 
and  fifty  yards  of  your  fine  are  run  olf  before  you  dare  ven- 
ture to  check  him.  Now  his  speed  is  somewhat  diminished, 
hold  on  a  little,  aiad  as  the  river  side  is  clear  of  trees,  follow 
up  after  him,  for  it  is  bad  policy  to  let  out  line  to  an  unman- 
ageable length,  when  you  can  follow  your  fish.  There  are 
some  awkward  rocks  towards  the  head  of  the  pool,  which 
may  cut  your  line ;  turn  him,  therefore,  as  soon  as  you  can. 
Now  is  the  time  to  show  your  tact,  in  putting  your  tackle  to 
test,  without  having  it  snapped  by  a  sudden  spring.  Hold 
gently — ease  oft"  a  little — now  hold  again — how  beautifully 
the  rod  bends,  true  from  top  to  butt,  in  one  uniform  curve  ! 
He  has  a  mouth,  though  bitted  for  the  first  time!  Bravo! 
his  nose  is  down  the  water!  Lead  him  along — gently,  he 
grows  restive,  and  is  about  again.  Though  his  course  is  still 
up  the  stream,  he  seems  inclined  to  tack.  Now  he  shoots 
from  bank  to  bank,  like  a  Berwick  smack  tui-ning  up  Sea 
Reach  in  a  gale  of  wind.  Watch  him  well  in  stays,  lest  he 
shoot  suddenly  ahead,  and  carry  all  away.     He  is  nearing  the 


60 


THE    SALMON. 


rocks — give  him  t];e  butt  and  turn  him  again.  He  comes 
rotmd — he  cannot  bear  that  steady  pull — what  excellen 
tackle  !  lead  him  downwards — he  follows  reluctantly,  but  he 
is  beginning  to  fag.  Keep  winding  up  your  line  as  you  lead 
him  along.  He  is  inclined  to  take  a  rest  9,t  the  bottom,  but 
as  you  hope  to  land  him,  do  not  grant  him  a  moment.  Throw 
in  a  large  stone  at  him,  but  have  both  your  eyes  open — one 
on  your  rod,  and  the  other  on  the  place  where  the  fish  lies — 
lest  he  make  a  rush  when  you  are  stooping  for  a  stone,  and 
break  loose.  Great,  at  this  moment,  is  the  advantage  of  the 
angler  who  has  a  'cast '  in  his  eye  !  That  stone  has  startled 
the  fish — no  rest  for  salmo — and  now  he  darts  to  the  surface. 
'  Up  w^i  tally  ! '  what  a  leap  !  it  is  well  you  humored  him  by 
dipping  the  top  of  your  rod,  or  he  would  have  gone  free. 
Again  and  again!  these  are  the  last  efforts  of  despair,  and 
they  have  exhausted  him.  He  is  seized  with  stupor,  like  a 
stout  gentleman  who  has  suddenly  exerted  himself  after 
dinner,  or  a  boxer  who  has  just  received  a  swinging  blow  ou 
the  jugular.  Draw  him  towards  the  shore,  he  can  scarcely 
move  a  fin.  Quick,  the  gaff  is  in  his  gills,  and  now  you  have 
him  out ;  and  as  he  lies  stretched  on  the  pebbles,  with  his 
silver  sides  glancing  in  the  sun,  you  think  that  you  never 
caught  a  handsomer  fish  in  your  life,  though  you  perceive 
that  you  have  been  wrong  in  your  estimate  of  his  weight — 
thii'ty  pounds — for  it  is  evident  that  he  does  not  weigh  more 
than  thirteen.  It  was  exactly  half-past  seven  when  you 
hooked  him,  and  when  you  look  at  your  watch  after  lauding 
him,  you  perceive  that  it  wants  a  quarter  to  nine,  so  that  he 
Has  kept  you  in  exercise  exactly  an  hour  and  a  quarter." 

Artificial  Flies  for  Salmon  Fishing.  The  flies  used  in 
this  country  for  taking  salmon,  do  not  differ  materially  from 
those  used  in  England,  Ireland,  or  Scotland.  In  the  fly  sea- 
son, those  of  the  most  gaudy  description  are  generally  used. 


I 


THE    SALMON.  fe'l 

The  most  approved  are  made  of  the  choice  feathers  of  the 
peacock,  pheasant,  parrot,  partridge  woodcock,  ostrich,  ma- 
caw, turkey,  guinea-hen,  &c.,  with  bright  colored  bodies,  and 
gold  twist.  They  can  be  procured  ready  made,  and  of  all 
descriptions,  at  the  general  tackle  stores.  The  following  list, 
used  in  Ireland,  Scotland,  and  Wales,  and  to  some  extent  in 
the  United  States,  may  be  found  useful  to  the  Angler. 

No.  1.  Body  of  the  fly  half  dark  blue  and  half  orange 
mohair,  ribbed  with  silver  twist  and  red  tip  ;  legs  of  black 
hackle,  v 
mallard. 

No.  2.  The  body  half  blue  and  half  light  green,  or  greenish 
yellow,  with  a  gold  rib  and  red  twist,  black  hackle  legs,  and 
wings  from  the  heron's  wing. 

No.  3.  Body,  light  green  mohair,  ribbed  with  gold  twist ; 
tips,  orange  mohair  and  turkey's  wing ;  legs  black  hackle ; 
wings  of  the  black  and  white  tail  feathers  of  the  turkey. 

No.  4.  Body  of  orange  colored  silk  or  worsted,  with  gold 
twist ;  dun  hackle  legs  ;  wings  dark  brown  mottled  feather 
of  the  bittern. 

No.  5.  Wings  of  the  speckled  feather  of  the  mallard's 
wing;  body  of  blue  mohair,  with  silver  twist,  with  a  dark 
blue  hackle  for  legs. 

No.  6.  Body,  claret  and  orange  colored  mohair,  with 
green  tip  and  gold  twist ;  wdngs  of  the  turkey  feather,  with 
white  tips  ;  legs  black  and  red  hackle. 

No.  7.  Body  of  yellow  silk  or  mohair,  with  gold  twist; 
wings  of  the  brown  mottled  feather  of  the  turkey ;  dark  red 
hackle  for  legs . 

No.  8.  Wings  of  the  woodcock  or  partridge,  body  purple 
mohair,  legs  coch-a-bonddu  hackle. 

No  9  Wings  light  speckled  feather  of  the  wing  of  the 
mallard ;  body  yellow  silk  with  fine  gold  twist ;  tail  three 
sti'ands  of  red  hackle,  and  legs  of  the  same. 


62 


THE    SALMON, 


No.  10.  Body  black  osti-ich ,  with  silver  twist ;  wings 

from  the  mallard's  wing,  and  black  hackle  for  legs. 

There  are  other  varieties  of  flies,  both  of  English  and 
American  manufacture,  used  in  the  United  States  and  Canada, 
which  can  generally  be  procured  at  the  tackle  stores  in  the 
city  of  New-York. 


l^M 

it      liil 

^-='— .-. 

r 

^. 

'      -^ 

1^= 

Salmon  Spearing.  This  is  a  mode  of  taking  fish  not  ap- 
proved of  by  the  regular  sportsman.  It  is  practised  to  a 
great  extent  on  many  of  our  western  lakes  and  rivers, 
usually  by  persons  who  take  fish  for  a  livelihood,  and 
where  they  are  found  in  such  immense  quantities,  that  there 
can  be  no  objection  to  the  plan,  as  it  is  an  active  and  invigor- 
ating pastime,  almost  equal  to  that  of  hunting.  It  is  generzdly 
practised  at  night,  with  torches,  and  gives  many  an  hour  of 
evening  sport,  after  a  day's  business,  to  the  inhabitants  in  the 
vicinity  of  the  lakes  where  they  are  found.  The  Indians, 
who  in  their  rude  manner  surpass  many  of  their  more  civilized 
brethren  in  water  or  land  sports,  are  veiy  fond  of  this  amuse" 
ment,  and  in  the  season  can  be  seen  traversing  the  lakes  in 
their  canoes,  with  varied  and  brilliant  pine  lights,  presenting 
a  most  beautiful  and  picturesque  appearance. 

There  is  a  law  of  the  State  of  New-York,  prohibiting  the 
taking  of  salmon  by  net,  hook,  or  spear,  "  or  any  other  device 
whatsoever,"  in  the  months  of  October  and  November,  but 
which,  Hke  many  of  our  State  laws,  is  better  known  by  its 
breach  than  its  observance. 

How  to  cook  a  Salmon.  The  follov^nng  method  of  cooking 
and  crimping  a  salmon,  given  by  Sir  Humphrey  Davy,  will 
be  found  useful  after  he  has  been  taken;  and  as  the  reader 
has  been  led  through  the  instructions  of  taking  the  game,  con- 
cluding that  the  fish  is  taken,  directions  for  cooking  will  be 
here  in  place. 


THE    SALMON. 


63 


"  He  seems  fairly  tired,  I  shall  bring  him  into  shore.  Now 
gaff  him ;  strike  as  near  the  tail  as  you  can.  He  is  safe ;  we 
must  prepare  him  for  the  pot.  Give  him  a  stunning  blow  on 
the  head,  to  deprive  him  of  sensation ;  and  then  give  him  a 
transverse  cut,  just  below  the  gills  and  crimp  him,  by  cutting, 
so  as  almost  to  divide  him  into  slices,  and  hold  him  by  the 
tail  that  he  may  bleed.  There  is  a  small  spring  I  see,  close 
under  that  bank,  which  I  dare  say  has  the  mean  temperature 
of  the  atmosphere  in  this  climate,  and  is  much  under  fifty  de- 
grees ;  place  him  there,  and  let  him  remain  ten  minutes,  and 
then  carry  him  to  the  pot  and  let  the  water  and  salt  boil  furi- 
ously, before  you  put  in  a  slice  ;  and  give  time  for  the  water 
to  recover  its  heat  before  you  put  in  another ;  leave  the  head 
out,  and  throw  in  the  thickest  pieces  first  " 


I 


CHAPTER  V. 


OP    THE    LAKE    TROUT. 

(Salmo  Confinis.) 

This  species  of  Trout  is  entirely  distinct  from  that  known  as 
the  Mackinaw  Trout  or  Mackinaw  Salmon  ;  he  is  not  so  much 
of  a  game  fish,  neither  is  he  so  tasteful  to  the  palate  as  the 
former  description.  The  following,  taken  from  Dr.  Dekay's 
New  York  Fauna,  will  enable  our  friends  to  make  the  proper 
distinction  between  the  two  : — 

"Char\cteristics: — Blackish,  with  numerous  gray  spots. 
Body  robust,  comparatively  short  in  proportion  to  its  depth. 
Caudal  fin,  with  a  sinuous  margin.     Length  two  to  four  feet. 

"  It  occurs  in  most  of  the  northern  lakes  of  this  state  ;*  and 
I  have  noticed  it  in  Silver  Lake,  Pennsylvania,  adjacent  to 
Broome  county,  which  is,  as  far  as  I  know,  its  southernmost 
limits.  The  average  weight  is  from  eight  to  ten  pounds,  but  I 
have  heard  fishermen  speak  of  its  weighing  thirty  pounds,  and 
even  more.  Some  idea  of  their  abundance  may  be  formed 
from  the  fact  that  a  single  fisherman  has  been  known  to  cap- 
ture, on  Paskungameh  or  Long  Lake,  five  hundred  weight  in 
the  course  of  one  week." 

They  are  taken  with  stout  lines  and  tackle  similar  to  that 
used  for  the  Mackinaw  Trout ;  the  deepest  holes  in  the  deepest 

•  New  York. 


THE   LAKE   TROUT. 


65 


parts  of  the  lakes  are  their  haunts.  The  best  bait  for  taking 
them  is  the  shiner,  although  they  are  not  very  particular  as  to 
feed,  and  can  be  captured  with  almost  any  kind  of  small  fish  that 
populate  the  brooks  that  run  into  the  lakes.  Although  not  so 
valuable  as  an  article  of  diet  or  sport,  still  they  should  be  pre- 
served from  certain  and  inevitable  extinction  by  a  protective  law 
during  their  spawning  season.  They  have  the  misfortune  to 
spawn  in  the  month  of  October;  a  pleasant  time  for  active 
out-door  exercise,  and  for  the  favorite  practice  with  many  of 
the  foolish  inhabitants  near  the  lakes,  of  spearing  this  fish  when 
they  go  into  shallow  water  to  spawn.  It  is  said  that  legis- 
lative enactments  against  this  wholesale  murder  would  be 
useless.  It  might  be  so  ;  but  were  our  angling  friends  on  the 
lakes  to  take  the  subject  in  hand,  have  proper  laws  passed, 
and  see  that  they  were  put  in  execution  against  every  ofTender, 
this  member  of  the  finny  family  might  be  preserved  as  long  as 
waters  run  and  fish  swim. 


CHAPTER  VI. 
OP    THE    TROUT 


This  beautiful  and  well  known  fish  inhabits  the  waters  of 
almost  all  countries  on  the  globe.  In  England,  Ireland,  Scot- 
land, Gennany,  and  Prussia,  it  is  sought  for  by  the  angler  and 
the  epicure  as  the  height  of  their  admiration.  Our  own  coun- 
try, with  its  countless  streams  and  lakes,  furnishes  quantities 
equal  to  all  the  rest  combined ;  and  although  they  have  been 
much  sought  after  within  a  few  years  back,  still  there  are 
many  streams  where  the  line  never  floated,  or  the  trout  ever 
had  the  satisfaction  of  being  tempted  by  the  angler's  scientific 
art.  They  vary  greatly  in  size,  color  and  description,  accord- 
ing to  the  climate,  the  nature  of  the  water,  or  the  quality  of 
their  feed.  They  go  imder  the  different  names  of  common 
or  silver  trout,  black  trout,  sea  trout,  and  bass. 

The  Silver  Trout,  or  common  trout,  is  found  in  almost  all 
of  our  clear  swift  running  northern  streams,  and  weighfrom  one 
to  15  pounds.  A  splendid  specimen  of  this  species  of  trout  is 
taken  in  Bashe's  Kill,  Sullivan  County,  New-York,  said  to  sur- 
pass any  thing  of  the  kind  in  the  world.  This  stream  winds  along 
the  western  side  of  Shawangunk  mountain,  through  the  beauti- 
ful and  well  cultivated  valley  of  Memekating,  has  a  smooth 
gravelly  bottom,  and  so  remarkably  clear  and  transparent  is 
it,  that  the  smallest  insect  is  perceptible  on  its  bed. 


TROUT  FISHING  IN  SULLIVAN  COUNTY 


"  We  break  from  the  tree-groups,  a  glade  deep  with  grass  ; 

The  white  clover's  breath  loads  the  sense  as  we  pass. 

A  sparkle— a  streak— a  broad  glitter  is  seen, 

The  bright  Callikoon,  through  its  thickets  of  green  ! 

We  rush  to  the  banks — its  sweet  music  we  hear ; 

Its  gush,  dash  and  gurgle,  all  blent  to  the  ear. 

No  shadows  are  drawn  by  the  cloud  covered  sun, 

We  plunge  in  the  chrystal,  otir  sport  is  begun. 

Our  line,  where  that  ripple  shoots  onward  we  throw. 

It  sweeps  to  the  foam-spangled  eddy  below, 

A  tremor— a  pull— the  Trout  upward  is  thrown. 

He  swings  to  our  basket— the  prize  is  our  own  !  "'—Street. 


THE    TROUT.  67 

Common  Trout,  *  {Salmo  Fontinalus — MUchill,)  "  with 
yellow  and  red  spots  on  both  sides  of  the  lateral  line,  concave 
tail,  and  sides  of  the  belly  orange  red ;  back  mottled  pale  and 
brown,  sides  dark  brown  with  yellow  and  red  spots,  the  yeL 
low  larger  than  the  red  surrounding  them ;  the  latter  appear 
like  scarlet  dots ;  lateral  line  straight,  the  yellow  spots  and 
red  dots  both  above  and  below  that  line  ;  lowest  part  of  the  ab- 
domen whitish  with  a  smutty  tinge ;  first  rays  of  the  pectoral 
ventral  and  anal  fins  white,  the  second  black,  the  rest  pur- 
plish red ;  dorsal  fin  mottled  of  a  yellowish  and  black ;  tail  is 
rather  concave,  but  not  amounting  to  a  fork,  and  of  a  reddish 
purple,  with  blackish  spots  above  and  below ;  eyes  large  and 
pale,  mouth  wide,  teeth  sharp,  tongue  distinct,  skin  scaleless. 
Is  reckoned  a  most  dainty  fish.  He  hves  in  running  waters 
only,t  and  not  in  stagnant  ponds;  and  therefore  the  lively 
streams,  descending  north  and  south  from  their  sources  on 
Long  Island,  exactly  suit  the  constitution  of  this  fish.  The 
heaviest  Long  Island  trout  that  I  have  heard  of  weighed  four 
pounds  and  a  half." 

"  The  common  trout  of  Massachusetts  t  is  from  8  to  12 
inches  long,  dotted  on  the  back  with  brownish  spots,  shaded 
by  a  paler  circle.  On  the  gill-covers  is  a  broad  spot ;  the  un- 
der jaw  is  the  longest ;  the  soft  rayed  fins  tinged  with  yeUow, 
and  on  the  sides  of  the  body  are  red  spots." 

The  Black  Trout  is  usually  found  in  muddy  sluggish 
streams  or  large  ponds,  vdith  clay  bottoms,  in  the  roughest  and 
wildest  parts  of  our  country.     They  are  not  considered  as 

*  The  trout  of  Long  Island. 

t  This  is  not  always  the  case.  They  are  taken  in  great  quantities  at 
Stump  Pond,  Long  Island,  of  a  large  size,  but  not  of  as  fine  a  flavor  and 
color  as  in  swift  running  waters.  They  are  also  found  in  various  other 
ponds  throughout  the  country,  and  are  often  transferred  to  artificial  ponds 
supplied  from  springs. 

J  Smith. 


iis«C=^ 


63 


THE    TROUT. 


game  a  fish  as  the  ordinary  trout,  neither  do  they  possess 
as  fine  a  flavor  for  the  table.  They  are  supposed  to  t;ike  their 
color  from  the  quality  and  color  of  the  water,  which  has  gene- 
rally a  dark  smoky  appearance,  occasioned  by  the  decayed 
leaves  and  timber  which  there  abound.  Many  of  the  streams 
in  the  western  and  mountainous  parts  of  Pennsylvania,  contain 
this  species.  They  are  found  also  in  great  abundance,  in  the 
wild  and  uninhabited  parts  of  Hamilton  county,  New-York, 
and  in  some  parts  of  New-Hampshire  and  Vermont. 

Of  the  Sea  Trout,  the  writer  is  enabled  to  give  a  better 
and  more  satisfactory  description  than  his  own.  Smith  says : 
"  They  are  found,  as  may  be  inferred  from  the  name,  in  the  salt 
and  brackish  waters  of  tide  rivers,  inland  bays  in  various  parts 
of  this  *  and  the  adjoining  states.  When  taken  from  the  salt 
water  early  in  the  spring,  they  are  in  high  perfection,  and 
nothing  can  exceed  their  piscatory  symmetry.  The  general  ap- 
pearance of  the  skin  is  of  a  silvery  brightness ;  the  back  being 
of  a  greenish  and  mackerel  complexion,  the  spots  of  a  vermil- 
ion color,  mixed  with  others  of  a  faint  yellow,  and  sometimes 
slightly  tinged  with  purple,  extend  the  whole  length  on  each 
side  of  the  lateral  line ;  the  fins  are  light  in  color  and  firm  in 
texture,  and  together  with  the  tail  are  rather  shorter  and  more 
rounded  than  the  common  trout.  They  have  a  firm  compact- 
ness of  form  from  head  to  tail,  which  accounts  for  the  superior 
sprightliness  of  their  motion ;  the  head  and  mouth  are  very 
small,  and  the  latter  never  black  inside  like  the  common,  or 
fresh  water  trout ;  the  flesh  is  even  redder,  or  rather  we  would 
say,  more  pink  colored  than  the  salmon,  to  which,  by  many, 
they  are  preferred  as  a  delicacy,  having,  like  the  salmon, 
much  of  what  is  called  the  curd  or  fat  between  the  flakes. 

"  A  fish  of  a  pound  weight  measures  about  11  inches  in 
length.  Their  average  size  is  considerably  larger  than  the 
fresh  water,  or  brook  trout — having  been  taken  in  the  waters  to 


*  Massachusetts. 


THE    TROUT. 


which  we  refer*  of  nearly  five  pounds  weight ;  such  instances, 
however,  are  rare,  three  pounds  being  considered  a  very  large 
fish.  We  do  not  remember  ever  seeing  a  poor  fish  of  this  kind 
taken ;  they  are  invariably  in  good  condition,  let  the  size  be 
what  it  will ;  their  principal  food  is  the  minnow  and  shrimp, 
particularly  the  latter,  with  which  early  in  the  season  their 
stomachs  are  found  to  be  filled ;  they  feed  upon  the  minnow 
rather  later  in  the  season,  when  the  increasing  warmth  of  the 
water  invites  it  to  leave  the  warmer  springs  of  fresh  water, 
where  it  has  passed  the  vdnter,  and  venture  into  the  shallows 
round  the  margin  of  the  bay,  it  then  becomes  an  easy  prey  to 
the  voracious  trout,  which  pursues  it  with  desperate  boldness 
to  the  very  feet  of  the  angler  as  he  stands  in  the  water,  obli- 
ging it  in  shoals,  to  leap  from  the  surface,  and  sometimes  evea 
to  be  cast  on  shore  in  its  attempts  to  escape  its  himgry  jaws. 
Though  they  are,  on  the  whole,  the  best  bait ;  the  shrimp  on 
the  contrary,  living  as  they  do  among  the  eel -grass  in  the  bay, 
which  also  affords  sheltc  to  the  trout,  being  more  wdthin 
reach,  may  consequently  be  said  to  supply  their  principal  food, 
at  least  through  the  winter  months.  As  it  is  necessary  in  the 
pursuit  of  all  game  to  be  governed  by  a  knowledge  of  its  par- 
ticular food,  so  it  may  be  said  of  the  sea  trout ;  their  motions 
while  in  the  salt  water  being  regulated  by  those  of  the  minute 
fish  on  which  they  live.  Both  minnows  and  shrimp  are  more 
or  less  affected  by  the  action  of  the  tide,  particularly  the  lat 
ter,  which  in  its  reflux  sweeps  the  passive  shrimp  in  shoals 
across  a  sandy  eddy  of  the  bay,  into  the  very  mouths  of  the 
expectant  trout,  who  there  collect  and  lie  in  wait  to  feast  up- 
on them," 

The  last  mentioned  species,  (Lepomis  Salmonea,)  is  pe- 
culiar to  our  southern  rivers,  and  with  many  southerners  go 
under  the  name  of  Trout  Bass,  or  Brown  Bass.  They  grow 
to  a  much  larger  size  than  the  northern  trout,  varying  in 

*  Waquoit  Bay,  upon  Cape  Cod,  and  Fire  Place,  L 


/o 


THE    TROUT. 


length  from  6  to  24  inches ;  they  are  of  a  darker  color,  and 
do  not  possess  that  beauty  of  appearance  when  out  of  the 
water,  or  that  delicious  flavor  when  upon  the  table ;  neither 
do  they  contribute  as  much  to  the  Angler's  sport,  as  those  of 
more  northern  latitudes. 

Another  species  of  trout,  mentioned  tjy  Smith,  is  the 
HucJio  Trout,  {Salmo  HucTio,)  resembhng  very  much  the 
sea  trout;  it  is  found,  on  careful  inspection,  to  be  more 
slender,  and  to  have  a  greater  number  of  red  spots ;  the  back 
is  dusky ;  the  ventral  fin  has  a  yellowish  tinge ;  all  the  others 
are  of  a  palish  purple ;  the  tail  is  forked,  and  the  fish  measures 
sometimes  four  feet  through ;  ordinarily  they  are  only  about  two, 
and  caught  by  the  hook.  This  trout  certainly  exists  in  the 
large  rivers  and  ponds  in  the  interior,  but  deteriorate  in  size 
They  are  brought  from  New-Hampshire  in  the  winter,  frozen 
for  the  markets,  and  from  the  northern  parts  of  Maine,  where 
specimens  have  been  taken,  large  as  any  produced  in  the 
great  rivers  of  Europe. 

There  is  no  fish  that  varies  so  much  in  size,  shape,  color 
and  flavor,  as  the  trout.  They  are  found  in  different  varieties 
in  the  same  stream,  and  vary  so  much  in  external  appearance 
and  flavor  in  some  parts  of  the  Union,  as  to  lead  to  different 
appellations  from  experienced  and  scientific  men. 

They  usually  spawn  in  the  months  of  September  and  Oc- 
tober. The  best  time  for  takuig  them  is  from  April  untU 
August ;  but  if  the  weather  is  mild  and  pleasant,  they  are 
often  taken  in  fine  condition  and  of  large  size,  in  the  month 
of  March.  They  are  not,  however,  considered  in  perfection 
until  the  months  of  May  and  June,  until  which  time,  owing 
to  the  coldness  of  our  climate,  they  do  not  obtain  sufficient 
quantity  of  the  proper  food  to  make  them  active  and  healthy. 
They  are  also  more  difficult  to  take,  and  will  give  the  sports- 
man more  pleasure  than  in  the  months  of  March  and  April, 
when  they  bite  more  freely,  but  not  with  that  zest  and  vigor. 


b 


THE    TROUT.  71 

Of  the  nature  and  habits  of  the  trout,  Walton  says :  "  And 
you  are  to  note  that  he  continues  many  months  out  of  season ; 
for  it  may  be  observed  of  the  trout,  that  he  is  like  the  buck 
or  the  ox,  that  will  not  be  fat  in  many  months,  though  he  go 
in  the  very  same  pastures  that  horses  do,  which  wiU  be  fat  in 
one  month.  And  so  you  may  observe,  that  most  other  fishes 
recover  strength  and  grow  sooner  fat  and  in  season  than  the 
trout  doth. 

"  And  next  you  are  to  note,  that  till  the  sun  gets  to  such  a 
height  as  to  warm  the  earth  and  water,  the  trout  is  sick  and 
lean,  and  lousy,  and  unwholesome  ;  for  you  shall  in  winter 
find  him  to  have  a  big  head,  and  then  to  be  lank  and  thin,  and 
lean ;  at  wliich  time  many  of  them  having  sticking  to  them 
sags,  or  trout-lice ;  which  is  a  kind  of  wonn,  in  shape  like  a 
clove,  or  pin  with  a  big  head,  and  sticks  close  to  him  and 
sucks  his  moisture ;  those  I  think  the  trout  breeds  himself; 
and  never  thrives  tiU  he  frees  himself  from  them,  which  is 
when  warm  weather  comes ;  and  then  as  he  grows  stronger, 
he  gets  from  the  dead  still  water  into  the  sharp  stream  and 
the  gravel,  and  there  rubs  off  these  worms  or  hce ;  and  then 
as  he  grows  stronger,  so  he  gets  him  into  swifter  and  swifter 
streams,  and  there  hes  at  the  watch  for  any  fly  or  minnow 
that  comes  near  him." 

The  North  Coimtry  Angler,  an  English  writer,  says :  "  The 
burn  (or  common)  trout,  grows  fast  if  it  has  plenty  of  food 
and  good  w^ater ;  several  experiments  have  been  made  in 
fish-ponds ;  some  fed  by  river  water,  some  by  cleeu"  fluent 
springs,  into  which  the  young  have  been  put  about  five  or  sis 
months  old — that  is,  in  September  or  October,  reckoning 
from  April,  when  they  come  out  of  their  spawning  beds,  at 
which  time  they  will  be  six  or  seven  inches  lonj 
there  has  been  but  littie  difference  in  theii^  age  and  size  when 
put  into  the  pond,  yet  in  18  months  after  there  will  be  a  sur- 
prising change.     I  have  seen  a  pond  drained  ten  months  after 


72  THE    TROUT. 

the  fish  were  put  into  it,  which  was  in  July,  when  they  were 
about  15  months  old,  at  which  time  they  were  15  or  16  inches, 
others  not  above  12.  But  when  the  pond  was  drained  ten 
months  after,  in  March,  when  they  were  almost  two  years 
old,  some  were  21  or  22  inches,  and  weighed  three  pounds 
or  more  ;  others  were  about  16  inches;  and  a  fourth  part  not 
above  12.  I  do  not  know  to  what  we  can  attribute  this  dif-' 
ference ;  it  could  not  be  either  in  the  food  or  the  water,  or 
the  weather,  they  faring  all  alike  in  these.  But  if  I  may  be 
allowed  my  opinion,  perhaps  some  of  the  fry  may  have  been 
the  spawn  of  those  that  were  only  17  months  old,  which  is 
the  soonest  that  any  of  them  spawn ;  others  of  parents  29 
months,  or  two  years  and  a  half  old ;  and  others  a  year  older. 
This  difference  in  the  age  of  the  parent  trout  may,  I  believe, 
occasion  the  difference  in  the  size  of  their  breed;  otherwise 
I  cannot  account  for  it.  Trout,  in  a  good  pond,  will  grow 
much  faster  than  in  some  rivers,  because  they  do  not  range 
so  much  in  feeding.  How  long  they  live  cannot  be  determined 
in  any  other  way  so  well  as  by  observation  on  those  in  ponds, 
which  observation  I  never  had  an  opportunity  of  making  my- 
self, and  therefore  shall  only  mention  what  a  gentleman  told 
me.  He  assured  me  that  at  four  or  five  years  old  they  were 
at  their  full  growth,  which  was,  in  some,  at  about  30  inches, 
and  in  many  much  less;  that  they  continued  about  three 
years  pretty  nearly  the  same  in  size  and  goodness  ;  two  years 
after  they  grew  big  headed  and  smaller  bodied,  and  died  in 
the  winter  after  that  change  ;  but  he  thought  the  head  did  not 
grow  larger,  but  only  seemed  to  be  so,  because  the  body 
decayed;  so  that,  according  to  this  gentleman's  computation, 
nine  or  ten  years  is  the  term  of  their  life ;  and  yet  I  think 
they  may  live  longer  in  some  rivers,  and  grow  to  a  much 
greater  size,  when  they  have  liberty  to  go  into  the  tide-way 
and  salt  water." 

The  evidence  of  other  writers  goes  to  show  that  they  live 


THE    TROUT.  73 

to  a  much  greater  age,  an  instance  being  known  in  England 
where  a  trout  remained  ih  a  well  upwards  of  sixty  years,  be- 
ing visited  by  the  neighboring  country  as  a  remarkable  curi- 
osity. Another  one,  for  28  years  was  an  inhabitant  of  a  well 
at  Dumbarton  Castle,  Scotland.  It  had  never  increased  in 
size  from  the  time  it  was  placed  there,  when  it  weighed 
about  a  pound,  and  became  so  tame  that  it  would  receive  its 
food  from  the  hands  of  the  soldiers. 

When  in  prime  condition  the  trout  is  short  and  thick, 
having  a  small  head  and  broad  tail ;  the  spots  on  the  sides  are 
red  tinged  with  purple,  and  the  belly  of  a  beautiful  bright 
silver  color. 

This  fish,  from  its  extreme  beauty,  delicacy  of  flavor  and 
extraordinary  activity  as  a  game  fish,  has  attracted  the  atten- 
tion of  all  classes  of  people,  from  the  boy  with  a  pin-hook,  to 
those  that  have  swayed  the  destiny  of  empire.  The  divine, 
the  philosopher,  the  poet,  the  artist,  and  the  statesman,  from 
the  earUest  dates,  have  enjoyed  many  days  of  recreation  in 
his  pursuit,  sang  songs  to  his  praise,  or  wntten  pages  of  in- 
struction of  their  own  experience  in  taking  him  from  his  na- 
tive element.  Un^er  such  circumstances,  it  would  be  super 
fluous,  at  this  late  day,  to  attempt  to  give  any  new  instruc- 
tions to  the  young  Angler,  or  the  seeker  after  piscatorial  in- 
formation. And  as  the  opinions  and  practice  of  well  known 
advisers  will  no  doubt  be  preferred,  they  are  here  given, 
with  such  comments  as  may  be  found  necessary. 

There  are  three  different  methods  pursued  in  the  capture 
of  the  trout : — angling  at  the  top,  with  a  natural  or  artificial 
fly,  grasshopper,  or  other  small  insect ;  at  the  middle,  with  a 
minnow,  shrimp,  or  similar  small  fish ;  and  at  the  bottom, 
with  a  worm,  or  different  kinds  of  pastes. 

Of  Fly  Fishing.  Of  all  the  various  modes  adopted  and 
contrived  by  the  ingenuity  of  man  for  pulling  out  the  "  cun* 


74 


THE    IROUT. 


ning  trout,"  this  at  once  recommends  itself  as  the  perfection  of 
the  art ;  but  as  it  is  considered  by  a  majority  of  our  brethren 
more  difficult  than  worm  fishing,  it  has  many  objectors.  But 
the  difficulties  are  more  in  the  imagination  than  the  practice, 
and  when  once  understood,  it  gives  the  highest  pleasure  of 
the  art.     Others  think  they  will  not  take  the  fly  at  all  in  this 


cannot  be  persuaded  that  with  a  simple  fly  made  of  feathers, 
they  can  take  as  many  fish,  and  often  times  more.  Tell  them 
that  Isaac  Walton,  Sir  Humphrey  Davy,  and  some  of  the 
greatest  Anglers  the  world  ever  saw,  adopted  this  mode 
altogether,  and  that  all  writers  on  Angling  have  devoted 
pages  of  their  works  to  explanatory  drawings,  &c.,  in  refer- 
ence to  it;  that  it  is  the  most  gentlemanly,  the  most  elegant, 
the  least  trouble ;  that  you  can  take  your  rod  enclosed  in  a 
small  bag  a  couple  of  feet  long,  and  about  half  a  pound  in 
weight,  or  in  the  more  portable  form  of  a  walking  stick,  and 
your  flies  in  your  pocket-book ;  that  you  can  traverse  the 
stream,  and  enjoy  its  beautiful  scenery  for  miles  and  miles 
with  the  least  possible  trouble ;  and  they  will  still  adhere  to 
their  only  method  of  worm  fishing. 

From  the  fact  of  there  being  comparatively  few  who 
practice  with  the  fly,  some  English  writers  are  of  the  opinion 
that  there  are  no  jiy-Jishers  in  America,  and  many  of  our  own 
countrymen  think  there  are  very  few;  but  this  is  a  great 
mistake.  There  are  hundreds  of  good  fly  anglers,  and  many 
that  can  throw  a  fly  with  the  most  experienced  of  Europe. 

In  the  Spring,  when  the  streams  are  muddy,  the  worm,  of 
course,  is  prefeiTed,  as  it  is  the  only  method  that  can  be 
practised,  ov^dng  to  the  state  of  the  water,  and  also  from  the 
fact  that  the  trout  lie  deep,  and  in  the  holes  under  the  banks. 
It  is  also  sometimes  better  towards  the  close  of  the  day  in 
summer ;  the  worm  vdll  then  tempt  the  trout  when  nothing 
else  will.     But  as  a  general  rule,  in  clear  streams,  no  mattex 


» 


THE    TROUT.  74 

in  what  part  of  the  country,  in  the  summer  months,  the  arti- 
ficial fly  can  be  used  with  success. 

Fly-fishing  is  usually  practised  with  a  short  one-handed 
rod,  from  ten  to  twelve  feet  in  length,  or  a  two-handed  rod, 
from  fifteen  to  eighteen  feet  in  length.  The  first  mentioned 
is  the  most  common  in  use,  and  is  calculated  for  the  majority 
of  our  streams,  which  are  small,  and  require  but  little  length 
of  rod  or  line.  Attached  to  the  rod  should  be  a  reel,  contain- 
ing from  thirty  to  fifty  yards  of  hair,  grass,  silk,  or  silk  and 
hair  line — the  latter  description  should  be  used  if  it  can  be 
procured,  tapering  from  the  tenth  of  an  inch  almost  to  a 
point ;  to  this  should  be  attached  a  leader  of  from  one  to  two 
yards  in  length  ;  and  finally  your  fly,  on  a  light  length  of  gut ; 
if  you  wish  to  use  two  or  three  flies,  place  them  on  your 
leader  with  short  gut,  about  24  inches  apart. 

The  latter  description  of  rod  is  used  in  larger  streams, 
where  it  is  necessary  to"  throw  a  great  distance  ;  for  this  pur- 
pose, the  reel  should  be  large  enough  to  contain  100  yards  of 
line,  with  the  other  tackle  precisely  the  same  as  with  the 
smaller  rod.  It  should  be  recollected  that  the  trout  rods 
should  be  made  similar  to  the  salmon  rods,  and  of  the  lightest 
w^oods,  as  formerly  described. 

The  above  descriptions  are  generally  used  in  this  country, 
but  the  following  information  from  Hofland,  one  of  the  latest 
and  best  English  writers,  may  be  preferred : 

"  A  slight  rod,  12  feet  long,  or,  if  wanted  for  a  narrow  or 
wooded  stream,  one  of  10  or  12  feet  only  would  be  more 
convenient,  a  reel  containing  30  yards  of  line,  a  book  of  arti- 
ficial flies,  and  a  landing-net,  and  you  are  fully  equipped  for 
the  sport.  *  *  *  j  have  already  said  that  a  one-handed 
rod  should  be  10  or  12  feet  long,  and  a  two-handed  rod  from 
16  to  18  feet;  to  either  of  which  must  be  attached  a  reel 
containing  30  yards  of  twisted  silk  and  hair  line,  tapering 
from  a  moderate  thickness  up  to  a  few  hairs,  at  the  end  of 


76  THE    TROUT. 

which  you  are  by  a  loop  to  attach  your  bottom  tackle.  This 
should  be  made  of  round,  even  gut,  and  three  yards  long : 
some  persons  prefer  four  yards ;  but  I  think  too  great  a 
length  of  gut  increases  the  difficulty  in  casting  the  line. 
These  lines  should  also  taper  gradually,  the  gut  being  much 
stronger  at  the  end  which  is  to  be  attached  to  the  line  on  the 
reel,  than  at  the  end  to  which  the  sti-etcher  fly  is  to  be  fixed. 
When  you  fish  with  only  two  flies,  the  second  (or  drop  fly) 
should  be  at  a  distance  of  36  or  40  inches  from  the  bottom  or 
stretcher  fly ;  but  if  you  use  three  flies,  the  first  drop  should 
be  only  34  inches  from  the  stretcher,  and  the  second  30 
inches  from  the  first.  These  drop  flies  are  attached  to  the 
line  by  loops,  and  should  not  be  more  than  three  inches  long; 
and  by  having  the  gut  rather  stronger  than  for  the  end  fly, 
they  will  stand  nearly  at  a  right  angle  from  the  line.  I  re- 
commend the  beginner  to  commence  with  one  fly  only;  but 
at  most  he  must  not  use  more  than  two  ;  and,  as  for  his  mode 
of  casting  or  throwing  his  fly,  now  his  tackle  is  prepared,  I 
fear  little  useful  instruction  can  be  given,  as  skill  and  dexterity, 
in  this  point,  must  depend  upon  practice.  I  may,  however, 
advise  him  not  to  attempt  to  cast  a  long  line  at  first,  but  to 
try  his  strength  and  gain  facility  by  degrees.  He  must  make 
up  his  mind  to  hear  many  a  crack,  like  a  coachman's  whip, 
and  find  the  consequent  loss  of  his  flies  before  he  can  direct 
his  Stretcher  to  a  given  point,  and  let  it  faU  on  the  water  as 
light  as  a  gossamer." 

Cotton  says :  "  For  the  length  of  your  rod,  you  are  always 
to  be  governed  by  the  breadth  of  the  river  you  shall  choose 
to  angle  at;  and  for  a  trout  I'iver  one  of  five  or  six  yards  is 
commonly  enough;  and  longer,  though  never  so  neatly  and 
artificially  made,  it  ought  not  to  be,  if  you  intend  to  fish  at 
ease  ;  and  if  otherwise,  where  lies  the  sport  ?  The  length  of 
your  line,  to  a  man  that  knows  how  to  handle  his  rod  and  to 
cast  it,  is  no  matter  of  encumbrance,  ex:cept  in  woody  places, 


THETROUT.  77 

and  in  landing  of  a  fish,  which  every  one  that  can  afford  to 
angle  for  pleasure  has  somebody  to  do  for  him.*  And  the 
length  of  line  is  a  mighty  advantage  to  the  fishing  at  a  dis- 
tance ;  and  to  fish  fine  and  far  off,  is  the  first  and  principal 
rule  for  trout  angling.  Your  line  in  this  case  should  never  be 
less  than  one,  nor  ever  exceed  two  hairs,  next  to  the  hook ; 
for  one  (though  some,  I  know,  will  pretend  to  more  art  than 
their  fellows)  is  indeed  too  few,  the  least  accident,  with  the 
finest  hand,  being  sufficient  to  break  it ;  but  he  that  cannot 
kill  a  trout  of  twenty  inches  long  with  two,  in  a  river  clear  of 
wood  and  weeds,  deserves  not  the  name  of  a  tnie  angler. 

"  Now,  to  have  your  linet  as  it  ought  to  be,  two  of  the 
finest  lengths  nearest  the  hook  should  be  of  two  hairs  a-piece ; 
the  next  three  lengths  above  them  of  three ;  the  next  three 
above  them  of  four ;  and  so  of  five,  and  six,  and  seven,  to  the 
very  top  ;  by  which  means  your  rod  and  tackle  will  in  a 
manner  taper  from  your  very  hand  to  your  hook ;  your  line 
will  fall  much  better  and  straighter,  and  cast  your  fly  to  any 
certain  place  to  which  the  hand  and  eye  shah,  direct  it,  with 
less  weight  and  violence,  than  would  otherwise  circle  the 
water  and  fright  away  the  fish. 

"  In  casting  your  line,  do  it  always  before  you,  and  so  that 
your  fly  may  first  fall  upon  the  water,  and  as  little  of  your 
line  with  it  as  possible ;  though  if  the  wind  be  stiff,  you  will 
of  necessity  be  compelled  to  drown  a  good  part  of  your  line 
to  keep  your  fly  under  water.  And  in  casting  your  fly  you 
must  aim  at  the  farther  or  nearer  bank,  as  the  wind  serves 

*  This  is  the  method  of  fishing  without  a  reel,  and  with  very  fine  hair 
Knes,  mostly  practised  in  Cotton's  day.  We  hardly  think  that  every 
body  in  Republican  America,  that  can  afford  to  fish  for  pleasure,  has 
an  attendant  to  land  his  fish  for  him ! 

t  This  mode  is  given  for  the  benefit  of  those  who  live  in  the  country, 
are  obliged  to  make  their  own  lines,  and  find  it  necessary  to  fish  with 
out  a  reel. 


78 


THE    TROUT. 


yoTir  turn,  which  also  will  be  with  and  against  you  on  the 
same  side,  several  times  in  an  hour,  as  the  river  winds  in  its 
course,  and  you  will  be  forced  to  angle  up  and  down  by 
turns  accordingly,  but  are  to  endeavor,  as  much  as  you  can, 
to  have  the  wind  evermore  on  your  bacjc.  And  always  be 
sure  to  stand  as  far  off  the  bank  as  the  length  will  give  you 
leave,  when  you  throw  on  the  contrary  side ;  though  when 
the  wind  will  not  permit  you  so  to  do,  and  that  you  are  con- 
strained to  angle  on  the  same  side  whereon  you  stand,  you 
must  then  stand  on  the  very  brink  of  the  river,  and  cast  your 
fly  at  the  utmost  length  of  your  rod  and  line,  up  or  down  the 
river,  as  the  gale  serves." 


_^E^; 

^ 

~^- 

• 

=>;= 

Management  of  the  Line,  when  Fishing  either  with  one 
Fly,  or  two  or  more  Flies.  The  following  minute  and  easy 
method  of  the  management  of  the  line,  and  throwing  the  fly 
from  Taylor's  "  Art  of  Angling,"  will  be  found  to  be  excel 
lent  advice  to  the  young  beginner. 

"  When  you  have  fixed  your  rod  properly,  with  your 
winch  thereon,  and  brought  your  line  from  it  through  the 
rings  of  your  rod,  loop  on  to  it  by  the  strongest  end  your  foot 
length,*  which  should  be  about  three  yards  and  a  half  long, 
made  of  good  strong  silk-worm  gut,  well  tied,  and  the  knots 
neatly  whipped,  running  (very  little)  finer  towards  the  hot* 
tom  end,  at  which  place  there  must  be  a  neatly  whipped  loop ; 
then  take  your  end  fly,  or  stretcher,  which  should  be  made 
of  one  or  two  lengths  of  good  level  gut,  full  as  fine,  or  a  little 
finer,  than  the  bottom  link  of  your  foot  length,  tied  and 
whipped  neatly  together,  and  looped  nicely  at  the  end ;  loop 
this  to  the  end  of  your  gut  length ;  and  then,  your  drop  fly- 
just  above  a  knot,  where  whipped,  about  a  yard  from  the 
end  fly,  to  hang  from  the  Ime  not  more  than  two  or  three 

♦  Called  in  this  country  a  leader,  as  described  on  page  32. 


THE    TROUT. 


79 


inches.  If  you  choose  to  fish  with  more,  keep  them  all  at 
the  same  distance.  And  observe,  that  if  your  droppers  be 
larger  than,  or  even  as  large  as,  your  stretcher,  you  will  not 
be  able  to  throw  a  good  line :  but  a  beginner  should  never 
use  more  than  one  fly. 

"  When  thus  prepared,  let  out  the  line  about  half  as  long 
again  as  the  rod  ;  and  holding  the  line  properly  in  one  hand, 
and  the  line,  just  above  the  fly,  in  the  other,  give  your  rod  a 
motion  from  right  to  left,  and  as  you  move  the  rod  backwards, 
in  order  to  throw  out  the  line,  dismiss  the  line  from  your 
hand  at  the  same  time ;  and  try  several  throws  at  this  length. 
Then  let  out  more  line  and  try  that ;  stiU  using  more  and 
more  till  you  can  manage  any  length  needful ;  but  about  nine 
yards  is  quite  sufficient  for  a  learner  to  practice  with.  And 
observe,  that  in  raising  your  line  in  order  to  throw  it  again, 
you  should  wave  the  rod  a  little  round  your  head,  and  not 
bring  it  directly  backwards ;  nor  must  you  return  the  line 
too  soon,  nor  until  it  has  streamed  its  full  length  behind  you,  or 
you  will  certainly  whip  off"  your  end  fly.  There  is  great  art  in 
making  your  line  fall  light  on  the  water,  and  showing  the  flies 
well  to  the  fish.  The  best  way  that  I  can  direct  is,  that  when 
you  have  thrown  out  your  line,  contriving  to  let  it  faU  lightly 
and  uatiirally,  you  should  raise  your  rod  gently  and  by  de- 
grees; sometimes  with  a  kind  of  tremulant  flourish,  which 
will  bring  the  flies  in  a  little  towards  you ;  still  letting  themi 
go  down  with  the  stream,  but  never  drawing  them  against 
it,  for  it  is  unnatural ;  and  before  the  line  comes  too  near  you 
throw  it  again.  When  you  see  a  fish  rise  at  a  natural  fly, 
throw  out  about  a  yard  above  him,  but  not  directly  over  his 
head ;  and  let  your  fly  or  flies  move  gently  towards  him, 
which  will  show  it  to  him  in  a  more  natural  form,  and  tempt 
him  the  more  to  take  it.  Experience  and  observation  alone, 
however,  can  make  a  man  a  complete  adept  in  the  art,  so  as 


THE    TROUT. 


to  enable  him  to  throw  his  fly  behind  bushes  and  trees,  into 
holes,  under  banks,  and  other  places  mentioned  as  the  *  trout 
haunts,*  and  where  the  best  fish  are  to  be  found." 

There  is  much  diversity  of  opinion  about  the  manner  of 
fishing,  whether  up  or  down  the  stream ;  the  great  majority 
of  Anglers,  both  in  Europe  and  this  country,  favor  the  latter 
method,  and  a  very  few  the  former.  Hofland  remarks  on 
this :  "  Some  persons  recommend  fishing  up  the  stream,  and 
throwing  the  fly  before  them.  For  my  own  part,  (after  much 
experience,)  whenever  I  can  do  so  with  convenience,  I  cast 
my  fly  above  me,  and  across  the  stream,  drawing  it  gently 
towards  me.  If  the  v^rind  should  be  against  you,  you  will  be 
constrained  to  stand  close  to  the  water's  edge,  and  make 
your  cast  close  to  the  bank  on  which  you  stand,  either  up  or 
down  the  stream,  as  the  wind  may  serve.  Avoid,  if  possible, 
fishing  with  the  sun  behind  you,  as  the  moving  shadow  of 
yourself  and  rod  will  alarm  the  fish.  The  finer  the  tackle 
(particularly  the  bottom  tackle)  and  the  lighter  the  fly  falls 
on  the  water,  the  greater  will  be  your  sport;  indeed  some 
Anglers  use  only  a  single  hair  for  their  bottom  tackle ;  but 
when  the  water  you  fish  is  weedy,  or  much  wooded,  a  single 
hair  is  difficult  to  manage ;  but  in  ponds  or  streams,  free 
fi-om  impediments,  it  may  be  used  by  a  skilful  hand  to  a  great 
advantage." 


Of  Bush-Fishing,  sometimes  called  Dibhing,  Dabbing,  or 
Daping.  This  is  a  cunning  mode  of  fishing  on  the  part  of  the 
Angler,  quite  equal  to  any  of  the  curious  manoeuvres  of  the 
trout  himself.  It  is  practised  in  the  summer  months,  when  the 
water  is  low,  and  the  bushes  are  in  leaf,  thereby  giving  the 
Angler  a  hiding  place ;  and  when  it  is  almost  impossible  to 
take  him  by  any  other  method ;  and  although  it  requires 
extreme  care,  and  all  the  ingenuity  of  the  fisher,  it  will 


THE    TROUT.  81 

amply  repay  him,  by  the  size  and  quality  of  the  game,  the 
lai'gest,  oldest,  most  wary  of  the  tribe,  being  often  taken  by 
this  process.     Hofland  gives  the  following  instructions  : 

"  The  Angler  must  be  provided  with  a  14  feet  rod,  with  a 
stiff  top,  and  strong  running  tackle  ;  he  will  seldom  have  to 
use  more  than  a  yard  of  line,  the  bottom  of  which  should  be 
of  strong  silk  worm  gut.  I  recommend  strong  tackle,  because 
in  confined  situations,  overhung  with  wood,  you  will  not  have 
room  to  play  your  fish,  but  must  hold  him  tight  and  depend 
on  the  strength  of  your  tackle. 

"  The  size  of  your  hook  must  depend  upon  the  size  of  the 
fly,  from  No.  7  to  9  for  small  flies  and  grubs,  and  for  beetles 
No.  4  or  5.  For  bush-fishmg,  you  should  be  provided  with 
well  scoured  brandlings  and  red  worms,  cad-baits,*  clock- 
baits,  earth-grubs,  beetles,  grasshoppers,  and  a  horn  of  flies ; 
or  at  least  as  many  of  the  above  as  you  can  procure. 

"  Great  caution  is  necessary  in  using  your  rod  and  line,  for 
if  there  are   few  bushes  or  brambles  to  conceal  you,  the 

water  must  be  approached  warily,  as  the  large  trout  often  lie  "'?"^gj3     \ 

near  the  surface,  and  if  you  are  once  seen  they  will  fly  from 
you.  If  the  water  should  be  deep,  dark,  and  overhung  with 
thick  foliage,  so  that  you  can  scarcely  find  an  open  space  for 
your  bait,  your  line  must  be  shortened  to  half  a  yard,  and 
sometimes  less. 

"  If  your  flies  are  small,  use  two  of  them  at  once,  as  they 
frequently  fall  in  the  water  in  couples.  When  daping  with  the 
fly,  if  you  see  your  fish,  drop  the  fly  gently  on  the  water 
about  a  foot  before  him,  and  if  you  are  not  seen,  he  will 
eagerly  take  it.  When  your  fish  is  struck,  do  not  allow  him 
to  get  his  head  down,  for  fear  of  roots  and  weeds,  but  keep 
him  to  the  top  of  the  water,  when  his  fins  and  strength  will 

*  Cad-baits  and  clock-baits  are  not  known  amongst  Anglers  in  thia 
country  •  the  others  will  be  found  useful  if  they  can  be  procured. 


S.^ 


THE    TROUT. 


— --■ 

1— = 

— 

^^ 

•^x= 

,-• 

be  of  little  use  to  him;  and  in  this  situation,  with  good  tackle, 
you  may  soon  exhaust  him,  and  make  him  your  own  by  a 
landing-net,  the  handle  of  which  should  be  two  yards  long ; 
or  he  may  be  landed  by  a  hook  or  gaff,  with  a  long  handle, 
and  this  in  some  situations,  amidst  close  thorny  brambles,  will 
be  found  more  useful  than  the  landing-net,  which  is  liable  to 
be  caught  in  the  bushes.  When  you  use  the  worm,  caddis 
or  any  other  grub,  you  will  require  a  single  shot.  No.  6*  to 
sink  your  bait,  for  it  cannot  sink  too  slowly,  or  cause  too 
little  disturbance  in  the  water." 

The  North  Country  Angler  says :  "  There  are  some  obser- 
vations I  have  made,  which  the  Angler  may  find  the  benefit 
of;  one  is,  that  although  the  shade  of  trees  and  bushes,  is  much 
longer  and  greater  on  the  south  or  sun  side  of  the  river,  than 
on  the  north  ;  yet  I  always  find  the  most  and  largest  trout  on 
that  side.  I  suppose  the  sun's  being  more  intense  and  warm 
on  the  north  side,  may  occasion  more  flies,  erucas,  and  insects, 
to  creep  upon  those  bushes,  and  consequently  the  more  fish 
will  frequent  them. 

"  When  the  trees  or  bushes  are  very  close,  I  advise  the 
bush  Angler  to  take  a  hedge-bill  or  hatchet,  and  cut  off  two 
or  three  branches  here  and  there,  at  proper  places  and  dis- 
tances, and  so  make  little  convenient  openings,  at  wliich  he 
may  easily  put  in  his  rod  and  line ;  but  tliis  is  to  be  done 
some  time  before  you  come  there  to  fish. 

"  If  you  come  to  a  woody  place,  where  you  have  no  such 
conveniences,  and  where  perhaps  there  is  a  long  pool,  and 
no  angling  with  a  fly,  or  throwing  the  rod,  there  you  may  be 
sure  of  many  large  fish.  For  that  very  reason,  I  have  chosen 
such  places,  though  very  troublesome,  when  I  have  been 

*  It  has  not  been  thought  necessary  to  remark  upon  the  sizes  of  hooks, 
shot,  or  sinkers,  in  speaking  generally,  as  they  should  vary  materially  in 
the  various  waters  where  the  different  sizes  of  fish  are  found,  and  where 
streams  run  more  or  less  rapid. 


THE     TROUT. 


forced  to  creep  under  trees  and  bushes,  dragging  my  rod 
after  me,  with  the  very  top  of  it  in  my  hand,  to  get  near  the 
water;  and  I  have  been  well  paid  for  my  trouble.  Whilst 
you  are  getting  in  your  rod,  throw  a  brandling,  or  grub,  or 
what  you  fish  with,  into  the  water,  which  will  make  the  fish 
take  your  bait  the  more  boldly. 

"  There  are  some  pools  that  have  no  bushes  at  all,  but 
only  hoUow  banks,  in  some  places  under  which  the  great  fish 
wiU  lie  in  the  day  time.  I  have  gone  softly  to  such  places, 
and  have  dropped  in  a  suitable  bait,  close  by  the  bank,  and 
have  presently  had  a  good  fish.  When  I  use  cork,  chamois, 
or  buff,  instead  of  natural  baits.  I  always  drop  them  in  strong 
scented  oil,  in  shade-fishing,  because  the  fish  comes  slowly  to 
the  bait,  and  if  he  does  not  smell  something  like  the  natural 
bait,  he  will  not  take  it,  though  well  imitated." 

Cotton  gives  the  following,  vdth  which  we  conclude  our 
remarks  on  Daping  or  Dibbing.  "  These  are  to  be  angled 
with  a  short  line,  not  much  more  than  half  the  length  of  your 
rod,  if  the  air  be  stiU,  or  with  a  longer,  very  near  or  all  out 
as  long  as  your  rod,  if  you  have  any  wind  to  carry  it  from 
you.  And  this  way  of  fishing  we  call  Daping,  Dabbing,  or 
Dibbing,  wherein  you  are  always  to  have  your  line  flying 
before  you,  up  or  down  the  river,  as  the  wind  serves,  and 
to  angle  as  near  as  you  can  to  the  bank  of  the  same  side 
whereon  you  stand,  though  where  you  see  a  fish  near,  you 
may  guide  your  fly  quick  over  him,  whether  in  the  middle  or 
on  the  contrary  side  ;  and  if  you  are  pretty  weU  out  of  sight, 
either  by  kneeling,  or  the  interposition  of  a  bank  or  bush, 
you  may  be  almost  sure  to  raise  and  take  him  too,  if  it  be 
presently  done ;  the  fish  will  otherwise  peradventure  be  re- 
moved to  some  other  place,  if  it  be  in  stiU  deeps,  where  he 
is  always  on  the  motion,  and  roving  up  and  down  to  look  out 
for  prey,  though  in  a  stream  you  may  always,  almost,  espe- 
cially if  there  be  a  good  store,  find  him  in  the  same  place. 


iifiLz~ 


84 


THE    TROUT. 


Your  line  ought,  in  this  case,  to  be  three  good  hairs  next  the 
hook ;  both  by  reason  you  are  in  this  kind  of  angling  to  ex« 
pect  the  biggest  fish,  and  also  that,  wanting  length  to  give 
him  line  after  he  has  struck,  you  must  be  forced  to  tug  for  it; 
to  which  I  will  add,  tliat  not  an  inch  of  your  line  being  to  be 
suffered  to  touch  the  water  in  Dibbing,  it  may  be  allowed  to 
be  the  stronger." 

Having  given  two  of  the  methods  of  taking  the  trout,  it 
will  be  well  to  introduce  the  reader  to  his  hiding-places.  On 
this  subject,  Hofland  gives  the  best  and  most  minute  infor- 
mation. "  He  is  fond  of  swift,  clear  streams,  running  over 
chalk,  limestone,  or  gravelly  bottoms ;  but  he  is  more  fre- 
quently in  the  eddies  by  the  side  of  the  stream,  than  in  the 
midst  of  it.  A  mill-tail  is  a  favorite  haunt  of  the  trout ;  for 
he  finds  protection  under  the  apron,  which  is  generally  hol- 
low, and  has  the  advantage  of  being  in  the  eddy,  by  the  side 
of  the  mill-race,  awaiting  his  food.  He  delights  also  in  cas- 
cades, tumbling  bays,  or  wiers.  The  larger  ti-out  generally 
have  their  hold  under  roots  of  overhanging  trees,  and  beneath 
hollow  banks  in  the  deepest  parts  of  the  river.  The  junction 
of  little  rapids,  formed  by  water  passing  round  an  obstruction 
in  the  midst  of  the  general  current,  is  a  likely  point  at  which 
to  raise  a  trout ;  also  at  the  roots  of  trees,  or  in  other  places 
where  the  froth  of  the  stream  collects.  All  such  places  are 
favorable  for  sport,  as  insects  follow  the  same  course  as  the 
bubbles,  and  are  there  sought  by  the  fish.  After  sunset,  in 
summer,  the  large  fish  leave  their  haunts,  and  may  be  found 
in  the  sewers,  and  at  the  tails  of  sti'eams ;  and  during  this 
time,  so  long  as  the  Angler  can  see  his  fly  on  the  water,  he 
may  expect  sport." 

Of  Fishing  in  the  Middle,  with  a  Minnow,  or  any  Small 
Fish.  The  rod  used  in  this  kind  of  anghng,  is  from  12  to  16 
feet  in  length,  with  a  stifFer  top  than  that  used  for  fly-fishing, 


THE    TROUT.  85 

and  goes  under  the  name  of  a  bait-rod.  The  smaller,  say  12 
feet,  for  small  wading  streams,  and  the  longer  for  wider  and 
deeper  waters.  Attached  should  be  an  American*  reel, 
holding  from  30  to  50  yards  of  American  laid\  grass,  or  silk 
line,  with  from  two  to  three  yards  of  silk-worm  gut,  termi- 
nating with  a  Limerick  hook,  from  No.  2  to  5,  according  to 
the  size  of  your  bait,  fastened  by  a  loop  as  before  described. 
For  baiting  the  miimow,  pass  your  hook  in  at  the  mouth  and 
out  at  the  giils,  then  in  again  at  the  commencement  of  the 
dorsal  fin  and  out  again  just  beyond,  tying  the  hook  at  each 
end  with  a  piece  of  thin  silk  or  thread.  By  this  method  you 
can,  if  you  use  a  live  minnow,  and  are  very  careful,  keep 
your  bait  animated  for  a  great  length  of  time. 

The  North  Countiy  Angler  gives  a  very  good  mode  of 
baiting  with  the  minnow,  as  follows :  "  I  have  a  gilse-hook 
(No.  3  or  4)  at  the  end  of  the  line,  but  wrapped  no  further 
on  the  end  of  the  shank  than  to  make  it  secure,  and  leave 
more  room  to  bait.  An  inch,  or  very  little  more,  from  the 
shank  end  of  the  gilse-hook,  I  wrap  on  a  strong  hook,  about 
half  the  size  of  the  other.  I  put  the  point  of  the  large  hook 
in  at  the  mouth  of  the  mmnow,  and  out  at  the  tail,  on  the  right 
side  of  the  minnow,  binding  it  half  round  as  I  put  it  in ;  then 
I  put  the  other  hook  in,  below  the  under  chap,  which  keeps 
the  minnow's  mouth  quite  close. 

"  When  I  am  m  no  hurry,  T  tie  the.  tail  and  hook  together, 
with  a  very  small  white  thread ;  before  I  enter  the  little 
hook,  I  draw  up  the  minnow  to  its  full  length,  and  make  it 
fit  the  bending  of  the  gi'eat  hook,  to  make  it  twirl  round 

*  The  imported  reels  are  used  to  a  great  extent,  but  those  of  Ameri- 
can manufacture  are  much  superior,  and  should  be  preferred. 

t  This  description  of  line  has  of  late  years  become  much  used.  The 
grass  is  imported  from  Canton  and  laid  here,  or  taken  in  a  finished 
state,  untwisted,  and  relaid,  which  makes  it  much  stronger  and  firmei 
than  when  first  imported. 


THE    TROUT. 


when  it  is  drawn  in  the  water.  "When  all  is  in  order,  I  take 
the  line  in  my  left  hand,  a  little  above  the  bait,  and  throw  it 
under-hand,  hfting  up  my  right  and  the  rod,  that  the  bait 
may  fall  gently  on  the  water. 

"  I  stand  at  the  very  top  of  the  stream,  as  far  ofl"  as  my 
tackle  will  permit,  and  let  the  bait  drop  in  a  yard  from  the 
middle  of  it ;  I  draw  the  minnow  by  gentle  pulls,  of  about  a 
yard  at  a  time,  across  the  stream,  turning  my  rod  up  the 
water,  within  half  a  yard  of  its  surface,  keeping  my  eye  fixed 
on  the  minnow.  When  a  fish  takes  it,  he  generally  hooks 
himself;  however,  I  give  him  a  smart  stroke,  and,  if  he  does 
not  get  off  then,  I  am  pretty  sure  of  him.  In  this  manner  I 
throw  in  three  or  four  times,  at  the  upper  part  of  a  stream, 
but  never  twice  in  the  same  place,  but  a  yard  lower  every 
cast.  I  always  throw  quite  over  the  stream,  but  let  the  bait 
cross  it  in  a  round,  like  a  semicircle,  about  a  foot  below  the 
surface,  which  two  of  No.  3  or  4  shot,  which  I  always  have 
upon  my  line,  nine  or  ten  inches  from  the  hooks,  will  sink 
it  to.  When  I  am  drawing  the  bait  across  the  stream,  I  keep 
the  top  of  the  rod  within  less  than  a  yard  from  the  water,  and 
draw  it  downwards,  that  the  bait  may  be  at  a  greater  distance 
from  me,  and  the  first  thing  that  the  fish  will  see.  Some- 
times I  can  see  the  fish  before  he  takes  tlie  bait,  and  then  I 
give  in  the  rod  a  little,  that  the  minnow  may,  as  it  were, 
meet  him  half-way ;  but  if  I  think  he  is  shy,  I  pull  it  away, 
and  do  not  throw  it  in  again  till  he  has  got  to  his  feeding 
place. 

''  The  twirling  of  the  minnow  is  the  beauty  of  this  kind  of 
angling,  the  fish  seeing  it  a  greater  distance,  and  fancying  it 
is  making  all  the  haste  it  can  to  escape  from  them ;  and  they 
make  the  same  haste  to  catch  it." 

Hofland  has  the  following :  "  The  minnow  rod  should  be 
of  bamboo  cane,  at  least  16  feet  long,  with  a  tolerable  stiff 
top ;  and  20  or  25  yards  of  line,  something  stronger  than 


i 


THE    TROUT.  87 

your  fly-line,  will  be  sufficient.  Some  Anglers  use  a  rod  20 
feet  long.  To  enable  them  to  fish  a  wide  stream,  this  length 
of  rod  is  necessary,  as  the  line,  in  spinning  the  minnow,  is 
somewhat  short  of  the  rod ;  if  you  wade  the  stream,  a  rod  of 
12  feet  will  be  long  enough. 

"  For  Baiting  with  the  Minnow.  In  the  first  place,  pro- 
cure a  piece  of  brass  wire,  about  three  inches  long ;  one  end 
of  which  must  be  hammered  into  a  small  loop,  and  the  other 
end  flattened  with  a  hammer,  and  sharpened  in  the  shape  of 
a  spear  head.  This  must  be  drawn  through  a  tapering  piece 
of  lead,*  cast  for  the  purpose.  Wires  of  this  description  may 
be  kept  by  you,  of  different  lengths,  to  suit  the  size  of  the 
bait-fish  used. 

"  Enter  the  spear  end  of  the  leaded  wire  at  the  mouth  of 
the  minnow,  and  bring  it  out  at  the  fork  of  the  tail.  Then 
take  a  triangular  hook,  formed  by  tying  together  three  No.  8 
or  9  hooks  on  a  piece  of  strong  gut,  one  inch  and  a  quarter 
long,  with  a  small  loop  on  the  end.  Now,  with  a  baiting- 
needle,  enter  the  point  under  the  back  fin  of  the  bait,  when 
one  of  the  triangular  hooks  will  enter  the  bait  under  the  back 
fin,  the  other  two  will  lie  by  its  sides,  and  the  loop  of  the 
gut  will  be  even  with  the  brass  loop  in  the  minnow's  mouth. 

"  You  must  now  prepare  a  minnow-trace,  of  three  yards  of 
gut,  at.one  end  of  which  tie  on  a  Limerick  hook  No.  9  ;  12 
inches  above  this,  place  a  fine  swivel,  and  24  inches  higher 
up  another  swivel,  and  your  trace  is  ready.  Next,  enter  the 
hook  at  the  end  of  your  trace,  at  the  back  of  the  bait's  head, 
and  pass  it  through  the  two  loops  now  in  its  mouth,  and 
bring  it  out  under  the  lips,  when  the  bait's  mouth  will  be 
closed.  Then,  bend  gently  the  spear  of  brass  wire,  so  as  to 
gently  curve  the  tail  of  the  minnow,  and  then  tie  the  tail  fast  to 
the  wire  with  white  tlu-ead,  and  you  are  ready  for  the  stream." 

*  These  articles  can  be  purchased  at  the  tackle  stores,  of  different 
sizes  and  descriptions. 


88  THETROUT. 

The  following  is  from  Walton,  who  by  many  writers  was 
considered  the  best  minnow  Angler  in  England :  "  And  of 
these  minnows,  first  you  are  to  know,  that  the  biggest  size  is 
not  the  best,  and  next,  that  the  middle  size  and  the  whitest 
are  the  best;  and  then  you  are  to  know,  that  your  minnow 
must  be  put  on  your  hook,  that  it  must  turn  round  when  it  is 
drawn  against  the  stream ;  and  that  it  may  turn  nimbly,  you 
must  put  on  a  big  sized  hook,  as  I  shall  now  direct  you, 
which  is  this  :  put  your  hook  in  at  his  mouth  and  out  at  his 
gill;  then  having  drawn  your  hook  two  or  three  inches  be- 
yond or  through  his  gill,  put  it  again  through  his  mouth,  and 
the  point  or  beard  out  at  his  tail ;  and  then  tie  the  hook  and 
his  tail  about  very  neatly,  with  a  white  thread,  which  w^ill 
make  it  apter  to  turn  quick  in  the  water ;  that  done,  pull 
back  that  part  of  your  line  which  was  slack  when  you  did  put 
your  hook  into  the  minnow  the  second  time  ;  I  say,  pull  that 
part  of  your  line  back  so  that  it  shall  fasten  the  head,  so  that 
the  body  of  the  minnow  shall  be  almost  straight*  on  your 
hook ;  this  done,  try  how  it  will  turn  by  drawing  it  across 
the  water,  against  a  stream ;  and  if  it  do  not  turn  nimbly, 
then  turn  the  tail  a  little  to  the  right  or  left  hand,  and  try 
again  till  it  turn  quick ;  for  if  not,  you  are  in  danger  to  catch 
nothing;  for  know,  that  it  is  impossible  for  a  minnow  to  turn 
too  quick." 

The  Minnow  is  beautifully  and  faithfully  imitated  in 
England,  and  imported  into  this  country,  and  w^ill  be  found  a 
valuable  addition  to  the  Angler's  stock  of  artificial  baits.t 

Although  in  this  and  the  following  methods,  the  float  is 
not  mentioned  as  an  article  of  tackle,  it  is  much  xiied  by 

*  Rennie,  in  his  notes  on  Walton,  says  :  "  I  have  never  been  able  ta 
cause  a  minnow  to  swim  well  in  trolling,  unless  the  tail  was  bent  nearly 
to  a  semicircle.'' 

t  Smearing  the  artificial  baits  with  fish-slime  is  recommended  by 
Rennie. 


THE    TROUT.  89 

Anglers  generally.  It  should  be  of  small  size,  and  made  of 
light  cork,  or  quills,  suited  to  the  weight  of  your  shot  and  the 
current  of  the  stream. 

Of  Bottom  or  Worm- Fishing.  This  is,  and  has  been  from 
the  earliest  periods,  the  standard  mode  of  trout  angling.  It 
is  practised  principally  at  the  opening  and  closing  of  the  sea- 
son by  Anglers  generally;  but  by  some  of  our  piscatorial 
friends,  who  adjure  fly-fishing,  from  the  time  the  trees  bud, 
until  autumn  scatters  their  leaves  upon  the  ground. 

The  rod  generally  used  is  from  12  to  15  feet  in  length,  for 
small  streams,  and  from  15  to  20  feet  (according  to  circum- 
stances) for  the  larger.  The  reel,  and  other  appurtenances, 
should  be  similar  to  that  described  for  minnow-fishing. 

Hofland  says:  "  For  worm-fishing,  your  rod  should  be  of 
bamboo  cane,  and  from  16  to  20  feet  long,  and  the  line  gene- 
rally something  shorter  than  the  rod  ;  but  it  may  be  shortened 
or  lengthened,  according  to  circumstances,  by  your  reel.  The 
best  worms  for  a  large  trout  are  the  lob-worm  and  the  marsh- 
worm,  but  with  many  Anglers  the  brandling  is  a  great 
favorite. 

"  The  method  of  casting  your  line  will  depend  upon  the 
nature  of  the  water;  but  as  a  general  rule  I  may  say,  keep 
the  point  of  your  rod,  as  nearly  as  possible,  perpendicular  to 
your  bait,  steadily  following  it,  as  the  bait  drags  along  the  bot- 
tom, with  the  point  of  your  rod,  and  when  you  feel  a  bite,  let 
the  fish  turn  before  you  strike.  Unless  the  stream  be  rapid 
or  deep,  a  single  shot  (No.  4)  will  be  sufficient  to  sink  your 
worm ;  but  in  a  deep  heavy  curi-ent,  two  or  three  more  of 
the  same  size  will  be  required.  In  fishing  across  a  stream 
with  a  single  hair,  and  a  small  red-worm,  run,  from  your 
reel,  line  to  the  length  of  the  rod,  and,  taking  hold  of  the  line 
about  12  inches  above  the  bait,  with  your  left  hand  draw  it 
towards  you  till  the  line  tightens,  and  the  top  of  the  rod 


DO 


THE    TROUT. 


bends.  Holding  the  rod  fix-mly  in  the  right  hand,  let  go  the 
line,  and  with  a  little  practice  you  will  find  the  bait  drop 
lightly  into  the  water  at  the  extremity  of  the  rod  and  line; 
and  then,  either  draw  your  line  gently  across  the  water,  or 
carry  your  bait  down  the  stream,  as  above  directed.  The 
eddy  by  the  side  of  a  mill-tail,  or  flood-gate,  or  water-fall,  is 
a  good  place  to  try  the  lob-worm.  The  deep  holes  near 
overhanging  trees  and  old  stumps,  and  those  parts  of  the  river 
where  the  stream  has  undermined  the  banks,  are  also  the 
haunts  of  the  largest  trout. 

"  When  the  water  is  discolored  by  rain,  your  tackle  may 
be  strong,  and  you  will  not  easily  be  seen  by  the  fish;  but  if 
the  water  be  clear,  and  the  day  bright,  your  only  chance  for 
taking  trout  with  the  worm,  vnU  be  by  using  fine  tackle,  and 
keeping  completely  out  of  sight. 

"  The  lob-worm  is  also  used,  without  any  shot  on  the  line, 
after  sunset  in  summer,  by  drawing  it  on  the  top  of  the  water, 
across  a  sharp  mill-stream,  when  the  trout  will  rise  and  take 
the  bait  at  the  top  of  the  water,  as  they  would  the  fly;  and 
in  this  manner  very  large  trout  are  frequently  taken. 

"  The  gentle,  or  maggot,  is  a  good  bait  for  a  trout,  during 
the  months  of  June,  July,  and  August,  and  may  be  used,  with 
a  small  float,  carrying  one  or  two  shot-corns,  in  miU-dams, 
ponds,  and  other  still  waters,  allowing  your  bait  to  nearly 
touch  the  ground. 

"  I  shall  now  describe  a  method  of  bottom-fishing,  with  a 
bait  which  I  have  found,  in  certain  situations  and  seasons, 
more  successful  than  any  other.  The  same  tackle  may  be 
used  as  before  described  for  the  gentle,  i.  e.  a  fine  gut  bot- 
tom, with  hook  No.  10,  and  a  small  quill  float,  carry mg  one 
or  two  small  shot-corns. 

"  Procure  a  wide-necked  bottle,  and  fill  it  with  blue 
bottle-flies,  or  the  flies  caught  on  newly  scattered  cow  or 
horse-dung,  and  with  two  of  these  flies  bait  your  hook,  and 


THE    TROUT.  91 

let  it  nearly  touch  the  ground.  In  this  manner  I  have  caught 
many  fine  trout  in  mill-dams,  ponds,  and  deep  quiet  waters, 
during  July  and  August,  when  not  a  single  fish  would  rise  at 
any  kind  of  ai'tificial  fly  which  could  be  offered.  I  have  never 
seen  the  method  described  by  any  author  on  the  subject,  but 
I  can  with  confidence  recommend  it  to  my  brothers  of  the 
angle,  at  those  times  when  the  usual  baits  fail  to  procure  a 
dish  of  fish. 

"  When  you  have  struck  a  good  fish,  keep  him  as  near 
the  top  of  the  water  as  possible,  and  carry  him  down  the 
stream  above  the  weeds,  and,  if  you  succeed  in  getting  him 
into  clear  water,  with  a  little  care  he  is  your  own." 

Cotton  gives  the  following  method  of  angling  by  the  hand 
with  a  ground  bait:  "  And  by  much  the  best  of  all  other,  is 
with  a  line  full  as  long,  or  a  yard  longer  than  your  rod ;  with 
no  more  than  one  hair*  next  the  hook,  and  for  two  or  three 
lengths  above  it;  and  no  more  than  one  small  pellet  of  shot 
for  your  plumb  ;  your  hook  Httle ;  your  worms  of  the  smaller 
brandlings,  very  well  scoured;  and  only  one  upon  your  hook 
at  a  time,  which  is  thus  to  be  baited :  The  point  of  your 
hook  is  to  be  put  in  at  the  very  tag  of  his  tail,  and  run  up  his 
body  quite  over  all  the  arming,  and  still  stripped  on  an  inch 
at  least  upon  the  hair;  the  head  remaining  part  hanging 
downward.  And  with  this  line  and  hook,  thus  baited,  you 
are  evermore  to  angle  in  the  streams,  always  in  a  clear  rather 
than  a  troubled  water,  and  always  up  the  river,  still  casting 
out  your  worm  before  you  with  a  light  one-handed  rod,  like 
an  artificial  fly,  where  it  will  be  taken,  sometimes  at  the  top, 
or  within  a  very  little  of  the  superficies  of  the  water,  and 
almost  always  before  that  light  plumb  can  sink  it  to  the  bot- 
tom ;  both  by  reason  of  the  stream,  and  also  that  you  must 
always  keep  your  worm  in  motion  by  drawing  still  back 

*  If  the  American  Angler  prefer  any  of  Walton's  or  Cotton's  instruc- 
tions, lie  should  in  all  cases  use  fine  gut,  instead  of  hair  as  described. 


32  THETROUT. 

towards  you,  as  if  you  were  angling  with  a  fly.  And  believe 
me,  whoever  will  try,  shall  find  this  the  best  way  of  all  others 
to  angle  with  a  worm,  in  a  bright  water  especially ;  but  then 
his  rod  must  be  veiy  light  and  pliant,  and  very  true  and  finely 
made,  which,-  with  a  skilful  hand  will  do  wonders,  and  in  a 
clear  stream  is  undoubtedly  the  best  way  of  angling  for  a 
trout  or  grayling,  with  a  Worm,  by  many  degrees,  that  any 
man  can  make  choice  of,  and  of  most  ease  and  delight  to  the 
Angler.  To  which  let  me  add,  that  if  the  Angler  be  of  a 
constitution  that  will  suffer  him  to  wade,  and  will  slip  into 
the  tail  of  a  stream,  to  the  calf  of  the  leg  or  the  knee,  and  so 
keep  off  the  bank,  he  shall  almost  take  what  fish  he  pleases." 

The  following  pertinent  remarks  for  clear  weather,  from 
Blaine,  should  have  place  in  the  memory  of  every  lover  of 
trout  angling : 

"Trout  are  to  be  taken  in  clear  weather,  when  they  will 
not  touch  either  minnow  or  fly ;  and  there  is  certainly  more 
art  and  sportsmanship  in  fishing  with  the  worm  at  that  time, 
than  some  people  imagine  or  acknowledge.  When  to  the 
advantage  of  bright  weather  are  added  those  of  clear  and 
shallow  streams,  much  artifice  must  be  employed.  Your 
tackle  very  fine,  your  hook  small,  (No.  5,  6,  or  7,)  and  your 
baits  well  scoured  and  lively.  A  wheel  will  enable  you  to 
vary  the  length  of  your  line  as  occasion  dictates ;  and  though 
in  general  it  must  be  as  long  or  longer  than  your  rod,  yet 
where  there  is  wood,  &c.  &c.,  you  may  by  shortening  it,  get 
at  the  holes,  and  still  contrive  to  keep  out  of  sight,  for  com- 
pletely so  to  be  must  never  be  forgotten — kneel,  stoop  or 
stand — out  of  sight  you  must  be ;  and  then  if  you  can  lightly 
and  neatly  drop  in  a  lively  brandling,  near  the  likely  holds  or 
haunts  in  a  strong  stream,  especially  near  the  top  of  it,  let  the 
sun  shine  ever  so  bright,  be  the  wind  rough  or  calm,  and  the 
water  ever  so  clear,  you  will  kill  fish  when  they  are  not  to  be 
taken  by  any  other  mode." 


THETROUT.  93 

Franks  gives  the  following  pleasant  mode  of  killing  a  trout 
which  is  well  worthy  of  repetition : 

"  And  now,  Theophilus,  I  must  reprove  your  precipitancy, 
because  a  great  error  in  young  Anglers ;  be  mindful,  there- 
fore, to  observe  directions  in  handling  and  managing  your 
rod  and  line,  and  cautiously  keeping  out  of  sight;  all  of  which 
precautions  are  requisite  accomplishments,  which  of  necessity 
ought  to  be  understood  by  every  ingenious  Angler ;  and  so 
is  that  secret  of  striking,  which  should  never  be  used  with 
violence,  because  by  a  moderate  touch,  and  a  slender  pro- 
portion of  strength,  the  artist  for  the  most  part  hath  best 
success.  Another  caution  you  must  take  along  with  you ; 
I  mean  when  you  observe  game  to  make  out,  that  is,  when 
he  bolts,  or  when  he  launcheth  himself  to  the  utmost  extent 
of  your  rod  and  line,  which  a  well-fed  fish  at  all  times,  fre- 
quently attempts,  upon  the  least  advantage  he  gains  of  the 
Angler;  be  mindful,  therefore,  to  throw  him  line  enough,  if, 
provided,  you  purpose  to  see  his  destruction ;  yet  with  this 
caution,  that  you  be  not  too  liberal.  On  the  other  hand,  too 
straight  a  line  brings  equal  hazard,  so  that  to  poise  your  fish 
and  your  foresight  together,  as  by  keeping  one  eye  at  the 
point  of  your  rod,  and  the  other  be  sure  you  direct  on  your 
game,  wliich  comes  nearest  the  mediums  of  art,  and  the  rules 
and  rudiments  of  your  precedent  directions.  But  this  great 
round  may  be  easily  solved,  for  if  when  you  discover  your 
fish  fag  his  fins,  you  may  rationally  conclude  he  then  struggles 
with  death,  and  then  is  your  time  to  triffle  him  on  shore  on 
some  smooth  shelf  of  sand,  where  you  may  boldly  land  him, 
before  his  scales  encumber  the  soil. 

"  Lest  precipitancy  spoil  sport,  I'll  preponder  my  rudi- 
ments and  prognosticate,  here's  a  fish,  or  something  like  it, 
a  fair  hansel  for  a  foolish  fisher.  This  capering,  for  aught  I 
know,  may  cost  him  his  life,  for  I  resolve  to  hold  his  nose 
to  the  grindstone :  dance  on  and  die,  that  is  the  way  to  your 


94 


THE    TROUT. 


■^t 

1^^ 

-■ 

=B 



■ 

-- 





silent  sepulchre,  for  upon  that  silty,  gravelly,  shelf  of  sand  I 
resolve  to  land  him,  or  lose  all  I  have.  And  now  I  fancy  him 
weary  of  life,  as  aged  people  that  are  weary  of  infirmities,  yet 
I  want  courage  to  encounter  him,  lest  fearing  to  lose  him, 
which  if  I  do  I  impair  my  reputation.  However,  here  is 
nobody  but  trees  to  reprove  me,  except  these  I'ocks,  and 
they  tell  no  tales.  Well,  then,  as  he  wants  no  agility  to 
evade  me,  I'll  endeavor  with  activity  to  approach  him,  so 
that  the  difference  between  us  will  be  only  this,  that  he  covets 
acquaintance  with  but  one  element,  and  I  would  compel  him 
to  examine  another.  Now  he  runs  to  divert  me  or  himself, 
but  I  must  invite  him  nearer  home,  for  I  fancy  none  such 
distance. 

"  Though  his  fins  fag,  and  his  tail  wriggles,  his  strength 
declines,  his  gills  look  languid,  and  his  mettle  declineth — all 
of  which  interpret  tokens  of  submission — still,  the  best  news 
I  bring  him  is  summons  of  death.  Yet,  let  not  my  rashness 
pre-engage  me  to  the  loss  of  my  game,  for,  to  neglect  my  ru- 
diments is  to  ruin  my  design,  which  in  plain  terms,  is  the 
ruin  of  this  resolute  fish,  who,  seemingly,  now  measures  and 
mingles  his  proportion  with  more  than  one  element,  and, 
doomed  to  a  trance,  he  prostrates  himself  on  the  surface  of 
the  calms,  dead  to  my  apprehension,  save  only  I  want  credit 
to  believe  him  dead,  when,  calling  to  mind  my  former  pre- 
cipitancy, that  invited  me  to  a  loss,  and  so  this  adventure  may 
prove,  if  I  look  not  well  about  me,  to  land  and  strand  him  on 
that  shelf  of  eand,  where  I  resolve  with  my  rod  to  survey  his 
dimensions.  Welcome  on  shore,  my  languisliing  combatant, 
if  only  to  entertain  my  friend  Arnoldus." 

The  following  beautiful  lines  from  the  poet  and  fisherman 
Gay,  "  run  "  directly  from  the  "  reel "  of  his  imagination, 
and  from  the  crystal  "  waters  "  of  the  fount  of  inspiration; 
every  "  line  "  "  plumbed  "  to  the  nicety  of  a  "  hair,^'  the 
"  point  "  needs  but  the  aid  of  the  "Jli/  "  press  of  the  printer 


THE    TROUT, 


9« 


and  the  "  cast "  of  the  founder,  to  stereotype  on,  or  cause  it 
to  "  worm'^  itself  into,  the  "  gentle  "  affections  of  every  true 
piscatorial  sportsman,  and  make  it  ever  ^' float "  around  the 
"  net  "-work  of  his  memory,  giving  him  "  buoyancy "  of 
spirit,  a  "full  length  "  of  courage,  and  a  "  mess  "  of  patience, 
sufficient  to  make  him  master  of  his  "  rod." 


"  He  lifts  his  silver  gills  above  the  flood. 
And  greedily  sucks  in  th'  unfaithful  food, 
Then  downward  plunges  with  the  fraudful  prey. 
And  bears  with  joy  the  little  spoil  away ; 
Soon,  in  smart  pain,  he  feels  the  dire  mistake, 
Lashes  the  wave,  and  beats  the  foamy  lake 
With  sudden  rage  he  now  aloft  appears. 
And  in  his  eye  convulsive  anguish  bears  ; 
And  now  again,  impatient  of  the  wound, 
He  rolls,  and  writhes  his  straining  body  round, 
Then  headlong  shoots  beneath  the  dashing  tide. 
The  trembling  fins  the  boiling  wave  divide : 
Now  hope  exalts  the  fisher's  beating  heart. 
Now,  he  turns  pale,  and  fears  his  dubious  art ; 
He  views  the  trembling  fish  with  longing  eyes. 
While  the  line  stretches  with  the  unwieldly  prize; 
Each  motion  humors  with  his  steady  hands. 
And  one  slight  hair  the  mighty  bulk  commands ; 
Till  tired  at  last,  despoil'd  of  all  his  strength. 
The  game  athwart  the  stream  unfolds  his  length ; 
He  now,  with  pleasure,  views  the  gasping  prize 
Gnash  his  sharp  teeth,  and  roll  his  blood-shot  eyes ; 
Then  draws  him  to  the  shore,  with  artful  care, 
And  lifts  his  nostrils  in  the  sichening  air ; 
Upon  the  burden'd  stream  he  floating  lies, 
Stretches  his  quivering  fins,  and  gasping  dies." 

How  to  Cook  a  Trout.  As  the  sportsman,  after  a  few 
aours  diversion  and  toil,  often  needs  a  little  refreshment,  and 
as  a  meal  of  his  own  providing  is  generally  ate  with  more  zest 
and  satisfaction,  he  should  be  possessed  of  the  proper  inform 
ation,  either  to  prepare,  or  direct  the  preparation,  of  his  re 


96  THE    TROUT. 

past.  Barker,  before  spoken  of,  gives  the  following  approv 
ed  methods,  which  will  be  found  sufficiently  epicurean  to 
tickle  the  palate  of  the  most  dainty,  or  to  bring  into  requisi 
tiou  the  talent  of  a  most  finished  Parisian  cook. 

"  We  must  have  one  dish  of  broyled  trouts;  when  the  en- 
trails are  taken  out,  you  must  cut  them  across  the  side  ;  being 
washed  clean,  you  must  take  some  sweet  herbs,  thyme,  sweet 
marjoram,  and  parsley,  chopped  small,  the  trouts  being  cut 
somewhat  thick,  and  fill  the  cuts  full  with  the  chopped  herbs  ; 
then  make  your  gridiron  fit  to  put  them  on,  being  well  cooled 
with  rough-suet ;  then  lay  the  trouts  on  a  charcc:J  fire,  and 
baste  them  with  fresh  butter  until  you  think  they  are  well 
broyled.  The  sauce  must  be  butter  and  vinegar,  and  the 
yolk  of  an  egg  beaten ;  then  beat  it  altogether,  and  put  it  on 
the  fish  for  the  service. 

"  The  best  dish  of  stewed  fish  that  ever  I  heard  com- 
mended of  the  English,  was  dressed  in  this  way :  first,  they 
were  broyled  on  a  charcoal  fire,  being  cut  on  the  sides  as 
fried  trouts;  then  the  stew-pan  was  taken,  and  set  on  a 
chafing-dish  of  coles ;  there  was  put  mto  the  stew-pan  half  a 
pound  of  sweet  butter,  one  pennyworth  of  beaten  cinnamon, 
a  little  vinegar ;  when  all  was  melted,  the  fish  was  put  into 
the  pan,  and  covered  with  a  covering-plate,  so  kept  stewing 
half  an  hour ;  being  turned,  then  taken  out  of  the  stew-pan 
and  dished ;  be  sure  to  beat  your  sauce  before  you  put  it  on 
your  fish;  then  squeeze  a  lemon  on  your  fish :  it  was  the  best 
dish  of  fish  that  ever  I  heard  commended  by  noblemen  and 
gentlemen.  This  is  our  English  fashion.  The  Italian,  he 
stews  upon  a  chafing-dish  of  coles,  with  white  wine,  cloves, 
and  mace,  nutmegs  sliced,  and  a  little  ginger ;  you  must  un- 
derstand, when  this  fish  is  stew^ed,  the  same  liquor  the  fish 
stewed  iu  must  be  beaten  with  some  sweet  butter  and  the 
juice  of  a  lemon  before  it  is  dished  for  the  service. 

"  The  French  doth  add  to  this  a  slice  or  two  of  bacou. 


THE    TROUT. 


97 


Though  I  have  been  no  traveller,  I  may  speak  of  it,  for  I  have 
been  admitted  into  the  most  ambassadors'  kitchens  that  have 
come  into  England  this  forty  years,  and  do  wait  on  them  stiU, 
at  the  Lord  Protector's  charge,  and  I  am  duly  paid  for  it ; 
sometimes  I  see  slovenly  scullions  abuse  good  fish  most 
grossly. 

"  We  must  have  a  trout-pie  to  eat  hot,  and  another  to  eat 
cold :  the  first  thing  you  must  gain  must  be  a  peck  of  the 
best  wheaten  flour,  two  pounds  of  butter,  two  quarts  of  milk, 
new  from  the  cow,  half  a  dozen  of  eggs  to  make  the  paste. 
Where  I  was  born  there  is  not  a  girl  of  ten  years  of  age,  but 
can  make  a  pie.  For  one  pie,  the  trouts  shall  be  opened,  and 
the  guts  taken  out,  and  cleaned,  and  washed ;  seasoned  with 
pepper  and  salt,  then  laid  in  the  pie ;  half  a  pound  of  currants 
put  among  the  fish,  with  a  pound  of  sweet  butter  cut  in 
pieces  and  set  on  the  fish,  so  close  it  up ;  when  it  is  baked 
and  come  out  of  the  oven,  pour  into  the  pie  three  or  four 
spoonsfuU  of  claret  wine,  so  dish  it  up  and  send  it  to  the  table. 
These  trouts  shall  cut  close  and  moist. 

"  For  the  other  pie,  the  trouts  shall  be  boyled  a  little ;  it 
will  make  the  fish  rise,  and  eat  more  crisp ;  season  them  with 
pepper  and  salt,  and  lay  them  in  the  pie;  you  must  put 
more  butter  in  this  pie  than  the  other,  for  this  will  keep,  and 
must  be  filled  up  with  butter  when  it  cometh  forth  of  the 
oven." 

A  common  mode  of  cooking  the  trout,  is  by  cutting  them, 
as  before  directed  by  Barker,  seasoning  them  well  with  salt 
and  pepper,  dredging  them  with  oat  meal  or  wheat  flour,  and 
frying  them  in  butter. 

Another  method  is  to  cut  them  in  two,  sprinkle  with  a 
small  quantity  of  Cayenne  pepper,  a  due  proportion  of  salt, 
and  broil  them. 

Of  the  Artificial  Fly.     The  idea  of  having  flies  for  every 


S^^»>v^ 


98 


THE    TROUT. 


/' 


I 

^-.N_ 

' 



jy^-^ 

- — -. 

month  in  the  year,  is  long  since  exploded,  and  although  some 
authors  in  England  still  arrange  them  according  to  the  months, 
it  is  found  that  they  cannot  be  depended  upon  as  a  certainty. 
Walton,  one  of  the  first  authors  who  arranged  them  in  this 
manner,  in  his  preface  has  these  remarks :  "  That  whereas 
it  is  said  by  many,  that  in  fly-fishing  for  trout,  the  Angler 
must  observe  his  twelve  several  flies  for  the  twelve  months 
of  the  year;  I  say,  he  that  follows  that  rule  shall  be  as  sure 
to  catch  fish,  and  be  as  wise  as  he  that  makes  hay  by  the  fair 
days  in  an  almanac,  and  no  surer ;  for  those  very  flies  that 
used  to  appear  about  and  on  the  water  in  one  month  of  the 
year,  may,  the  following  year,  come  almost  a  month  sooner 
or  later,  as  the  same  year  proves  colder  or  hotter ;  but  for 
the  generality,  three  or  four  flies,  neatly  and  rightly  made, 
and  not  too  big,  serve  for  a  trout  in  most  rivers  all  the  sum- 
mer ;  and  for  winter,  fly-fishing  is  as  useful  as  an  almanac  out 
of  date." 

Barker  gives  his  instructions  in  his  favorite  vein,  thus : 

"  A  brother  of  the  angle  must  always  be  sped 
With  three  black  Palmers,  and  also  three  red ; 
And  all  made  with  hackles.    In  a  cloudy  day 
Or  in  windy  weather,  angle  you  may. 

"  But  morning  and  evening,  if  the  day  be  bright ; 
And  the  chief  point  of  all  is  to  keep  out  of  sight. 
'  In  the  month  of  May,  none  but  the  May-fly, 
For  every  month  one,'  is  a  pitiful  lie. 

"  The  hawthorn-fly  must  be  very  small ; 
And  the  sandy  hog's-hair  is,  sure,  best  of  all 
(For  the  mallard-wing  May-fly,  and  peacock's  train, 
Win  look  like  the  flesh-fly)  to  kill  trout  amain. 

«  The  oak-fly*  is  good  if  it  have  a  brown  wing, 
So  is  the  grasshopper,  that  in  July  doth  sing ; 

*  The  oak-fly  is  also  known  in  England  by  the  names  of  the  asb-flf, 
the  woodcock  fly,  and  the  cannon,  or  downhill-fly. 


THE    TROUT.  39 

With  a  green  body  make  him,  on  a  middle  sized  hook, 
But  when  you  have  catch'd  fish,  then  play  the  good  cook. 

"  Once  more,  my  good  brother,  I'll  speak  in  thy  ear ; 
Hog's,  red  cow's,  and  bear's  wool  to  float  best  appear ; 
And  so  doth  your  fur,  if  it  rightly  fall ; 
But  always  remember,  make  two,  and  make  all." 

It  would  be  equally  absurd  to  name  any  precise  descrip- 
tion of  fly  for  any  particular  month  in  this  country,  and  per- 
haps more  so,  as  our  weather  is  more  changeable  than  that 
of  any  part  of  Europe. 

There  are  many  kinds  of  flies  used  both  here  and  in  Eng- 
land, but  two  descriptions  have  the  preference,  and  accom- 
pany all  Anglers  as  the  universal  fly,  and  are  consequently 
necessary  requisites  to  a  well  arranged  Fly- Angler's  estab- 
lishment. The  Red  Hackle,  or  Soldier  Palmer,  and  the 
Black  Hackle,  or  Black  Palmer,  are  "the  Flies. ^^  They  are 
both  made  in  a  variety  of  ways,  with  difierent  colored  bodies, 
but  with  the  same  kind  of  hackle  or  legs.  The  most  killing 
kind  of  the  red  hackle  is  made  with  a  red  worsted  or  mohair 
body,  wound  around  with  gold  twist.  The  black  hackle  is 
used  more  particularly  in  very  bright  days,  when  the  sun 
shines  unobscured  by  clouds.  It  is  made  with  black  worsted 
body,  and  a  black  cock's  hackle  for  legs ;  the  body  is  some- 
times w^ound  with  silver  twist,  which  in  many  streams,  at 
certain  times,  offers  additional  attractions  to  the  dainty  sub- 
ject of  our  discourse.  They  are  both  made  in  various  ways 
and  of  various  sizes,  and  are  known  under  different  names. 
The  body  of  the  red  hackle  is  sometimes  made  with  crimson, 
black,  yellow,  green,  and  various  other  hues  of  worsted,  for 
bodies;  the  black,  also,  with  red,  white,  green,  and  other 
colors  intermingled.  They  are  also  made  under  different 
names  with  and  without  wings. 

The  White  HackCe,  or  Miller,  is  a  good  fly  in  dark,  low- 
ering days.     It  is  made  with  a  white  worsted  body,  and 


100 


THE    TROUT. 


white  dog's  hair  for  legs,  and  is  sometimes  varied  wdth  a  dark 
colored  or  gold  twist ;  also,  sometimes  with  wings  and  some- 
times without.  The  Green  Drake  is  also  considered  a  good 
fly  in  some  streams.  It  is  made  with  a  yellow  floss  silk  or 
worsted  body,  wound  with  a  red  or  ginger  hackle  for  legs, 
and  dark  yellow  or  light  green  parrot  feather  for  wings. 

As  there  are  no  particular  names  given  to  the  different 
varieties  of  flies  with  us,  the  following  list  from  Hofland,  will 
be  of  assistance  to  the  American  fly-fisher,  in  making  up  his 
book  of  flies. 

The  Chantrey.  It  takes  its  name  from  being  a  favorite 
of  Sir  Francis  Chantrey,  the  celebrated  sculptor.  Body, 
copper-colored  peacock's  herl,  ribbed  with  gold  twist ;  legs, 
a  black  hackle ;  wings,  partridge  or  brown  hen's  feather,  or 
pheasant's  tail.     Hook  No.  9  or  10. 

Hofland^ s  Fancy.  Body,  reddish,  dark  brown  silk ;  legs, 
red  hackle ;  wings,  woodcock's  wing ;  tail,  two  or  three 
strands  of  red  hackle.     Hook  No.  10. 

March  Brown,  also  called  the  Dun  Drake.  Body,  fur  of 
the  hare's  ear,  ribbed  with  olive  silk ;  legs,  partridge  hackle; 
wings,  tail  feather  of  the  partridge;  tail,  two  or  three  strands 
of  the  partridge  hackle      Hook  No.  8  or  9. 

Blue  Dun.  Body,  dubbed  with  water-rat's  fur,  and  rib- 
bed with  yellow  silk ;  legs,  a  dun  hen's  hackle ;  wings  from 
the  feather  of  the  starhng's  wing ;  tail,  two  strands  of  a  griz- 
zle cock's  hackle.     Hook  No.  10. 

Carshalton.  Body,  black  silk,  ribbed  with  silver  twist, 
legs,  a  dark  grizzle  hackle ;  wings,  the  dark  feather  of  the 
starling's  wing,  made  spare  and  short.     Hook  No.  10. 

Carshalton  Cocktail.     A  dun  fly.     Body,  light  blue  fur ; 

legs,  dark  dun  hackle ;  wings,  the  inside  feather  of  a  teal's 

tail,  two  fibres  of  a  white  cock's  hackle.     Hook  No.  9 


THE     TROUT.  101 

The  Pale  Yellow  Dun.  A  very  killing  fly.  Body,  yellow 
mohair,  or  martin's  pale  yellow  fur,  tied  with  yellow  silk ; 
wings,  the  lightest  part  of  a  feather  from  a  young  starling's 
wing.     Hook  No.  12. 

The  Orange  Dun.  Body,  red  squirrel's  fur,  ribbed  with 
gold  thread ;  legs,  red  hackle ;  wings  from  the  starling's 
wing ;  tail,  two  fibres  of  red  cock's  hackle.     Hook  No.  9. 

The  Coachman.  Body,  copper-colored  peacock's  herl; 
legs,  red  hackle;  wings,  from  landrail.     Hook  No.  8. 

Cow'Dung  Fly.  Useful  chiefly  in  dark,  windy  weather. 
Body,  dull  lemon  colored  mohair  ;  legs,  red  hackle  ;  wings, 
from  feathers  of  the  landrail  or  starling's  wing.  Hook  No.  8 
or  9. 

The  Harems  Ear  Dun.  Body,  the  fur  of  the  hare's  ear ; 
wings,  the  feather  from  a  starling's  wing ;  tail,  two  fibres  of 
the  brown  feather  of  a  starling's  wing.  Hook  No.  10,  some- 
times dressed  without  the  wisk  or  tail. 

Edmonson' s  Welsh  Fly.  Body,  dull  orange  mohair ;  legs, 
the  back  feather  of  a  partridge  ;  wings,  the  feathers  from  a 
woodcock's  wing,  or  the  tail  of  a  hen  grouse.     Hook  No.  8. 

The  Kingdom  or  Kindon.  Body,  pale  yellow  silk,  rib- 
bed with  crimson  silk ;  legs,  black  hackle  ;  wings,  the  feather 
of  a  woodcock's  wing.     Hook  No.  9. 

Brown  Shiner.  This  is  a  hackle  fly.  Body,  peacock's 
aerl,  twisted  spare,  with  a  grouse  hackle  over  it. 

Gravel  or  Spider-fly.  Body,  water-rat's  fur ;  legs,  black 
hackle  ;  wings,  the  feather  from  the  rump  of  a  partridge. 
Also  made  with  a  dark  dun  hackle.     Hook  No.  10  or  11. 

The  Iron  Blue  Body,  the  fur  of  the  water-rat;  legs,  a 
light  dun  hackle  ;  wdngs,  the  tail  feather  of  a  tom-tit,  or  of  an 
American  robin. 

The  Great  Red  Spinner,  may  be  used  as  an  evening  fly 
during  the  whole  summer  season.     Body,  hog's  wool,  red 


102 


THE    TROUT. 


and  brown,  mixed  with  gold  twist ;  legs,  bright  red  cock's 
hackle ;  wings,  the  light  feather  of  the  starling's  wing ;  tail, 
three  strands  of  a  red  cock's  hackle.     Hook  No.  7. 

Black  Gnat.  Body,  black  hackle,  or  ostrich  herl,  tied 
with  black  silk ;  wings,  the  feather  from  a  starling's  wing. 
Hook  No.  13. 

Wren  Tail.  An  excellent  killer  in  small  bright  streams, 
is  always  dressed  as  a  hackle  fly.  Body,  dark  orange  silk, 
with  wings  and  legs  of  a  wren's  tail.  Although  the  feathers 
of  a  wren's  tail  cannot  be  properly  called  hackles,  they  are 
here  used  as  such,  and  this  remark  will  apply  to  other  feath- 
ers similarly  employed.     Hook  No.  12. 

The  Bracken  Clock.  A  kind  of  beetle.  Body,  peacock's 
herl,  dressed  full,  and  tied  with  piu-ple  silk;  wings,  feather 
of  a  pheasant's  breast.     Hook  No.  9  or  10. 

Red  Ant,  in  imitation  of  the  small  red  ant.  Body,  pea- 
cock's herl,  made  full  at  the  tail,  and  spare  toward  the  head ; 
legs,  red  or  ginger  cock's  hackle;  wings,  from  the  light 
feather  of  the  staging's  wing.  Hook  No.  9  or  10.  By  sub- 
stituting ostrich  herl  for  peacock's  herl,  and  a  black  hackle 
instead  of  a  red  one,  the  black  ant  may  be  imitated. 

The  Sand  Fly.  Body,  the  fur  from  a  hare's  neck  twisted 
round  silk  of  the  same  color ;  legs,  a  ginger  hen's  hackle ; 
wings,  the  feather  from  the  landrail's  wing.     Hook  No.  9. 

The  Stone  Fly.  One  of  the  larger  kind  of  flies  used  in 
windy  weather.  Body,  fur  of  the  hare's  ear,  mixed  with 
brown  and  yellow  mohair,  and  ribbed  with  yellow  silk,  the 
yellow  color  towards  the  tail ;  legs,  a  browiiish  red  hackle ; 
wings,  the  dark  feather  of  the  mallard's  wing ;  tail,  two  or 
three  fibres  of  the  mottled  feather  of  the  partridge.  Hook 
No.  6. 

Alder  Fly.  Body,  peacock's  herl,  tied  with  dark  brown 
silk ;  legs,  coch-a-bonddu  hackle ;  wings,  the  brown  speckled 
feather  of  a  mallard's  back.     Hook  No.  8.     Sometimes  dress- 


THE    TROUT, 


103 


ed  on  a  No.  6  or  7  hook,  and  winged  with  the  red  rump 
feather  of  a  pheasant,  when  it  is  found  excellent  as  a  lake  fly. 

Green  Drake.  Body,  yeUow  floss  silk,  ribbed  with  brown 
silk,  the  extreme  head  and  tail  coppery  peacock's  herl ; 
legs,  a  red  or  ginger  hackle ;  wings,  the  mottled  wing  of  tho 
mallard,  stained  olive ;  tail  or  whisk,  three  hairs  from  a  rab- 
bit's whiskers.  Hook  No.  6.  The  natural  fly  appears  in 
May  and  Jime,  in  such  vast  numbers  that  the  trout  become 
glutted  with  them,  and  grow  fat  upon  their  good  living. 
Sometimes  preferred  dressed  on  a  No.  4  or  5  hook. 

Grey  Drake.  Body,  white  floss  silk,  ribbed  with  dark 
brown  or  mulberry  colored  silk;  head,  and  top  of  the  tail, 
peacock's  herl ;  legs,  a  grizzle  cock's  hackle  ;  wings,  a  mal- 
lard's mottled  feather,  made  to  stand  upright;  tail,  three 
whiskers  of  a  rabbit. 

The  Black  Palmer.  This  is  a  standard  fly,  and  its  merits 
are  too  well  known  to  need  a  description.  It  is  a  valuable 
drop-fly  in  dark,  rainy,  or  windy  weather,  and  in  full  water. 
Body,  ostrich's  herl,  ribbed  with  silver  twist,  and  a  black 
cock's  hackle  over  all. 

The  Soldier  Palmer.  This  fly,  and  its  varieties,  may  be 
considered  the  most  general  fly  on  the  list,  and  many  An- 
glers never  fit  up  a  fly-book  without  having  a  red  hackle  of 
some  kind  for  a  drop-fly.  The  one  given  as  a  specimen  may 
be  used  with  success  for  large  trout,  and  a  strong  water ;  but 
for  a  bright  stream  a  smaller  hook  must  be  adopted,  and  the 
fly  must  be  more  spare  of  hackle ;  and,  should  the  water  be 
very  clear,  the  gold  twist  had  better  be  omitted,  and  a  spare 
hackle  be  tied  with  red  twist ;  another  variety,  is  the  using 
a  black  hackle  for  the  head  of  the  fly,  body  red  mohair,  or 
squirrel's  fui',  ribbed  with  gold  tvnst,  and  red  cock's  hackle 
over  all. 

The  Governor.  Body,  coppery  colored  peacock's  herl, 
ribbed  with  gold  twist,  tipped  with  scarlet  twist ;  legs,  red 


104  THE    TROUT. 

or  ginger  hackle  ;  wings,  the  light  part  of  a  pheasant's  wing. 
Hook  No.  9. 

Coch-a-honddri.  This  fly  is  a  well  known  favorite 
throughout  the  United  Kingdom,  though  not  always  under  the 
same  name.  The  cock  that  furnishes  the  peculiarly  mixed 
deep  and  red  black  feather,  necessary  to  make  this  fly,  is  in 
great  estimation.  Body,  peacock's  herl ;  legs  and  wings,  red 
and  black,  or  coch-a-bonddu  hackle.  Hook  No.  8  or  9.  For 
clear  streams  it  is  dressed  on  a  No.  12  hook. 

The  Yellow  Sally,  Body,  pale  yellow  fur,  or  mohair, 
ribbed  with  fawn  colored  silk ;  legs,  a  ginger  hackle ;  wings, 
a  white  hackle,  died  yellow.     Hook  No.  9. 

Ginger  Hackle.  Body,  short  and  spare,  of  yellow  silk ; 
legs  and  wings,  a  ginger  hackle.     Hook  No.  8. 

Grouse  Hackle.  Body,  varied  to  the  water  and  season, 
such  as  peacock's  herl,  orange  silk,  &c. ;  legs  and  vsrings,  a 
grouse  hackle.     Hook  from  No.  8  to  12. 

The  Dotteril  Hackle.  Body  made  of  yellow  silk;  legs 
and  wings  from  the  feather  of  a  dotteril.  Hook  from  No.  6 
to  12.  This  is  an  excellent  fly,  and  in  the  north  parts  of 
England  considered  superior  even  to  the  red  hackle. 

The  Water  Cricket.  Body,  orange  floss  silk,  tied  on  with 
black  silk ;  legs,  are  made  best  with  peacock's  topping ;  if 
this  cannot  be  easily  procured,  a  black  cock's  hackle  will 
answer  the  purpose.  Either  of  these  must  be  wound  all 
down  the  body,  and  the  fibres  then  snapped  off. 

The  Blue-Bottle  Fly.  Body,  dark  blue  floss  silk,  tied 
with  brown  silk;  legs,  a  cock's  black  hackle;  wings,  feather 
of  the  starling's  wing.     Hook  No.  9  to  12.* 

Common  House-Fly.  Body,  ostrich  herl,  rather  full ;  legs, 
a  black  hackle  ;  wings,  the  feather  of  the  starling's  wing. 

*  The  sizes  of  hooks  used  by  Hofland  are  entirely  too  small  for  the 
majority  of  our  streams.  Where  a  hook  No.  9  or  10  is  recommended, 
No.  4  or  5  should  be  used.    Those  spoken  of  by  Blaine  are  more  suitable. 


THE    TROUT, 


105 


The  following  night,  and  other  flies,  are  from  Blaine : 

The  Mealy  Wliite  Moth.  Upper  wings,  the  dappled  light 
feather  of  the  mallard,  or  any  very  light  clear  colored  feather; 
under  wings,  the  soft  mealy  feather  of  a  white  owl,  or  in  de- 
fault, any  soft  white  feather ;  body,  white  rabbit's  fur  or 
•white  ostrich  herl,  dressed  full,  and  exhibiting  a  brown  head ; 
legs,  a  white  cock's  hackle,  carried  two  or  three  turns  only 
behind  the  wings.     Hook  No.  3,  4  or  5. 

The  Mealy  Brown  Moth.  Upper  wings,  the  dappled 
feather  of  a  mallard,  dyed  a  reddish  brown ;  under  wings, 
the  soft  feather  of  a  brown  owl,  or  a  soft  reddish  feather  or 
two  from  the  landrail ;  body,  any  soft  brown  fur,  as  of  the 
hare,  brown  hog's  down,  bear's  fur,  and  the  nearest  the 
shade  is  to  tan  the  better,  to  be  dressed  moderately  full  and 
long;  legs,  a  brown  cock's  hackle,  carried  one  turn  beyond 
that  of  the  preceding  fly.     Hook  No.  3,  4  or  5. 

The  Mealy  Cream  Moth.  Upper  wings,  the  cream  color- 
ed feather  of  the  gray  owl ;  under  wings,  the  soft  feathers  of 
the  same  a  shade  lighter;  body,  any  dubbing  or  fur  of  a  cream 
color;  legs,  a  ginger  hackle,  w^rapped  three  times.  Hook  No. 
4,  5,  or  6. 

The  Evening  Wliite-  Winged  Harl  Fly.  Wings,  of  a 
white  fowl's  feather;  body,  peacock's  herl,  dressed  fuU  and 
short ;  legs,  a  very  minute  portion  of  red  hackle.  Hook 
No.  .5,  6,  7,  or  8. 

The  Hvmble  Bee.  Wings,  of  the  cock  black-bird,  to  lie 
flat;  body,  fore  part  dubbed  with  black  glossy  mohair  or  fur; 
hinder  part  of  a  deep  orange ;  legs,  dress  two-thirds  of  the 
body  with  a  brown  hackle.     Hook  No.  3  or  4. 

The  Large  Blow,  or  Flesh-Fly.  Wings,  any  transparent 
looking  feather,  to  be  dressed  flat ;  body,  dubbed  with  black 
bear's  fur,  and  a  very  small  portion  of  glossy  pm-ple  mohair 
with  it,  tied  with  silk  of  the  same.  Dress  the  body  full,  and 
pick  out  the  dubbing  to  make  it  look  rough ;  legs,  a  very  dark 


106 


THE    TROUT. 


brown  or  black  hackle,  dressed  two  turns  only  behind  the 


The  Hazle  Fly,  or  Lady  Bird,  crustaceous  wmgs.  A 
small  stumpy  portion  of  the  red  feather  of  a  partridge's  tail 
or  landrail's  wing,  to  be  dressed  extended;  under  wing, 
transparent  looking  feather  of  a  hen  black-bird,  rather  longer 
than  the  former,  to  be  dressed  thin,  and  rather  less  extended ; 
body,  dubbed  thick  and  round  with  dark  purple  mohair,  and 
a  small  quantity  of  brown  fur  intermingled,  which,  when 
picked  out,  form  the  legs.     Hook  No.  7  or  8. 

The  Orl  Fly.  Wings,  a  brown  hen's  or  a  landrail  s  rud- 
dy feather,  to  be  dressed  long  and  close  to  the  back ;  body, 
ribbed  alternately  with  dark  brown  and  orange  dubbing,  add- 
ing antennae,  or  horns ;  legs,  a  grizzle  cock's  hackle.  Hook 
No.  6  or  7. 

Cinnamon  Fly,  or  Fetid  Light  Brown.  Wings  of  a  ruddy 
cream  color,  from  the  feather  of  the  landrail,  or  any  other  of 
a  flame  color,  to  be  dressed  long,  large,  and  flat;  body,  seal's 
fur  of  the  natural  hue;  legs,  a  reddish  brown  hackle.  Hook 
No.  6. 

There  are  many  other  flies  not  enumerated  in  the  fore- 
going lists,  which  the  trout  will  occasionally  fancy.  On  this 
subject,  Blaine  says : 

**  The  number  of  artificial  flies  required  for  the  practice 
of  fly-fishing,  is  very  differently  estimated  by  different  wri- 
ters. The  angling  patriarch  Walton,  gives  a  list  of  twelve 
'  reasonable  flies,'  which  his  friend  Cotton  judiciously  dou- 
bled. The  experience  of  a  century .  and  a  half  has  since 
greatly  increased  the  list,  as  more  extended  observation 
proved  the  universality  of  appetite  in  fish  for  the  insect  race. 
It  appears,  therefore,  strangely  extraordinary  to  find  a  writer 
of  such  credit  as  Salter,  contracting  the  required  numbers 
into  the  confined  limits  of  Red  and  Black  Palmers,  Red  and 
Black  Hackles,  Ant-flies,  the  May-fly,  Stone-fly,  Gnats,  a  Red 


THE    TROUT.  107 

Spinner,  and  a  Moth !  A  fly-book  so  furnished,  might  secure 
a  medley  of  roach,  dace,  chub,  and  a  few  unhappy  trout, 
which  had  strayed  out  of  bounds ;  but  the  exhibition  of  both 
bait  and  fish  would  not  be  very  creditable  to  the  professed 
fly-fisher.  We  have  no  doubt  that  many  of  the  flies  which 
the  books  of  some  excellent  Anglers  contain,  are  seldom 
called  into  action ;  but  as  they  are  when  collected  not  very 
cumbrous  in  carriage,  eat  and  drink  nothing,  and  may  now 
and  then  suit  the  '  lucky  occasion,'  we  see  no  disadvantage, 
but  approve  the  judgment  of  those  Anglers  in  being  furm'shed 
with  them.  In  our  own  fishing  practice,  we  have  met  with 
numerous  gratifying  proofs  of  the  benefit  of  an  ample  store ; 
but  infinitely  more  have  we  felt  the  benefit  arising  from  our 
ability  to  increase  our  stock  from  our  own  resources,  when- 
ever we  found  occasion  so  to  do. 

Many  of  the  flies  mentioned  will  be  found  useful  to 
the  Angler  in  this  country.  They  may  be  had  at  the  regular 
tackle  stores,  can  be  made  to  order,  or  procured  from 
England.  Some  difficulty  may  arise  should  the  sportsman 
wish"  to  make  his  own  flies,  in  procuring  the  exact  feathers 
and  materials  as  described,  but  similar  feathers  can  be  taken 
from  many  of  our  birds,  or  can  be  dyed  the  same  colors, 
which  will  answer  every  purpose. 

Although  flies  of  every  description  can  be  procured  in  the 
principal  cities,  there  are  many  in  distant  parts  of  the  country 
who  will  not  be  able  to  procure  them  at  all.  Besides,  the 
most  skilful  fisher  may  have  the  misfortune  to  lose  his  best 
flies  at  the  beginning  of  a  day  s  sport,  and  it  would  be  well, 
therefore,  for  every  brother  of  this  branch  of  angling  to  be 
always  ready  with  his  materials  and  his  knowledge  for  mak- 
ing the  artificial  fly.  In  fact,  it  is  the  practice  of  many  An- 
glers, always  to  examine  the  waters  and  shake  the  boughs  of 
the  trees,  to  procure  the  latest  insect  that  will  most  probably 


108  THE     TROUT. 

fall  a  prey  to  the  voracious  trout,  and  imitate  nature's  handi 
work  on  the  spot. 

Gay,  the  celebrated  poet,  who  was  a  great  proficient  in 
fly-fishing,  in  his  "  Rural  Sports,"'  gives  the  following  beauti- 
ful description  of  fly-making: 

"  He  shakes  the  boughs  that  on  the  margin  grow, 
Which  o'er  the  stream  a  waving  forest  throw, 
When,  if  an  insect  fall,  (his  certain  guide,) 
He  gently  takes  him  from  the  whirling  tide, 
Examines  well  his  form  with  curious  eyes. 
His  gaudy  vest,  his  wings,  his  horns,  his  size  ; 
Then  round  the  hook  the  chosen  fur  he  winds, 
And  on  the  back  a  speckled  feather  binds  ; 
So  just  the  colors  shine  in  every  part. 
That  nature  seems  to  live  again  in  art." 

And  also — 

"  To  frame  the  little  animal  provide 

All  the  gay  hues  that  wait  on  female  pride  : 

Let  nature  guide  thee ;  sometimes  golden  wire 

The  shining  bellies  of  the  fly  require ; 

The  peacock's  plumes  thy  tackle  must  not  fail. 

Nor  the  dear  purchase  of  the  sable's  tail ; 

Each  gaudy  bird  some  slender  tribute  brings, 

And  lends  the  glowing  insect  proper  wings ; 

Silks  of  all  colors  must  their  aid  impart. 

And  every  fur  promote  the  fisher's  art : 

So  the  gay  lady,  with  expensive  care, 

Borrows  the  pride  of  land,  of  sea,  of  air; 

Furs,  pearls,  and  plumes,  the  glittering  thing  displays. 

Dazzles  our  eyes,  and  easy  hearts  betrays." 

The  following  different  directions,  by  various  authors, 
will  enable  the  reader  to  select  a  method  suited  to  his  own 
taste,  by  which  with  a  little  practice  and  perseverance,  he  can 


THE    TROUT.  109 

succeed  in  forming  flies  suitable  for  his  different  fishing- 
grounds,  with  very  little  trouble. 

How  to  make  the  Artificial  Winged  Fly- — (Hofland.) — 
"  There  are  several  raodes  adopted  in  making  the  artificial 
fly ;  one  is,  to  tie  the  wings  on  the  hook,  in  the  natural  pesi- 
tion,  in  the  first  instance  ;  another  method  is,  to  place  the 
feathers  for  the  wings  in  a  reverse  position,  in  the  first  in- 
stance, and  naturally  afterwards ;  and  the  third  and  last  way, 
is  to  tie  the  wings  on  the  hook,  after  the  body  is  made,  instead 
of  beginning  the  fly  with  them. 

"  The  most  expeditious  way  of  completing  a  number  of 
flies,  is  to  have  every  necessary  material  arranged  immediately 
under  your  eye,  and  every  article  separate  and  distinct ;  all 
the  hooks,  gut,  or  hair,  wdngs,  hackle,  dubbing,  silk,  and  wax, 
ready  assorted  and  prepared  for  instant  use.  The  hooks  re- 
quire to  be  sized  for  your  different  flies ;  the  gut  requires  the 
most  careful  examination  and  adjustment;  the  hackles  have 
to  be  stripped,  and  the  dubbing  to  be  well  mixed ;  the  silk 
assorted,  and  to  be  of  the  finest  texture ;  and  the  wings  to  be 
tied  the  length  of  the  hook  they  are  to  be  fastened  to,  in  or- 
der that  the  fibres  of  the  feather  may  be  all  brought  into  the 
small  compass  of  the  hook.  This  previous  trouble  not  only 
saves  time,  but  insures  a  degree  of  neatness  that  is  otherwdse 
almost  unattainable. 

"  The  tying  of  the  wdngs  is  thus  performed :  a  piece  of 
well  waxed  silk  is  laid  in  a  noose  on  the  fore-finger  of  the  left 
hand,  the  wings  or  feathers  are  put  on  the  under  part  of  the 
noose,  and  at  the  distance  of  the  length  of  the  wdug  required ; 
the  thumb  is  then  applied  closely  to  the  feather,  and  with  one 
end  of  the  noose  in  the  mouth  and  the  other  in  the  right  hand, 
the  noose  is  drawn  quite  tight,  and  the  silk  is  then  cut  within 
an  inch  of  the  knot,  to  leave  a  handle  by  which  to  hold  the 
wdng.  If  the  thumb  is  not  closely  pressed,  the  feathers  will 
be  pulled  away. 


110 


THE    TROUT. 


.7.:^ 

'=m. 

:^=^ 

sft 

1^^ 

— - ' 

— 

— 

\^^-- 

"  First  Method — How  to  make  the  Fly  with  the  Wings  in 
the  natural  position  in  the  first  instance.  Hold  the  hook  by 
the  bend,  with  the  point  downwards,  between  the  fore-finger 
and  thumb  of  the  left  hand;  with  your  waxed  sUk  in  your 
right  hand,  give  one  or  two  turns  round  the  bare  hook,  about 
midway ;  lay  the  end  of  the  gut  along  the  upper  side  of  the 
hook,  (if  tied  on  the  under  side,  the  fly  will  not  swim  true, 
but  continually  revolve,)  wrap  the  silk  firmly  until  you  get 
within  a  few  turns  of  the  top ;  you  then  take  the  wings,  lay 
them  along  the  shank  with  the  right  hand,  and  hold  them 
firmly  in  their  place  to  the  hook  with  the  left  hand.  Next, 
tie  the  feather  tightly  at  the  point  of  contact,  with  two  or 
three  turns ;  cut  off'  the  superfluous  ends  of  the  feather,  and 
tying  the  head  of  the  fly  very  firmly,  you  carry  the  silk  around 
the  gut  beyond  the  head,  that  the  end  of  the  hook  may  not 
chafe,  or  cut  away  the  gut ;  then  retrace  the  silk,  until  you 
come  to  the  tying  on  of  the  wings.  Divide  the  wings  equally, 
and  carry  the  silk  through  the  division  alternately,  two  or 
three  times,  to  keep  the  wings  distinct  from  each  other.  Now 
prepare  the  hackle,  by  drawing  back  the  fibres,  and  by  hav- 
ing two  or  three  less  on  the  butt,  on  the  side  of  the  feather 
that  comes  next  the  hook,  that  it  may  revolve  without  twist- 
ing away.  Tie  the  butt-end  of  the  hackle  close  to  the  wings, 
having  its  upper  or  dark  side  to  the  head  of  the  fly.  The 
Scotch  reverse  this,  and  tie  the  hackle  with  its  under  side  to 
the  head ;  and  likewise  strip  the  fibres  entirely  off  that  side 
which  touches  the  hook.  Take  the  dubbing  between  the 
fore-finger  and  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand,  twist  it  very 
thinly  about  your  silk,  and  carry  it  around  the  hook  as  far  as 
you  intend  the  hackle  or  legs  to  be  carried,  and  hold  it  be- 
tween the  fore-finger  and  thumb  of  the  left  hand,  or  fasten  it. 
Then,  with  your  plyers,  carry  the  hackle  around  your  hook, 
close  under  the  wings,  and  down  to  where  you  have  brought 
your  silk  and  dubbing,  then  continue  to  finish  your  body,  by 


THE    TROUT.  Ill 

carrying  over  the  end  of  the  hackle;  and  when  you  have 
made  the  body  of  sufficient  length,  fasten  off  by  bringing 
the  silk  twice  or  thrice  loosely  around  the  hook,  and  passing 
the  end  through  the  coils,  to  make  all  tight. 

"  Some  finish  the  body  of  this  fly  thus : — when  the  hackle 
is  fastened,  after  it  has  made  the  legs  of  the  fly,  the  bare  silk 
is  carried  to  the  end  of  the  intended  body ;  dubbing  is  then 
carried  up  to  the  legs  and  there  fastened. 

"  Second  Method.  This  manner  of  proceeding  difiers 
from  the  first  in  fixing  on  of  the  wings.  When  you  have 
fastened  the  gut  and  hook  together,  to  the  point  where  the 
wings  are  to  be  tied,  apply  the  wings  to  the  hook,  with  the 
butt  of  the  feather  lying  uppermost;  when  the  wings  are  well 
fastened,  pull  them  back  into  their  natural  position;  and 
when  the  head  of  the  fly  is  finished,  pass  the  silk  alternately 
through  the  wings ;  and,  having  your  silk  well  tied  to  the 
roots  of  the  wings,  (and  not  over  the  roots,)  the  fly  is  to  be 
completed,  as  in  the  first  method,  having  cut  off  the  roots  of 
the  feather." 

How  to  make  the  Hackle  or  Palmer  Fly. — (Kennie.) — 
"  Hold  your  hook  m  a  horizontal  position,  with  the  shank 
downwards,  and  the  bent  of  it  between  the  fore-finger  and 
thumb  of  your  left  hand ;  and  having  a  fine  bristle,  or  strand 
of  silk-worm  gut,  and  other  materials,  lying  by  you,  take  half 
a  yai'd  of  red  marking  silk,  well  wajced,  and  with  your  right 
hand  give  it  four  or  five  turns  about  the  shank  of  the  hook, 
inclining  the  turns  to  the  right  hand ;  when  you  are  near  the 
shank,  turn  it  into  such  a  loop  as  you  are  hereafter  directed 
to  make  for  fastening  off,  and  draw  it  tight,  leaving  the  ends 
of  the  silk  to  hang  down  at  each  end  of  the  hook.  Having 
singed  the  end  of  your  bristle,  lay  the  same  along  the  inside 
of  the  shank  of  the  hook,  as  low  as  the  bent,  and  whip  four 
or  five  times  round ;  then  singing  the  other  end  of  the  bristle 
to  a  fit  length,  turn  it  over  to  the  back  of  the  shank,  and. 


112 


THE    TROUT. 


pinching  it  into  a  proper  form,  whip  down  and  fasten  off  as 
before  directed,  which  will  bring  both  ends  of  the  silk  into 
tlie  bent.  After  you  have  waxed  your  silk  again,  take  three 
or  four  strands  of  ostrich  feather,  and  holding  them  and  the 
bent  of  your  hook  as  at  first  directed,  the  feathers  to  your  left 
hand  and  the  roots  in  the  bent  of  your  hook,  with  that  end 
of  the  silk  which  you  have  just  now  waxed,  whip  them  three 
or  four  times  round  and  fasten  oif ;  then  turning  the  feathers 
to  the  right,  and  twisting  them  and  the  silk  with  your  fore- 
finger and  thumb,  wind  them  round  the  shank  of  the  hook, 
still  supplying  the  short  strands  with  new  ones,  as  they  fail, 
till  you  come  to  the  end  and  fasten  off.  When  you  have  so 
done,  clip  off  the  ends  of  the  feathers  and  trim  the  body  of 
the  palmer  small  at  the  extremity,  and  full  in  the  middle,  and 
wax  both  ends  of  your  silk,  which  are  now  divided,  and  lie 
at  either  end  of  the  hook. 

"  Lay  your  work  by  you  ;  and  taking  a  strong  bold  hackle, 
with  fibres  about  half  an  inch  long,  straighten  the  stem  care- 
fully, and  holding  the  small  end  between  the  fore-finger  and 
thumb  of  your  left  hand,  with  those  of  the  right  stroke  the 
fibres  the  contrary  way  to  that  which  they  naturally  lie ;  and 
taking  the  hook,  and  holding  it  as  before,  lay  the  hackle  into 
the  bent  of  the  hook,  with  the  hollow  (which  is  the  palest) 
side  upwards,  and  whip  it  very  fast  to  its  place ;  in  doing 
whereof,  be  careful  not  to  tie  in  many  of  the  fibres;  or  if 
you  should  chance  to  do  so,  pick  them  out  with  the  point  of 
a  very  large  needle. 

"  When  the  hackle  is  thus  made  fast,  the  utmost  care  and 
nicety  is  necessary  in  winding  it  on ;  for  if  you  fail  in  this, 
your  fly  is  spoiled,  and  you  must  begin  all  again  :  to  prevent 
which,  keeping  the  hollow  or  pale  side  to  your  left  hand,  and 
as  much  as  possible  the  side  of  the  stem  down  on  the  dubbing, 
wind  the  hackle  twice  round;  and  holding  fast  what  you 
have  80  wound,  pick  out  the  loose  fibres  which  you  may  have 


THE    TROUT. 


113 


taken  in,  and  make  another  turn;  then  lay  hold  of  the  hacklo 
with  the  third  and  fourth  fingers  of  your  left  hand,  with  which 
you  may  extend  it  while  you  disengage  the  loose  fibres  as 
before. 

"  In  this  manner  proceed  till  you  come  within  an  eighth 
of  an  inch  of  the  end  of  the  shank,  where  you  will  find  an 
end  of  silk  hanging,  and  by  which  time  you  will  find  the 
fibres  at  the  great  end  of  the  hackle  something  discomposed; 
clip  these  ofl:'  close  to  the  stem,  and  with  the  end  of  your  mid- 
dle finger  press  the  stem  close  to  the  hook,  while  with  the 
fore-finger  of  your  right  hand,  you  turn  the  silk  into  a  loop; 
which  when  you  have  twice  put  over  the  end  of  the  shank  of 
the  hook,  loop  and  all,  your  work  is  safe. 

"  Then  wax  that  end  of  the  silk  which  you  now  used,  and 
turn  it  over  as  before,  till  you  have  taken  up  nearly  all  that 
remained  of  the  hook,  observing  to  lay  the  turns  neatly  side 
by  side;  and  lastly  clip  ofi'the  ends  of  the  silk." 

On  making  the  Palmer  or  HacMe-Fly,  roith  the  code's  or 
hen's  feathers,  Hofland  remarks,  "  is  simply  as  described  in 
the  fore-named  methods,  (pages  110  and  111,)  by  twisting  on 
the  legs  and  body,  taking  care  that  the  hackle  has  fibres  as 
long  as,  or  rather  longer  than,  the  hook  it  is  to  be  twisted 
upon. 

"  But  in  making  hackle-flies  with  birds'  feathers,  such  as 
those  of  the  snipe,  dotteril,  &c.,  the  feather  is  prepared  by 
stripping  off  the  superfluous  parts  at  the  butt-end,  then  draw- 
ing back  a  sufficient  quantity  of  fibre  to  make  the  fly ;  take 
the  feather  by  the  root  and  point,  with  both  hands,  (having 
its  outside  uppermost,)  and  put  the  whole  of  the  fibres  into 
your  mouth,  and  wet  them,  that  they  adhere  together  back 
to  back.  When  the  gut  is  fastened  to  the  hook,  you  must  tie 
on  the  feather  near  to  the  head  of  the  hook,  and  the  feather 
may  be  tied  either  at  the  butt-end  or  point;  then  twist  the 
feather  twice  or  thrice  round  the  hook,  and  fasten  it  by  one 


:~ 

is: 

-'—: 

^ 

—- 

■—=5^ 

— --- 

114  THE    TROUT. 

or  more  loops ;  the  fibres  of  the  feather  will  then  lie  the  re- 
verse way,  cut  off  the  superfluous  part  of  the  feather,  that 
remains  after  tying,  and  twist  on  the  body  of  the  required 
length ;  fasten  by  two  loops,  draw  down  the  fibres  of  the 
feather  to  the  bend,  and  the  fly  is  finished. 

"  If  tinsel,  or  gold  and  silver  twist  be  required  for  the 
body  of  the  fly,  it  must  be  tied  on  after  the  hackle,  but  car- 
ried round  the  body  before  the  hackle  makes  the  legs.  If 
the  tinsel  be  required  only  at  the  tail  of  the  fly,  it  must  be 
tied  on  immediately  after  the  gut  and  hook  are  put  together; 
the  hackle  next,  and  then  the  body,  &c. 

"  The  choice  of  your  fly  must  depend  much  upon  the  na 
tiire  of  the  water  you  fish  in,  and  the  state  of  the  weather  i 
if  the  water  be  full,  and  somewhat  colored,  your  flies  may  be 
of  the  larger  and  darker  kind ;  if,  on  the  contrary,  the  water 
should  be  low  and  clear,  and  the  day  bright,  your  fly  should 
be  dressed  accordingly,  i.  e.,  it  should  be  pale  in  color  and 
spare  in  the  dressing." 

Of  the  different  Feathers  spoken  of.  A  very  good  imitar 
tion  of  the  starling's  wing,  which  is  a  plain  pale  grey,  can  be 

Df 

tail  of  the  black-bird, 
grey  feather,  with  black  specks,  can  be  nearly  imitated  by 
the  feather  taken  from  the  wing  and  shoulder  of  the  common 
drake,  and  also  by  some  of  the  light  colored  feathers  of  the 
game-hen.  A  similar  to  the  landrail,  which  is  a  pahsh  brown, 
can  be  supplied  from  the  woodcock  or  pheasant.  The  coch- 
a-bonddu  feather  is  neither  more  nor  less  than  the  black  and 
red  feather  of  the  cock. 


CHAPTER  VII. 
OP  THE  PIKE    JACK,  PICKEREL  OR  MUSCALINGA. 


This,  with  the  Trout,  may  be  considered  the  universal  fish  of 
the  world.  It  appears  to  inhabit  the  inland  waters  of  all 
northern  countries.  We  read  of  them  as  far  back  as  the 
days  of  ancient  Rome ;  and  they  have  been  known  in  Ger- 
many and  Poland  from  time  immemorial.  A  late  writer  on 
Natural  History  in  England,  says  that  they  were  introduced 
into  that  country  in  the  year  1537,  and  that  they  were  sold 
for  double  the  price  of  a  lamb ;  but  the  lady  writer  on  angling, 
Dame  Julianna  Berners,  who  lived  and  wrote  some  time  be- 
fore the  abovementioned  year,  (1496,)  gives  the  following  in- 
gtructions  for  taking  him,  which  rather  tends  to  a  different  con» 
elusion  as  to  the  period  in  which  they  were  brought  to  that 
country.  "  Take  a  codlynge  hoke;  and  take  a  roche,  or  a 
fresshe  heeryng ;  and  a  wyre  with  an  hole  in  the  ende,  and  put 
it  in  at  the  mouth  and  out  at  the  taylle,  down  by  the  ridge  of 
the  fresshe  heeryng ;  and  thenne  put  the  line  of  your  hoke  in 
after,  and  draw  the  hoke  into  the  cheke  of  the  fresshe  heer 
yng;  then  put  a  plumb  e  of  lede  upon  your  line  a  yerde  longe 


116 


THE    PIKE,    &C. 


from  your  hoke,  and  a  flote  in  mid  way  betweene ;  and  cast 
it  in  a  pytte  where  the  pyke  usyth  ;  and  this  is  the  beste  and 
moost  surest  crafte  of  takynge  the  pyke."  In  all  probability 
they  are  natives  of  England  as  well  as  other  parts  of  Europe. 

He  is  certainly  one  of  the  oldest  inhabitants  of  our  own 
country,  as  he  was  well  known  to  the  natives,  and  in  some 
parts  is  still  called  by  the  Indian  name  of  Muscalinga.  At  all 
events,  he  does  not  need  such  restrictions  for  his  preservation 
as*  were  a  short  time  since  proposed  in  the  Legislature  of  the 
State  of  New- York,  for  the  protection  of  cai-p  in  the  Hudson 
river.  On  a  debate  for  the  passage  of  a  law  to  protect  some 
newly  imported  fish  of  the  carp  species,  a  Mr.  Bloss  said : 
"  that  he  w^as  in  favor  of  a  term  of  naturalization,  not  over 
five  years,  and  so  he  would  protect  the  fishy  foreigner, 
at  least  for  that  space  of  time."  This  well-timed  joke  caused 
so  much  merriment  and  good  feeling  amongst  the  members 
of  the  House,  that  the  law  of  protection  passed  with  but  iittie 
opposition. 

The  pike  is  also  called  the  Tyrant  of  the  Waters,  the  Wolf- 
Fish,  and  the  Fresh  Water  Shark;  and  certainly,  from  his 
ravenous  disposition,  he  well  deserves  all  these  names;  and 
although  not  quite  so  voracious  as  that  very  peculiar  bird, 
that  devoured  the  boards,  shavings,  and  even  the  jack-planes 
and  hand-saws  of  the  carpenter  employed  to  fit  up  its  cage, 
still  his  masticatory  apparatus  must  be  very  powerful,  and 
his  digestive  machinery  equally  strong,  if  all  that  is  said  of 
him  be  true. 

"  A  thousand  foes  the  finny  people  chase : 

Nor  are  they  safe  from  their  own  kindred  race  : 
The  Pike,  fell  tyrant  of  the  liquid  plain, 
With  rav'nous  waste  devours  liis  fellow  train." 

It  is  said  that  in  Germany  a  mule,  while  drinking  from  a 
pond,  was  seized  at  the  mouth  by  a  large  pike,  and  nearly 


THE     PIKE,    &C.  117 

drowned,  but  by  the  aid  of  an  attendant,  the  mule  succeeded 
in  getting  his  head  above  water,  and  brought  the  pike  on 
shore,  still  clinging  to  his  mouth.  They  have  also  been 
known  to  devour  young  goslings,  rats,  and  mice,  and  when 
placed  in  ponds  with  other  fish,  have  sometimes  devoured 
them  all. 

Smith  relates  the  following  story,  which  serves  to  show 
the  "  ruhng  passion  strong  in  death:"  "  A  gentleman  was 
once  angUng  for  pike,  and  succeeded  in  taking  a  very  large 
one,  at  which  time  be  was  encountered  by  a  shepherd  and 
his  dog.  He  made  the  man  a  present  of  his  fish,  and  while 
engaged  in  clearing  his  tackle,  he  saw  the  dog,  who  had  for 
some  time  been  expressing  his  satisfaction  by  the  most  une- 
quivocal signs,  seat  himself  unsuspectingly,  with  his  tail  at  a 
tempting  proximity  to  the  jaws  of  the  pike,  which  suddenly 
caught  at  It.  It  would  be  Impossible  to  express  the  terror  of 
the  dog,  on  finding  such  an  appendage  entailed  upon  him ; 
he  ran  in  every  direction  to  free  himself,  but  In  vain,  and  at 
last  plunged  into  the  stream  as  a  last  resource — but  this  was 
equally  fruitless.  The  hair  had  become  so  entangled  in  the 
fish's  teeth,  that  It  could  not  release  Its  hold ;  accordingly,  he 
struggled  over  to  the  opposite  side,  now  above  and  now  be- 
low the  surface.  Having  landed,  the  dog  made  for  his  mas- 
ter's cottage  with  all  haste,  where  he  was  at  length  freed 
from  his  unwilling  persecutor ;  yet,  notwithstanding  the  fa- 
tigue the  latter  had  endured,  he  actually  seized  and  sunk  his 
teeth  into  a  stick  which  was  used  to  force  open  his  jaws." 

They  are  known  to  live  to  a  very  great  age.  A  Russian 
with  an  unpronounceable  name,*  makes  mention  of  a  pike 
that  lived  to  the  age  of  ninety  years ;  and  Gf  sner  says,  one 
was  taken  in  a  lake  In  Suabia,  Germany,  In  1479,  having  a 


*  As  some  of  our  readers  may  want  our  authority,  and  may  be  willing 
to  run  the  risk  of  breaking  their  jaws,  we  give  the  name,  Rzacznshi. 


118 


THE    PIKE,    &C. 


ring  attached,  stating  that  it  had  been  place^  there  in  the 
year  1280,  making  its  age  249  years.  It  weighed  350  pounds. 
The  identical  ring  is  still  preserved  at  Manheim.  On 
drawing  a  pool  near  Newport,  (Eng.)  one  was  taken  weigh 
ing  170  pounds.  They  are  said  also  to  grow  to  a  very  large 
size,  and  to  live  to  a  very  great  age  in  Persia. 

"  In  1801,"  says  Blaine,  "  a  hook,  baited  with  a  roach, 
was  set  in  the  manor  pond  at  Toddington,  Bedfordshire  ;  the 
next  morning  a  large  pike  was  caught,  which  with  difficulty 
was  got  out.  It  appeared  that  a  pike  of  three  and  a  half 
pounds  weight  was  first  caught,  which  was  afterwards  swal- 
lowed by  another  weighing  thirteen  pounds  and  a  half,  and 
both  were  taken. 

''From  the  size  of  the  fish  which  have  occasionally  been  taken 
from  within  them,  there  appears  to  be  hardly  any  limit  to  their 
voracity.  One  caught  in  the  Iris  was  found  to  contain  a  bar- 
bel of  six  pounds,  and  a  chub  of  more  than  three :  these  nine 
pounds  of  food  formed  nearly  a  third  of  his  own  proper  bulk, 
which  was  31  1-2  pounds.  The  circumstance  of  two  fish  of 
such  dimensions  being  within  the  animal  at  one  time,  is  a 
proof  that  the  calls  of  appetite  in  this  tribe  are  of  a  peculiar 
kind ;  they  are  most  imperative  but  not  incessant.  The  de- 
sire to  fill  the  stomach  is  such  that  no  ofFal  is  refused ;  animal 
substances  of  every  kind,  living  and  dead,  are  equally  well 
received,  and  sometimes  other  matter ;  for  the  clay  plummet 
of  the  Angler,  the  clay  and  bran  balls  for  ground-baiting,  when 


which  many  instances  have  occurred ;  and  it  is  at  such  times 
that  he  dashes  at  large  flies  on  the  water,  prompted  to  it  pro- 
bably by  his  habits  of  receiving  there  many  savory  morsels, 
in  the  shape  of  rats,  mice,  and  frogs,  as  well  as  the  young  of 
ducks,  geese,  swans,  and  other  aquatic  birds,  which  he  is 
known  to  prey  on  as  readily  as  fish." 

They  are  found  in  our  streams,  ponds,  and  lakes,  firom  one 


THE    PIKE,    ftC.  119 

extremity  of  the  Union  to  the  other,  and  do  not  materially 
differ  from  the  same  species  in  other  countries,  and,  as  the 
Yankee  would  say,  will  live  as  long,  eat  as  much,  and  grow- 
as  large,  as  in  any  other  place  on  airth.  The  largest  within 
recollection  was  taken  in  one  of  our  western  lakes,  and 
weighed  46  pounds. 

They  increase  in  size  faster  than  any  other  fish  known. 
Block,  a  German  author,  says,  that  "  in  the  first  year  tb6y 
grow  from  eight  to  ten  inches,  in  the  second  from  twelve  to 
fourteen,  and  in  the  third  from  eighteen  to  twenty."    r^ 

They  are  observed  by  Walton  to  be  "a  solitary,  melan- 
choly, and  bold  fish ;  melancholy  because  he  always  swims 
or  rests  himself  alone,  and  never  swims  in  shoals  or  with 
company,  as  the  roach  and  dace  and  most  other  fish  do,  and 
bold  because  he  fears  not  a  shadow,  or  to  see  and  be  seen, 
as  the  trout  and  chub,  and  all  other  fish  do."  Rather  sorry 
company  for  any  kind  of  fish  would  be  the  pike,  according 
to  Rennie,  who  says  that  a  pike  placed  in  a  pond  with  an 
abundance  of  fish,  in  one  year  devoured  aU  but  one,  which 
was  a  carp  weighing  nine  pounds,  and  he  had  taken  a  piece 
out  of  him.  Poor  satisfaction  would  it  be  for  any  of  the  finny 
tribe  to  promenade  down  the  stream  with  this  voracious  ani- 
mal, and  to  have  the  peculiar  satisfaction  of  being  devoured  at 
once  without  sauce,  or  perhaps  gradually  consumed  by  a 
piece  out  of  the  back  or  tail  at  intervals.  No  amusement,  as 
the  song  goes, 

*  Like  the  trout  and  the  salmon, 
Sitting  down  playing  a  nice  dacent,  agreeable,  pleasant,  sociable 
game  of  backgammou.' 

No  wonder  they  have  no  company,  or  are  not  sociable ;  they 
should  stay  by  themselves  and  prefer  the  Angler's  hook,  by 
all  means,  and  keep  away  from  evil  associates,  that  they  may 
"  come  smoking,"  according  to  Bai-ker's  rules,  "  as  a  viand 


120 


THE    PIKE,    &C. 


for  the  well  set  appetite  of  man,  instead  of  the  sharpened 
teeth  and  uusatiable  desires  of  one  of  their  own  species." 

They  generally  spawn  in  the  months  of  March  and  April, 
and  sometimes,  in  some  parts  of  the  country,  as  early  as 
February.  Their  colors,  when  in  good  water  and  under  fa- 
vorable circumstances,  are  exceedingly  beautiful.  Smith  re- 
marks that  "  during  the  height  of  the  season,  their  colors  are 
extremely  brilliant,  being  green,  diversified  with  bright  yel- 
low spots;  at  the  close  of  the  season  the  green  fades  to  a 
grayish  hue;  and  the  yellow  spots  become  faint  and  in- 
distinct." 

They  are  fond  of  still,  shady  spots,  under  and  near  the 
weed  called  pickerel-weed,  and  appear  to  grow  better  and 
larger  in  ponds  and  lakes  than  in  swift  running  streams.  In 
the  extreme  heat  of  summer,  they  are  often  found  near  the 
surface,  where  they  are  sometimes  taken  with  a  wire  noose, 
attached  to  a  long  pole.  They  are  so  bold  that  they  will  often 
take  a  bait  after  breaking  their  hold  a  few  minutes  previous, 
and  they  have  been  taken  in  several  instances  with  a  number 
of  hooks  imbedded  in  the  flesh  in  the  inside  of  their  mouths. 

In  winter,  they  retreat  to  the  deep  holes,  and  under  rocky 
projections,  stumps  of  trees,  roots,  &c.,  from  which  places 
by  making  a  hole  in  the  ice,  they  are  readily  taken  by  spear 
ing,  or  with  a  drop-line  with  a  small  live  fish  for  bait.  At 
this  season  of  the  year  their  appearance  is  somewhat  changed, 
their  colors  being  less  brilliant,  and  their  spots  of  a  darker  hue. 

Blaine  remarks  :  ''  The  abstinence  of  the  pike  and  jack  is 
no  less  singular  than  their  voracity ;  during  the  summer 
months  their  digestive  functions  are  somewhat  torpid,  which 
appears  a  remarkable  peculiarity  in  the  pike  economy,  seeing 
it  must  be  in  inverse  ratio  to  the  wants  of  the  fish,  for  they  must 
be  at  this  time  in  a  state  of  emaciation  from  the  effects  of 
spawning ;  and  the  circumstance  is  fortunate,  for  were  the 
appetite  as  usual,  few  young  fiy  could  escape ;  but  during 


THE     PIKK,    &.C  . 


121 


the  summer  they  are  listless,  and  affect  the  surface  of  the 
water,  where  in  warm  sunny  weather  they  seem  to  bask  in  a 
sleepy  state  for  hours  together,  and  at  these  times  frequently 
get  ensnared  by  the  wire  halter  of  the  poacher.  It  is  not  a 
little  remarkable,  also,  that  smaller  fish  appear  to  be  aware 
when  this  abstuient  state  of  their  foe  is  on  him  ;  for  they  who 
at  other  times  are  evidently  impressed  with  an  instinctive 
dread  at  his  presence,  are  now  seen  swimming  around  him 
with  total  unconcern.  At  these  periods,  no  baits,  however 
tempting,  can  allure  him ;  but  on  the  contrary,  he  retreats 
from  every  thing  of  the  kind.  Windy  weather  is  alone  capa- 
ble of  exciting  the  dormant  powers ;  and  then,  if  a  cool  sharp 
breeze  spring  up,  he  may  sometimes  be  tempted  to  run; 
but  even  then  he  will  rather  play  with  the  bait,  and  may  be 
seen  even  sailing  about  with  it  across  his  mouth ;  after  doing 
which  he  commonly  ejects  it.  This  inaptitude  to  receive 
food  with  the  usual  keenness,  continues  from  the  time  they 
spawn,  until  the  time  of  their  recovery  from  the  effects  of  it ; 
and  thus  pike  and  jack  fishmg  are  not  productive  of  much 
sport  between  March  and  October,  unless  an  occasional 
breeze  should  blow  a  hungiy  fit  on  them  ;  and  it  is  thus  also 
that  when  they  are  attempted  between  these  periods,  the 
experienced  fisher  often  at  once  commences  his  practice  by 
snap-tackle. 

"  We  are  disposed  to  think  that  the  decreased  voracity  of 
these  fish  during  the  heats  of  summer,  is  in  some  measure 
likewise  influenced  by  the  increase  of  temperature.  This 
animal  thrives  best  in  frigid  climes,  and  the  further  we  pro- 
ceed within  certain  limits,  the  larger  is  his  growth  ;  thus,  in 
the  Canadian  lakes  he  exists  in  vast  numbers,  and  grows  to 
the  length  of  four  or  five  feet ;  and  he  does  the  same  in  the 
cold  waters  of  Lapland,  also  disappearing,  according  to  Wal- 
henburg,  in  geographical  distribution  with  the  spruce  fir. 
It  is  no  wonder,  therefore,  that  only  a  slight  approximation 


122 


THE    PIKE,    .fcC. 


to  the  equator  should  uimerve  his  powers,  particularly  during 
the  summer  heats." 

In  this  country,  generally  speaking,  except  in  the  more 
southern  parts,  the  habits  of  the  pike,  although  very  similar, 
are  not  quite  so  indolent  as  they  are  in  England.  In  the 
northern  parts  of  the  States  of  New-York  and  Pennsylvania, 
and  the  more  northern  states,  where  the  climate  is  colder  than 
that  mentioned  by  Blaine,  they  are  frequently  taken  in  fine 
condition,  and  with  the  usual  quantity  of  sport,  in  the  months 
of  August  and  September.  Generally  speaking,  the  months 
of  September  and  October  are  found  to  be  the  best  months, 
and  in  many  parts  of  the  country,  afford  the  Angler  as  much 
true  enjoyment  and  diversion,  as  any  other  of  the  numerous 
modes  of  piscatorial  amusement. 

The  streams  and  ponds  containing  them  are  abundant,  and 
furnish  immense  quantities.  Tiiere  is  perhaps  more  angling 
for  the  pike  than  for  any  other  of  the  finny  tribe,  insomuch 
that  it  is  almost  impossible  to  mention  a  section  of  the  country, 
except  within  some  of  our  more  southern  states,  which  do 
not  furnish  fine  grounds  for  the  pike,  from  the  moderate  size 
contained  in  the  ponds,  to  the  essex  or  muscalinga  of  our 
western  lakes. 

The  most  common  mode  of  taking  them  in  the  ponds  and 
lakes,  is  with  a  stiff  rod  of  ash  or  bamboo,  about  12  feet  long, 
accompanied  with  a  reel  containing  from  50  to  100  yards  of 
strong  flax  or  grass  line,  with  a  small  fish,  or  the  leg  or 
hinder  part  of  a  frog  for  bait.  The  hook,  which  should 
be  a  Limerick  or  Kirby  salmon,  from  No.  0  to  5,  according 
to  the  size  of  your  game,  is  attached  to  strong  gimp  or  wire, 
from  12  to  24  inches  long,  for  spring  and  autumn  fishing,  and 
for  summer  fishing,  if  the  pike  are  shy,  strong  twisted  gut  is 
preferable.  In  stream  fishing,  the  addition  of  a  swivel 
sinker  and  a  cork  or  hollow  float,  will  be  found  necessary. 

Of  the  Rod,  Blaine  remarks :  "  Mr.  Nobbs,  with  more 


THE    PIKE,  AC.  123 

truth  than  good  taste,  has  observed,  that  if  your  hook  and 
line  be  good,  you  may  make  shift  with  an  indifferent  rod; 
and  he  seems  to  ridicule  *  those  precise  craftsmen  who  spend 
their  time  in  admiring  their  instruments;'  for  he  adds,  that 
he  has  'often  put  a  ring  on  his  walking-stick,  and  with  his 
hue  thus  mounted,  has  killed  his  pike ; '  and  no  one  doubts 
him.  We  have  also  heard  a  boy  discourse  sweet  music  on  a 
jew's-harp;  and  yet,  somehow,  jews'-harps  have  not  super 
seded  the  use  of  the  violin,  which  is  passing  strange ! 

**  We  shall  not,  however,  have  much  difficulty  in  persuad 
ing  the  true  Angler  that  an  appropriate  rod  will  not  only  add 
to  the  success  of  his  practice,  but  will  render  that  practice 
more  convenient  and  agreeable  than  otherwise.  It  will  cer- 
tainly be  more  professionally  characteristic.  In  the  rod  or 
rods  used  for  jack  fishing,  the  method  to  be  employed,  the 
nature  of  the  water,  and  the  probable  size  of  the  fish,  are  all 
matters  necessary  to  be  taken  into  account.  In  live-bait 
fishing,  and  in  trolling,  a  rod  of  neai'ly  similar  length  and  di- 
mensions is  required ;  but  in  snap-fishing,  one  of  greater 
strength  but  diminished  length  is  generally  employed.  In  a 
very  wdde  water,  considerable  length  of  rod  is  necessary  for 
the  purpose  of  reaching  the  probable  haunts  of  the  fish,  and 
making  a  cast  over  the  reeds  or  sedges  which  frequently  skirt 
the  banks  and  edges  of  some  waters.  Without  a  rod  of  con- 
siderable length,  the  bait  often  falls  short,  and  not  only  misses 
its  object,  but  gets  torn  by  falling  within,  instead  of  without 
the  reeds  ;  and  an  opening  between  weed-beds,  (so  likely  a 
situation  for  jack,)  either  in  rivers  or  lakes,  can  seldom  be 
reached  without  a  length  rod.  A  proper  rod,  however,  for 
the  intended  sport,  not  only  adds  to  the  pleasure  of  the  prac- 
tice, but  likewise  to  the  success  of  it.  Notwithstanding  all 
which,  it  must  be  conceded,  that  in  pike  and  jack  fishing,  it 
is  more  the  method  of  the  Angler  than  the  merits  of  his  rod, 
that  is  essentially  requisite  to  his  sport." 


124 


THE    PIKE,    &C. 


As  pike  angling  has  become  a  favorite  practice  with  many 
sportsmen,  both  ia  this  comitry  and  Europe,  the  particular 
directions,  practice,  and  instructions  of  the  best,  will  be  se- 
lected for  the  beaefit  of  those  not  initiated.  The  following, 
from  the  last  mentioned  writer,  the  readev  can  adapt  to  his 
peculiar  situation,  compared  with  the  localities  mentioned. 

"  The  rod  or  rods,  for  both  live-bait  fishing  and  trolling 
in  the  rivers  of  the  southern  parts  of  the  kingdom,  may  be 
made  throughout  of  bamboo ;  but  a  rod  so  made  must  be 
composed  of  the  very  best  possible  materials ;  in  which  case, 
in  good  hands,  it  will  be  fully  equal  to  land  any  pike  that  does 
not  exceed  eight  or  ten  pounds  in  weight.  But  where  pike 
may  probably  be  met  with  of  heavier  weight,  the  butt  and 
top  at  least,  should  be  of  some  solid  wood  ;  the  former  may 
be  of  willow,*  for  lightness,  and  the  latter  of  any  tough,  con- 
densed wood,  at  the  discretion  of  a  good  rod  maker,  sur- 
mounted with  one-third  whalebone. 

"  For  the  lochs  of  Scotland,  the  lakes  and  meres  of  Eng- 
lish counties,  known  to  contain  pike  from  15  to  20  pounds,  or 
more,  in  weight,  the  rod  must  wholly  be  formed  of  solid 
wood.t  But  even  here  we  recommend  that  the  butts  be 
bored,  both  to  lighten,  and  also  to  contain  one  or  two  spare 
tops,  which  it  may  very  well  do  without  weakening  it 
Every  trolling  rod  should  be  fitted  up  with  at  least  one 
spare  top,  but  it  may  with  still  more  propriety  have 
two.     One    should    be    made    shorter    and    stronger    than 


*  The  butts  of  rods  so5d  at  the  fishinj-tackle  stores,  are  usually  made 
of  maple,  and  the  tops  of  lance-wood,  which  is  a  good  arrangement  of 
woods,  the  former  being  perfectly  strong  and  solid,  and  the  latter  tough 
and  pliable;  add  the  bamboo  joints,  as  above  described,  of  a  proper 
taper,  and  you  have  a  rod  that  cannot  be  surpassed  for  lightness, 
strength,  and  durability.    See  Article  on  Rods,  page  22. 

t  Well  seasoned  ash,  with  a  maple  butt  and  lance-wood  top,  is  the 
best  description  that  can  be  used,  and  is  suitable  for  lake  fishing. 


THE    PIKE,    &C.  125 

the  other,  to  \ary  the  fishing  according  to  circumstances, 
and  likevdse  to  enable  the  Angler  at  a  distance  from  his 
stores,  to  have  recourse  to  snap-fishing,  if  he  find  the  jack 
dainty ;  this  purpose  may,  however,  be  still  more  effectually 
answered  by  a  second  top,  made  wholly  of  whalebone, 
and  less  than  half  the  length  of  the  other.  Where  the  angling 
mania  has  possession  of  a  traveller,  as  it  had  of  ourselves,  it  is 
of  much  importance  that  an  article  should  be  capable  of  be- 
ing converted  into  many  purposes.  By  such  a  rod  as  we 
have  just  described,  he  may  troll  in  every  water  in  the  king- 
dom ;  nay,  he  may  extend  his  fishings  to  the  enormous  pike 
of  the  Canadian  lakes,  mailed  over  with  rhomboidal  scales, 
and  yet  he  may  not  return  without  a  successful  run. 

"  Captain  Williamson  says,  that  *  the  spare  top  of  an  ordi- 
nary bottom-rod,  which  is  occasionally  employed  for  jack 
trolling,  should  be  firm,  and  not  too  pliant,  so  that  it  will  bear 
a  weight  of  four  pounds  hung  to  the  hook  w^ithout  breaking.' 
Mr.  Salter  on  this  head,  says :  *  I  have  two  tops  to  my  troll 
ing  rod,  which  I  always  carry  with  me,  in  case  of  breaking 
one,  &c. ;  one  is  made  very  flexible  of  wood,  and  a  whale- 
bone top,  about  two  feet  long;  to  this,  for  strength  and  secu- 
rity, I  have  a  ring  in  the  wood  part,  as  well  as  the  large  one 
at  the  whalebone  top ;  this  top  1  always  use  when  trolling 
with  the  gorge-bait,  or  when  fishing  with  live  bait ;  the  other 
top  is  made  wholly  of  stout  whalebone,  about  one  foot  long ; 
this  I  use  only  when  snap-fishuig,  for  which  it  is  well  adapted 
by  its  superior  strength  and  stiffness.' 

"  The  length  of  the  rod  for  live-bait  fishing  and  trolling,  may 
vary  from  15  to  17  feet,  according  to  circumstances ;  if  its 
wood  and  workmanship  can  be  depended  upon,  16  feet  is  in 
no  case  too  much ;  and  where  extensive  streams  are  fished 
over,  one  of  16  or  18  feet  is  convenient." 

The  Rings  or  Guides  for  the  Line,  on  a  trolling  rod, 
should  be  much  larger  than  those  for  salmon  or  trout,  and 


126 


THE    PIKE,    &C. 


-■3 

-^ 

a 

^x^ 

{—- 

wider  apart,  say  from  two  to  three  feet  from  each  other. 
The  solid  rings,  or  patent  guides,  as  they  are  called,  and  the 
patent  tip  or  end,  should  be  preferred. 

The  manner  of  baiting,  where  a  single  hook,  is  used,  for 
live  or  dead  bait-fishing,  is  the  same  as  that  before  described 
for  trout. 

The  Bottom- Tackle  is  sometimes  fitted  up  with  swivel- 
traces,  which  Blaine  thus  describes:  "  The  single,  is  thus 
made :  to  about  10  or  12  inches  of  gimp,  add  a  hook-swivel 
at  one  end,  and  a  loop  at  the  other ;  the  hook  of  the  swivel 
will  receive  the  loop  also  of  the  gimp-hook,  and  the  gut  loop 
will  receive  the  reel  line  by  a  draw  bow-knot,  which  it  will 
be  prudent  occasionally  to  examine,  w^hen  the  reel  Une  used  is 
one  either  of  hair,  or  silk  and  hair,  as  such  knots  made  in 
them  sometimes  loosen,  but  in  the  plaited  sUk  this  never 
happens.  It  will  be  necessary  to  add  three  or  four  swan 
shots  to  the  trace,  or  otherwise  a  dip-lead,*  either  of  which 
should  be  fixed  just  above  the  swivel.  Note  here,  that  it  is 
necessary  to  add  some  weight  to  all  the  fish-bait  beyond  their 
own:  the  intention  of  which  is,  that  the  increased  resistance 
to  the  water,  made  by  this  means,  occasions  an  increase  in  the 
velocity  of  their  spinning,  by  way  of  counteraction. 

"  The  Double  Swivel-Trace,  is  made  by  uniting  two  10 
inch  lengths  of  gimp  by  a  box-swivel;  to  one  end  of  this 
trace,  add  another  swivel  of  the  hook  kind,  loop  the  remain 
ing  end,  and  finish  by  adding  to  the  trace  by  way  of  ballast, 
either  swan-shot  or  a  dip-lead.  Note,  that  in  the  application 
of  these  traces,  it  may  be  sometimes  more  convenient,  in 
stead  of  making  a  loop  for  receiving  the  hook-loop,  to  whip 
the  hook  at  once  to  the  trace,  and  this  may  be  more  particu- 

*  A  sinker,  with  swivels  attached  to  each  end,  dispensing  with  the 
swivel  described,  is  generally  preferred  by  American  Anglers  ;  and  also 
in  the  double  swivel-trace,  one  of  the  swivels  is  often  omitted,  and  a 
8  mvel  sinker  used  instead. 


THE    PIKE       &C. 


127 


larly  proper  when  the  water  is  shallow.  On  this  subject, 
Salter  says :  *  In  the  summer  months,  when  the  water  gets 
low  and  bright,  from  a  contiimance  of  dry  weather,  I  have 
found,  when  I  used  traces  made  of  the  choicest  twisted  gut, 
instead  of  gimp,  and  hooks  also  tied  to  twisted  gut,  that  I 
have  killed  more  jack  and  pike,  either  when  trolling  with  the 
gorge,  or  live-bait  fishing,  than  I  could  if  I  used  gimp.  This, 
you  are  to  observe,  is  only  during  the  summer,  when  jack 
and  pike  are  not  much  on  the  feed,  and  the  water  is  very 
bright — they  seem  shy  of  coarse  tackle;  but  not  so  in  winter 
and  spring,  for  they  are  then  well  on  the  feed  and  the  water 
is  generally  somewhat  discolored,  at  which  time  and  seasons 
I  believe  jack  and  pike  would  take  a  baited  hook  if  it  was 
tied  to  a  clothes'  line  or  rope." 

Another  mode  of  taking  the  pike  is  by  baiting  with  a 
small  fish  on  the  gorge-hook,  which  Hofland  says  is  "  either  a 
double  or  single  hook,  fixed  on  a  twisted  brass  wire,  and  loaded 
on  the  shank  with  lead,  to  which  is  attached  a  piece  of  gimp, 
eight  or  ten  inches  long,  at  the  end  of  which  is  a  small  loop. 
To  bait  this  hook  you  must  have  a  brass  needle,  about  seven 
inches  long;  put  the  loop  of  the  gimp  in  the  eye  or  small 
curve  of  the  needle  ;  then  put  the  point  of  the  needle  in  at 
the  mouth  of  the  fish,  and  bring  it  out  at  his  tail ;  bring  the 
gimp  and  wire  along  with  it,  the  lead  being  fixed  in  the  belly 
of  the  bait  fish,  and  th^  hook  or  hooks  lying  close  to  the  out- 
side of  the  mouth;  then  turn  the  points  of  the  hooks  towards 
his  eyes,  if  a  double  hook,  but  if  a  single  one,  dlt'ectly  in  a 
line  with  his  belly ;  next  tie  the  fish's  tail  to  the  arming  wire 
very  neatly  with  a  strong  thread.  To  the  line  on  your  reel 
you  must  attach  a  gimp  trace  24  inches  long,  having  a  swivel 
at  each  end,  and  one  in  the  middle.  The  spring-swivel  at 
the  end  of  your  line,  is  to  be  hooked  on  the  loop  of  your 
baited  trace,  and  you  are  ready  for  sport. 

"  When  you  are  thus  prepared,  drop  in  your  bait  lightly 


128 


THE    PIKE,    &C. 


before  you,  then  cast  it  on  each  side,  and  let  the  third  throw 
be  across  the  river,  or  as  far  as  you  can  reach ;  still  letting 
the  bait  fall  lightly  on  the  water.  In  each  cast  let  your  bait 
fall  nearly  to  the  bottom ;  then  draw  it  up  gently  towards 
you,  and  again  let  it  sink  and  rise  tUl  you,  draw  it  out  of  the 
■water  for  another  cast. 

"  The  further  you  throw  your  bait  if  the  water  be  broad, 
(provided  always  that  it  fall  lightly,)  the  greater  your  chance 
of  success,  so  that  you  are  not  interrupted  by  weeds,  roots  of 
trees,  &c. ;  and  if  the  water  should  be  very  weedy,  you  will 
be  compelled  to  drop  your  bait  into  deep  clear  openings. 

"  When  you  feel  a  run,  let  your  line  be  perfectly  free,  and 
allow  the  fish  to  make  for  his  haunt  without  check ;  and 
when  he  stops,  give  out  a  little  slack  line ;  by  your  watch 
give  him  ten  minutes  to  pouch  the  bait  before  you  strike, 
which  you  may  then  do,  by  first  gently  drawing  in  your  slack 
line,  and  then  striking  gently;  but  should  your  fish  move 
soon  after  he  has  been  to  his  haunt,  give  him  line,  and  he  will 
stop  again ;  but,  after  this,  if  he  move  a  second  time  before 
the  ten  minutes  are  expired,  strike,  and  you  will  most  likely 
secure  him ;  but  if  he  has  only  been  playing  with  the  bait,  you 
will  have  lost  him.  When  I  have  been  so  served  once  or 
twice,  I  generally  resort  to  my  snap-tackle. 

"  If  you  have  fairly  hooked  your  fish,  he  cannot  easily 
break  away ;  and  as  your  tackle  is  strong,  unless  he  is  very 
large,  you  need  not  give  out  much  line,  but  hold  him  fast  and 
clear  of  the  weeds,  giving  him  but  a  short  struggle  for  his 
life.  The  gaff  is  better  than  a  net  for  landing  a  large  pike,  for 
he  is  dangerous  to  handle,  and  his  bite  is  much  to  be  dreaded. 

"  When  you  are  without  either  gaff  or  landing-net,  seize 
the  fish  by  putting  your  finger  and  thumb  into  his  eyes." 

The  pike  is  sometimes  angled  for  with  worms,  when  the 
water  is  clear,  and  the  game  runs  small.     Blaine  says : 

"  Worm-fishing  for  jack  is  a  species  of  live-bait  angling, 


THE    PIKE,    &.C.  129 

that  we  and  others  have  sometimes  practised  with  success, 
particularly  where  small  jack  are  numerous,  in  ditches  and 
dykes,  in  marshes,  &c.  In  our  worm-fishing  for  jack,  we 
have  found  the  brandling  the  most  successful  of  all  the  varie- 
ties, and  our  practice  has  usually  been  to  employ  two  at  a 
time  on  a  No.  3  or  4  hook ;  we  however  did  not  use  the 
common  wire  hook,  but  the  barbed  or  stronger  kind,  by 
which  means  the  strength  was  increased,  though  the  appear- 
ance was  not  rendered  more  formidable.  And  note,  that  this 
kind  of  hook  may  be  prudently  used  in  all  the  various  me- 
thods to  be  detailed,  when  single  hooks  of  small  size  are  re 
quired.  Use  a  float  correspondent  to  the  nature  of  the  water; 
and  if  that  be  moderately  deep  and  at  all  rufl3ed,  let  the  float 
be  a  small  sized  cork  one  ;  but  when  the  surface  is  not  dis- 
turbed, use  a  porcupine's  quUl,  for  the  finer  the  tackle,  the 
greater  the  chance  of  success.  Retire  as  far  as  possible  from 
the  banks,  and  strike  tolerably  quick,  at  least  after  the  second 
tug  is  felt,  by  which  time  the  jack  has  usually  got  the  worm 
within  the  throat." 

Live-Bait  and  Snap-Angling.  These  are  favorite  modes 
of  sport  with  many  Anglers,  but  objected  to  by  others  on  ac- 
count of  the  spiceof  inhumanity  with  which  the  practice  is  tinc- 
tured, by  attaching  the  live  bait  to  the  hook,  in  anticipation  of 
a  bite  from  the  all-devouring  jack.  It  is  usually  practised  in 
the  summer  months,  when  the  water  is  low  and  clear,  and  the 
game  requires  particular  attention.  The  following  methods 
of  baiting,  frnm  Blaine,  are  sufficiently  compassionate  for  the 
most  fastidious  member  of  the  Humane  or  Peace  Societies. 

"  One  of  the  most  simple  and  least  painful,  is  to  pass  the 
hook  under  the  back  fin,  just  even  with  the  roots  of  its  rays, 
including  a  small  portion  of  its  skin  only,  by  which  means  the 
fish  will  not  be  materially  injured,  and  will  continue  to  swim 
strong,  and  show  itself.  In  this  method  it  has  been  found  that 
the  struggles  of  the  fish,  or  even  the  violence  of  the  striking 


ff-  ^^iW.  / 


130 


of  a  jack,  has  often  forced  the  bait  from  the  Hook;  to  prevent 
which,  a  thread  has  been  carried  round  the  point  of  the  hook 
on  one  side,  and  being  passed  under  the  belly,  has  been  fas- 
tened to  the  shank  of  the  other  side ;  but  this  deforms  the 
fish,  and  injures  its  vitaHty,  it  is  therefore  not  an  ehgible 
practice :  its  object  may  be  obtained  in  a  more  effectual 
manner,  thus :  instead  of  one,  make  use  of  two  strong  but 
small  hooks.  No.  3,  4  or  5,  according  to  the  size  of  the  bait ; 
hang  each  of  these  to  a  small  piece  of  strong  gut,  of  three 
inches  in  length,  and  loop  each  end.  Introduce  each  of  these 
hooks  a  very  little  removed  from  each  other,  under  the  dor- 
sal fin,  one  on  one  side,  and  the  other  on  the  other  side ;  this 
done,  if  they  are  critically  placed,  these  two  loops  will  meet 
BO  exactly  as  to  be  received  into  the  loop  of  the  trace-lines, 
without  dragging  one  side  more  than  the  other.  This  me- 
thod, we  can  venture  to  promise,  will  prevent  the  escape  of 
the  bait,  and  is,  as  we  believe,  much  more  effective  in  taking 
the  prey  also. 

"  The  Snap-Bait  variety  is  seldom  chosen  in  pike-fishing 
by  preference,  but  is  rather  forced  on  the  fisher,  in  the  spring 
and  summer  months,  when  the  pike  and  jack  are  not  much 
on  the  alert  in  taking  baits.  On  the  contrary,  if  one  of  them 
does  seize  a  bait  at  these  times,  he  is  apt  to  pouch  or  gorge 
it,  but  after  roving  about  with  it  in  his  mouth  for  some 
time,  he  ejects,  or  blows  it  out,  as  Anglers  term  it.  Snap- 
fishing,  we  may  add,  intermixes  itself  with  live-bait  fishing, 
and  with  trolling  also ;  or  rather,  on  some  occasions  we  add 
a  snap  mode  of  striking  the  pike  to  the  other  methods ;  we 
have  therefore  a  live-snap  and  a  dead-snap,  and  now  and  then 
snap-hooks  are  likewise  added  to  a  gorge-hook  m  trolling,  and 
that  vsrith  perfect  success.  In  all  cases,  therefore,  if  the  bait- 
hooks  are  such  as  can  be  depended  on,  and  the  rod  be  suffi- 
ciently strong,  the  methods  already  described,  and  such  as 
are  to  follow,  may  be  made  snap-fishing,  by  simply  striking 


THE     PIKE, 


131 


the  fish  at  once,  mstead  of  allowing  him  to  take  the  bait  away 
to  his  hold ;  the  principal,  and  indeed  the  only  difference  be 
ing,  that  when  we  go  out  with  the  intent  of  snap-angling,  oui 
hooks  are  large,  and  ought  to  be  strong  also,  and  our  rod  is 
strong  and  short. 

'*  Directions  for  making  a  Live  Snap-Bait.  Take  two 
strong  hooks,  of  size  No.  3  or  4,  according  to  the  strength  ot 
their  make,  as  well  as  the  size  of  the  bait :  tie  each  to  about 
an  inch  and  a  quarter  of  fine  twisted  wire,  and  again  tie  these 
two  wires  together,  including  in  the  tie  a  hook*  No.  8  or  9, 
and  also  eight  or  ten  inches  of  gimp,  which  loop  at  the  other 
end :  but  in  the  tying,  place  the  large  hooks,  contrariwise,  so 
that  one  may  point  towards  the  head,  and  the  other  towards 
the  tail  of  the  bait-fish,  which  will  greatly  increase  the  chance 
of  success  when  using  it.  To  apply  this,  enter  the  small 
hook  under  the  back  fin,  and  allow  one  of  the  two  large 
hooks  to  apply  itself  close  to  one  side  of  the  bait,  and  the 
other  to  be  similarly  placed  on  the  other,  but  with  the  direc- 
tion of  their  points  reversed.  We  have  often,  even  when  the 
spring-snap  has  been  in  our  book,  made  use  of  this  more  sim- 
ple plan  in  preference,  particularly  where  our  only  baits  were 
gudgeons.  A  good  sized  roach  or  dace  can  conceal  the  snap, 
but  it  is  hardly  applicable  in  any  way  to  a  small  fish. 

*'  Dead-Bait  Spring-Snap.  This  machine  can  be  applied 
either  to  the  dead  or  living  bait ;  it  is,  however,  we  think, 
more  applicable  to  the  former,  as  it  requires  a  sufficient  hold 
on  the  bait  to  ofier  a  resistaiice  equal  to  the  springing  snap,  or 
the  benefit  is  lost :  such  a  hold  is  injurious  to  the  live  bait, 
and  soon  destroys  it.  No  bait  answers  so  well  for  the  placing 
of  the  spring-snap,  as  either  a  roach,  bream,t  or  perch,  on 

*  These  hooks  should  be  tied  near  the  top,  in  a  similar  position  to 
that  on  the  spring  snap-hook,  described  on  plate  of  hooks. 

t  Any  of  the  small  fish  that  inhabit  the  stream  with  the  pike,  will  an 
swer  the  purpose,  and  be  equally  acceptable. 


132 


THE    EIRE,     tC. 


account  of  the  breadth  of  their  figures ;  but  to  either  of  these, 
and  to  the  roach  particularly,  it  can  be  readily  and  conve 
niently  attached.  Choose  a  fresh  dead  roach,  of  from  three 
to  five  ounces  ;  insert  the  small  hook  of  the  spring  as  above 
directed  for  the  common  snap,  but  a  little  deeper,  so  as  to  take 
a  firmer  and  deeper  hold,  than  when  applied  to  the  living 
one.  If  the  apparatus,  from  its  size,  must  project  beyond  the 
line  of  the  fish  form,  let  it  be  above  ;  but  by  no  means  allow 
the  bend  of  the  hooks  to  appear  under  the  ventral  surface. 
The  figures  Nos.  4  and  5  on  Plate  No,  2,  exhibiting  the  snap 
sprung  and  unsprung,  furnish  a  sufficient  exemplification  of 
its  mode  of  action ;  in  seizing  of  the  bait,  the  pike  or  jack 
draw  the  hooks  out  of  the  detaining  frame,  and  in  conse- 
quence they  immediately  expand  and  fix  themselves  into  the 
jaws  of  the  fish  which  has  seized  it. 

"  Of  the  Hooks  in  Snap-Fishing.  We  must  again  say,  it 
is  of  great  consequence  that  those  to  strike  the  pike  be  so 
placed  as  to  easily  clear  themselves ;  if,  therefore,  it  is  ex- 
pected of  these  hooks  that  they  shall  support  and  play  the 
fish,  and  yet  be  ready  at  a  moment  to  disengage  themselves 
from  this  attachment,  then  too  much  is  expected  of  them ; 
and  when  they  ought  to  be  free,  to  strike  at  once  into  the 
mouth  of  the  pike,  they  are  apt  to  be  buried  deep  in  the  body 
of  the  bait.  It  was  purposely  to  relieve  this  strain  on  the 
bait  that  we  added  to  the  traces  a  small  hook,  which  then 
left  the  large  hooks  at  liberty  to  disengage  themselves :  for 
on  the  small  hooks  the  stress  of  the  action  of  playing  the  fish, 
was  then  altogether  placed.  It  is  on  this  principle  that  the 
snap-baits  in  general  should  be  formed,  and  where  they  have 
not  some  sustaining  hooks,  independent  of  the  snap-hooks, 
then  they  ought  never  to  pass  through  the  centre  of  the  body 
of  the  bait-fish,  but  superficially  under  the  skin  only,  so  that 
when  the  pike  strikes,  the  skin  of  the  bait  may  readily  tear 
away  by  the  united  forces  of  the  stroke  of  the  Angler  and  his 


THE     PIKE,     &C, 


133 


prey,  the  consequence  of  which  is,  that  the  hook  or  hooks 
immediately  disengage  themselves  from  the  bait,  and  pene- 
trating the  mouth  of  the  pike,  they  retain  him. 

"  The  Bait  being  properly  fixed,  cast  it  lightly  into  the 


rod,  observing  to  make  the  first  cast  in  shore,  but  be  as 
much  concealed  as  possible  from  viewr.  If  success  does  not 
follow  this,  extend  the  throw  further  into  the  water,  and  to 
do  that  with  effect,  give  the  impulsive  swing  of  the  bait  with 
the  same  length  of  hne  as  before,  but  have  in  addition  a  yard 
or  two  of  loose  line  in  the  left  hand,  which  as  the  bait  flies 
forward,  loosen  quickly  from  the  hand,  and  as  it  arrives  at  its 
destination,  drop  the  point  of  the  rod,  which  will  ease  the 
bait  into  the  water  vdthout  injury  to  itself,  or  alarm  to  the 
pike.  The  attempts  of  the  live  bait  to  make  for  the  weeds 
or  the  shore,  must  be  counteracted  by  drawing  it  back  or 
giving  it  a  new  direction,  and  as  it  flags  in  liveliness,  stimulate 
it  by  shaking  the  rod  a  little,  which  often  stimulates  the  jack 
also  to  strike  the  bait.  In  drawing  up  the  bait  to  remove  it 
to  a  new  situation,  observe  to  do  it  gently,  and  at  the  same 
time  watch  the  water,  for  it  is  not  at  all  uncommon  for  a  jack 
to  follow  on  its  attempted  removal.  If  any  thing  of  this  kind 
is  perceived,  by  no  means  remove  the  bait,  but  lower  it  again 
into  the  water,  and  begin  moving  it  quickly  at  a  few  inches 
below  the  surface,  backwards  and  forwards.  In  all  cases, 
keep  the  float  in  sight,  but  avoid  showing  yourself  if  possible, 
particularly  in  the  summer  months,  and  when  the  weather 
and  water  are  both  bright.  At  such  a  time,  to  increase  your 
small  chance  of  sport,  try  to  get  the  sun  before  you,  and  the 
wind  behind ;  the  former  you  might  well  dispense  with  alto- 
gether, the  other  will  prove  your  best  friend ;  but  if  there  be 
Bun,  you  must  at  least  take  care  that  it  do  not  reflect  either 
your  own  shadow  or  that  of  your  rod  on  the  water.  In  the 
months  of  February,  October  and  November,  this  mav  be  of 


134 


THE     P  I  K  K  ,     &.C. 


little  consequence,  but  it  is  otherwise  in  the  spring  and  sum- 
mer months. 

"  Be  careful  not  to  mistake  the  motions  of  the  bait  for  those 
which  are  made  by  the  pike  or  jack  when  seizing  it.  With 
the  experienced  Angler  there  is  no  danger  in  this,  but  one  less 
initiated  might  be  apt  to  fall  into  the  error,  particularly  as  the 
mere  sight  of  the  jack  will  sometimes  make  the  bait  throw 
himself  out  of  water  to  avoid  his  dreaded  foe.  The  proficient 
at  such  a  time  will  do  nothing  more  than  gently  move  his 
bait  as  though  it  were  going  to  leave  the  spot,  which  alone 
w^ill  sometimes  occasion  the  jack  to  seize  it  at  once.  The 
seizure  of  the  bait  by  the  pike  is  marked  by  the  float,  which 
is  not  throvni  up,  but  on  the  contrary  is  drawn  violently 
down,  and  the  water  is  likewise  observed  to  undulate,  unless 
the  bait  be  seized  at  a  considerable  depth.  Be  prepared  for 
this  with  a  free  line  as  regards  the  reel ;  it  is  also  a  good 
plan  to  have  in  the  left  hand  a  yard  or  two  of  loose  line  to 
give  out  as  the  pike  runs,  which  is  infinitely  preferable  to  al- 
lowing it  to  be  pulled  by  the  fish  himself  from  the  reel ; 
which  alone,  with  a  pike  not  well  on  the  feed,  will  cause  him 
to  reject  it.  Whatever  line,  therefore,  is  required  in  the  pro- 
gress of  the  fish  to  his  hold  or  haunt,  veer  it  out  by  the  hand, 
and  such  hold  is  seldom  far  off,  and  he  will  when  there,  stop 
to  gorge  the  bait. 

"  In  striking,  let  not  impatience  tempt  you:  wait  until 
you  are  certain  that  the  pike  has  actually  gorged  the  bait; 
otherwise  your  sliglit  hold  on  your  bait  and  prey  will  tear 
away,  and  you  will  lose  both  at  the  same  effort.  The  pouch- 
ing time  is  by  no  means  definite,  but  is  regulated  by  circum- 
stances :  thus,  having  satisfied  yourself  by  the  previous  still 
ness  of  the  pike  or  jack,  that  he  is  gorging,  and  by  his  again 
moving  out  from  his  retreat  (which  signal  you  must  look  for) 
that  he  has  actually  done  so,  give  your  line  a  smart  hand 


THE    PIKE,    &C  135 

Stroke,  which  will  fix  the  barbs  into  the  maw  beyond  the 
power  of  ejection." 

Trolling  for  Pike.  This  method,  the  last  given,  is  per- 
haps the  best  of  the  series  of  the  different  contrivances  for 
taking  this  species  of  game.  It  is  generally  practised  in  two 
ways,  by  roving  or  drawing  the  line  from  the  shore,  or  by 
trolling  the  line  gently  from  a  small  sail-boat  or  skiff,  with  an 
attendant,  to  be  guided  by  your  directions.  With  a  stiff  rod, 
reel,  and  other  tackle,  without  a  float,  as  before  described, 
the  latter  method,  with  a  good  ground  and  large  game,  is  de- 
cidedly at  the  top  of  pike-angling.  Whether  on  shore  or  in  a 
boat,  the  manner  of  proceeding  should  be  the  same. 

Of  Bank-Trolling,  Blaine,  the  best  authority,  has  the  fol- 
lowing :  '•  The  method  of  holding  the  rod  differs  in  the  prac- 
tice of  different  Anglers,  some  grasp  it  firmly  in  the  right 
hand,  and  depend  on  the  strength  of  their  arm  for  deUvering 
the  bait  out  to  its  extent ;  but  we  apprehend  that  much  the 
better  method  is  that  of  resting  the  butt  against  the  hip,  thigh, 
or  stomach,  or  wherever  convenient  support  can  be  obtained, 
(we  always  use  our  hip  for  the  purpose,)  by  which  much  ex- 
ertion is  saved,  the  bait  can  be  cast  much  wider,  and  when 
the  Angler  is  accustomed  to  the  habit,  he  may,  by  this  means, 
direct  it  within  a  few  inches  of  the  spot  he  aims  at.  The  rod 
placed,  and  the  bait  swinging  on  such  a  length  of  line  as  can 
be  managed,  retain  within  the  left  hand  a  yard  of  it  loose, 
which  as  the  bait  is  cast  gradually  run  off  the  hand,  directing 
it  rather  slantingly;  by  such  means  it  will  shoot  diagonally 
forward,  with  a  natural  appearance  impelled  by  the  weight  of 
the  lead.*  When  delivered,  begin  to  move  it  after  the  man- 
ner of  the  motion,  about  mid-water,  observing  always  to  avoid 
removing  it  quickly  from  the  water  for  another  throw,  for 

*  This  is  where  the  leaded  gorge-hook  is  used,  the  method  of  baiting 
most  adopted  in  trolling. 


136  THE     PIKE,    &C. 

both  pike  and  jack  often  follow  the  bait,  and  seize  it  at  tne 
moment  it  rises  towards  the  surface,  fearful  it  is  going  to 
throw  itself  out  of  the  water  to  avoid  the  pursuit. 

"  When  you  have  a  run,  or  in  other  words,  when  a  pike 
or  jack  has  seized  your  bait,  lower  the  point  of  the  rod  to- 
wards the  water,  and  at  the  same  time  draw  the  line  gradu- 
ally from  the  reel  with  the  left  hand,  so  that  nothing  may 
impede  or  check  the  progress  of  the  fish  in  carrying  the  bait 
to  its  hold  in  order  to  pouch  it;  do  not  strike  until  he  has  had 
possession  of  the  bait  about  seven  minutes,  or  till  the  line 
shakes  or  moves  in  the  water,  then  wind  up  the  slack  line, 
and  turn  the  rod,  so  that  the  reel  may  be  uppermost  instead 
of  underneath,  then  strike,  but  not  with  violence." 

Taylor  offers  an  excellent  practical  remark  on  striking, 
when  he  says:  "  The  pike  will  as  soon  as  he  has  seized  a 
bait,  run  to  his  hold  to  pouch  or  swallow  it ;  allow  him  there- 
fore five  minutes  to  do  so,  (unless  the  line  slackens  before  that 
time,  which  is  a  signal  that  he  has  already  done  it,)  and  then 
strike.  But  if  after  he  has  run  off  with  the  bait,  he  makes 
scarcely  any  stay  with  it  at  his  hold,  but  goes  off  with  it  again, 
you  should  not  strike  till  after  he  has  rested  a  second  time 
allowing  him  still  about  five  minutes;  but  if  he  should  run 
off  a  third  time  before  the  five  minutes  are  expired,  draw  a 
tight  line,  and  strike  him  instantly." 

Captain  Williamson  observes,  that  "  when  you  see  a  great 
number  of  very  small  bubbles  rising  from  the  spot  where  you 
know,  by  the  direction  of  your  line,  the  jack  is  lying,  you 
should  forbear  from  striking,  it  being  a  certain  sign  that  he 
has  not  pouched  your  bait."* 

"  The  pike  being  struck,''^  the  first  directions  continue, 


*  There  is  much  difference  of  opinion  about  the  time  to  be  j^iven  for 
pouching  the  bait,  some  giving  iu  some  cases  fifteen  or  twenty  minutes, 
and  one  writer  recommends  tliirty  minutes  I  The  most  experienced,  in 
particular  instances,  give  ten,  and  even  fifteen  minutes;  but  thirty,  or 


M&, 


THE    PIKE,     &C. 


137 


"  if  it  should  be  a  large  fish,  and  the  place  open,  give  more 
line,  and  do  not  pull  hard  at  any  time,  unless  your  tackle 
should  be  in  danger  of  entangling  among  weeds  or  bushes , 
and  when  this  is  the  case,  the  utmost  caution  is  necessary 
lest  the  rod,  line,  hook,  or  hold,  should  break.  When  com- 
pletely exhausted,  and  brought  to  the  side,  take  it  up  with  a 
net,  or  fix  a  landing-hook  in  it,  either  through  the  upper  lip  or 
under  jaw ;  or,  if  in  want  of  either  of  these,  put  your  thumb 
and  finger  into  its  eyes,  which  is  the  most  safe  hold  with  the 
hand." 

It  is  also  most  judiciously  remarked  by  Mr.  Salter: 
**  When  you  have  hooked  a  jack  or  pike,  and  played  him  till 
he  is  quite  exhausted,  and  you  are  drawing  him  ashore,  make 
it  a  rule  to  float  him  on  his  side,  and  keep  the  head  a  little 
raised  above  the  surface  of  the  water,  that  the  nose  or  gills 
may  not  hang  to  or  catch  hold  of  weeds,  &c.,  while  you  are 
thus  engaged  bringing  your  prize  to  the  shore ;  for  some- 
times you  cannot  avoid  drawing  it  over  or  among  the  weeds; 
and  I  have  seen  a  pike  touch  and  get  entangled  in  this  way, 
and  before  it  could  be  disentangled,  it  recovered  from  its  ex- 
haustion or  stupor,  and  occasioned  much  trouble  and  hazard 
before  it  could  again  be  subdued. 

**  When  a  pike  has  been  brought  to  land,  the  inexperi- 
enced should  be  w^arued  to  be  careful  of  his  jaws,  and  to  ob- 
serve that  after  he  appears  wholly  exhausted,  he  can  yet  bite 
severely.  He  can  also,  if  he  be  not  immediately  stunned, 
make  his  way  again  to  the  water  most  artfully,  by  repeated 
jumps,  of  which  we  witnessed  a  most  ludicrous  instance. 
The  pike  being  stunned,  it  becomes  necessary  to  recover  the 
gorge-hook  from  the  maw.  To  do  this,  turn  him  on  his  side, 
and  set  the  hollow  of  your  foot  behind  his  gills ;  then  with 
your  spud  wrench  open  his  mouth,  and  introduce  your  dis- 

even  twenty  minutes,  would  tire  the  patience  of  the  most  ardent  of  the 
followers  of  Isaac  Walton. 


138 


THE    PIKE,    &,C. 


gorger.  If  the  hooks  are  in  the  maw,  as  they  usually  are 
under  the  gorging  system,  open  the  fish's  stomach  about  the 
middle,  and  you  will  be  opposite  to  or  rather  under  the 
points,  so  that  your  gimp  will  be  safe.  Cut  away  the  parts 
that  are  hooked,  and  unslipping  the  knot  that  holds  the  gimp 
to  the  reel  line,  draw  your  bait,  hooks,  and  gimp,  all  through 
the  aperture  made  in  the  stomach.  This  will  disfigure  the 
fish  less  than  cutting  down  the  jaws,  until  the  hook  can  be 
got  out  through  the  mouth.  It  is  a  good  plan  in  trolling  to 
be  provided  with  two  or  three  sticks  of  various  lengths  ;  one 
of  these  will  assist  to  prop  open  a  jack's  mouth,  while  the 
Angler  is  attempting  the  extraction  of  the  hook,  but  by  no 
means  trust  your  fingers  in  his  mouth  unless  he  be  gagged." 

In  addition  to  the  common  pike,  jack,  or  pickerel,  the  fol- 
lowing notice  of  different  species,  by  Flint,  in  his  History  of 
the  Mississippi  Valley,  may  be  interesting  to  the  reader. 

"  Pike  Essex.  We  have  noted  many  species  of  pike  in 
the  Ohio  and  Mississippi,  and  their  waters.  They  are  called 
pike,  pickerel,  and  jack-fish,  and  perfectly  resemble  the 
fish  of  the  same  name  in  the  Atlantic  waters.  The  Indians  of 
the  Wabash  and  Illinois  call  them  piccanau.  They  are  of  all 
sizes,  from  a  half  to  twenty  pounds. 

"  Essex  Vittatus,  jack-fish,  white  pickerel.  Length 
sometimes  five  feet." 

The  latter  appears  to  be  a  distinct  species.  They  are  very 
good  for  the  table,  and  further  as  to  his  angling  qualities  we 
are  not  informed. 

Having  given  the  pike  a  long  run  through  many  pages 
and  over  what  may  appear  to  the  uninitiated  the  rocks  and 
weeds  of  instruction,  it  is  to  be  hoped,  notwithstanding,  that 
the  subject  is  sufficiently  clear  to  introduce  him  to  the  pot, 
which  shall  be  done  through  Mr.  Nobbs,  an  English  author, 
quoted  by  Hofland. 

"  How  to  Cook  the  Pike.     Take  your  pike  and  open  him ; 


THE    PIKE,    &C  . 


139 


rub  him  within  with  salt  and  claret  wine  ;  save  the  melt,  and 
a  little  of  the  bloody  fat ;  cut  him  in  two  or  three  pieces,  and 
put  him  in  when  the  water  boils;  put  in  with  him  sweet 
marjoram,  savory,  thyme  or  fennel,  with  a  good  handful  of 
salt ;  let  them  boll  nearly  half  an  hour.  For  the  sauce,  take 
sweet  butter,  anchovies,  horse-radish,  claret  wine,  of  each  a 
good  quantity;  a  little  of  the  blood,  shalet,  or  garh'c,  and  some 
lemon  sUced;  beat  them  well  together,  and  serve  him  up." 


CHAPTER  VIII. 
OP    THE    PERCH. 


This,  like  the  last  described,  is  a  bold  and  voracious  fish,  and 
with  the  pickerel  and  trout,  has  his  place  in  the  numerous 
ponds  and  lakes  throughout  our  country.  There  are  many 
varieties,  the  most  common  of  wrhich  may  be  described  under 
the  general  heads  of  Common,  Yellow,  White,  and  Black 
Perch. 

The  Common  Perch — (Perca  Fluviatillis — Smith.)  "  A 
beautiful  fish  this,  having  an  olive  brown  tinge,  mingled  with 
a  golden  hue,  together  with  dark  bands  transversely  coursing 
the  sides.  The  first  dorsal  fin  is  somewhat  larger  than  the 
second,  and  marked  posteriorly  by  a  particular  dark  spot. 
All  the  fins  are  tinged  with  a  lively  red,  when  first  brought 
out  of  the  water ;  the  same  color  is  also  observed  on  the  under 
edge  of  the  gill  membrane." 

The  Yellow  Perch — (Bodianus  Flavescens — Mitchill.)  "A 
beautiful  fresh  water  fish  of  a  foot  or  more  in  length,  and  three 
inches  in  depth.  Head  rather  small,  and  tapering  towards 
the  snout.     Both  jaws  roughened  with  very   small  te*?*^:. 


THE     PERCH.  141 

Eyes  large  and  yellowish.  Body  deep  and  thick,  but  becom- 
ing slender  towards  the  tail.  Scales  rather  rough  and  hard. 
Lateral  line  almost  straight.  Tail  rather  concave.  First  ven- 
tral ray  spinous;  as  are  also  the  two  first  and  anal  rays,  all 
the  rays  of  the  foremost  dorsal  fin,  and  the  first  of  the  second 
dorsal.  Colors,  brown  or  olive  on  the  back,  turning  yellow 
on  the  sides,  and  white  on  the  belly.  Faint  brown  zones,  to 
the  number  of  four,  or  more,  diversifying  the  sides  from  the 
back  to  belly.  Dorsal  and  pectoral  fins  brown.  Ventral  and 
anal  scarlet. 

"  In  the  year  1790,  I  tran.sported  about  two  dozen  of  these 
yellow  perch  from  Rockankama  Pond,  in  Siiflfolk  County,  to 
Success  Pond,  in  Queens.  The  distance  is  about  40  miles. 
Since  that  time  there  have  been  as  many  of  them  as  could 
subsist.  My  assistant  iu  the  undertaking,  was  my  uncle  Uriah 
Mitchill,  Esq.,  High  Sheriff  of  Queens  County.  We  filled  a 
large  churn  with  the  waters  of  Rockankama  Pond.  We  put 
80  few  perch  into  it,  that  there  was  no  necessity  for  changing 
it  on  the  road.  We  were  in  a  wagon,  and  came  the  whole 
distance  on  a  walk,  without  stopping  to  refresh  either  man  or 
horse.  The  project  of  transporting  the  fish  to  Success  Pond 
was  completely  answered ;  and  in  this  way  was  the  yellow 
perch  carried  to  Hempstead  waters." 

The  first-mentioned  pond  furnishes  immense  quantities  of 
the  finest  kind  of  yellow  perch,  and  is  the  resort  of  parties  of 
pleasure,  and  those  who  are  fond  of  light  sport,  during  the 
summer  season.  It  is  situated  in  the  northwest  part  of  the 
town  of  Islip,  Long-Island,  is  a  beautiful  and  picturesque 
sheet  of  water,  almost  large  enough  to  deserve  the  name  of  a 
lake ;  its  shape  is  nearly  circular,  the  water  perfectly  clear, 
and  of  gi-eat  depth — so  deep  in  some  places  that  no  bottom 
has  been  found.  The  water  is  said  to  rise  and  fall  once  in 
seven  years. 

Smith  remarks :  "  Under  favorable  circumstances,  for  in 


k 


142 


THE    PERCH. 


mr 

— ■ — - 

_i_  __^.^ 



■ ". . 

— x=^ 

-  ■ 

--- — 



■^~. 

stance,  in  a  deep  large  pond,  shaded  by  a  thrifty  growth  of 
brushwood  on  the  margin,  the  yellow  perch  attains  to  a  large 
size,  and  becomes  elegant  in  its  proportions." 

It  is  the  opinion  of  a  late  writer  on  Natural  History,  that 
this  fish,  and  that  called  the  silver  perch,  is  one  and  the  same 
thing.  He  says :  "  In  our  humble  view,  the  yellow  fins  of 
the  silver  perch,  entitle  it  to  the  name  and  rank  of  the  one 
before  us,  (the  yellow  perch,)  and  further  we  believe,  they 
are  one  and  the  same  thing — the  trifling  difference  in  color 
depending  on  circumstances.  The  love  and  ambition  of  sub- 
division— the  longing  to  be  the  creator  of  new  genera  and  new 
species — has  introduced  more  confusion  into  works  of  natural 
history,  than  can  be  expurgated  in  fifty  years  of  common 
sense  to  come." 

White  Perc^— (Bodianus  Pallidus— Mitchill.)  "  With 
soft  and  connected  dorsal  fins,  pale  back,  and  white  sides. 
Length  eight  inches,  depth  two  and  a  half.  Color  whitish, 
with  a  dark  hue,  according  to  the  angle  of  reflected  light. 
Back,  pale;  tail  even;  lateral  line  extending  through  it. 
Small  teeth  in  the  lips.  Patches  of  them  in  the  throat.  Eyes 
large  and  pale.     Nostrils  double." 

Smith  gives  a  similar  description,  and  also  has  the  follow- 
ing :  "  Pond  Perch  is  another  common  name  for  the  same 
fish:  we  cannot  discover  any  kind  of  difference  whatever." 

Black  or  Red  Perch — (Bodianus  Rufus — Smith.)  "  This 
is  a  little  larger  than  the  silver  perch,  and  though  denominated 
red,  is  really  nearly  black,  after  it  has  done  spawning.  Oper- 
culum serrated,  the  tail  slightly  forked,  and  the  jaws  and  swal- 
low set  with  fine  sharp  teeth.  Usually  the  three  first  rays  in 
theanalare stiff.  Verycommonwherevertheothersarefound." 

Flint  also  mentions  a  species  of  this  perch  peculiar  to 
western  waters,  and  a  fine-  table  fish,  which  he  calls  Brown 
Bass.  It  is  called  Brown  Bass  (Lepomis  Fluxuolaris)  or 
Black  Perch,  and  grows  from  one  to  two  feet  in  length. 


THE    PERCH. 


143 


There  are  many  other  varieties  in  the  ponds  and  brooks 
spread  over  the  length  and  breadth  of  the  country  ;  and  al- 
though they  do  not  give  as  much  sport  to  the  Angler  in  their 
capture,  as  the  trout  and  similar  descriptions,  still  they  are 
much  sought  after,  and  considered  a  fine  table  fish.  They 
generally  spawn  in  the  month  of  March;  and  although  they 
may  be  taken  at  almost  any  time,  either  in  winter  or  summer, 
they  may  be  had  in  the  largest  quantities  and  in  the  finest 
condition,  from  May  to  July.  The  time  of  day  in  which  the 
fisher  will  be  most  successful  in  taking  them,  is  from  seven 
until  ten  in  the  morning,  or  from  four  until  dusk  in  the  eve- 
ning. They  are  very  slow  in  their  growth,  though  some- 
times attaining  a  very  large  size,  and  multiply  very  fast. 

Smith  remarks  :  "  Perhaps  there  is  not  another  fish,  with 
the  exception  of  the  eel,  so  universally  spread  over  the  globe, 
as  the  fresh  water  perch.  It  is  delicate  food,  and  therefore 
exceedingly  valued.  From  the  largest  rivers  above  the  influ- 
ence of  tides,  to  the  smallest  rills  which  trickle  down  the 
sides  of  the  lofty  mountain,  the  perch  is  always  to  be  found. 
They  swim  swiftly,  keeping  near  the  surface,  feeding  on  flies 
and  minute  insects.     In  the  lake  of  Geneva,  a  female  was 


very  clearly  that  it  is  marvellously  prolific,  yet  not  ten  in  a 
hundred  of  the  ova  arrive  at  maturity,  being  the  food  of 
others.  To  the  Greeks  and  Romans,  this  fish  was  perfectly 
femiliar." 

Of  English  authority,  Blaine  says :  "  The  perch  is  con- 
sidered slow  in  its  growth;  but  its  increase  depends  much  on 
the  nature  of  its  habitation:  in  ponds,  and  other  small  and 
perfectly  stagnant  waters,  it  grows  slowly,  and  seldom  ar- 
rives at  last  to  any  great  size  or  weight ;  but  in  rivers,  in  es- 
tuaries, and  particularly  in  such  waters  as  are  subject  to  the 
rising  tide,  and  as  are  slightly  impregnated  with  brackish 
particles,  although  without  current,  they  grow  fast,  and  be- 


144 


THE    PERCH. 


come  very  fat.  Of  the  notifies  of  large  pei'ch,  we  have  be- 
fore observed  on  one  taken  in  the  Serpentine  River,  in  Hyde 
Park,  which  weighed  nine  pounds,  and  another  of  eight 
pounds,  taken  in  Dagenhara  Breach,  by  a  Mr.  Curtis.  In 
'  The  Angler's  Sure  Guide,'  mention  is  made  of  the  portrait 
of  one  caught  near  Oxford,  which  was  twenty-nine  inches 
long,  and  of  a  proportionate  depth ;  and  supposing  such  mea- 
sure to  have  been  correct,  the  weight  must  have  been  very 
great. 

"  The  perch  is  gregarious,  in  the  strictest  sense  of  the 
word :  a  number  herd  together  by  a  sort  of  compact,  which 
confines  them  to  situation,  to  size,  and  to  habit  as  well  as 
manner;  all  are  alike;  the  same  hole  contains  them,  and  the 
same  swim  maintains  them;  and  if  one  should  be  taken,  it  is 
the  Angler's  owii  fault  if  the  whole  do  not  share  the  same 
fate.  This  circumstance  is  remarkable  in  a  fish  of  prey,  since 
predatory  fish  in  most  instances  are  solitary ;  and  it  is  even 
more  singular  in  one  so  voracious  as  to  swallow  its  own  eye, 
as  heretofore  stated.* 

The  common  mode  of  angling  for  perch  in  ponds,  is  vvdth 
a  light  stiff*  rod,  similar  to  that  used  in  worm-angling  for  trout, 

*  The  following'  is  the  circumstance  alluded  to :  "  Some  time  ago,  two 
young  gentlemen  of  Dumfries,  while  fishing  at  Dalswinton  Loch,  having 
expended  their  stock  of  worms,  &c.,  had  recourse  to  the  expedient  of 
picking  out  the  eyes  of  the  dead  perch  they  had  taken,  and  attaching 
them  to  their  hooks — a  bait  which  this  fish  is  known  to  take  as  readily  as 
any  other.  One  of  the  perch  caught  in  this  manner  struggled  so  much 
when  taken  out  of  the  water,  that  the  hook  had  no  sooner  been  loosened 
from  its  mouth  than  it  came  in  contact  with  one  of  its  own  eyes,  and  ac- 
tually tore  it  out.  In  the  struggle,  the  fish  slipped  through  the  holder's 
fingers,  and  again  escaped  to  its  native  element.  The  disappointed  fisher, 
still  retaining  the  eye  of  the  aquatic  fugitive,  adjusted  it  on  the  hook,  and 
again  committed  his  line  to  the  waters.  After  a  very  short  interval,  on 
pulling  up  the  line,  he  was  astonished  to  find  the  identical  perch  that  had 
eluded  his  grasp  a  few  minutes  before,  and  which  literally  perished  in 
swallowing  its  own  eye." 


THE     PERCH. 


145 


with  a  short  line,  about  the  length  of  the  rod,  a  light  float,  and 
a  small  sinker,  with  a  trout  hook  No.  2.  This  is  not,  however, 
the  safest  mode ;  for  although  the  Angler  expects  small  game, 
he  should  be  prepared  for  large;  and  as  the  pickerel  is  a  com- 
mon inhabitant  of  ponds  with  the  perch,  he  should  always 
have  attached  to  his  rod  a  reel,  to  contain  from  20  to  50  yards 
of  line,  unless,  like  the  negro  who  was  sent  by  his  master  to 
catch  eels,  he  mean  to  take  perch,  and  nothing  else.  The 
colored  gentleman  spoken  of  was  sent  by  his  master  to  catch 
a  mess  of  eels  for  his  breakfast.  After  sitting  a  long  time, 
and  taking  only  a  few  of  his  favorite  fish,  he  had  a  severe  tug 
at  his  hne,  and  with  his  strong  tackle  he  immediately  pulled 
out  a  fine  three  pound  bass,  but  to  the  astonishment  of  the 
bystanders,  unhooked  him,  and  threw  him  overboard,  say- 
ing, "  Massa  tell  me  cotch  eelsJ'^ 

The  usual  bait  for  the  pierch,  in  pond-fishing,  is  the  com- 
mon ground-worm,  which  they  will  take  generally  if  they 
take  any  thing.  The  brandling,  and  other  worms,  are  some- 
times used,  as  also  cheese  and  bread  pastes.  For  stream- 
fishing,  for  large  game,  in  addition  to  the  worm,  the  mianow, 
or  any  similar  small  fish  that  delight  in  the  same  water;  also, 
the  parts  of  frogs,  as  in  pickerel-fishing;  and,  when  the  stream 
runs  into  or  near  salt  water,  and  they  can  be  procured,  the 
shrimp  will  be  found  an  excellent  bait.  They  are  used  in  the 
same  manner,  and  with  the  same  kind  of  tackle,  as  in  trout 
and  pike-fishing,  as  before  described. 

For  Minnow-Fishing  for  Perch,  Hofland  gives  the  follow- 
ing: "  The  minnow  may  be  used  by  fixing  a  No.  9  hook  under 
the  back  fin,  or  by  passing  it  through  his  lips,  with  a  cork 
float,  can-ying  shot  according  to  the  depth  of  the  water.  You 
should  fish  within  a  few  inches  of  the  bottom,  and  when  a  fish 
bites,  a  little  time  should  be  given  before  you  strike,  as  the 
perch  is  tender  mouthed,  and  if  not  well  hooked,  is  apt  to 
break  his  hold. 


146 


THE    PERCH. 


"  Some  Anglers  prefer  roving  for  perch,  in  the  following 
manner :  Use  a  reel  on  your  rod,  and  have  bottom  tackle  of 
three  yards  of  gut,  a  hook  No.  8  or  9,  one  or  two  shot-corns 
to  sink  the  bait,  which  should  be  one  or  two  well  scoured 
red  worms ;  and  you  must  then  cast  your  line  across  the 
stream,  letting  it  sink,  and  drawing  it  towards  you  alternate- 
ly, until  you  feel  a  bite,  then  allow  a  few  seconds  before  you 
strike.  You  may  also  drop  this  bait  into  a  deep  still  hole,  as 
in  trout-fishing ;  indeed  a  practical  Angler  (especially  an  old 
trout-fisher,  will  prefer  this  mode  of  worm-fishing  to  the  use 
of  the  float." 

Taylor  directs :  "  If  the  Angler  roves  with  a  minnow,  let 
it  be  alive,  and  the  hook  stuck  in  under  the  back  fin,  or 
through  the  upper  lip ;  let  the  minnow  swim  in  mid-water, 
or  rather  lower;  use  a  cork  float,  of  a  size  that  he  cannot  sink 
it  imder  the  water,  with  a  few  shot,  about  nine  inches  from 
the  hook,  to  keep  him  down,  or  when  tired  he  will  rise  to 
the  surface.  When  using  the  frog,  put  the  hook  through  the 
skin  of  its  back,  and  it  will  swim  easier  than  if  the  hook  was 
thrust  through  the  skin  of  its  hind  legs ;  recollect  to  keep  the 
bait  as  fax  from  the  shore  as  possible,  for  he  will  constantly 
be  making  to  it ;  always  give  line  enough  at  a  bite  to  let  the 
perch  gorge.  Where  pike  are  suspected  to  haunt,  the  hook 
should  be  attached  to  gimp,  as  in  this  way  of  fishing  they  will 
take  the  bait  as  well  as  the  perch." 

For  taking  the  perch,  some  Anglers  affix  the  bait  by  two 
hooks,  one  inserted  at  the  root  of  the  back  fin,  and  the  other 
attached  to  either  the  gill,  Up,  or  nostril.  We  think  this  by 
no  means  a  bad  plan ;  but  on  the  contrary,  that  it  mcreases 
the  chance  of  fixing  the  fish,  when  he  only  makes  a  snatching 
bite,  as  is  common  with  the  perch  when  not  well  on  the  feed. 
The  former  pages  of  this  work  having  passed  through  the 
press,  the  following  description  of  the  perch  of  Western  New 
Vork,  his  haunts,  and  mode  of  preparing  for  food,  by  an  ardent 


THE    PERCH. 


147 


and  enthusiastic  follower  of  Walton,  taken  from  the  Buffalo 
Commercial  Advertiser,  wiU,  though  rather  out  of  order  io 
this  place,  be  fully  appreciated  by  the  perch  angler. 

"  The  Yellow  Perch.  This  beautiful  and  active  fish  is 
almost  omnipresent  in  the  fresh  waters  of  the  Northern 
States.  There  are  probably  two  distinct  but  similar  species 
in  our  country,  blended  together  under  this  common  name. 
The  perch  of  New  England  differs  from  ours  principally  in  the 
shape  of  the  head.  In  the  Saratoga  Lake,  O  wasco  Lake,  Cayu- 
ga Outlet,  the  Flats  of  Lake  Huron,  and  many  other  localities, 
the  perch  is  larger  than  with  us,  frequentiy  weighing  three 
pounds.  Among  the  perch  of  our  streams  and  river,  a  half 
pounder  is  a  very  portly  citizen — though  on  a  few  particular  bars 
they  are  sometimes  taken  in  considerable  numbers,  averaging 
nearly  a  pound  each.  It  is  almost  always  to  be  had,  from 
earliest  Spring  to  the  commencement  of  Winter ;  and  when 
poor  Piscator  has  had  all  his  lobsters  taken  by  the  sheeps- 
head,  and  utterly  despairs  of  bass,  he  can,  at  any  time,  and 
almost  any  where,  in  our  river,  bait  with  the  minnow  and 
the  worm,  and  retrieve  somewhat  from  frowning  fortune, 
by  catching  a  mess  of  perch. 

"  In  the  Spring,  as  soon  as  the  ice  has  left  the  streams,  the 
perch  begins  running  up  our  creeks  to  spawn.  He  is  then 
caught  in  them  in  great  plenty.  About  the  middle  of  May, 
however,  he  seems  to  prefer  the  Niagara's  clear  current,  and 
almost  entirely  deserts  the  Tonawanda,  and  other  amber 
waters.  You  then  find  him  in  the  eddies,  on  the  edge  o\ 
swift  ripples,  and  often  in  the  swift  waters,  watching  for  the 
minnow.  As  the  water  weeds  increase  in  height,  he  en- 
sconces himself  among  them,  and,  in  mid-summer,  comes  out 
to  seek  his  prey  only  in  the  morning  and  towards  night.  Ho 
seems  to  delight  especially  in  a  grassy  bottom,  and  when  the 
black  frost  has  cut  down  the  tall  water-weeds,  and  the  more 
delicate  herbage  that  never  attains  the  surface  is  withered,  he 


148  THEPICRCH. 

disappears  until  spring, — probably  secluding  himself  in  the 
depths  of  the  river. 

"  The  back  fin  of  the  perch  is  large,  and  armed  with 
strong  spines.  He  is  bold  and  ravenous.  He  will  not  give 
way  to  the  pike  or  to  the  black  bass ;  apd  though  he  may 
sometimes  be  eaten  by  them,  his  comrades  will  retaliate  upon 
the  young  of  his  destroyers. 

''  The  proper  bait  for  the  perch  is  the  minnow.  He  will 
take  that  all  seasons.  In  mid-summer,  however,  he  prefers 
the  worm,  at  which  he  generally  bites  freely.  He  is  often 
taken  with  the  grub,  or  with  small  pieces  of  fish  of  any  kind. 

•'  He  is  a  capital  fish  at  all  times  for  the  table.  His  flesh 
is  hard  and  savory.  He  should  be  fried  with  salt  pork  rather 
than  butter,  and  thoroughly  done.  He  makes  good  chowder, 
though  inferior  for  that  purpose  to  the  black  bass  or  the  yel- 
low pike. 

"  A  difference  of  opinion  exists  among  our  most  tasteful 
icthyophagists,  as  to  whether  this  fish  should  be  scaled  or 
skinned.  Let  me  tell  you  how  to  skin  him.  Take  a  sharj> 
pointed  knife,  and  rip  up  the  skin  along  the  back,  from  the 
posterior  extremity  of  the  back  fin,  on  one  or  both  sides  of  it 
along  its  whole  length — then  take  the  fish  firmly  by  the  head 
with  the  left  hand,  and  with  the  right  take  hold  of  the  skin  of 
the  back  near  the  head,  first  on  one  side  and  then  on  the 
other,  and  peel  it  down  over  the  tail.  This  being  done,  all 
the  fins  are  thereby  removed  except  those  of  the  back  and 
belly,  which  are  easily  drawn  out  by  a  gentle  pulling  towards 
the  head.  Cut  off  the  head,  and  you  have  a  skinless,  finless 
lump  of  pure  white  flesh.  Some  say  this  is  the  only  way  a 
perch  should  be  prepared  for  the  cook's  art — others  say  it 
impairs  the  flavor,  and  should  never  be  pursued.  As  for  me, 
I  say,  *  in  medio  tutissimus  ibis,^ — neither  of  the  disputants 
is  infallible.  Much,  very  much  of  the  sweetness  of  the  perch 
and  indeed  almost  all  fishes,  resides  in  the  skin,  which  should 


THE     SUN-FISH.  149 

never  be  parted  with  except  for  some  special  reason,  there- 
fore as  a  general  thing,  I  scale  my  perch.  But,  in  summer, 
the  skin  of  the  percli  is  apt  to  acquire  a  slight  bitter  taste,  or 
a  smack  of  the  mud — therefore,  in  summer  I  skin  my  perch." 
'*  Of  the  Gastronomic  Properties  of  the  Perch,''''  says 
Blaine,  "  whoever  has  heard  of  the  broiled  Y>erc\i  flitches,  and 
water  souchy,  of  Sir  Bamber  Gascoyne's  cooking,  would  not 
hold  us  blameless  were  we  to  be  totally  silent.  This  fish  has 
indeed  stood  the  test  of  time,  and  has  been  as  little  subjected 
to  the  mutations  of  fashion,  perhaps  as  any  one  of  the  finny 
tribe :  it  was  highly  esteemed  by  the  Romans,  as  we  are  in- 
formed by  Aristotle,  and  its  praises  were  sung  by  Ausonius : 

"  *  Nee  te  delicias  mensarum,  perca  silebo 
Amnigenos  inter  pisces  dignande  marinis  ! '  " 

How  to  cook  the  Perch.  The  pan,  in  proper  hands,  will 
do  justice  to  this  fish  :  many  epicures,  however,  prefer  broil- 
ing. Either  method,  according  to  former  directions  for  others 
of  the  race,  will  give  satisfaction  to  the  Angler,  particularly  if 
very  tired,  and  on  the  feed. 

Of  the  Water  Souchy,  Hofland  gives  the  following  me- 
thod: "Scale,  gut,  and  wash  your  perch;  put  salt  in  your 
water;  when  it  boils,  put  in  the  fish  with  an  onion  cut  in 
slices,  and  separate  it  into  rings ;  a  handful  of  parsley^  picked 
and  washed  clean;  put  in  as  much  as  will  turn  the  water 
white  ;  when  your  fish  are  done  enough,  put  them  in  a  soup- 
dish,  and  pour  a  little  water  over  them,  with  the  parsley  and 
the  onions ;  then  serve  them  up  with  parsley  and  butter  in  a 
boat." 

Large  perch  may  be  crimped  and  boiled  in  the  same 
way. 

THE  SUN-FISH. 
This  is  a  small  fish,  that  generally  tenants  the  same  pond 


150 


THE    SUN-FISH. 


with  the  perch.  They  vary  in  size,  shape,  and  color,  in  dif- 
ferent parts  of  the  country,  and  are  taken  readily  with  perch 
tackle.  Their  general  size  is  from  three  to  eight  inches  in 
length,  except  a  species  found  in  the  Ohio,  Kentucky,  and 
other  western  rivers,  where  they  are  frequently  taken  twelve 
inches  long. 

Angling  for  sun-fish,  when  found  in  ponds,  with  small 
perch,  is  a  favorite  amusement  of  lady  Anglers,  who  often 
make  the  best  part  of  pic-nic  fishing  parties,  and,  as  Walton 
Bays,  "  angle  for  men  and  fish  at  fish,  at  the  same  time."  De- 
termined old  bachelors  should  be  as  wary  in  making  up  such 
parties,  as  they  would  be  in  taking  a  trout,  or  they  will  be 
caught  in  their  own  net ;  and  when  beguiled  by  one  of  the 
fair  sex,  he  might  break  out  into  a  stream  of  rhyme  like  the 
following,  by  Dr.  Donne : 


Come  live  with  me,  and  be  my  love, 
And  we  will  some  new  pleasures  prove, 
Of  golden  sands  and  chrystal  brooks, 
With  silken  lines  and  silver  hooks. 


"  Let  coarse,  bold  hands,  from  slimy  nest, 
The  bedded  fish  in  banks  outwrest; 
Let  curious  traitors  sleave  silk  flies. 
To  witch  poor  wandering  fishes'  eyes : 

*«  For  thee,  thou  need'st  no  such  deceit, 
For  thou  thyself  art  thine  own  bait ; 
That  fish  that  is  not  catch'd  thereby, 
Is  wiser  far,  alas,  than  L" 


CHAPTER  IX. 
OF    THE    CARP    OR    TENCH. 


This  beautiful  fish  is  not  a  native  of  our  own  country;  but 
as  they  have  been  imported  from  England  by  a  number  of 
persons  in  many  parts  of  the  United  States,  for  the  purpose 
of  stocking  their  ponds,  and  protection  having  been  given 
them  by  the  laws  of  the  State  of  New- York,  they  will  un- 
doubtedly become  an  object  of  the  Angler's  pleasure,  it  will 
be  well  to  give  some  information  of  their  habits,  and  the 
modes  of  taking  them  in  other  countries. 

"  The  family  of  carps,"  says  Smith,  "  is  distinguished  by 
not  possessing  an  adipose  fin ;  by  a  small  mouth,  and  weak 
jaws,  destitute  of  teeth.  The  brancial  rays  are  few ;  the 
body  scaly ;  the  intestines  short  and  without  caecums.  They 
have  a  swimming  bladder,  divided  into  two  sacks,  somewhat 
like  an  hour-glass,  and  live  in  fresh  water,  being  harmless, 
inoffensive,  and  quiet  inhabitants. 

"  In  the  United  States  we  have  not  yet  discovered  the 
true  carp  of  Europe,  which  is  so  extensively  bred  in  pleasure 
grounds.  Usually  it  grows  to  a  length  of  12  or  18  inches, 
but  in  the  stagnant  waters  of  Persia,  still  larger.     It  is  gene* 


152 


THE    CARP    OR    TENCH, 


rally  supposed  to  have  been  carried  to  England  about  1514.* 
The  quantity  of  roes  exhuded  by  the  female  far  exceeds  the 
weight  of  her  body. 

"  Though  denominated  the  wise  on  account  of  its  sagacity, 
yet  in  the  spawning  season  it  will  allow  the  Angler  to  tickle 
its  sides,  and  is  thus  easily  captured." 

In  warai  climates  they  are  said  to  grow  to  a  very  large  size, 
and  often  weigh  thirty  to  forty  pounds,  and  measure  in  length 
three  or  four  feet.  They  are  known  generally  in  England, 
Germany,  Russia,  France,  Italy,  and  Prussia,  in  which  latter 
countiy  they  grow  to  the  enormous  size  mentioned.  They 
are  said  to  live  to  a  great  age,  instances  being  found  where 
they  have  been  supposed  to  be  1 00  years  old. 

There  are  from  twenty  to  thirty  different  species  of  the 
carp,  most  of  which  give  sport  to  the  Angler.  Of  the  com- 
mon carp  of  England,  Blaine  remarks:  "  Its  general  color  is 
a  yellowish  olive,  much  deeper  and  browner  on  the  back, 
and  accompanied  with  a  slightly  gilded  tinge  on  the  sides; 
the  scales  are  large,  rounded,  and  very  distinct ;  the  head  is 


ly  long  cirrus  or  beard,  and  above  the  nostrils  is  a  much 
smaller  and  shorter  pair  •,  the  lateral  line  is  slightly  curved, 
and  marked  by  a  row  of  blackish  specks ;  the  fins  are  violet 
brown,  except  the  anal,  which  has  a  reddish  tinge  ;  the  dor- 
sal fin  is  broad,  or  continued  to  some  distance  from  the  mid- 
dle of  the  back  towards  the  tail,  which  is  slightly  forked, 
with  rounded  lobes." 

*  There  is  an  old  distich  in  reference  to  their  introduction  into  Eng- 
land in  1514,  which  says— 

"  Hops  and  turkie.«,  carp  and  beer, 
Came  into  England  all  in  a  year; 


which  is  entirely  disproved  by  the  authoress  of  1486,  who  says  he  is  a 
"  deyntous  fysshe,"  and  gives  directions  for  the  "  harnavs  "  or  tackle  for 
taking  him. 


THE    CARP    OR    TENCH.  153 

The  carp  generally  feeds  on  worms  and  water  insects,  and 
are  very  tenacious  of  life,  having  been  known  to  live  a  great 
length  of  time  out  of  water.  As  an  instance  of  this,  it  is  re- 
lated that  they  have  in  Holland  a  way  of  fattening  them,  by 
hanging  them  up  in  a  net  in  a  damp  cellar,  and  feeding  them 
with  bread  and  milk.  They  are  then  placed  in  wet  moss, 
and  moistened  twice  a  day ;  and  by  which  method  they  grow 
very  large,  and  increase  in  flavor. 

Hofland  gives  the  following  instance  of  their  tenacity  of 
life,  through  a  Mr.  Hilditch,  who  painted  the  full  length  por- 
traits of  a  carp  and  tench.  "  He  kept  these  fish  in  a  tub  for 
a  w^eek,  taking  them  out  alternately  in  the  morning  at  ten 
o'clock,  to  paint  fiora,  and  putting  them  into  water  again  at 
four,  during  six  days ;  and  I  may  add,  that  his  amiable  sister 
pleaded  so  well  for  the  lives  of  these  two  fish,  who  had  seen 
so  much  land  service,  that  Mr.  Hilditch  took  them  down  from 
Ludgate-Hill  to  Black-Friar's-Bridge,  when,  to  use  his  own 
words,  *  they  swam  away  fresh  and  lively.*  " 

They  are  said  to  spawn  several  times  in  the  course  of  a 
year,  but  their  time  or  times  of  spawning  depends  much  on 
the  state  of  the  weather  and  the  temperature  of  the  water. 
The  time  when  they  are  known  to  spawn,  is  in  the  months 
of  May  or  June. 

They  are  found  near  the  bottom  of  muddy  streams  and 
ponds,  and  choose  to  lie  under  and  near  the  weeds,  plants, 
and  water  lilies.  When  old,  they  are  like  the  trout,  shy  and 
crafty,  and  sometimes,  where  they  are  scarce,  require  all  the 
skill  of  the  most  finished  Angler  in  taking  them.  In  large 
ponds,  however,  where  they  are  found  in  abundance,  they 
are  often  very  tame,  and  are  known  in  some  instances  in  Ger- 
many, to  be  called  to  feed  by  the  ringing  of  a  bell. 

Hofland  says:  "  Even  large  carp  become  very  tame  in 
ponds  where  they  are  regularly  fed ;  for  Mr.  Jesse  says  of 


154 


THE    CARP    OR    TENCH 


some  carp  or  tench*  retained  by  him  in  a  stew,  that  '  they 
were  soon  reconciled  to  their  situation,  and  ate  boiled  pota- 
toes in  considerable  quantities ;  and  the  former  seemed  to 
have  lost  their  original  shyness,  eating  in  my  presence  with- 
out any  scruple; '  and  Sir  John  Hawkins  says  he  was  assured 
by  a  friend  of  his,  that  he  saw  a  carp  come  to  the  edge  of  a 
pond,  from  being  whistled  to  by  a  person  who  daily  fed  it ; 
and  I  have,  myself,  seen  carp  come  to  the  edge  of  the  water, 
to  be  fed  with  breadf  by  the  visitors  to  Roche  Abbey." 

The  time  for  angling  for  them  is  from  March  till  Septem- 
ber, with  worms  of  various  kinds,  caterpillars,  grasshoppers, 
beedes,  wasps,  and  pastes.  They  are  generally  taken  at  or 
near  the  bottom,  with  a  worm  attached  to  a  small  strong 
hook,  say  No.  9  or  10  trout. 

The  time  of  day  for  taking  the  carp  is  thus  given  by  one 
of  England's  poets  : — 


"  At  early  dawn,  or  rather,  when  the  air 
Glimmering  with  fading  light,  and  shadowy  eve 
Is  busiest  to  confer  and  to  bereave ; 
Then,  pensive  votary!  let  thy  feet  repair 
To  silent  lakes,  or  gentle  river  fair." 

Mr.  Salter  recommends  a  red  worm  on  the  hook,  with  a 
gentle  on  the  point  of  it.  They  are  also  taken  with  fruit 
and  vegetables  of  different  kinds.  Salter  says  they  may  be 
taken  with  marrow-fat  peas.     Taylor  and  Walton  prescribe 

*  The  tench  is  a  species  of  the  carp,  diflfering  considerably  in  appear- 
ance from  what  is  called  the  common  carp.  It  is  of  a  dark  olive  color, 
with  quite  small  scales  and  nearly  even.  The  mode  of  angling  for  him 
is  the  same  adopted  for  the  subject  of  our  present  chapter. 

i  It  may  not  be  generally  known  that  the  gold-fish  and  silver-fish, 
which  are  seen  about  in  glass  globes,  and  small  artificial  ponds,  and  eat 
bread  from  the  hand,  are  a  species  of  the  golden  carp.  They  are  natives 
of  China,  where  they  are  bred  and  sold  in  great  quantities. 


THE    CARP    OR    T£NCH.  155 

fruits  and  vegetables.  In  the  use  of  peas,  Taylor's  plan  is  to 
hang  one  on  the  hook,  about  a  foot  from  the  ground,  and 
throwing  in  a  few  now  and  then  by  way  of  a  lure.  In  order 
to  insui-e  success  at  any  time  in  taking  the  carp,  ground-bait 
should  be  used  in  all  cases,  and  in  the  evening  previous  to 
your  expected  sport,  if  possible. 

Of  the  requisite  Tackle^  and.  Manner  of  Taking  the 
Carp,  Hofland  gives  the  following:  "  Notwithstanding  the 
instances  of  familiarity,  it  is  by  no  means  easy  to  make  a  large 
carp  familiar  with  your  bait :  to  do  this,  the  greatest  nicety 
and  caution  must  be  observed ;  but  if  the  young  Angler,  who 
has  been  often  foiled  in  his  attempts,  will  patiently  and  im- 
plicitly follow  my  instructions,  he  will  become  a  match  for 
this  cunning  fish. 

"  Use  a  strong  rod  with  running  tackle,  and  have  a  bot 
tom  of  three  yards  of  fineish  gut,  and  a  hook  No  9  or  10 ; 
use  a  very  light  quill  float,  that  will  carry  two  small  shot, 
and  bait  with  a  well  scoured  red  worm. 

"  Now  plumb  the  depth  with  the  greatest  nicety,  and  let 
your  bait  just  touch,  or  all  but  touch  the  bottom ;  but  you  are 
not  yet  prepared ;  for  a  forked  stick  must  be  fixed  in  the 
bank,  on  which  you  must  let  your  rod  rest,  so  that  your  float 
shall  exactly  cover  the  spot  you  have  just  plumbed.  Now 
throw  in  a  sufficient  quantity  of  ground-bait,  of  bread  and 
bran,  worked  into  a  paste,  and  made  mto  little  balls ;  or  in 
want  of  these,  throw  in  the  garbage  of  chickens  or  ducks ; 
and  all  this  is  to  be  done  the  evening  of  the  day  before  you 
intend  to  fish. 

"  The  next  morning,  if  in  summer,  be  at  the  pond  side 
where  you  have  baited  and  plumbed  your  depth,  by  four 
o'clock,  at  latest,  and  taking  your  rod  and  line,  which  is 
already  fixed  to  the  exact  depth,  bait  with  a  small,  bright 
red  worm;  then  approach  the  water  cautiously,  keeping  out 
of  sight  as  much  as  possible,  and  drop  your  bait  exactly  over 


156 


THE    CARP    OR    TENCH, 


the  spot  you  plumbed  over  night ;  then  rest  part  of  your  rod 
in  the  forked  stick,  and  the  bottom  of  it  on  the  ground. 

'*  You  must  now  retii-e  a  few  paces,  keeping  entirely  out  of 
sight ;  but  still,  near  enough  to  observe  your  float ;  when  you 
perceive  a  bite,  give  a  little  time  ;  indeed  it  is  better  to  wait 
till  you  see  the  float  begin  to  move  off"  before  you  strike, 
which  you  may  then  do  smartly  ;  and  as  the  carp  is  a  leather- 
mouthed  fish,  if  you  manage  him  well,  there  is  no  fear  of 
losing  him,  unless  the  pond  is  very  weedy.  Be  careful  to 
have  your  line  free,  that,  if  a  large  fish,  he  may  run  out  some 
of  your  line  before  you  attempt  to  turn  him  ;  as  he  is  a  very 
strong  fish,  and  your  tackle  rather  slight,  you  must  give  him 
careful  play  before  you  land  him. 

"  The  extreme  shyness  of  the  large  carp,  maizes  all  this 
somewhat  tedious  process  necessary  to  insure  success ;  but 
I  can  safely  assert  that  I  scarcely  ever  took  this  trouble  in 
vain.  Various  baits  are  recommended  for  carp ;  such  as 
green  peas  parboiled,  pastry  of  all  descriptions,  gentles  and 
caterpillars,  &c. ;  but  I  have  found  the  red  worm  the  best, 
and  next  to  this,  the  gentle,  and  plain  bread  paste.  Those 
who  prefer  a  sweet  paste,  may  dip  the  bread  in  honey. 
Pastes  and  gentles  will  answer  better  in  autumn  than  in 
spring.  April  and  May  are,  in  my  opinion,  the  best  months 
for  carp  fishing,  and  very  early  in  the  morning,  or  late  in  the 
evening,  is  the  best  time  for  pursuing  your  sport." 

Walton  remai'ks :  "  The  carp  bites  either  at  worms  or 
pastes  ;  and  of  worms,  I  think  the  blueish  marsh  or  meadow- 
worm  is  best;  but  possibly  another  worm,  not  too  big,  may 
do  as  well,  and  so  may  a  green  gentle ;  and  as  for  pastes, 
there  are  almost  as  many  sorts  as  there  are  medicines  for  the 
tooth-ache ;  but  doubtless  sweet  pastes  are  best ;  I  mean 
pastes  made  with  honey  or  with  sugar,  which  that  you  may 
the  better  beguile  this  crafty  fish,  should  be  thrown  into  the 
pond  or  place  in  which  you  fish  for  him,  some  hours  or 


THE    CARP    OR    TENCH.  157 

longer,  before  you  undertake  your  trial  of  skill  with  the  an- 
gle-rod; and  doubtless,  if  it  be  thrown  into  the  water  a  day 
or  two  before,  at  several  times,  in  small  pellets,  you  are  the 
likeliest,  when  you  fish  for  carp,  to  attain  your  desired  sport. 
"  And  if  you  fish  for  carp  with  gentles,  then  put  upon 
your  hook  a  small  piece  of  scarlet,  the  sixth  of  an  inch  square, 
it  being  soaked  in,  or  anointed  with  oil  of  petre,  called  by 
some,  oil  of  the  rock;  and  if  your  gentles  be  put,  two  or 
three  days  before,  into  a  box  anointed  with  honey,  and  so  put 
upon  your  hook  as  to  preserve  them  to  be  living,  you  are  as 
like  to  kill  this  crafty  fish  this  way  as  any  other ;  but  still  as 
you  are  fishing,  chew  a  little  white  or  brown  bread  in  your 
mouth,  and  cast  it  into  the  pond  about  the  place  where  your 
float  swims.  Other  baits  there  be  ;  but  these,  with  diligence 
and  patient  watchfulness,  will  do  it  better  than  any  that  I 
ever  practised  or  heard  of." 

Blaine  has  the  following :  "  When  the  angling  commences, 
if  possible,  keep  entirely  out  sight  of  the  fish ;  make  no 
noise ;  let  the  bait  slide  silently  into  the  water ;  and  try 
their  fancy  for  taking  it  at  various  depths,  beginning  with  the 
lowest.  If  rain  falls  lightly,  the  angler  would  do  well  to 
pursue  his  practise  during  the  whole  day.  Sometimes,  also, 
success  will  attend  him  through  the  whole  of  a  gloomy  day 
without  rain,  but  in  general  cases,  during  the  hot  months,  it 
ta  not  possible  to  fish  too  early  or  too  late  for  carp.  In  a 
starlight  or  moonlight  night  of  July,  they  have  been  taken 
after  the  '  witching  time  '  even. 

"  When  the  angler  perceives  abite,  he  must  strike  accord- 
ing to  the  nature  of  his  bait.  If,  for  instance,  in  fishing  with 
a  lob-worm,  he  were  to  strike  the  moment  he  felt  the  float 
move,  he  would  pull  the  worm  out  of  the  mouth  of  the  carp, 
who  sucks  in  after  the  manner  of  a  barbel.  On  the  contrary, 
if  paste  be  employed,  it  is  prudent  to  strike  it  on  the  slight- 
est warning,  otherwise  the  waiy  animal  will  suck  away  all 


158 


THE    CARP    OR    TENCH. 


Z^ 

^^^- 

~~— . 



■ 

^-V; 

:t 

^^zhx-::. 



— ' rr- 

— Xr=r. 

. 

the  paste ;  but  with  a  small  hook,  and  a  very  slight  wris 
stroke,  the  nibbling  fish  may  be  probably  struck ;  or  if  he  i 
not  effectually  hooked,  the  fineness  of  the  stroke  will  not 
alarm  him,  and  he  will  return  to  the  charge.  Again,  when 
fishing  for  carp  in  rivers,  it  will  be  found  that  the  habit  ol 
meeting  the  insects  which  pass  down  the  stream,  makes  the 
fish  more  on  the  alert  to  prevent  their  escape  ;  they  take  the 
bait  quicker  in  rivers  for  this  reason,  and  they  should  there- 
fore be  struck  much  quicker." 

Walton  prepares  and  dishes  up  this  dainty  fish  in  the  fol- 
lowing sufficiently  luxurious  style,  to  make  the  Angler  or 
reader  smack  his  lips  in  anticipation. 

"  But  first,  I  will  tell  you  how  to  make  this  carp,  that  is  so 
curious  to  be  caught,  so  curious  a  dish  of  meat  as  shall  make 
him  worth  all  yoar  labor  and  patience.  And  though  it  is  not 
without  some  trouble  and  charges,  yet  it  will  recompense 
both.  Take  a  carp,  (alive  if  possible) ;  scour  him,  and  rub  him 
clean  with  water  and  salt,  but  scale  him  not ;  then  open  him, 
and  put  him  with  his  blood  and  liver,  which  you  must  save 
when  you  open  him,  into  a  small  pot,  or  kettle  ;  then  take 
sweet  marjoram,  thyme,  or  parsley,  of  each  a  handful ;  a 
sprig  of  rosemary,  and  mother-of-savory ;  bind  them  into 
two  or  three  small  bundles,  and  put  them  to  your  carp,  with 
four  or  five  whole  onions,  twenty  pickled  oysters,  and  three 
anchovies.  Then  pour  upon  your  carp  as  much  claret  wine 
as  will  only  cover  him ;  and  season  your  claret  well  with  salt, 
cloves  and  mace,  and  the  rind  of  oranges  and  lemons.  That 
done,  cover  your  pot  and  set  it  on  a  quick  fire,  till  it  be  suffi- 
ciently boiled.  Then  take  out  the  carp  and  lay  it  with  the 
broth  into  the  dish,  and  pour  upon  it  a  quarter  of  a  pound 
of  the  best  fresh  butter,  melted  and  beaten  with  a  half  a 
dozen  spoonsful  of  the  broth,  the  yolks  of  two  or  three  eggs, 
and  some  of  the  herbs  shred ;  garnish  your  dish  vidth  lemons, 
and  so  serve  it  up,  and  much  good  do  you." 


CHAPTER    X. 

OP    THE    STRIPED  BASSE,  OR   ROCK-PISH. 


This  noble  and  highly  prized  fish  is  peculiar  to  our  own 
country,  and  to  particular  parts  of  it.  As  an  object  of  sport, 
for  perfect  symmetry  and  beauty  of  appearance,  and  as  a 
dish  for  the  table,  it  is  considered  second  only  to  the  salmon. 
They  are  found  in  the  rivers,  bays,  and  inlets,  from  the  Capes 
of  the  Delaware  to  Massachusetts  Bay,  and  also  in  the  rivers 
and  bays  of  Florida.  They  appear  in  the  greatest  abundance 
in  the  Chesapeake  Bay,*  and  in  the  rivers,  bays,  inlets  and 
creeks  in  the  vicinity  of  New- York,  and  are  taken  in  large 
quantities,  from  the  size  of  a  common  trout  to  the  weight  of 
upwards  of  a  hundred  pounds. 

In  addition  to  the  above  described  names,  they  are  some- 
times called  Perch.  The  late  learned  and  distinguished  Go- 
vernor De  Witt  Clinton,  who  was  a  member  of  the  Philoso- 

*  A  friend  who  angles  in  Chesapeake  Bay,  below  Baltimore,  says  that 
he  h:is  seen  them  as  long  as  a  crow-bar !  This  is  not  quite  so  bad  as  be- 
ing as  big  as  a  lump  of  chalk,  as  the  crow-bar  was  in  sight  at  the  time, 
and  measured  about  five  feet  six  inches. 


160  THE    STRIPED    BASSE. 

phical  Society  of  the  city  of  New  York,  says  that  Basse  is  a 
Dutch  word,  signifying  perch.  As  there  is  a  difference  of 
opinion  among  the  few  American  authors,  in  respect  to  this 
fish,  we  give  their  own  words. 

Smith  of  Massachusetts,  defines  this  species  as  the  Stri- 
ped Basse,  Rock  Basse — Perca  Labrax — (Lin.  Sciaena  Bloch.) 
"  On  the  sides  are  parallel  lines,  like  narrow  ribbons,  eighl 
in  number,  which  give  it  the  name  of  the  striped  basse ; 
the  scales  are  large,  of  a  metallic  lustre  ;  in  the  opper- 
culum,  the  middle  plate  is  serrated ;  the  last  portion  of  the 
third  plate  the  gill  cover,  constituted  of  three  pieces,  has  two 
nearly  concealed  spines.  In  the  brancial  membrane  are 
seven  rays  ;  pectoral,  sixteen  ;  ventral,  six ;  dorsal,  eight  in 
the  first,  fourteen  in  the  second  ;  anal  fifteen,  and  in  the  can- 
dal  17  ;  some  of  them  in  each  fin,  according  to  the  size,  it 
would  appear,  of  the  individual,  are  stiff  or  spinous. 

**  Three  or  four  of  the  stripes  reach  the  tail, — the  num- 
ber not  always  being  constant ;  and  the  remainder  gradually 
disappear  at  different  points  on  the  abdominal  walls ;  the 
eyes  are  white,  the  head  strikes  one  as  being  long,  and  the 
under  jaw,  as  in  the  pike,  juts  beyond  its  fellow.  Next  to  the 
mackerel,  this  is  decidedly  the  handsomest  of  native  fishes. 

"  Striped  Bass,  are  a  sea  fish,  and  principally  subsist  near 
the  mouths  of  rivers,  up  which  they  run  as  high  as  they  can 
conveniently  go.  During  the  approach  of  winter,  instead  of 
striking  out  into  the  deep  water  of  the  open  ocean,  like  most 
other  anadromous  species,  the  basse  finds  a  residence  in 
ponds,  coves,  rivers,  and  still  arms  of  the  sea,  where  undis- 
turbed and  comfortable,  it  remains  till  the  following  spring. 
The  principal  rivers  in  the  state  of  Maine,  as  the  Penobscot. 
&c.,  are  the  places  where  they  are  now*  taken  in  the  great- 
est abundance,  and  of  the  finest  flavor  and  size.  In  all  the 
rivers,  too,  of  Massachusetts,  they  are  also  found,  at  the  in* 

*  183a 


THE    STRIPED    BASSE. 


16* 


clement  seasou  of  winter,  but  the  fishery  is  not  so  productive 
as  in  Maine,  whence  the  best  in  the  Boston  market  are  annu 
ally  brought." 

The  following  is  from  the  Transactions  of  the  Literary 
and  Philosophical  Society,  by  Dr.  Mitchill. 

"  MitchilVs  Perch,  Striped  Basse  or  Rock-Fish,  (Perca 
Mitchilli),  with  eight  parallel  lines  from  head  to  tail.  One  of 
the  largest  and  most  excellent  of  the  New  York  fishes :  may 
be  found  from  the  weight  of  an  ounce  to  that  of  seventy 
pounds  and  upwards.  The  position  of  the  ventral  fins  rather 
behind  the  pectoral,  made  me  once  incline  to  place  him  in 
the  abdominales.  His  second  gill  plate  is  finely  serrated. 
That  circumstance,  if  he  remained  among  the  thoracic,  would 
rank  him  among  the  percae,  and  when  I  decided  in  favor  of 
changing  his  order,  I  was  obliged  to  constitute  a  new  genus  for 
him,  which  I  called  roccus.  Ikit  having  since  found  that  there 
are  fishes  whose  ventral  fins  are  further  back  on  the  abdo- 
men than  this,  that  are  nevertheless  considered  as  thoracic, 
I  have,  on  reconsideration,  persuaded  myself  it  will  be  most 
correct  to  place  him  among  his  compeers  of  the  perch  family.'* 

After  a  similar  description  to  that  given  by  Smith,  our 
naturalist  continues:  "  But  one  of  the  most  obvious  and 
distinguishing  features  of  this  fish,  is  the  striped  appearance 
of  his  body.  From  head  to  tail  his  back  is  marked  by  lon- 
gitudinal lines.  The  ground  color  is  pale,  brown,  whitish 
and  silvery.  On  this  are  delineated  the  aforesaid  lines  in 
parallel  rows.  These  rows,  at  some  seasons,  appear  black, 
and  make  a  strong  contrast.  At  other  times  they  are  more 
faint,  and  seem  to  be  faded  into  areddish  brown.  When  the 
brown  thus  predominates,  dark  specks  or  spots  can  be  traced 
at  regular  distances  along  the  stripes,  particularly  toward  the 
back. 

"  The  number  of  these  stripes  is  usually  eight ;  and  four 
of  them  most  commonly  reach  the  tail.     The  rest  are  fre- 


"%._    '^M 


162 


THE    STRIPED    BASSE, 


/ 


-— - 

~r± 

■'-^^- 

-^^- 

:_^zz:: 

^^^^ 



-"^^ 





1 



• 

quently  shorter ;  vanishing  unequally  in  their  progress.    Belly 
a  fine  mixture  of  silver  and  vv^hite.     Scales  adhere  firmly. 

"  This  fish  is  very  highly  prized  by  the  New-Yorkers.  He 
is  savory  and  excellent  beyond  the  generality  of  fishes.  His 
common  abode  is  the  salt  water  ;  but  he  niigrates  to  the  fresh 
streams  and  recesses  to  breed  during  the  spring,  and  for  shel* 
ter  in  winter. 

*'  He  takes  the  hook,  especially  when  baited  with  soft  crab, 
Small  ones  are  catched  by  the  boys,  from  the  wharves  and 
boats  every  where  near  the  city. 

"  Their  greatest  run  is  late  in  the  fall.  Instead  of  going 
away  on  the  approach  of  winter,  the  striped  bass  seeks  refuge 
in  bays,  ponds,  and  recesses  where  he  may  remain  warm  and 
quiet.  Here  the  fishermen  find  him,  and  make  great  hauls 
during  the  coldest  season,  when  very  great  numbers  are 
brought  to  market  in  a  frozen  state.  At  this  time  it  is  usual 
to  take  some  very  large  and  heavy  ones.  Yet  I  have  seen  a 
dozen  at  a  time,  of  the  weight  of  fifty  pounds  each,  in  Oc- 
tober, while  the  weather  was  very  mild. 

"  He  is  also  taken  in  seines  during  the  summer,  and  in  au- 
tumn. Indeed,  there  is  no  fish  that  stays  more  steadily  with 
us  all  the  year  round,  than  the  rock ;  and  he  is  found  of  all 
sizes,  to  suit  all  sorts  of  palates." 

The  basse  has  been  behoved,  as  stated  at  the  commence- 
ment of  this  article,  to  be  a  native  of  this  country,  and  was 
supposed  first  to  have  been  noticed  by  Mitchill ;  but  the  fol- 
lowing from  Smith,  would  lead  to  a  different  conclusion. 

"  By  what  authority  Dr.  Mitchill  gave  his  own  name  to 
the  striped  bass,  '  Perca  MitchilU,'  we  cannot  divine :  he 
might  with  equal  propriety  have  tacked  his  name  to  the  white 
shark,  or  to  the  bones  of  the  mastodon,  and  the  last  would 
have  savored  less  of  vanity,  than  affixing  his  cognomen  to  a 
common  table  fish,  known  from  time  immemorial  all  over 
Europe." 


THE     STRIPED    BASl 


163 


If  the  above  assertion  of  Smith's  is  correct,  it  is  very 
strange  that  so  important  an  angle  fish  has  not  been  known 
to  the  angling  community  of  Europe ;  for  out  of  upwards  of 
an  hundred  books  on  the  subject  of  angling,  in  Europe,  only 
one  or  two  makes  mention  of  any  kind  of  basse  whatever,  and 
they  are  a  species  of  trout,  differing  entirely  from  the  striped 
basse  of  our  waters.  However,  to  us  Anglers,  (although  we 
should  like  to  see  the  learned  Doctors  agree,)  it  matters  not 
*  whether  we  have  the  name  so  long  as  we  have  the  game." 

As  an  object  of  sport,  they  are  sought  after  with  great 
avidity,  by  the  sportsmen  of  the  parts  of  New  York 
and  New-Jersey,  bordering  on  the  Hudson  river,  and 
have  been  taken  of  quite  a  large  size  as  far  up  as  Albany  * 
and  Troy.  They  are  also  made  very  profitable  to  market 
fishermen,  at  some  seasons  being  taken  in  great  numbers,  with 
very  Uttle  trouble.  In  the  early  part  of  January  of  the  pre- 
sent year,  25,000  pounds  were  taken  in  Point  Judith  Ponds, 
the  majority  of  a  large  size,  that  netted  the  proprietors 
$5,000. 

They  are  generally  angled  for  with  a  strong,  pliable  rod, 
12  to  15  feet  in  length,  made  of  ash,  with  a  lance-wood  top. 
For  boat  fishing,  a  rod  about  12  feet  in  length  is  considered 
long  enough,  but  for  bridge  or  bank  fishing,  14  to  18  feet  have 
the  preference.  They  may  be  had  in  every  variety  of  style 
at  the  tackle  stores  in  the  city  of  New-York,  where  no  pains 
or  expense  is  spared  in  adapting  them  to  the  peculiar  tastes 
of  the  Angler.  Attached  to  the  rod  should  be  a  reel,  suffi- 
ciently large  to  contain  from  300  to  600  feet  of  flax,  grass,  or 
silk  line  ;  to  your  line  a  swivel  sinker,  and  float,  according  to 
the  current  of  your  fishing  ground,  and  a  leader,  from  three  to 
six  feet  in  length,  double  for  fall  fishing,  and  single  for  the 
spring  run.     Some  of  the  best  Anglers,  however,  prefer  using 

*  In  the  spring  of  1844,  one  was  taken  with  a  rod  and  reel,  in  Sau- 
gerties  creek,  weighing  fifteen  and  a  half  pounds. 


1G4  THKSTRIPED     BASSE. 

Single  gut  throughout  the  season,  and  if  it  can  be  procured  of 
a  large  size,  round  and  even  throughout,  in  experienced 
hands  it  will  be  apt  to  take  the  most  and  largest  fish.  To 
your  leader  should  be  a  Limerick  or  Kirby  hook,  from  No.  0 
to  3,  according  to  the  season  and  size  of  t]ie  game. 

In  no  species  of  angling  is  it  so  necessary  to  have  superior 
quality  of  tackle,  as  in  the  one  under  consideration.  The 
beginner  should  therefore  provide  himself  with  such  descrip- 
tions as  will  meet  any  emergency ;  for  in  salt  water,  in  the 
bays  and  large  rivers,  the  fisher  will  often  be  crossed  by" 
fishes  of  great  magnitude,  and  by  taking  the  proper  precaution 
to  have  every  thing  strong  and  durable,  he  will  often  prevent 
loss  of  tackle  and  loss  of  patience,  two  very  important  items 
of  a  successful  Angler's  stock.  i 

An  experienced  Angler  and  mechanic,  who  has  made 
many  a  rod,  gives  the  following  description  of  a  proper  one 
for  basse  fishing.  "  Your  rod  should  be  about  12  or  13  feet 
in  length,  not  too  stiflf  nor  yet  too  limber,  for  by  being  too 
stiff  you  are  apt  to  break  your  tackle,  or  lose  your  fish  by 
being  struck  too  hard,  and  by  being  too  light  you  are  apt  to 
break  it,  and  thus  spoil  your  sport.  Besides,  a  rod  of  medium 
size  is  lighter,  more  convenient  to  handle,  and  much  more 
likely  to  give  you  satisfaction  after  a  tedious  day's  angling,  if 
any  such  should  be  your  lot,  than  if  it  were  stiff— a  fault 
which  many  new  beginners  are  apt  to  acquire.  For  general 
basse  angling,  the  one  I  should  prefer  (and  it  is  the  one  most 
in  use  with  good  sportsmen)  would  be  about  seven-eighths 
of  an  inch  in  diameter  at  the  butt  ferrule,  and  a  true  taper  to 
the  point,  which  should  not  exceed  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch 
in  diameter,  making  your  butt  sufficiently  large  for  the  grasp 
of  your  hand,  say  an  inch  and  a  quarter  in  diameter,  which  is 
about  as  large  as  will  well  fill  your  hand ;  larger  is  inconve- 
nient— smaller  will  be  likely  to  cramp  your  fingers. 

"  Your  hooks  should  be  about  No.  2  of  Kirby,  or  No.  1  of 


THE    STRIPED    BAS  3E. 


165 


Limerick,  firmly  lashed  to  one  or  two  strands  of  gut,  accord- 
ing to  the  run  of  your  fish.  If  you  fish  with  one  strand  of 
extra  strong  gut  next  your  hook,  you  will  be  safe  enough,  and 
be  as  likely  to  take  as  good  fish  as  with  stronger  tackle ;  but 
be  sure  that  your  leader,  where  your  sinker  is  put  on,  and 
where  the  heaviest  strain  generally  comes,  be  stronger  than 
your  hook  length,  and  of  two  strands  of  strong  gut,  or  three 
strands  of  medium  size  ;  for  by  that  means,  if  you  should  be 
80  unfortunate  as  to  get  fouled  on  the  bottom,  you  will  es- 
cape with  the  loss  of  your  hook  only,  whereas  if  your  tackle 
be  of  an  uniform  strength,  you  will  most  likely  lose  the  whole, 
line,  sinker,  hooks,  and  all,  which  may  probably  make  you 
swear;  arifTthis,  according  to  Walton,  is  a  bad  practice;  for 
as  the  old  adage  goes,  '  He  who  swears  takes  no  fish.' 

"  You  are  to  remember  that  in  boat  fishing,  if  you  do  not 
fish  with  a  float,  or  with  a  running  or  sliding  sinker  on  the 
bottom,  your  sinker  should  be  light  enough  to  float  ofl"  with 
the  tide,  and  be  able  to  feel  the  bottom  at  all  times,  so  that  if 
your  sinker  be  20  feet  off",  you  can  still  feel  it  strike  the  bot- 
tom, and  lift  it  up,  when  you  can  let  out  more  line.  I  prefer 
this  mode  of  fishing,  both  for  basse  and  weak-fish,  to  any 
other;  and  you  will  be  likely  to  get  better  fish,  and  more  of 
them. 

"  You  are  to  consider,  also,  the  times  of  tide,  the  baits  in 
season,  the  quietness  of  the  spot  selected  for  your  fishing,  (for 
the  basse,  like  the  trout,  will  avoid  all  places  where  there  is 
an  unusual  noise,)  and  the  full  or  neapt  tides,  which  latter  are 
allowed  by  all  salt  water  Anglers  to  be  the  best  time  for 
taking  fish,  and  which  I  know  to  be  the  fact  from  experience. 
This  time  of  tide,  when  it  happens  early  in  the  morning,  or 
towards  sun-down,  with  the  wind  off*  shore,  and  a  gentle  rip- 
ple on  the  water,  is  the  time  when  basse  are  most  upon  the 
feed,  and  the  sportsman's  efibrts  are  generally  crowned  with 
success. 


166 


THE    STRIPED    BASSE. 


"  You  are  to  fish  as  near  bottom  as  possible,  either  with 
float  or  without ;  if  the  tide  be  too  strong,  the  float  should,  be 
dispensed  with;  but  a  little  experience  will  give  proper 
judgment  as  to  the  time  of  using  either,  or  both." 

The  following,  from  an  old  and  experienced  amateur, 
who  has  angled  for  many  years  in  the  vicinity  of  New-York, 
will  be  foimd  excellent  information  for  those  who  think  that 


"  No  angling  can  surpass 
The  taking  of  the  basse." 

"  The  Striped  Basse  is  one  of  the  finest  fish  of  our  waters. 
By  sportsmen  it  is  considered  a  game  fish  of  the  salt  water 
tribe,  affording  capital  amusement  to  the  angler,  by  his  great 
strength  and  activity.  There  are  many  places  in  the  vicinity 
of  New-York  city,  where  these  fish  are  frequently  found  in 
great  plenty.  They  commence  taking  the  hook  generally  in 
April.  The  first  fishing  ground  in  the  neighborhood,  in  the 
spring,  is  in  the  creeks  at  Kingsbridge — next  at  Macomb's 
Dam,  Newtown  creek,  and  Jersey  flats.  At  this  early  sea 
son,  shrimp  is  far  the  best  bait,  especially  where  the  water 
is  salt,  though  in  the  Passaic,  at  Belleville,  anglers  are.  very 
successful  in  the  use  of  shad-roe  as  a  bait.  This  bait  is  rather 
difficult  to  manage  by  a  novice.  The  experienced  angler 
makes  use  of  tow,  or  wool,  cutting  his  bait  with  as  much  of 
the  skin  as  possible,  and  winding  a  few  strands  of  the  tow 
or  wool  around  it  on  the  hook,  which  prevents  the  current 
from  washing  it  off",  which  it  would  soon  do  witbou'  this  pre 
caution  On  the  reefs  of  the  Passaic  and  Hackensack  rivertj, 
many  of  these  noble  fish  are  taken  early  in  April.  The  shad- 
roe  has  been  tried  repeatedly  at  Macomb's  Dam  and  in  New- 
town creek,  without  success  ;  the  reason  is  obvious  to  the 
w^riter.  The  shad  run  up  the  fresh  water  streams  to  spawn, 
and  are  never  known  to  spawn  at  either  of  the  places  just 
mentioned,  and  I  have  never  had  much  success  with  this 


^^ 


THE    STRIPED    BASSE.  167 

b^it,  excepting  in  fresh  water  streams.  The  shrimp  is  a 
much  pleasanter  and  cleaner  bait,  and  is  very  generally  found 
to  be  successful  in  the  early  spring  fishing,  and  continues  so 
until  crabs  commence  shedding  their  coats  freely.  In  the 
latter  part  of  June,  the  bass  prefer  the  soft  or  shedder  crab, 
though  the  shrimp  continues  to  be  used  with  success,  until 
near  the  first  of  August,  when  the  crab  is  decidedly  the  best 
of  all  baits  that  can  be  used.  The  mode  of  angling  conse- 
quently varies  at  this  time.  While  using  the  shrimp,  the  an 
gler  is  generally  most  successful,  by  using  the  float,  and  sus- 
pending his  hook  from  mid-water  to  within  a  foot  of  the  bot- 
tom, excepting  where  the  water  is  quite  shallow,  when  it 
should  hang  just  so  as  to  clear  the  bottom,  as  in  water  of 
little  depth  the  fish  look  for  their  prey  near  the  bottom.  But 
when  crab  bait  is  used,  the  best  mode  of  fishing  is  for  tho 
bait  to  lie  on  the  bottom ;  a  sliding  sinker  is  then  the  best, 
always  as  light  as  the  tide  or  current  will  allow.  The  largest 
fish  are  generally  taken  by  thus  fishing  at  the  bottom,  with- 
out a  float ;  and  the  reason  for  dispensing  with  the  float  is  ob- 
vious, if  we  will  look  at  the  habits  of  the  fish.  In  angling 
with  shrimp,  the  bait  should  be  suspended  as  above  stated, 
because  the  shrimp,  by  the  action  of  the  current,  are  fre- 
quently swept  from  the  edges  of  the  channel,  or  driven  out 
by  eels,  or  other  enemies,  and  the  bass  look  for  them  accord- 
ingly ;  when  feeding  on  the  crab,  however,  these  fish  search 
along  the  bottom  to  find  the  crab  in  his  helpless  and  defence- 
less state,  and  swim  with  their  bodies  at  an  angle,  with  the 
head  downward,  examining  the  bottom,  where  experience 
teaches  them  to  find  their  prey  ;  thus  a  crab  bait  suspended 
by  a  float  at  midwater  would  usually  escape  their  observa- 
tion, and  the  angler  unacquainted  with  these  facts  would 
mourn  over  his  want  of  success  without  being  able  to  ac- 
count for  it.  In  the  latter  part  of  September,  the  shrimp 
again  begin  to  come  into  use,  and  in  October,  these,  with  the 


168 


THE    STRl PED    BASSE. 


common  kill  fish,  or,  as  it  is  usually  called,  killey  fish,  and 
the  spearing  in  October,  are  decidedly  the  best  baits,  espe- 
cially in  running  waters,  such  as  the  streams  at  Macomb's 
Dam,  Pelham  Bridge,  &c.;  while  in  some  of  our  fresh  water 
fishing  grounds,  such  as  Hackensack  river  and  English  Neigh- 
borhood creek,  the  white  opened  soft-clam  is  found  by  far  the 
best  bait  in  October  and  November,  especially  for  large  fish. 

•'Another  mode  of  fishing  for  striped  bass  is  practiced  by 
fishermen  and  amateurs,  by  which  very  large  fish  are  often 
taken.  It  is  by  trolling  with  a  strong  hand  line,  w^ith  a  real 
squid  for  bait,  or  an  artificial  bait  made  in  various  ways: 
sometimes  of  the  v^^hite  leg  bone  of  a  sheep,  or  of  bright 
metal,  such  as  block  tin,  pewter,  &c.:  these  can  be  had  at 
the  fishing  tackle  shops.  The  boat  is  gently  rowed  along  by 
a  skilful  oarsman,  who  rests  on  his  oars  the  moment  a  fish  is 
struck,  giving  the  angler  full  opportunity  to  play  his  fish  with 
skill  and  care,  both  of  which  are  highly  requisite,  for  the  fish 
thus  taken  are  sometimes  very  large.  Those  weighing  20, 
30,  and  even  40  pounds  have  often  been  taken  in  the  East 
river,  in  the  neighborhood  of  Hellgate,  and  in  Harlem  river, 
little  Hellgate,  which  is  the  arm  of  the  stream  which  passes 
between  Ward's  and  Randall's  islands,  and  in  Morrisania 
creek.  This  is  all  fine  trolling  ground,  but  as  the  best  suc- 
cess is  usually  met  with  at  night,  this  precludes  any  but  the 
most  robust  from  enjoying  this  kind  of  sport — though  fre- 
qupntly  fine  fish  are  taken  during  the  day. 

"  The  fishermen  who  supply  our  market  with  these  fine 
fish,  have  lately  been  very  successful  in  the  use  of  set  lines 
late  in  the  fall.  In  the  neighborhood  of  Piermo.nt,  on  the 
Hudson,  this  mode  has  been  employed  to  great  advantage: 
a  strong  line  is  extended  from  one  stake  or  anchor  to  another 
at  given  distances,  and  to  this  cord  are  attached  short  lines 
with  strong  hooks,  baited  with  a  small  toracod  or  other  live 
fish :  at  the  proper  time  of  tide  the  fishermen  raise  one  end 


THE    STRIPED    BASSE. 


1C9 


of  the  line  and  proceed  to  take  the  fish  from  the  hooks.  In 
one  night  several  hundred  weight  of  these  excellent  fish  have 
been  taken  from  two  or  three  of  these  set  lines,  to  be  seen 
alive  on  the  stands  in  Washington  market  late  in  December 
Some  of  the  finest  the  writer  has  ever  eaten  were  bought  ?it 
the  stand  of  Mr.  Hiscox  in  that  market." 

On  the  subject  of  the  different  baits  for  the  basse,  it  is 
proper  to  remark  that,  like  the  trout,  the  rock  is  very  par- 
ticular about  the  quality  of  his  food :  in  some  places  at  some 
seasons  he  will  jump  readily  at  clam  bait,  and  at  other  places 
he  will  take  nothing  but  shrimp  or  crab.  At  Macomb's  Dam, 
Harlem  river,  at  particular  periods,  the  best  bait  is  a  small, 
beautiful  fish  called  the  spearing,  which  sometimes  he  will 
take  and  nothing  else,  and  other  times  nothing  but  shedder 
crabs  will  satisfy  his  dainty  palate.  At  many  places  in  the 
Hudson  river,  and  in  the  bay,  the  clam  bait  is  sufficient  to 
hook  him  in  large  quantities.  At  the  former  place  he  is 
rather  epicurean,  and  as  long  as  Astor  House  fare  is  offered 
him  by  the  peculiarity  of  the  ground,  he  will  not  be  content 
to  take  small  dishes,  and  rejects  everything  for  his  favorite 
fancy  at  the  time. 

In  the  striking  and  running  of  the  basse,  equally  as  much 
pleasure  is  given  as  with  the  trout  and  salmon,  and  is 
to  be  treated  in  the  same  manner  as  directed  for  those 
fishes.  Care  should  always  be  taken,  after  having  hooked 
him,  to  keep  him  well  up  from  the  bottom,  with  the  line  well 
stretched ;  and  if  the  angler  be  not  so  fortunate  as  to  have  a 
cast  in  his  eyes,  as  so  elegantly  described  on  former  pages,  from 
the  "  Angler's  Souvenir,"  let  him  be  watchful  of  every  move- 
ment, have  faith  in  his  tackle,  (which  should  always  be 
examined  for  that  purpose  previous  to  wetting  his  line,) 
courage,  patience  and  perseverance,  and  there  will  be  no 
difficulty  in  taking  the  largest  run  of  fish  with  little  trouble. 


CHAPTER  XI. 

OP  THE  WEAK-PISH,  WHEAT-FISH,  OR  SQUETEAGUE. 


This  is  another  native  fish,  as  far  as  known,  and  is  found 
chiefly  in  the  vicinity  of  New-York  and  Massachusetts.  It 
takes  the  various  names,  of  weak-fish,  wheat-fish,  and  sque- 
teauge  from  different  ascribed  causes;  the  first  from  the 
weakness  of  its  mouth.  The  second  name  has  its  origin 
from  the  fact  of  its  having  made  its  appearance  always  at 
harvest  time,  which  is  not  now  the  fact,  as  they  begin  to  run 
during  the  month  of  May,  and  are  taken  in  small  quantities  in 
the  month  of  April.  The  latter  bold  and  elegant  name  is 
given  by  the  native  inhabitants  of  the  island  of  New-York, 
who  once  were  free  to  roam  where  the  more  refined  now 
find  a  home. 

There  are  two  species,  as  descnbed  by  Mitchill,  as  fol- 
.ows: 

"The  Weak-Fish — (Labrus  Squeteague) — with  even 
tail,  speckled  back  and  sides,  one  or  more  sharp,  long  front 
teeth  in  the  upper  jaw,  and  yellowish  ventral  and  anal  fins. 
One  of  the  most  numerous  and  useful  of  New-York  fishes, 
particularly  during  the  season  when  the  cold  is  not  consider- 


THEWEAK-FISH,  17 1 

able.  Size  commonly  from  a  foot  to  fifteen  inches;  but  often 
grows  larger.  I  weighed  one,  for  example,  that  measm-ed 
27  inches  in  length,  by  seven  in  depth,  and  found  him  hea- 
vier than  six  pounds.  He  never  goes  into  fresh  streams,  or 
ponds,  but  within  the  limits  of  the  salt  water  is  taken  in  al- 
most all  the  places  where  the  rock-fish  is  caught.  The  weak- 
fish  is  so  much  the  companion  of  the  basse,  that  I  once  gave 
him  the  specific  name  of  Comes.  He  resembles  the  rock  in 
the  following  particulars:  1.  A  wide  mouth,  with  small 
teeth  in  the  lips  and  jaws;  2.  Patches  of  teeth  at  the  bottom 
of  a  capacious  throat;  3.  Two  dorsal  fins,  the  foremost  of 
which  has  eight  rays;  4.  A  lateral  line  passing  into  the  cau- 
dal fin;  5.  A  nearly  corresponding  number  of  sixteen  rays  in 
the  pectoral,  and  seventeen  in  the  caudal  fins;  6.  Double 
nostrils,  and  an  elongated  lower  jaw;  7.  A  projecting  head; 
and,  8.  Large  pale  yellow  eyes  on  its  sides.  But  there  are 
no  tangible  serrae  on  the  gill  cover,  the  divisions  at  the  edge 
are  visible  only.  They  are  not  long,  but  yield  to  the  slightest 
touch.  Also  the  gill  cover  is  not  fairly  triparite ;  but  consists 
of  no  more  than  two  plain  divisions.  *  *  *  *  The  weak-fish 
cannot,  therefore,  be  deemed  a  perca.  I  have  been  obliged 
to  separate  him  from  his  companion,  the  rock,  notwithstand- 
ing their  numerous  points  of  similitude.  I  have,  upon  the 
whole,  associated  him  with  the  great  family  of  labrus;  a 
connexion  he  seems  to  be  qualified  for,  by  his  smooth  and 
scaly  gill  covers,  his  sharp  and  strong  teeth,  and  the  softness 
of  his  dorsal  rays.  I  have  given  him  the  specific  name  by 
which  the  Narraganset  natives  distinguish  him — squeteague. 
It  would  have  been  as  easy  to  have  assigned  the  Mohegan 
appellation,  Checouts.  Head  and  back  of  the  weak-fish, 
brown,  with  frequently  a  tinge  of  greenish.  The  spaces  to- 
wards the  sides,  faintly  silvery,  with  dusky  specks.  These 
gradually  disappear  on  the  sides,  until  on  descending  to  the 
belly  a  clear  white  pervades  from  the  chin  to  the  tail.     The 


172 


THE    WEAK-FIS; 


swimming  bladder  is  convertible  to  good  glue.  I  have  eaten 
as  fine  blanc-mange  from  it  as  from  the  isinglass  of  the  stur- 
geon. He  is  a  fish  of  goodly  appearance ;  and  is  wholesome 
and  well-tasted,  though  rather  soft:  is  brought  to  market  in 
great  abundance  during  the  summer  months.  He  is  taken 
by  the  line  and  the  seine.  He  is  called  weak-fish,  as  some 
say,  because  he  does  not  pull  very  much  after  he  is  hooked;* 
or  as  others  allege,  because  the  laboring  men  who  are  fed 
upon  him  are  weak  by  reason  of  the  deficient  noui'ishment 
in  that  kind  of  food.  Certain  peculiar  noises  under  water,  of 
a  low  rumbling  or  drumming  kind,  are  ascribed  by  the  fisher- 
men to  the  squeteague.  Whether  the  sounds  come  from 
these  fishes  or"  not,  it  is  certain  that  during  their  season,  they 
may  be  heard  coming  from  the  bottom  of  the  water;  and  in 
places  frequented  by  weak-fish,  and  not  in  other  places;  and 
when  the  weak-fish  depart,  the  sounds  are  no  more  heard. 

"A  beautiful  variety  of  this  fish  is  sometimes  seen,  with 
the  following  characters,  to  wit : 

^^ Spotted  Squeteague — (Lab.  Sq.  maculatus). — There  are 
black,  well  defined  spots  among  the  specks  over  the  back 
and  sides,  and  checkering  the  caudal  and  second  dorsal  fins. 
The  pectoral  fins  are  rather  small:  ventral  and  anal  fins  not 
yellow  but  brownish.  The  parts  thus  variegated  with  spots 
have  a  pretty  appearance." 

They  bite  freely  at  the  shrimp  and  shedder  crab,  and  will 
often  take  clam  bait  as  readily.  In  the  vicinity  of  New- York 
they  are  found  in  the  greatest  abundance  in  the  bay  off"  Com- 
raunipaw.  Oyster  Islands,  Buckwheat  Island,  below  Ellza- 
bethtown  Point,  at  Buttermilk  Channel,  the  Owl's  Head, 
Gowanus  Bay,  and  Manhattanville;    and  although  they  ac- 


*  This  is  a  great  mistake  ;  the  squeteague,  considering  the  weakness 
or  softness  of  the  inner  part  of  his  mouth,  is  a  fair  pulling  fish ;  and 
when  they  are  hooked  of  a  good  size,  are  known  to  give  nearly  as  much 
sport  as  the  more  favored  rock. 


THE    WEAK-FISH. 


173 


company  the  basse  in  salt  water,  they  generally  swim  deeper, 
more  in  the  eddies,  and  farther  off  from  the  shore.  The 
experienced  angler  will  often  after  angling  for  basse  without 
success,  change  his  ground,  drop  his  bait  a  little  deeper  in 
the  water,  and  return  satisfied  with  his  quota  of  weak-fish  if 
not  his  expected  sport  in  basse. 

Although  they  are  not  as  active  when  hooked,  and  do  not 
compare  as  a  game  fish  with  the  basse,  the  same  description 
of  tackle  is  requisite ;  and  the  angler  who  occasionally  lays 
off  with  a  slack  line,  has  to  suffer  some  from  the  larger  and 
more  nimble  rock,  who  will  often  be  off  with  hooks,  line, 
float  and  sinker,  without  particular  notice. 

Some  of  those  who  make  the  squeteague  a  favorite  object 
of  their  pursuit,  prefer  a  light,  round,  bent  hook  called  the 
Aberdeen,  and  others  a  light  Kirby  size  No.  1,  which  they 
think  increases  their  chance  of  success.  A  large  hook,  say 
No.  1.  or  even  No.  0,  on  the  whole,  should  be  used,  although 
the  Limerick  *  is  a  good  and  sure  hook.  The  Kirby,  baited 
with  a  good  sized  shrimp,  will  be  found  for  this  weak 
mouthed  animal  a  more  sufficient  guaranty  for  the  faithful 
landing  of  any  size  that  swims. 

A  friend  who  pursues  this  sport  during  the  season,  vvath 
much  success,  says — "I  once  saw  one  taken  by  a  friend  of 
mine,  that  weighed  eight  pounds  and  a  half,  which  is  the 
largest  I  ever  saw."  You  frequently  take  from  10  to  40 
pounds  of  this  fish  in  a  day,  when  they  are  in  abundance. 
The  afternoon  tides  are  always  the  best,  about  two  hours 
before  sundown,  and  as  long  after  that  as  they  keep  from 
croaking,  when  you  had  better  leave  off,  as  you  will  take  no 
more  of  them. 

*  Some  prefer  the  Limerick,  slightly  curbed,  both  for  rock  and  sque- 
teague. 


f=: 

fe^ 

-1=^' 



.21=::^ 

^!^_. 

--- 

^- 

::::n 

\^= 

CHAPTER  XII. 

OP    THE    KING-FISH,    OR    BAR 


This  is  a  fine  fish,  both  for  the  hook  and  the  palate,  and  is 
found  only  and  seldom  in  the  bay  and  harbor  of  New-York. 
Whence  he  comes,  and  whither  he  goes,  and  of  his  habits, 
little  is  known,  even  among  the  oldest  uihabitants  of  New 
York.  The  older  fraternity  of  anglers,  however,  know 
more  about  him  than  those  of  later  growth:  certain  it  is, 
that  among  those  who  have  had  the  pleasure  of  his  acquaint- 
ance with  a  hook  and  line,  few  can  ever  forget  him.  As 
a  game  fish  he  is  considered  as  giving  more  real  sport  than 
either  the  trout,  basse,  or  salmon.  His  name  and  where- 
abouts has  only  to  be  whispered  to  the  New  York  Angler, 
and  he  is  off  after  sport  that  perhaps  he  has  anticipated  for 
years. 

'*  King-Fish — (Scejena  Nebulosa — Mitchill) — With  cir- 
rhous  chin,  clouded  skin,  and  ragged,  blunt  processes,  partly 
overhanging  the  upper  lip.  Length,  sixteen  or  eighteen 
inches;  depth  about  three;  though  some  individuals  are 
larger.     Head  and  body  scaly.     Color  of  the  head  and  body 


THE    KING-FISH,    OR    BARB.  175 

a  light  brown,  glossed  with  silvery  and  blue,  and  interspersed 
with  spots  and  blotches  of  a  darker  hue.  Some  of  these 
clouds  slant  obliquely  forward  from  the  dorsal  fin ;  some  run 
obliquely  backward  from  the  nape  of  the  neck;  and  some 
pass  midway  from  the  sides  to  the  tail.  There  is  here  and 
there  an  insulated  dark  patch,  with  dirty  discolorations  to- 
wards the  white  belly.  He  grows  rapidly  thick  and  stout 
towards  the  thorax,  and  then  gently  and  gradually  slopes 
away  towards  the  taU." 

He  is  taken  by  the  angler  for  basse  and  weak  fish  with 
their  ordinary  tackle,  with  the  exception  of  the  hook,  which 
should  be  rather  smaller,  say  No.  4,  Limerick  or  Kirby  sal- 
mon, to  accommodate  the  mouth  of  the  barb,  which  is  rather 
small. 

The  following  description  of  his  grounds,  and  manner  of 
taking  him,  by  a  friend  who  has  had  much  experience,  will 
close  our  article  on  the  king-fish  to  the  gratification  of  all  who 
have  or  ever  expect  to  bite  or  get  a  bite  from  this  interesting 
fish: 

"  This  is  one  of  the  finest  fish  for  the  table,  procured  from 
the  salt  water.  They  are  not  plenty  in  the  neighborhood  of 
this  city,  though  occasionally  a  season  occurs  when  they  are 
taken  in  considerable  numbers.  I  have  often  taken  20  or  30 
in  a  tide,  in  the  neighborhood  of  Communipaw,  that  delight- 
ful little  Dutch  town,  rendered  famous  in  history  by  the  re- 
nowned Knickerbocker. 

"  A  little  below  this  village  there  is  a  piece  of  hard  bot- 
tom on  the  extensive  flat  which  is  spread  out  from  Jersey 
City  down  nearly  to  Bergen  Point.  A  single  rock  is  bare  at 
low  water  on  this  hard  ground,  called  Black  Tom.  The  best 
ground,  in  my  experience,  is  found  thus:  Row  your  boat 
from  Black  Tom  directly  for  the  Jersey  shore,  sounding  with 
an  oar  until  the  bottom  becomes  soft  and  the  water  a  little 
deeper  than  on  the  hard.     You  are  then  at  the  edge  of  what 


CHAPTER  XIII. 
OP    THE    BLACK-PISH,    OR    TAUTOO 


This  is  another  of  our  native  fishes,  found  only  in  the  waters 
of  New-York,  Massachusetts,  Rhode-Island  and  vicinity. 
They  are  not  so  much  an  object  of  sport  as  the  two  last 
named,  but  as  they  come  early,  and  sometimes  in  great  abun- 
dance, and  when  taken  and  fresh  cooked  are  a  fine  table  fish, 
they  deserve  a  particular  place  in  our  extended  catalogue  of 
angle  fishes. 

Black-Fish  of  New-York,  Tautog  of  the  Mohegans — 
Tide  Black-Fish,  or  Runners — (Mitchill) — "  The  name  of  this 
fish  is  derived  from  the  color  of  its  back  and  sides,  being  of  a 
bluish  or  crow  black. 

"  The  black  fish  abounds  in  the  vicinity  of  Long  Island, 
and  is  a  stationary  inhabitant  of  the  salt  water.  He  never 
visits  the  rivers,  like  salmon  or  sturgeon;  nor,  on  the  other 
hand,  deserts  his  dwelling  place  as  they  do.  He  is  fond  of 
rocks,  reefs  and  rough  bottoms.  He  is  taken  through  the 
whole  course  of  Long  Island  Sound,  Fisher's  Island  Sound, 
;md  in  the  neighborhood  of  Rhode-Island.,    The  tautog  was 


"'W'^' 


THE    BLACK-FISH. 


179 


not  origiually  known  in  Massachusetts  bay ;  but  within  a  few 
years  he  has  been  carried  beyond  Cape  Cod,  and  has  multi- 
phed  so  abundantly  that  the  Boston  market  has  now  a  full 
supply,  without  the  necessity  of  importing  from  Newport  and 
Providence.  Black-fish,  however,  does  not  confine  himself 
to  rough  bottoms ;  for  he  is  also  caught  m  the  southern  bays 
of  Long  Island,  and  on  the  banks  of  the  ocean  oflf  Sandy 
Hook.  He  is  considered,  by  the  New-Yorkers,  as  a  very 
fine  fish  for  the  table.  He  grows  to  the  weight  of  ten  or 
twelve  pounds,  and  even  more ;  but  it  is  a  fish  of  a  good  size, 
that  equals  two  or  three. 

"He  may  be  kept  for  a  long  time  in  ponds  or  cars ;  and 
fed,  and  even  fatted  there.  When  the  cold  of  winter  be- 
numbs him  he  refuses  to  eat  any  more,  and  a  membrane  is 
observed  to  form  over  the  vent,  and  close  it.  He  begins  to 
regain  appetite  with  the  return  of  warmth  in  the  sping.  The 
blossoming  of  the  dogwood,  (cornus  floi-ida,)  early  in  April, 
is  understood  to  denote  the  time  of  baiting  black-fish.  As 
soon  as  these  flowers  unfold,  the  fishermen  proceed  with 
their  hooks  and  lines  to  the  favorite  places.  If  there  is  no 
dogwood,  a  judgment  is  derived  from  the  vegetation  of  the 
chestnut  tree  (castanea  vesca).  The  season  of  baiting  is 
reckoned  very  favorable  until  the  increasing  warmth  of  the 
season  brings  food  enough  to  fill  their  stomachs,  and  they 
thereupon  afibrd  less  pastime  to  the  sportsman  and  less  profit 
to  the  professor.  The  people  express  this  sentiment  in  these 
coarse  rhymes: 

"  '  When  chestnut  leaves  are  as  big  as  thumb  nail, 
Then  bite  black-fish  without  fail ; 
But  when  chestnut  leaves  are  as  long  as  a  span, 
Then  catch  black-fish  if  you  can.* " 


"The  common  bait  for  black-fish  is  the  soft  clam,  or  pisser 
^mya.)      The  soldier,  crab,  or  fiddler,  (ocypoda,)  will  fre- 


180  THE    BLACK-FISH 

quently  tempt  him  when  he  refuses  to  taste  the  other.  And 
he  snaps  very  readily  at  the  large  finny  worm  of  the  salt 
water  beaches,  (nereis,)  when  used  on  a  hook  for  him. 

"  Some  persons,  who  live  contiguous  to  the  shores  where 
are  situated  the  rocks  frequented  by  tautog,  invite  the  fish 
there  by  baiting.  By  this  is  meant  the  throwing  overboard 
broken  clams  or  crabs,  to  induce  the  black-fish  to  renew 
their  visits,  and  fine  sport  is  procured. 

"Rocky  shores  and  bottoms  are  the  haunts  of  black-fish. 
Long  experience  is  required  to  find  all  these  places  of  resort 
Nice  observations  on  the  land-marks,  in  different  directions, 
are  requisite  to  enable  a  fishing  party  to  anchor  on  the  proper 
spot.  When,  for  example,  a  certain  rock  and  tree  range  one 
way,  with  a  barn  window  appearing  over  a  headland  the 
other  way,  the  boat  being  at  the  point  where  two  such  lines 
intersect  each  other,  is  exactly  over  some  famous  rendezvous. 
To  insure  success  on  such  expectation,  it  is  proper  to  have 
a  pilot  along,  well  versed  in  all  the  local  and  minute  know- 
ledge. According  to  the  number  and  distance  of  the  rocks 
and  reefs  visited,  will  be  the  time  consumed,  from  the  dura- 
tion of  a  few  hours  to  a  long  summer's  day.  An  opinion  pre- 
vails, that  the  black-fish  can  hear  very  well;  and,  for  fear  of 
scaring  them  away,  the  greatest  stillness  is  observed.  He  is 
a  strong  fish,  and  pulls  well  for  one  of  his  weight  and  size. 

"At  some  places  black-fish  bite  best  upon  the  flood:  in 
others,  they  are  voracious  during  the  ebb.  Thunder  accom- 
panying a  shower,  is  an  indication  that  no  more  of  them  can 
be  caught.  The  appearance  of  a  porpoise  infallibly  puts  an 
end  to  sport.  Curious  stories  are  told  of  fish  in  the  wells 
and  ponds,  floating  in  their  native  element,  having  been 
found  dead,  after  sharp  and  repeated  flashes  of  lightning. 
Dull  weather,  with  an  easterly  wind,  is  generally  the  omen 
of  ill  luck.  The  exploits  performed  in  fishing  for  tautog,  are 
recounted  occasionally,  with  remarkable  glee,  and  they  afford 


THE    BLACK-FISH.  181 

a  never-failing  theme  of  entertainment  to  those  who  are  en- 
gaged in  this  sort  of  a<l venture.  Though  the  hand  line  is 
generally  used,  the  rod  is  sometimes  employed  to  great  ad- 
vantage. The  black-fish  is  remarkable  for  retaining  life  a 
long  time  after  he  is  taken  out  of  water.  He  sometimes 
swims  over  even  ground,  and  is  caught  in  seines." 

An  observant  New-York  amateur,  who  delights  in  black- 
fish  angling,  gives  us  the  following: 

"  The  black-fish,  or,  as  he  is  called  in  the  eastern  states, 
the  tautog,  is  a  very  fine  fish  for  the  table,  well  known  to  all 
epicures,  and  affords  fine  amusement  to  the  angler.  He  is 
taken  on  reefs  or  around  detached  rocks,  where  the  food  in 
which  he  delights  is  found.  The  usual  baits  employed  in 
takmg  black-fish  are  the  hard  and  soft  shelled  clam,  the  rock 
crab  and  soldier  crab  or  fiddler,  shrimp  and  shedder  lobster 
or  crab :  these  two  last  are  decidedly  the  best  that  can  be 
used,  though  in  many  situations  the  shrimp  and  the  two  small 
kinds  of  crab  above  named  are  sometimes  to  be  preferred. 
As  a  general  bait  for  these  fish,  the  shedder  lobster  is  my 
favorite,  and  I  have  long  been  a  successful  angler  for  these 
fish.  There  is  a  very  great  difference  observable  in  the 
black-fish,  even  those  feeding  together  at  the  same  rock. 
Those  taken  close  to  the  rock,  especially  if  it  has  shelving 
sides,  are  shorter,  much  darker  colored,  and  thicker  than 
those  which  are  found  playing  in  the  edge  of  the  tide  as  Wl^^^^^' 

it  sweeps  past  the  rock — these  are  the  long  fish,  with  larger 
heads  than  the  others,  and  of  much  lighter  color,  especially 
about  the  head  and  snout,  the  latter  frequently  being  nearly 
white,  whence  they  are  called  white-noses  and  tide-runners. 
They  seem  to  delight  in  the  eddies  at  the  very  edge  of  the 
swift  water,  where  they  watch  for  the  slirimp,  or  small  crabs, 
which  are  borne  along  by  the  tide.  By  casting  the  line  a 
little  above  the  rock,  and  letting  the  bait  float  with  the  cur- 
rent past  it,  holding  the  rod  vdth  an  even  and  rendy  liaiid 


182 


THE    BLACK-FIS] 


-^W. 


you  present  the  bait  to  his  expecting  eye  in  the  most  natural 
way — and  this  should  always  be  the  study  of  the  angler  who 
wishes  to  succeed.  His  bite  is  much  more  powerful  than 
that  of  the  rock-fish,  though  both  are  bold  biting  tish,  and  to 
the  experienced  angler,  with  good  tackle,  ^-arely  missed. 

"The  rock-fish  lie  under  the  overhanging  rock- weed,  on 
the  watch  for  live  bait,  shrimp,  or  crabs,  dart  out  and  seize 
their  prey,  and  retire  to  their  harbor,  drawing  the  line  from 
the  perpendicular  to  a  slanting  position,  and  that  without  the 
angler  feeling  him ;  and  I  have  taken  many  a  dark-sided  fel- 
low, merely  from  watching  the  slant  of  the  line.  Both  kinds 
are  very  powerful,  and  although  they  rarely  run  far  from  the 
rock  when  hooked,  their  extraordinary  vigor,  and  stubborn 
resistance,  make  them  a  capital  subject  for  the  rod.  The 
largest  I  have  ever  taken  with  the  rod,  weighed  five  and  a 
half  pounds.  This  was  at  Oyster-Pond  Point,  at  the  Sound 
end  of  Long  Island.  This  is  one  of  the  best  places  which  I 
know,  of  easy  access  from  New-York,  for  taking  these  fine 
fish.  An  excellent  temperance  hotel  is  kept  by  Mr.  Latham, 
and  good  boats  and  guides  are  to  be  had. 

"  The  best  mode  of  arranging  rod  tackle  for  black-fish  is 
this :  Attach  two  plaited  gut  snells,  one  of  twelve  inches  and 
one  of  eight,  to  a  small  brass  ring,  the  size  of  those  used  on 
the  second  joint  of  the  rod  from  the  hand ;  put  a  slide  sinker 
on  the  line,  and  tie  to  the  ring,  and  all  is  ready.  The  slide 
sinker  is  by  far  the  best,  as  it  is  frequently  desirable  to  throw 
from  your  boat  to  a  sunken  rock,  and  as  the  sinker  lies  on 
the  bottom,  the  smallest  action  of  the  fish  at  the  bait  is  readily 
felt. 

"  For  hand-line  fishing  I  prefer  the  same  mode  of  arranging 
the  hooks  to  any  other :  the  usual  way  is  to  have  a  loop  at 
the  end  of  the  line ;  attach  the  loop  to  the  eye  of  the  sinker, 
and  fasten  the  snells  on  the  line  just  above  the  latter,  so  that 
they  wiU  hang  about  twelve  and  eight  inches  below." 


THE    BLACK-FISH.  183 

The  rod  proper  for  taking  black-fish,  should  be  similar  to 
that  described  for  trolling,  say  about  twelve  feet  long,  and 
quite  stiff;  the  line  stout,  and  of  strong  flax  or  hemp;  and 
although  not  absolutely  necessary  for  black-fish  alone,  should 
be  attached  to  a  good  running  reel ;  by  this  arrangement,  the 
sportsman  will  be  prepared,  which  is  often  the  case,  to  meet 
a  drum  or  large  basse,  which  are  sometimes  found  on  the  same 
grounds.  The  hook  in  use  for  black-fish,  varies  in  size,  with 
many  anglers,  some  preferring  quite  a  small  size  for 
taking  the  largest  size  fish,  say  about  No.  10 ;  and  others, 
ranging  from  No.  3  to  No.  5,  the  most  proper  sizes  for 
general  fishing.  These  hooks,  it  will  be  noticed,  by 
referring  to  plate  2.  of  hooks,  are  made  of  much  stronger 
wire,  and  are  known  amongst  anglers  and  dealers  in  tackle, 
as  the  black-fish  hook.  The  hook  should  be  attached  to  a 
strong  piece  of  flax  line  about  ten  to  fifteen  inches  in  length ; 
and  if  you  angle  with  two  hooks,  they  should  be  from  four  to 
six  inches  apart;  your  sinker  should  vary  according  to  the 
tide,  and.  be  fixed  above  your  hooks  about  twelve  or 
fifteen  inches.  Some  anglers  prefer  twisted  gut  lengths* 
to  their  hooks  instead  of  flax;  but  as  the  tautog  lies  chiefly 
on  rocky  ground  and  on  sharp  stony  bottoms,  and  are  not 
very  shy,  it  is  hardly  necessary  to  run  the  risk  of  losing  gut 
tackle  when  plain  line  will  answer. 

The  black  fish  being  a  bottom  fish  altogether,  does  not 
admit  of  such  variety  of  modes  of  capture  as  others  of  the 
briny  element.     The  most  common  mode  of  taking  him  is 

*  Others  use  short  lengths  of  gimp.  An  old  and  experienced  angler, 
who  is  very  fond  of  taking  the  tautog,  says  that  to  fish  pleasantly  and 
with  expedition,  he  always  attaches  his  hooks  to  twisted  snells  com- 
posed of  three  strands  of  strong  gut.  In  this  manner  he  avoids  the  delay 
and  perplexity  occasioned  by  the  frequent  entangling  of  the  ordinary 
flax  line  snells,  and  can  take  more  fish  than  by  any  other  method 


184 


THE    BLACK-FISH, 


with  a  common  drop  line  made  of  flax,  and  from  ten  to  thirty 
yards  in  length,  according  to  the  depth  of  water. 

When  the  black  fish  favors  you  with  a  bite,  give  particu- 
lar attention  and  pull  quickly,  for  he  has  a  hard,  tough  mouth, 
and  if  your  hook  and  tackle  are  strong,  you  need  not  be  fear- 
ful of  any  damage  to  your  tools,  and  with  proper  precaution, 
you  can  call  him  in. 

Give  him  no  quarter,  when  using  the  hand-line,  (until  you 
quarter  him  for  diimer ;)  keep  your  line  tight,  and  draw  him 
straight  up  until  he  snuff  the  pure  air  of  heaven,  much  to  his 
chagrin,  and  greatly  to  your  satisfaction:  and  remember, 
should  you  be  unwatchful,  and  he  take  you  unawares  and  go 
to  the  bottom,  your  chance  is  very  small;  for  although  he 
may  roam  occasionally,  in  search  of  his  favorite  food,  still  he 
loves  his  rocky  home,  and  down  he  will  go  with  your  bottom 
tackle,  unless  you  are  on  the  alert.  Remember,  then,  that 
"Eternal  vigilance  is  the  price  of" — a  black  fish. 

How  to  Cook  the  Black-Fish — Not  seemingly  by  a  pro- 
fessor of  the  rod  and  line,  yet  certainly  by  one  who  well 
understands  how  to  bring  out  the  gasti'onomic  properties 
of  the  subject  under  discussion,  the  following,  from  the 
pages  of  the  Knickerbocker  magazine,  although  containing 
much  that  is  extraneous,  will,  we  think,  suit  the  taste  of  our 
reader: 

"And  now,  fair  ruler  of  the  destinies  of  dinner!  (for  if 
thou  beest  a  man,  I  have  no  sympathies  toward  thee,)  smoke- 
compelling  Betty,  or  Mary,  or  whatever  else  may  be  the 
happy  appelative  in  which  not  only  thou  but  all  of  us  rejoice, 
thou  hast  lying  extended  before  thee  one  of  the  most  deli- 
cately absorbent  substances  in  nature,  imbibing  flavor  from 
everything  which  surrounds  it,  whether  of  adverse  or  of  pro- 
pitious tendency;  subject,  as  Wai-ren  Hastings  said  of  the 
enure  of  the  British  possessions  in  India,  alike  'to  the  touch 
of  chance,  or  the  breath  of  opinion.' 


TH  E    BLACK-FISH. 


185 


"  Thou  hast  It,  my  choice  Mary !  The  small,  deep  stew- 
pan — with  its  thin  cullender  or  strainer,  on  which  the  fish  is 
to  be  lowered  to  the  bottom,  that  it  may,  when  stewed  into 
soft  delight,  be  gently  raised  again,  without  injuring  its  integ- 
rity of  form — glows  witli  brightness  in  front  of  thee !  Thy 
vigorous  arm  of  mottled  red,  thy  round  wrist,  and  small 
compact  fingers  grasp  the  sharp  pointed  knife  with  which  to 
satisfy  thyself  that  not  one  scale  remains  around  the  head,  the 
fins,  the  tail. 

"  Now  tail  and  fins  are  nicely  shortened  in  their  termina- 
tion, not  hacked  off.  A  little  salt  is  thrown  over  the  fish, 
merely  to  harden  and  not  salt  it,  and  it  lies  two  hours  for 
this  purpose.  It  is  then  scored,  that  it  may  not  break  when 
it  swells,  and  browned  well  upon  the  gridiron :  from  which 
it  is  carefully  taken  up,  and  laid  to  repose  upon  a  bed  of 
nicely  peeled  and  very  fresh  mushrooms,  daintly  spread  over 
the  strainer. 

"  While  the  fish  was  hardening,  Mary  has  had  a  commu- 
nication from  up  stairs.  An  extra  bottle  of  the  Chateau  of 
twenty-five  had  been  unavailingly  opened  the  day  before,  to 
tempt  a  total  temperance  friend  who  had  arrived  from  the 
country.  Good  part  of  it  remains,  and  at  this  moment  it  is 
decanted  into  the  stew-pan ;  the  freighted  strainer  descends 
into  the  wine ;  and  the  fish,  entirely  immersed  in  the  ame- 
thystine element,  regrets  no  more  its  loss  of  life,  of  liberty, 
and  youth.  A  white  onion  or  two  is  sliced  into  rings,  that 
fall  as  decorations  over  him  ;  a  few  berries  of  pepper  thrown 
in ;  six  cloves ;  two  blades  of  mace  ;  an  echalot,  if  you  think 
proper ;  and  cayenne  or  not,  according  to  your  taste.  The 
stew-pan  is  then  covered,  and  a  careful,  slow,  epicurean  sim- 
mer completes  the  work." 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

OF    THE    DRUM 


This  is  a  large,  uncouth,  ugly-looking  fish,  not  often  sought 
after  as  an  object  of  sport,  but  sometimes,  and  when  least 
expected,  the  subject  of  the  angler's  toil.  If,  however, 
he  should  be  lightly  rigged,  and  not  on  the  alert,  this  ele- 
phant looking  animal  often  has  the  pleasure  of  chewing  the 
bottom  tackle  at  his  leisure,  and  the  astonished  sportsman 
unfortunately  has  to  rig  himself  anew,  (after  twisting  his 
segar  in  his  mouth,  or  rolling  his  quid  on  t'other  side,  if  he 
has  either,)  or  chew  the  cud  of  discontent  at  not  having  sup- 
plied himself  with  extra  tackle,  or  not  being  more  strongly 
accoutred. 

Mitchni  has  the  following  remarks  on  this  fish : 
*^  Black  Drum — (ScisBua  fusca) — Length  when  full  grown, 
thirty-eight  or  forty  inches;  depth,  fourteen  or  sixteen. 
Spreads  from  the  back  wedgewise  towards  the  belly,  which 
is  rather  flattish  and  bi'oad,  rendering  it  easy  to  turn  the 
dead  fish  upon  the  belly  for  examination. 

"The  black  drum  often  equals  fifteen,  twenty,  and  even 
thirty  pounds.  The  individual  now  before  me  comes  to 
thirty-four.     I  once  weighed  a  drum  that  was  as   heavy  as 


THE    DKUM.  187 

eighty  pounds.  I  have  been  credibly  informed  of  one  that 
weighed  a  hundred  and  one  pounds.  He  is  taken  abundantly 
during  the  summer,  both  with  line  and  net. 

"  Color  of  the  drum,  a  dull  silvery,  like  the  dross  of  melted 
lead,  with  a  faint,  brassy  tinge  of  ruddy,  though  between 
the  scales  the  skin  is  inclined  to  blackish  on  the  back  and 
sides,  and  thereby  gives  its  denomination  to  the  fish.  Scales 
of  the  body  exceedingly  large,  stiff,  horny,  and  marked  by 
radiated  and  concentric  lines.  Their  form  receding  some- 
what from  square,  and  approaching  the  figure  of  the  letter  D. 
They  are  so  planted  in  the  skin,  that  it  is  difficult  to  remove 
them.  Lateral  line,  broad,  rather  indistinct,  and  running 
scaly  to  the  end  of  the  tail.  Under  the  scales  the  silvery  hue 
is  most  considerable.  A  black  patch  on  the  other  side  of  the 
older  individuals,  behind  the  pectoral  fin.  All  the  fins  in- 
clined to  reddish,  more  especially  the  caudal,  pectoral,  and 
dorsal.  Sometimes  the  space  covered  or  shaded  by  the 
pectoral  fin  is  pale  or  white.     Tail  even,  eyes  silvery  yellow. 

"  His  name  of  drum  has  been  given  on  account  of  the 
drumming  noise  he  makes,  immediately  after  being  out  of 
water. 

"  He  swims  in  numerous  shoals  in  the  shallow  bays  on 
the  south  side  of  Long  Island,  where  fishermen,  during  the 
warm  season,  can  find  them,  almost  like  a  flock  of  sheep.  Is 
a  dull  fish." 

In  addition  to  his  whereabouts,  stated  by  Mitchill,  he  is 
found  in  large  company  in  the  Kills  and  off  Communipaw, 
where  he  is  often  taken  by  the  weak-fish  and  basse  angler. 
He  sometimes  takes  a  stroll  up  the  stream,  solus,  and  has  been 
taken  in  Harlem  river;  and  although  a  dull  fish,  it  would 
seem,  by  the  following  extract  from  the  New-York  Herald, 
sometimes  requires  skill,  experience,  and  activity,  in  taldug 
him: 

"  A  great  Haul. — A  gentleman  of  this  city,  who  delights 


188 


THE    DRUM. 


in  the  rare  sport  uf  angling,  and  has  spent  a  good  part  of  the 
summer  at  Shanlz's  Hotel,  Macomb's  Dam,  fishing  with  va- 
ried success  for  basse  and  blue-fish,  day  before  yesterday,  * 
(Thursday,)  struck  one  of  the  monsters  of  the  deep  that 
sometimes  visit  that  vicinity.  On  the  first  pull  he  thought 
that  he  had  struck  bottom,  but  his  reel  soon  began  to  whiz, 
and  his  line  to  run  with  great  rapidity.  Finding  nearly  all 
his  line,  300  feet,  run  out,  he  took  up  his  anchor-stone,  and 
away  went  the  boat  down  the  river  about  a  mile ;  he  then 
managed  so  as  to  make  a  tack,  and  up  the  river  they  went 
again,  and  down  and  up  again  for  two  hours  and  a  half,  until 
finally  his  majesty  was  got  into  shallow  water,  and  a  seizure 
made  under  the  gills,  but  he  slipped  grasp  and  made  a  sud- 
den lurch,  taking  rod  and  line,  and  floored  himself  on  the 
grass  about  twenty  yards  from  the  boat.  The  gentleman, 
who  is  a  muscular  man,  succeeded  with  some  difficulty  in 
getting  him  into  the  boat,  when  he  proved  to  be  a  drum  of 
the  largest  size,  and  on  weighing  at  the  hotel  weighed  a  little 
over  seventy  pounds.  This  is  believed  to  be  the  largest  fish 
ever  taken  with  rod  and  reel.  The  hooks  were  ordinary 
basse  hooks,  with  a  yard  leader  on  double  silk-worm  gut. 
purchased  at  Brown's,  a  few  days  since,  in  Fulton  street,  near 
our  office.  A  fish  of  the  same  kind  was  taken  last  summer 
in  the  Kills,  by  Mr.  Michaels,  weighing  over  forty  pounds, 
and  one  by  Mr.  Keese,  a  few  years  ago,  weighing  over  fifty 
pounds;  but  this  caps  the  climax,  and  Mr.  R.  deserves  a 
great  deal  of  credit  for  his  perseverance  in  tliis  extraordinary 
feat." 

*  August,  1844. 


CHAPTER  XV. 

OP    THE    BLACK,    OR    OSWEGO    BASSE. 


This  is  the  favorite  game  fish  of  the  northern  and  western 
parts  of  our  country,  and  is  found  in  abundance  in  most  of 
the  northern  lakes  and  western  rivers.  To  our  piscatorial 
friends  in  New-York,  Ohio,  Michigan  and  Kentucky,  they 
afford  unceasing  delight,  and  no  fish  receives  more  enco- 
miums as  to  the  pleasure  derived,  either  from  the  rod  or  fork. 

His  usual  size  is  about  twelve  to  fifteen  inches  in  length 
by  two  inches  in  thickness  and  five  inches  broad.  The  color 
is  deep  black  along  the  back  and  sides,  growing  lighter  to- 
wards the  belly,  and  becoming  yellowish,  in  the  female.  It 
has  a  thick  oval  head ;  large  mouth,  with  rows  of  small  teeth ; 
a  wide  dorsal  fin  near  the  centre  of  the  body ;  another  to- 
wards the  tail,  with  corresponding  pectoral  and  anal  fins. 
The  body  is  quite  thick  near  the  head,  and  tapers  regularly, 
terminating  in  a  swallow  tail.  It  feeds  principally  on  small 
fish,  which  betray  its  proximity  by  rising  to  the  surface  to 
elude  pursuit.  It  is  best  taken  with  minnows  and  other 
kinds  of  small  fish,  but  bites  freely  at  lobsters  and  muscles. 

The  Buffalo  correspondent  appears  to  think  that  the  black 


190 


THE     B  L  A  C 


basse  and  Oswego  basse  are  of  difFerent  species.  Hear 
him : 

*^The  Oswego  and  Black  Basse. — The  Oswego  basse  and 
black  basse  bear  so  strong  a  resemblance  to  each  other  that 
not  one  fisherman  in  ten  knows  them  as  distinct  entities.  In 
form,  color,  weight,  and  habits,  the  two  are  almost  perfectly 
identical;  and  yet  their  differences,  though  minute,  are  strik- 
ing and  essential.  An  Oswego  basse,  when  placed  by  a 
black  basse  of  the  same  size,  is  readily  distinguished  by  his 
more  forked  tail,  his  greater  thickness  of  shoulder,  his  coarser 
scales,  and,  above  all,  by  his  mouth,  which,  when  open,  is 
nearly  twice  as  large  as  that  of  the  black  basse.  In  Lake 
Ontario  the  Oswego  basse  is  abondant,  and  the  black  basse 
comparatively  rare.  In  Lake  Erie,  the  black  basse  greatly 
predominates,  and  it  may  be  doubted  whether  the  Oswego- 
nian — like  certain  citizens  of  the  Ontario  shore — is  not  an 
interloper  in  our  waters,  who  has  found  his  way  to  us  from 
below  through  some  canal.  However  this  may  be,  he  is 
certainly  right  welcome ! 

"  The  black  basse  is  our  chief  object  of  pursuit — his  cap- 
ture is  our  dearest  triumph — his  captive  form  our  proudest 
trophy.  When  word  first  comes,  in  June,  that  the  black 
basse  bites  in  our  river,  what  a  stir  there  is  among  our  anglers! 
— what  questioning  as  to  the  when,  and  the  where,  and  by 
whom,  and  with  what  bait,  and  the  number,  and  size  ! — what 
an  anxious  inquiry  after  big  minnows ! — what  a  raking  and 
scraping  of  pond-holes  for  soft  lobsters ! — what  a  watching 
of  the  skies ! — and,  if  there  be  no  wind,  or  a  zephyr  from  the 
south  or  west,  what  bright  and  hopeful  faces ! — but  if  the 
storm  rage,  or  an  easterly  wind,  however  gentle,  fan  our 
sleeping  bay,  what  rueful  countenances ! — what  half-sap- 
pressed  repinings  ! — what  a  woful,  spiritless  attempting  to  be 
busy  about  our  ordinary  avocationa  !  And  why  this  commo- 
tion ?     Because  this  is  the  very  prince  of  our  game-fishes. 


THE     DLACK     BASSE.  191 

His  capture  is  a  less  easy  task,  and  involves,  or  is  supposed 
to  involve,  more  science,  and  to  be  a,  truer  proof  of  merit  as 
an  angler,  than  any  other  tenant  of  our  crystal  waters.  But 
(let  me  whisper  it  in  thy  ear,  my  friend !)  there  is  much  of 
fancy  in  all  this.  He  is  a  noble  fish,  and  struggles  vigorously 
and  most  pertinaciously  for  liberty ;  but  no  art  nor  skill,  unat- 
tainable by  thee,  or  any  one,  is  requisite  to  hook  or  draw 
him  from  his  element. 

"  This  fish  beds  in  our  streams  and  rivers,  and  probably, 
too,  on  the  bars  and  shoals  of  our  bay.  Numbers  run  up  the 
larger  streams  in  May,  and  bite  freely  at  the  worm,  in  the 
middle  and  latter  part  of  that  month,  in  the  Tonawanda.  His 
appearance  is  too  familiar  to  need  description.  His  color 
varies,  though  it  generally  approaches  black.  I  think  only 
the  smaller  basse  run  up  the  creeks.  Those  taken  in  Tona 
wanda  seldom  overweigh  two  or  two  and  a  half  pounds,  and 
have  a  greenish  hue.  In  the  river  they  attain  a  weight  of 
four  and  four  and  a  half,  and  even  five  pounds ;  and  occasion- 
ally heavier  ones  have  been  taken,  weighing  even  eight 
pounds.  The  river  fish,  when  fresh  from  the  water,  is  fre- 
quently banded,  like  the  perch,  with  broad  bars  of  a  darker 
hue,  which  disappear,  however,  and  fade  into  the  general 
color  of  the  fish  as  he  becomes  dry.  He  seldom  takes  the 
hook,  in  the  Niagara,  until  June.  He  is  always  fine  eating, 
but  is  fattest  and  best  in  autumn." 

He  is  angled  for  in  the  usual  way,  and  with  the  same  ar- 
rangement of  tackle  as  the  striped  basse  or  salmon;  and  with 
flome  enthusiastic  western  sportsmen,  is  thought  to  give  more 
amusement  than  either.  But  the  most  active  and  exciting 
mode  of  pursuit  is  with  the  trolling  rod  and  boat.  We  are 
indebted  to  a  friend  who  has  frequented  Lake  George,  for  the 
following  interesting  communication : 

"  This  is  a  game  fish,  affording  the  angler  the  very  highest 
enjoyment.     These  fish  are  taken  in  various  ways.     When 


182 


THE    BLACK-FISl 


you  present  the  bait  to  his  expecting  eye  in  the  most  natural 
way — and  this  should  always  be  the  study  of  the  angler  who 
wishes  to  succeed.  His  bite  is  much  more  powerful  than 
that  of  the  rock-fish,  though  both  are  bold  biting  fish,  and  to 
the  experienced  angler,  with  good  tackle,  rarely  missed. 

"The  rock-fish  lie  under  the  overhanging  rock- weed,  on 
the  watch  for  live  bait,  shrimp,  or  crabs,  dart  out  and  seize 
their  prey,  and  retire  to  their  harbor,  drawing  the  line  from 
the  perpendicular  to  a  slanting  position,  and  that  without  the 
angler  feeling  him ;  and  I  have  taken  many  a  dark-sided  fel- 
low, merely  from  watching  the  slant  of  the  line.  Both  kinds 
are  very  powerful,  and  although  they  rarely  run  far  from  the 
rock  when  hooked,  their  extraordinary  vigor,  and  stubborn 
resistance,  make  them  a  capital  subject  for  the  rod.  The 
largest  I  have  ever  taken  with  the  rod,  weighed  five  and  a 
half  pounds.  This  was  at  Oyster-Pond  Point,  at  the  Sound 
end  of  Long  Island.  This  is  one  of  the  best  places  which  I 
know,  of  easy  access  from  New-York,  for  taking  these  fine 
fish.  An  excellent  temperance  hotel  is  kept  by  Mr.  Latham, 
and  good  boats  and  guides  are  to  be  had. 

"  The  best  mode  of  arranging  rod  tackle  for  black-fish  is 
this :  Attach  two  plaited  gut  snells,  one  of  twelve  inches  and 
one  of  eight,  to  a  small  brass  ring,  the  size  of  those  used  on 
the  second  joint  of  the  rod  from  the  hand ;  put  a  slide  sinker 
on  the  line,  and  tie  to  the  ring,  and  all  is  ready.  The  slide 
sinker  is  by  far  the  best,  as  it  is  frequently  desirable  to  throw 
from  your  boat  to  a  sunken  rock,  and  as  the  sinker  lies  on 
the  bottom,  the  smallest  action  of  the  fish  at  the  bait  is  readily 
felt. 

"  For  hand-line  fishing  I  prefer  the  same  mode  of  arranging 
the  hooks  to  any  other :  the  usual  way  is  to  have  a  loop  at 
the  end  of  the  line ;  attach  the  loop  to  the  eye  of  the  sinker, 
and  fasten  the  snells  on  the  line  just  above  the  latter,  so  that 
they  will  hang  about  twelve  and  eight  inches  below." 


THE    BLACK-FISH.  183 

The  rod  proper  for  taking  black-fish,  should  be  similar  to 
that  described  for  trolling,  say  about  twelve  feet  long,  and 
quite  stiff;  the  line  stout,  and  of  strong  flax  or  hemp;  and 
although  not  absolutely  necessary  for  black-fish  alone,  should 
be  attached  to  a  good  running  reel ;  by  this  arrangement,  the 
sportsman  will  be  prepared,  which  is  often  the  case,  to  meet 
a  drum  or  large  basse,  which  are  sometimes  found  on  the  same 
grounds.  The  hook  in  use  for  black-fish,  varies  in  size,  with 
many  anglers,  some  preferring  quite  a  small  size  for 
taking  the  largest  size  fish,  say  about  No.  10 ;  and  others, 
ranging  from  No.  3  to  No.  5,  the  most  proper  sizes  for 
general  fishing.  These  hooks,  it  will  be  noticed,  by 
referring  to  plate  2.  of  hooks,  are  made  of  much  stronger 
wire,  and  are  known  amongst  anglers  and  dealers  in  tackle, 
as  the  black-fish  hook.  The  hook  should  be  attached  to  a 
strong  piece  of  flax  line  about  ten  to  fifteen  inches  in  length ; 
and  if  you  angle  with  two  hooks,  they  should  be  from  four  to 
six  inches  apart;  your  sinker  should  vary  according  to  the 
tide,  and  be  fixed  above  your  hooks  about  twelve  or 
fifteen  inches.  Some  anglers  prefer  twisted  gut  lengths* 
to  their  hooks  instead  of  flax ;  but  as  the  tautog  lies  chiefly 
on  rocky  ground  and  on  sharp  stony  bottoms,  and  are  not 
very  shy,  it  is  hardly  necessary  to  run  the  risk  of  losing  gut 
tackle  when  plain  line  will  answer. 

The  black  fish  being  a  bottom  fish  altogether,  does  not 
admit  of  such  variety  of  modes  of  capture  as  others  of  the 
briny  element.     The  most  common  mode  of  taking  him  is 


*  Others  use  short  lengths  of  gimp.  An  old  and  experienced  angler, 
who  is  very  fond  of  taking  the  tautog,  says  that  to  fish  pleasantly  and 
with  expedition,  he  always  attaches  his  hooks  to  twisted  snells  com- 
posed of  three  strands  of  strong  gut.  In  this  manner  he  avoids  the  delay 
and  perplexity  occasioned  by  the  frequent  entangling  of  the  ordinary 
flax  line  suells,  and  can  take  more  fish  than  by  any  other  method 


191 


THE    BLACK    BASSE. 


-^--1^ 

: 

\Z^1~- 

—^::£^- 

fM 

-^X= 

There  is  so  great  a  diflference,  both  in  shape  and  color,  be- 
tween the  fish  of  this  size  and  those  of  two  or  more  pounds 
weight,  that  a  stranger  would  never  take  them  to  be  of  the 
same  species.  These  small  fish  are  very  similar  in  shape  to 
the  blue-fish  of  the  salt  water,  while  those  of  the  larger  size 
spread  in  width  as  they  increase  in  size,  so  that  a  fish  of  two 
and  a  half  to  three  pounds,  is  of  a  shape  between  a  black-fish, 
or  tautog,  and  the  famous  sheepshead.  In  color  they  difier 
also  greatly :  the  small  basse  being  of  a  Hght  dull  greenish 
color,  while  the  larger  grow  darker  as  they  increase  in  size, 
the  largest  being  nearly  black  on  the  back,  and  of  a  very  dark 
brownish  green  on  the  sides.  The  younger  gentry,  above 
described,  are  not  to  be  despised  on  account  of  their  size, 
for  when  taken  with  a  light  trout  rod,  they  wiU  be  found  to 
be  a  fine  vigorous  fish,  and  when  in  their  temerity  they  seize 
the  large  fly,  on  feeling  the  hook,  they  will,  true  to  their 
nature,  make  the  leap,  in  imitation  of  their  sires,  thus  show- 
ing tnemselves  to  be  game  fish.  I  have  known  them  to  leap 
three  times  while  reeling  in  the  long  trolling  line,  whereas 
the  larger  gentry  rarely  leap  more  than  once." 


CHAPTER  XVI. 
OF    THE    SHEEPSHEAD. 


This  is  another  fish  taken  by  the  black-fish  and  basse  sports- 
men in  the  vicinity  of  New-York.  He  affords  considerable 
excitement  in  capture,  and  much  pleasure  as  a  table  fish.* 
Of  late  yeai's  he  has  been  considered  very  scarce,  and  does 
not  seem  wiUing,  as  usual,  to  tickle  the  palates  of  the  inhabit- 
ants of  Manhattan  Island. 

Sheep's  Head — (sparus  ovis. — MitchiU.) — "  With  smutty 
face,  banded  sides,  pale  complexion,  prominent  eyebrows, 
and  grooved  dorsal  fin.  The  form  of  the  mouth,  and  a  cer- 
tain smuttiness  of  face,  have  a  distant  resemblance  to  the 
physiognomy  of  the  sheep.  Thence  comes  the  name  by 
which  he  is  usually  distinguished. 

"  Grows  big  enough  to  weigh  14  or  15  pounds.  One  that 
weighed  four  pounds  and  a  half,  measured  twenty  inches  in 
length,  eight  in  depth,  and  three  in  thickness.  Sheepshead 
is  the  most  esteemed  of  New-Yoik  fishes,  and  fetches  a  higher 


*  It  is  said  that  the  old  adage,  that  "  two  heads  are  better  than  one 
if  one  is  a  8heep*a  head,"  will  not  apply  to  this  fish. 


196 


THE    SHEEPSHEAD. 


price  than  any,  excepting,  perhaps,  fresh  salmon  and  trout. 
The  price  varies  from  a  dollar  to  one  hundred  and  fifty  cents, 
for  a  fish  of  middle  size;  that  is,  from  four  to  seven  pounds. 
Nothing,  in  the  opinion  of  a  New-Yorker,  can  exceed  boiled 
sheepshead,  served  up  at  a  sumptuous  dinner. 

'•  General  color  of  the  sheepshead  a  white  or  obscure  sil- 
very, with  a  smutty  daubing  over  the  face  and  chin,  and  a 
greenish  tinge  above  the  brow,  and  six  or  seven  dark  bands 
or  zones  of  an  inch  or  more  in  breadth,  regularly  slanting 
from  back  to  belly :  the  latter  a  dull  white,  approaching,  in 
some  places  and  individuals,  to  cream  color.  Scales  large, 
horny,  distinguished  by  radiated  and  concentric  lines,  and 
somewhat  like  a  square  rounded  at  the  comers.  They  are 
deeply  inserted  into  the  skin ;  adhere  with  remarkable  firm- 
ness ;  and  when  they  are  separated,  there  is  discoverable,  on 
the  edges  of  the  skin  that  enclosed  them,  a  sort  of  tarnished 
argentine  or  brightish  leaden  hue.     Rays  of  all  the  fins  coarse. 

"  This  noble  fish  visits  the  neighborhood  of  Long  Island 
annually.  Emerging  from  the  depths  of  the  ocean,  he  finds 
in  the  recesses  and  inlets  there,  a  plenty  of  the  crabs,  muscles, 
and  clams,  on  which  he  loves  to  feed.  He  confines  himself 
strictly  to  the  salt  water,  never  having  been  seen  in  the  fresh 
rivers.  His  term  of  continuance  is  only  during  the  warmest 
season ;  that  is,  from  the  beginning  of  June  to  the  middle  of 
September.  He  then  departs  to  the  unknown  depths  of  the 
Atlantic,  and  is  seen  no  more  until  the  ensuing  summer.  I 
have,  however,  known  him  to  stay  later ;  for  one  of  the  most 
numerous  collections  of  sheepshead  I  ever  saw  in  New-York 
market,  was  on  the  4th  of  October,  1814.  I  have  seen  him 
as  late  as  the  17th. 

"  The  sheepshead  swims  in  shoals,  and  is  sometimes  sur- 
rounded in  great  numbers  by  the  seine.  Several  hundred 
have  often  been  taken  at  a  single  haul,  with  the  long  sweep- 
ing: nets  in  use  near  Raynortown,  Babylon,  and  Fire  Island. 


THE    SHEEPSHEAD. 


197 


They  even  tell  of  thousands  being  brought  to  land  at  a 
draught. 

"  He  also  bites  at  the  hook,  and  is  not  unfrequently 
caught  in  succession.  The  outfitting  of  a  sheepsheading 
party,  is  always  an  occasion  of  considerable  parade  and  high 
expectation,  as  I  have  often  experienced.  Whenever  a 
sheepshead  is  brought  on  board  the  boat,  more  joy  is  mani- 
fested than  by  the  possession  of  any  other  kind  of  fish.  The 
sportsmen  view  the  exercise  so  much  above  common  fishing, 
that  the  capture  of  the  sheepshead  is  the  most  desirable  com- 
bination of  luck  with  skill ;  and  the  feats  of  hooking  and  pull- 
ing him  in,  furnish  materials  for  the  most  hyperbolical  stories 
The  sheepshead  is  a  very  stout  fish,  and  the  hooks  and  lines 
are  strong  in  proportion.  Yet  he  frequently  breaks  them, 
and  makes  his  escape.  Sheepshead  have  been  caught  with 
such  fish  tackle  fastened  to  their  jaws.  When  the  line  and 
hook  gives  way,  the  accident  makes  a  serious  impression  on 
the  company.  As  the  possession  of  the  sheepshead  is  a  grand 
prize,  so  his  escape  is  felt  a  distressing  loss.  I  knew  an  an- 
cient fisherman,  who  used  to  record  in  a  book  the  time, 
place,  and  circumstance,  of  every  sheepshead  he  had  caught." 

"  This  fish  is  sometimes  speared,  by  torch-light,  in  the 
wide  and  shallow  bays  of  Queens  and  SuflTolk  counties,  Long 
Island. 

"  The  places  where  he  is  found  in  the  greatest  abundance, 
are  about  40  miles  from  the  city.  He  soon  dies  after  being 
removed  from  his  element,  and  in  such  sultry  weather  soon 
spoils  after  death," 

The  proper  tackle  for  taking  this  fish  is  precisely  the  same 
as  that  used  for  the  largest  black-fish,  to  wit :  a  stout  drop- 
line,  of  hemp  or  cotton,  from  fifty  to  one  hundred  and  fifty 
feet  in  length,  and  about  one-fourth  of  an  inch  in  thickness, 
and  heavy  sinker,  according  to  tide  and  depth  of  water,  and 
a  stout  black-fish  hook  of  the  largest  size,  each  of  which 


198 


THE    SHEEPSHEAD. 


should  be  thoroughly  tried  before  they  are  cast  into  the  water 
With  such  an  outfit,  the  accidents  spoken  of  by  Mitchill  may 
be  avoided. 

An  amateur  friend,  who  has  had  great  success  in  taking 
tliis  fish,  furnishes  the  following: 

"  This  noble  fish  has  become  quite  scarce  in  our  harbor. 
The  writer  has  taken  them  repeatedly  on  a  small  reef  near 
Governor's  Island,  opposite  the  Battery,  but  this  was  in  days 
long  since  gone  by.  They  are  taken  still  occasionally  at 
Caving  Point,  and  opposite  the  signal  poles  at  the  Narrows ; 
also  at  Pelham  Bridge,  and  in  Little  Hellgate, 

"  Strong  tackle  is  essential  for  taking  them,  as  they  are  a 
very  vigorous  and  powerful  fish.  They  are  usually  found  on 
reefs  or  in  the  neighborhood  of  large  rocks,  whither  they  re- 
sort for  their  favorite  food,  which  is  the  small  rock  crab  and 
the  soft-shell  clam — a  very  common  bait  is  the  latter.  The 
clam  is  put  on  the  hook  whole,  by  inserting  the  point  of  the 
hook  through  the  stem,  and  buiying  the  whole  of  the  curve 
in  the  body  of  the  clam.  This  fish  is  furnished  with  a  fine 
set  of  front  teeth,  very  nearly  resembling  the  teeth  of  the 
g^eep — whence  the  name  ;  the  roof  of  the  mouth  is  literally 
paved  with  round  teeth,  placed  closely  together,  like  the 
paving  stones  in  the  carriage  track  of  our  city,  enabling  them 
to  crack  the  shell  of  the  clams  with  perfect  ease.  Some 
anglers,  after  placing  the  clam  on  the  hook,  slightly  crack 
the  shell  on  one  side ;  but  this  sometimes  causes  the  flesh 
of  the  clam  to  be  exposed  to  those  enemies  of  the  angler  for 
eheepshead — the  bergalls.  The  sheepshead  will  take  the 
whole  clam  when  he  finds  it,  and  crack  it  in  his  paved  mouth, 
without  the  previous  aid  of  the  fisherman.  Where  the  small 
fish  are  not  plenty — which  is  the  case  on  the  feeding  grounds 
in  the  south  bays — I  much  prefer  a  bait  of  the  opened  soft 
or  hard  clam  of  large  size — as  large  at  least  as  a  pullet's  egg — 
and  have  been  far  more  successful  with  it  than  with  the 


TH£SH£EPSH£AD.  199 

whole  clam.  The  shedder  crab  is  also  a  very  fine,  attractive 
bait  for  them,  on  grounds  where  small  fish  are  not  numerous. 

"  Great  care  and  skill  are  requisite  in  playing  a  sheeps- 
head.  His  nms  are  very  vigorous,  and  his  struggles  to  get 
rid  of  the  hook  very  powerful.  He  will  dash  head-foremost 
against  a  rock,  or  the  bottom  of  the  boat,  in  the  most  violent 
manner,  evidently  striving  to  rid  himself  of  the  fatal  hook, 
and  has  often  been  known  to  succeed  in  breaking  the  hook 
and  escaping.  I  once  saw  a  very  fine  one,  which  a  compan- 
ion was  playuig,  dash  violently  against  the  large  rock,  (one 
of  the  famous  stepping  stones  in  Long  Island  Sound,)  and  in 
his  next  run,  rushing  against  the  bottom  of  the  boat,  with  a 
loud  thump ;  and  when  finally  subdued  and  taken,  the  shank 
of  the  hook  was  found  to  be  broken,  and  he  was  only  held  by 
the  strong  guaging  of  the  line.  The  experienced  fishermen 
along  the  Long  Island  shore  of  the  Sound,  often  succeed  in 
taking  sheepshead,  by  selecting  a  rock  not  usually  visited  by 
fishermen,  and  baiting  it  by  throwing  in  daily,  for  a  w^eek  or 
two,  in  the  proper  season,  a  half-peck  of  soft  clams,  whole, 
depositing  them  on  the  eddy  side  of  the  rock,  caused  by  the 
flood-tide  They  are  thus  taken,  sometimes,  in  very  shallow 
water.  These  cunning  fellows  carefully  conceal  the  opera- 
tion of  baiting,  and  when  questioned  by  their  competitors, 
often  give  evasive  answers.  I  knew  one,  a  fine  old  fellow, 
of  Great  Neck,  who,  when  asked — '  Uncle  Jim,  where  did 
you  catch  your  sheepshead?'  very  gravely  replied — '  In  the 
mouth.' 

"  The  general  mode  of  fishing  for  them  is  with  the  hand 
line,  and  as  before  observed,  with  strong  tackle ;  but  they 
ai-e  also  taken,  by  amateur  fishermen,  with  the  rod,  and 
lighter  tackle,  afibrding  great  amusement  by  their  powerful 
endeavors  to  escape.  When  angling  for  them  with  the  rod, 
a  large  landing  net  should  always  be  at  hand.  A  friend  of 
mine,  now  deceased,  was  playing  a  sheepshead  with  his  rod 


800  THE    SHEEPSHEAD. 

in  Flatlands  bay,  some  years  since,  and  when  he  had  fairly 
exhausted  his  strength  by  long  and  careful  skill,  and  was 
reeling  him  towards  the  boat,  on  the  surface  of  the  water, 
lost  his  noble  prize  by  the  rapacity  of  a  villanous  shark,  who 
seized  the  fish,  and  broke  away  with  part  of  the  line.  In  the 
evening  of  the  same  day,  some  net  fisheriiien  were  hauling 
the  seine  on  a  neighboring  beach,  and  captured  the  piratical 
monster;  and  on  opening  him,  the  sheepshead  was  found  in 
his  stomach,  partly  digested,  with  my  friend's  hook  in  his 
jaw." 

The  Buffalo  correspondent  remarks,  of  the  fresh  and  salt 
water  sheepshead — 

"  This  is  a  villain  in  general  estimation — the  pest  of  the 
fisher  for  basse — a  fish  that  putteth  the  cook,  who  would  ren- 
der him  acceptable  at  table,  in  a  quandary — from  which,  I 
am  sorry  to  say,  I  cannot  relieve  her,  though  she  be  at  her 
wit's  end. 

"  He  is  generally  brown,  gray  or  reddish  above,  and  of  a 
dead,  impure  white  below.  His  head  is  large,  and  his  body 
is  flattened  latterly,  though  the  frying-pan  rejecteth  him. 
His  ordinary  weight  is  two  or  three  pounds,  though  he  some- 
times weighs  five,  and  even  six.  His  food,  his  haunts,  his 
habits,  are  similar  to  those  of  the  black  basse,  whom  he  ever 
accompanieth — as  though  he  were  intended  by  nature  as  a 
foil  to  set  off  the  merits  of  that  jewel  of  the  flood.  He  is 
despised,  yea  detested  by  the  choleric  angler — who  pulls 
him  out,  and  then  dasheth  him  upon  the  stones. 

"  The  sheepshead  of  the  sea  is  a  lusty,  crafty  fish,  bepraised 
alike  by  the  fisherman  and  the  epicure.  At  the  turn  of  the 
tide,  he  takes  the  whole  soft  clam  on  your  hook  at  a  mouth- 
ful, and  chews  it  shell  and  all,  and  pulls  Hke  a  salmon  as  you 
draw  him  in;  and  his  radiant,  deep,  and  broad-barred  sides, 
as  he  flaps  about  on  the  sand  of  that  low  islet  in  the  Great 
South  bay  of  Long  Island,  to  which  you  ha^e  just  hauled 


THE    SHEEPSHEAD 


201 


him — how  brilliantly  they  show,  and  make  you  think  of  the 
dying  dolphin,  and  of  old  Anon !  and  when  he  reposes  at  the 
head  of  the  table — fit  place  for  hira — beautiful,  though  boiled, 
how  heartfelt  is  the  homage  he  receives  from  all  around! 
Truly,  it  is  libel  on  him,  to  call  by  the  same  name  this  Paria 
of  the  lakes. 

"  And  yet  our  fish  is  vigorous,  and  not  altogether  destitute 
of  beauty,  to  the  eye  at  least  of  those  who  know  him  not.  Is 
it  not  chronicled,  that  at  Black-Rock,  a  strange  angler  once 
bartered  away  two  noble  basse  for  two  large  sheepsheads, 
which,  for  the  nonce,  were  called  white  basse  ?  *  The 
freckled  toad,  ugly  and  venomous,  wears  yet  a  precious 
jewel  in  his  head* — and  our  fish,  in  his  clumsy  cranium 
wears  two  small  loose  bones,  serrate,  and  white  and  polished, 
which  must  have  some  use  to  him,  some  wondrous  adapta- 
tion to  his  mode  of  life,  which,  when  unfolded,  will  prove 
that  he  is  not  unregarded  by  Him  who  made  the  great  whales 
and  the  fishes  of  the  sea. 

"  His  mouth  is  paved  with  large,  flat,  rough  bones,  or 
teeth,  like  those  of  the  sea  fishes  that  root  up  and  devour  the 
hardest  testaceae :  and,  I  have  little  doubt  but  that  the  natu- 
ralist who  watches  him  narrowly,  will  one  of  these  days  de- 
tect him  crushing  and  consuming  the  Uni  and  Anadontas— 
the  fresh  clams  of  our  muddy  flats  and  sandy  bars. 

''  He  bites  at  the  w^orm,  the  minnow,  the  chub,  the  lob- 
ster, and  makes  good  play  with  the  line,  though  he  gives  in 
more  quickly  than  the  basse.  An  experienced  angler  can 
generally  distinguish  his  bite  and  his  resistance — but  the 
most  knowing  ones  are  sometimes  taken  in,  and  think  him 
basse  until  he  is  fairly  brought  to  view. 

"When  you  have  caught  him,  let  any  one  who  will  accept 
him,  have  him ;  and  take  to  thyself  no  merit  for  the  gift.  His 
meat  is  more  like  leather  than  fish  or  flesh.  It  is  a  common 
saying,  that  the  more  you  cook  him  the  tougher  he  becomes; 


202 


THE    SHEEPSHEAD. 


and  I  am  not  aware  that  he  is  ever  eaten  raw.  But,  some 
people  do  eat  him,  and  profess  to  like  him :  they  must  have 
stupendous  powers  of  mastication  and  digestion.  I  have 
been  told,  that,  roasted  whole  in  the  ashes,  just  as  he  comes 
from  the  water,  he  is  savory  and  tender — sed  credat  Judceus ! 
I  once  did  eat  him,  prepared  as  follows :  lie  was  split  through 
the  back,  put  upon  the  gridiron,  there  grilled  enough  to 
cook  a  side  of  pork :  his  flesh  was  removed  from  the  skin, 
boned,  chopped  up  into  dice,  (probably  with  a  cleaver,)  and 
stewed  with  milk,  butter,  pepper  and  salt.  I  must  say,  that, 
though  it  was  meat  of  great  tenacity,  and  might  well  be 
likened  unto  India-rubber,  it  had  much  sweetness  " 


CHAPTER  XVIL 

OF    THE    COD    AND    TOM-COD, 


The  cod  is  another  salt-water  fish  of  the  world,  or,  more  prop- 
erly, the  more  northern  coasts  of  the  civihzed  world,  as  far  as 
known.  They  are  taken  in  abundance  on  the  coasts  of  Eng- 
land, France  and  Germany,  and  are  found  in  immense  num- 
bers on  the  northern  shores  of  our  own  continent.  They  are  a 
fine,  edible  fish ;  and  although  not  much  of  a  game  fish,  afibrd 
considei'able  sport  to  many  of  our  eastern  anglers  in  the  vici- 
nity of  Boston. 

Smith  remarks  on  this  fish — "  We  consider  it  imnecessary 
to  enter  into  a  minute  description.  Known  as  the  most  valu- 
able production  of  the  sea  to  man,  the  cod  abounds  on  the 
whole  coast  of  Massachusetts,  but  flourishes  in  the  greatest 
vigor  and  abundance  stiU.  further  north. 

The  cod  is  gregarious,  going  in  immense  armies  from 
place  to  place,  but  remaining  certain  parts  of  the  season  at 
particular  localities,  which  afibrd  its  appropriate  food  in  the 
greatest  abundance  :  sea- worms,  small  muscles,  and  marine 
plants,  are  common  on  clear,  sandy  or  rocky  bottoms — and 
there  the  cod  is  caught. 


204 


THE    COD, 


"  The  in-8hore  cod,  as  on  the  Great  Banks,  are  caught 
with  a  line  in  two  to  six  and  eight  fathoms  of  water,  where 
the  tide  ebbs  and  flows  with  considerable  force  over  rocky- 
soundings.  Pleasure  boats  are  often  successful  in  hauling 
one  or  two  hundred  in  a  day,  weighing  from  one  to  fifteen 
pounds.  Those  large  specimens  seen  occasionally  in  the 
stalls,  are  procured  further  out  at  sea. 

"In  the  spring,  the  cod  seems  uncommonly  voracious; 
for  however  unsuccessful  it  may  have  been  in  snatching  the 
bait  from  the  hook,  and  notwithstanding  the  mouth  may  have 
been  lacerated,  it  seizes  with  avidity  the  very  next  it  discov- 
ers. Wounds  heal  in  a  few  days,  so  that  however  badly  the 
skin  is  torn,  the  gelative  of  the  blood  is  poured  in  so  copiously 
as  to  close  the  breach  much  sooner  than  the  healing  process 
is  completed  in  warm-blooded  animals. 

"  Two  or  three  years  since,  the  keeper  of  Rainsford  Island 
caught  a  cod  which  had  suspended  to  about  a  yard  of  line, 
a  lead  weight  of  several  pounds,  the  other  end  being  secured 
to  a  hook  which  was  deeply  imbedded  in  the  bones  and  in- 
teguments of  the  upper  jaw.  How  long  the  fish  had  been 
dragging  about  the  inconvenient  burden,  it  was  difficult  to 
decide." 

One  of  the  most  important  features  in  this  fish,  is  its 
astonishing  fecundity.  Leuwenhock  has  had  the  patience  to 
count  nine  millions  of  eggs  in  a  single  cod ;  and  although 
hundreds  of  millions  of  these  eggs  are  hourly  destroyed  by 
the  fishermen,  who  take  them  at  all  seasons,  and  their  more 
voracious  brethren  of  the  ocean,  who  feed  upon  them — still, 
says  a  French  writer,  on  the  subject  of  their  prolific  powers, 
we  have  assurance  of  an  inexhaustible  supply  of  wholesome 
food,  secured  to  all  succeeding  generations. 

The  best  bait  for  a  pleasure  party  cod-fishing,  is  the 
common  mud  clam ;  by  some,  however,  the  menhaden  *  is 

*  This  fish  also  goes  under  the  name  of  marsbanker,  or  niosbonker: 


THE    COD.  205 

thought  preferable.  Many  kinds  of  fish  may  be  successfully 
caught  by  the  flesh  of  their  own  species  ;  but  this  is  not  the 
case  with  the  cod.  That  the  odor  of  some  kinds  of  bait  is 
particularly  agreeable  is  well  established ;  but  the  smell  of 
putrid  matter,  to  this  fish,  is  so  offensive,  that  instead  of  play- 
ing about  the  hook,  they  generally  go  beyond  its  influence. 

They  are  made  an  object  of  much  sport  and  pleasure  by 
the  angling  inhabitants  of  Boston  and  vicinity.  The  usual 
mode  of  taking  them  is  with  a  stout  cotton  or  hemp  line,  from 
fifty  to  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet  in  length,  and  about  one- 
fourth  of  an  inch  thick,  according  to  the  depth  of  the  water, 
with  the  largest  size  black-fish  hook,  or  a  small  size  fisher- 
man's cod  hook,  and  a  sinker  weighing  from  one  to  four 
pounds.  Parties  on  such  excursions  seldom  return  without 
a  boat-load  of  cod,  and  a  well-satisfied  but  very  tired  set  of 
anglers. 

As  an  instance  of  what  can  be  done  with  this  fish,  with  a 
light  tackle,  it  was  stated  in  the  papers  of  the  day,  about  a  year 
since,  that  Daniel  Webster  caught,  at  Marshfield,  a  cod  weigh- 
ing nine  pounds,  with  a  common  trout  line  and  trout  hook. 

The  cod  is  most  delicious  as  a  table  fish,  and  is  cooked 
in  various  ways :  when  fresh,  he  is  usually  fried  or  boiled ; 
when  dried,  he  is  an  object  of  export  to  all  parts  of  the  coun- 
try:  at  the  east,  w^hen  in  this  state,  he  is  prepared  and  mashed 
up  into  cakes  with  potatoes,  and  is  a  favorite  dish.  Of  late 
years,  the  frequenters  of  New-York  dining  saloons  have  been 
rather  amused  by  the  often  reiterated  cry  of  the  waiters — 
^  Hurry  up  them  fish-balls.''  This  is  no  more  nor  less  than 
the  potatoe  fish-cakes  of  the  east,  prepared  for  the  palates  of 
the  Gothamites  by  Sweeney,  and  Welsh,  and  other  caterers 
for  the  appetites  of  the  New-Yorkers. 

they  are  found  in  vast  quantities  on  the  coast  of  Long  Island,  and  in  the 
bays  and  inlets  of  Massachusetts,  where  they  are  used  for  manuring  the 
land. 


'A 


^06 


THE    TOM-COD. 


-^L 

-^- 

~ 

~^:^ 



The  Tom-Cod  or  Frost-Fish. — This  is  a  small  species  ol 
the  cod,  that  runs  up  the  rivers  in  the  vicinity  of  the  ocean, 
and  is  found  both  in  this  country  and  many  parts  of  Europe. 
Although  not  much  of  an  angle  fish,  he  affords,  with  the  floun- 
der, a  pan  mess  for  the  angler  in  the  vicinity  of  Boston  and 
New- York,  in  the  pleasant  days  of  April  and  November, 
when  the  basse  fishing  season  is  over. 

Smith  says — "■  The  tom-cod  may  be  recognized  by  three 
dorsal  fins,  two  anal,  three  abdominal,  two  pectoral.  The 
abdominal  are  small  and  slender,  being  before  the  pectoral, 
as  it  respects  the  head ;  under  the  tip  of  the  under  lip  is  one 
short,  stump-like  cirrus.  The  caudal  fin  is  broad,  and  rounded 
at  the  extremity.  Teeth  fine,  both  in  the  throat  and  jaws ; 
white,  small  and  plump  tongue ;  the  lateral  line  bearing  up- 
wards. Its  color  varies  at  different  seasons  of  the  year,  from 
a  rich  orange  to  a  light  greenish  yellow,  shaded  by  a  dark 
brown  on  the  back,  and  gradually  becoming  light  or  yellow 
between  the  vent  and  the  gills.  It  varies  in  length,  from  six 
to  fifteen  inches,  and  weighs  from  a  quarter  to  nearly  two 
pounds,  depending,  of  course,  on  the  age,  sex  and  season. 
In  the  north  of  Europe— admitting  this  to  be  the  fish,  which 
at  present  cannot  be  doubted — they  have  been  occasionally 
known  to  exceed  eight  pounds.  The  spawning  season  ap- 
pears to  be  in  February ;  in  this  climate,  about  the  first  of 
May,  they  begin  to  take  the  hook." 

They  are  usually  taken  by  the  basse  and  tautog  angler, 
with  the  ordinary  tackle,  with  the  exception  of  the  hook, 
which  should  be  a  No.  9  black-fish,  or  No.  6  Kirby.  When 
pursuing  this  sport  exclusively,  a  small  flax  line  about  fifty 
feet  in  length,  attached  to  a  stiff  rod,  or  in  boat  fishing,  a  me- 
dium sized  hand  black-fish  line,  with  small  hooks  attached 
to  flax  or  gut  snell,  will  answer  every  purpose. 


•^  ,*»- 


CHAPTER  XVm. 
OP    THE    PL  O  UNDER 


This  is  one  of  the  most  singular  and  odd-looking  productions 
of  the  deep,  and  were  it  not  that  they  are  the  common  salt 
water  fish  of  the  world,  would  be  viewed  with  wonder  and 
astonishment.  One  would  suppose,  from  the  flat  appearance 
and  formation  of  their  bodies,  that  nature  had  been  rather 
scarce  of  materials  when  making  up  this  division  of  the  salt 
water  tribe.  Besides  many  places  of  their  abode,  too  nu- 
merous to  mention,  in  the  old  world,  they  are  found  in  most 
of  salt  water  stations  of  the  new.  They  are  taken  in  goodly 
quantities,  and  in  good  condition,  in  certain  seasons,  according 
to  Smith  and  Mitchill,  in  the  vicinity  of  New-York  and  Mas- 
sachusetts, and  also  to  the  south  and  north  of  these  places 
The  former  remarks — "No  family  of  aquatic  beings  is  charac- 
terized by  so  many  strong  circumstances.  The  eyes  are  both 
on  one  side,  but  so  arranged  as  to  look  upward  at  an  angle  of 
about  eighty  degrees.  The  side  on  which  the  eyes  are  fixed 
is  always  colored,  but  the  opposite  one  is  quite  light  or 
whitish.  In  fact,  their  anatomy  demonstrates  the  greatest 
want  of  symmetry.     Writers  remark,  among  other  things 


208  THE    FLOUNDER. 

thnt  the  two  sides  are  unequal,  and  it  is  very  rare  to  find  the 
pectoral  fins  resembling  one  another.  In  the  branchial  mem- 
brane are  five  rays  ;  the  body  seems  compressed,  as  though 
pressed  between  two  stones;  the  dorsal  fin  encircles  the 
fish  like  a  ribbon,  so  that  the  back  is  on  one  side !  The  venter, 
or  inside  cavity,  is  quite  small,  but  prolonged  into  a  canal  in 
the  side  of  the  tail.  There  is  no  air-bladder ;  and  the  skull 
is  the  oddest  of  all  crania,  in  consequence  of  the  arrangement 
for  accommodating  both  eyes  on  one  side. 

"Notwithstanding  the  confused  manner  in  which  the 
skeleton  is  put  together,  distorted,  and  twisted  in  the  queer- 
est form,  there  is  only  about  the  ordinary  number  of  bones, 
entering  into  the  composition  of  other  fishes. 

''Flounder.  —  (Platessa  Vulgaris.)  —  Being  without  tho 
swimming-bladder,  they  naturally  keep  near  the  bottom. 
Indeed,  organized,  as  they  obviously  are,  for  looking  upward, 
rather  than  downward,  for  their  food,  as  well  as  the  objects 
they  are  to  avoid.  It  is  quite  rapid  in  its  movements,  but 
prefers  to  remain  on  the  surface  of  the  mud,  into  which  it 
nestles  for  concealment,  in  case  of  fright." 

Mitchill  has  the  following:  '' Flounder  of  New-York. — 
(Pleuronectes  dentatus.)  —  With  wide,  toothed,  oblique 
mouth,  and  pale  brown  uniform  back.  Grows  to  the  size 
of  twenty-four  inches  long,  and  twelve  broad,  in  the  south 
bays  of  Long  Island,  and  weighs  five  pounds.  I  have  seen 
him  even  larger  than  that.  There  is  considerable  variety  in 
his  color  and  spots.  Color  of  the  back  and  fins  commonly  a 
le  brown,  without  lines  or  spots ;  and  yet  varieties  occur, 
where  the  spotted  appearance  is  very  plain." 

The  size  of  the  usual  run  of  this  fish,  at  New-York  and 
Boston,  is  from  five  to  fifteen  inches  in  length  by  three  to  ten 
in  breadth.  Like  the  eel,  they  lie  in  the  soft  mud  at  the 
bottom  of  rivers,  near  to  the  docks,  lumber  piles,  bridge 
spiles,  &c.,  living  on  muscles,  insects,  and  the  spawn  of  fishes. 


THE    FLOUNDER. 


209 


They  are  in  the  best  condition  in  the  spring  ana  fall,  the  heat 
of  the  summer  not  being  favorable  to  their  perfection,  at 
which  time  their  flesh  is  soft  and  not  as  palatable.  They  are 
a  favorite  angle  fish  at  all  the  bridges  near  Boston,  where 
fishermen  can  be  seen  at  almost  any  time  in  mild  weather, 
hauling  them  up  or  waiting  for  a  bite.  They  are  taken  in 
Harlem  river,  New-York,  in  the  vicinity  of  the  bridges,  and  at 
the  numerous  black-fish  and  rock  grounds.  They  do  not  appear 
to  keep  any  particular  kind  of  company,  but  give  the  more 
finished  basse  angler  some  trouble  when  seeking  a  ten-pound 
rock  at  the  bottom,  by  nibbling  the  bait  with  his  small  mouth, 
and  sometimes  insisting  on  being  hooked. 

The  usual  mode  of  taking  him  is  with  a  small  flax  drop- 
line,  and  small  black-fish  tackle :  to  insure  success,  quite  a 
small  hook  must  be  used,  say  about  No.  8  hook.  The  basse 
angler  often  provides  himself  with  small  hooks,  and  when  his 
favorite  fish  is  not  on  the  feed,  is  content  to  take,  if  he  can 
get  them,  a  mess  of  flounders.  They  are,  when  fresh  caught, 
good  pan  fish,  and  by  some,  when  in  season  and  perfection, 
considered  an  epicurean  dish. 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

OP    THE    BLUE-FISH. 


This  fish  is  a  species  of  the  mackerel,  and  sometimes 
passes  under  that  name.  He  has  his  pecuhar  grounds  in 
Long  Island  Sound,  where  he  schools  from  the  ocean  in  the 
months  of  June,  July  and  August,  after  whicti  he  returns  to 
the  sea  to  spend  his  vacation.  They  are  taken  only  by  troll- 
ing with  the  artificial  squid — a  mode  of  amusement  calling 
into  action  the  physical  as  well  as  scientific  powers  of  the 
angler.  They  are  a  good  table  fish,  when  prepared  and 
cooked  immediately  after  being  caught,  but  grow  strong 
and  rancid  a  ter  bemg  any  length  of  time  out  of  the  water. 

The  Art  of  Trolling,  of  late  years,  has  become  a  favorite 
mode  of  piscatorial  amusement,  and  the  blue-fish  affords  to 
the  inhabitants  of  Connecticut,  New- York  and  Long  Island, 
a  large  amount  of  satisfaction  in  its  pursuit.  It  is  usually 
performed  in  a  good  sized  sail-boat,  with  a  guide  who  knows 
the  ground,  or  by  casting  from  the  shore,  and  drawing  in  al- 
ternately. The  former  method  is  most  practiced,  and  being 
liighly  approved  of  by  the  fair  sex,  who  often  compose  the 
best  part  of  a  fishing  party,  of  course  stamps  it  at  once  with 


THE    BLUE-FISH, 


211 


perfection.  To  those  ladies  who  unfortunately  have  to 
be  placed  on  the  list  of  invalids,  and  can  endure  the  de- 
lightful and  bracing  summer  breeze  and  gentle  south  wind, 
a  lew  days'  sport  in  the  Sound,  with  a  blue-fishing  party,  will 
amply  repay  them  for  their  exertion. 

The  tackle  is  simple,  cheap,  and  easily  arranged :  it  is 
composed  of  a  squid  made  of  bone,  ivory,  tin  or  pearl,  vdth 
a  stout  line,  of  from  100  to  150  feet  in  length,  attached;  and 
when  the  boat  is  in  full  sail,  the  squid  is  thrown  out,  the  fish 
hooked,  drawn  in  and  shaken  off,  and  throwTi  out,  alternately. 
We  give  an  extract  from  a  letter  written  by  a  gentleman  on 
an  excursion  on  the  south  side  of  Long  Island : 

''  Who  that  has  been  a  frequenter  of  our  bays  and  inlets, 
can  ever  forget  the  intense  excitement  attending  the  sport  of 
blue-fishing  ?  Those  who  desire  to  be  successful  in  this  de- 
lightful sport,  should  provide  themselves  with  a  proper  outfit, 
(which  can  be  procured  at  a  trifling  expense  at  any  of  the 
shops  where  fishing  tackle  is  sold,)  as  an  omission  in  this 
may  result  in  disappointment. 

"  The  tackle  in  most  general  use,  is  a  squid  made  of  block- 
tin,  lead,  mother-of-pearl,  or  white  bone,  of  a  flat,  narrow- 
oval  shape,  say  four  inches  long,  armed  on  one  end  with  a  good 
sized  hook,  (No.  0000  Kirby,)  laid  so  that  the  point  of  the 
hook  be  perpendicular  to  the  flat  side  of  the  squid.  I  would 
recommend  a  short  length  of  stout  gimp  to  be  put  through  a 
hole  in  the  other  end,  to  attach  it  to  the  line.  I  have  re- 
peatedly witnessed,  in  excursions  on  the  south  side  of  Long 
Island,  the  loss  of  a  squid  at  a  time  when  a  lover  of  this  sport 
could  least  afford  to  lose  time  in  making  the  necessary  repairs 
to  his  damaged  tackle.  The  line  should  be  of  cotton,  large 
sized,  and  well  laid,  of,  say  from  forty  to  sixty  yards  long. 
A  thin,  light  line  will  not  answer,  as,  in  case  a  large  fish  is 
hooked,  there  is  more  than  an  even  chance  that  the  line  part 
before  the  fish  is  secured ;   and  should  the  fish  be  got  in, 


212  THE    BLUE-FISH. 

the  fisher's  lacerated  hands  will  remind  him  that  there  h 
more  comfort  in  trolling  with  the  regular  squidding  tackle 
than  with  a  light  hemp  line,  such  as  we  sometimes  see  used 
by  the  uninitiated. 

"Being  thus  provided  with  the  tackle  suitable  for  this 
sport,  you  should  get  a  good  stout  boat,  with  an  experienced 
bay-man,  who  is  au  fait  in  its  management,  and  intimately 
acquainted  with  the  habits  and  localities  of  the  fish;  for 
upon  this,  in  a  great  measure,  depends  your  chance  of  a 
good  day's  sport.  With  a  fine  breeze,  that  will  propel  your 
boat  some  four  or  five  miles  an  hour,  you  may  embark, 
and  having  reached  the  whereabouts  of  the  fish,  cast  over 
your  squid,  with  from  fifty  to  one  hundred  feet  of  line,  which 
should  be  tied  securely  to  the  boat.  The  fish  sometimes 
strike  with  great  force,  and  neglect  in  fastening  the  line  fre- 
quently results  in  its  loss,  with  everything  appertaining 
thereto. 

"  There  is  a  great  variety  of  opinion  regarding  the  length 
of  line  most  proper  to  use  in  this  kind  of  fishing ;  but  I  have 
found  that  when  the  fish  are  inclined  to  take  the  squid,  they 
are  not  over  particular  in  the  quantity  of  line  out,  as  I  have 
seen  fish  taken,  not  only  with  a  very  long  Hue,  but  have 
hooked  and  secured  some  fine  ones,  myself,  almost  under 
the  stern  of  the  boat,  with  certainly  not  over  twenty  feet  of 
line. 

"When  a  school  offish  is  found,  the  boatman  should  be  par- 
ticular in  crossing  and  re-crossing  the  spot  where  the  school 
is,  as  in  a  very  contracted  space  it  frequently  happens  that  the 
greatest  sport  is  to  be  found.  As  an  example  of  this,  I  was 
enjoying  a  day's  sport  at  Shrewsberry  Inlet,  some  two  years 
since,  and  the  only  place  where  I  took  any  fish,  was  some  three 
hundred  yards  below  the  inlet,  in  the  river ;  and  instead  of 
sailing  up  some  half  mile,  and  down  again,  over  the  same 
ground,  I  confined  my  operations  to  a  space  of  about  two 


THE    BLUE-FISH. 


213 


hundred  yards,  and  was  very  successful,  returning  with  a  full 
fare.  When  a  fish  is  struck,  the  line  should  be  hauled  in 
with  a  steady  pull — not  jerked.  If  the  line  is  allowed  to 
slack,  the  fish  is  apt  to  throw  itself  off. 

"  To  disengage  the  fish  from  the  hook,  take  the  squid  in 
the  right  hand,  and  by  giving  it  a  slight  shake,  with  the  hook 
uppermost,  the  fish  will  drop  off  into  the  boat. 

"When  the  boat  is  in  stays,  (tacking,)  care  should  be 
taken  to  haul  in  the  line ;  an  omission  in  this  will  cause  your 
squid  to  sink  and  foul  in  the  bottom  grass. 

"  Blue-fish  are  sometimes  taken  from  the  shore,  by  cast- 
ing the  squid  as  far  as  possible  into  the  water,  and  hauling  it 
in  with  suflRcient  rapidity  to  prevent  its  sinking  far  below  the 
surface.  This  mode  of  fishing  is  attended  with  a  large  outlay 
of  labor,  but  in  reward,  some  fine  fish  are  taken.  The  places 
best  known  and  most  resorted  to  for  blue-fishing,  are  Baby 
Ion,  Islip,  and  Quogue,  L.  I.  The  two  former  have  the  great 
South  Bay,  with  Fire  Island  Inlet,  for  its  ground ;  the  latter 
the  East  Bay,  and  Pine  Neck  Inlet.  Babylon  and  Islip  are 
nigh  at  hand,  and  easy  of  access ;  Quogue  lies  some  ninety 
miles  east  of  New- York,  but  has  become  comparatively  near 
by  means  of  the  Long  Island  railway,  which  places  it  within 
five  hours  of  the  city. 

"  In  visiting  the  latter  spot,  the  disciple  of  the  rod  and 
gnn  will  find  a  good  house,  and  a  kind,  hospitable,  obliging 
man  in  its  proprietor.  Shrewsberry  Inlet  is  another  resort, 
near  which,  at  Port  Washington,  a  fine  house  has  been 
opened." 


CHAPTER  XX. 
OP    THE    SEA-BASSE,    PORGEE,    &C 


These  are  both  sea  fish,  and  abound  in  immense  quantities 
in  the  ocean  outside  of  Sandy  Hook,  New- York,  on  what  are 
called  the  Sea-Basse  and  Porgee  Banks.  In  the  summer 
months,  to  the  pent-up  citizen  who  is  obliged  to  stay  in  the 
city  during  the  sweltering  heat  of  July  and  August — the 
stranger  who  would  view  the  beauties  of  one  of  the  finest 
harbors  in  the  world — and  to  the  more  scientific  angler,  who, 
after  a  season's  fishing  at  the  gently  gliding  stream,  or  the 
romantic  mountain  lake,  would  like  to  try  the  more  bracing 
atmosphere  of  the  ocean — this  mode  of  angling  will  often 
afford  a  day  of  amusement  and  gratification. 

During  the  above-mentioned  months,  steamboats  are  pre- 
pared and  fitted  up  for  this  species  of  fishing,  and  make  their 
trips  sometimes  daily,  returning,  often,  with  well-satisfied 
amateur  ocean  anglers,  each  with  their  string  of  fish.*  In 
order  to  enliven  the  scene  on  these  occasions,  a  band  of  music 

*  In  the  summer  of  1843,  immense  quantities  were  taken — the  steam- 
boat often  returning  with  from  six  to  ten  thousand  porgees,  and  a  por- 
poise weighing  five  or  six  hundred  pounds. 


THE    SEA-8ASSE,   &C.  215 

is  taken,  and  cotillion  parties  are  made  up  on  the  upper  deck. 
A  skilful  harpooner  sometimes  makes  one  of  the  party,  and 
gives  excitement  to  the  scene  by  striking  and  taking  a  por- 
poise. The  boat  touches  at  Coney  Island,  giving  the  passen- 
gers an  opportumty  of  a  sea  bathe  and  a  clam  bake ;  and  also 
at  Fort  Hamilton,  allowing  an  opportunity  to  view  the  fortifi- 
cations of  the  harbor. 

In  addition  to  this  mode,  schooners  and  sloops  are  char- 
tered by  private  pleasure  parties,  who  spend  two  or  three 
days  on  an  excursion  down  the  bay  and  sound,  affording  op- 
portunity for  ocean  and  inland  fishing,  and  often  return  with 
an  assortment  of  the  finny  tnbe,  consisting  of  perch,  trout, 
rock,  tautog,  blue-fish,  flounders,  cod-fish,  sea-basse,  and  por- 
gees,  enough  to  stock  a  small-sized  fish  market. 

The  proprietors  of  the  steamboats  endeavor  to  accommo- 
date the  passengers  with  bait  and  tackle,  and  sometimes  suc- 
ceed; but  to  insure  success  and  satisfaction,  the  seeker 
of  this  description  of  sport  should  procure  his  own.  The  line 
should  be  of  stout  flax  or  hemp,  from  ten  to  twenty  fathoms 
in  length,  (generally  for  sale,  ready  furnished,  at  the  fishing 
tackle  stores,)  with  two  or  three  hooks  attached,  about  a  foot 
apart :  those  for  porgees  should  be  the  round  bent  black- 
fish  No.  3,  described  on  plate  2.  For  sea-basse,  the  hook 
should  be  a  stout  Kirby  No.  I.  The  assortment  should  al- 
ways consist  of  both  kinds,  and  plenty  of  them,  as  they  are 
sometimes  taken  off  by  shark  and  blue-fish,  or  are  broken 
against  the  side  of  the  boat  in  hauling  up.  The  sinker  should 
be  of  common  lead,  and  weigh  from  one-half  to  one  pound 
(the  latter  size,  if  only  one  is  taken,  is  the  best.)  Clam  bait 
is  the  only  kind  used,  and  necessary :  these  can  be  purchased 
at  the  markets,  ready  opened.  To  render  them  tough  and 
hard,  add  a  little  salt,  which  will  make  them  cling  to  the 
hook  much  better.  When  luck  favors  these  excursions,  two, 
three,  and  even  four  fish  are  taken  at  a  haul.     It  is  necessarv 


216 


THE    SEA-BASSE,  &C. 


to  be  on  the  alert,  and  jerk  strongly  at  each  bite,  or  your  bait 
will  be  taken  off.  The  fish  average  from  one  to  four  pounds 
which,  together  with  your  pound  sinker,  makes  a  consider- 
able weight  to  take  in,  in  from  ten  to  fifteen  fathoms  water. 
The  finger  and  hand  will  often  become  chafed  and  blistered, 
where  much  luck  is  experienced;  to  prevent  which,  the 
knowing  ones  provide  themselves  with  a  pair  of  old  gloves. 
With  this  additional  equipment,  you  can  fully  enjoy  a  hardy 
and  active  day's  sport,  tempered  with  the  benefits  arising 
from  the  bracing  ocean  air,  and  the  contemplation  of  the 
works  of  the  Creator  on  the  great  deep,  so  beautifiJly  de- 
scribed by  the  poet  Dana,  in  the  following  beautiful  lines: 


Type  of  the  Infinite!    I  look  away 

Over  the  billows,  and  I  cannot  stay 

My  thoughts  upon  a  resting-place,  or  make 

A  shore  beyond  my  vision,  where  they  break  { 

But  on  my  spirit  stretches,  till  it 's  pain 

To  think ;  then  rests,  and  then  puts  forth  again. 

Thou  holdst  me  by  a  spell ;  and  on  thy  beach 

I  feel  all  soul ;  and  thoughts  unmeasured  reach 

Far  back  beyond  all  date.    ***••* 


CHAPTER  XXI. 

OF  SOME  OP  THE  OTHER  INHABITANTS  OP  THE 
WATERS. 


In  the  foregoing  articles  on  the  different  fishes,  it  has  been 
the  object,  as  far  as  possible,  to  give  necessary  information 
of  all  angle  fishes,  and  the  modes  of  taking  them.  In  fur- 
therance of  this  design,  many  more  pages  have  been  occupied 
than  was  originally  intended ;  but  such  a  variety  of  fishes  is 
offered  by  the  nature  and  extent  of  our  country,  that  it  has 
seemed  almost  impossible,  without  wading  thus  far,  to  do 
justice  to  our  subject.  For  the  further  benefit  of  the  reader, 
we  will  venture  briefly  to  refer  to  some  others  of  the  finny 
tribe. 

THE  EEL. 

This  serpentine  looking  animal  has  its  friends  and  foes, 
and  is  found  in  almost  all  fresh  and  salt  water  streams  that 
circumvent  the  globe.  In  ancient  times,  it  was  highly  valued; 
and  at  the  present,  although  looked  upon  as  belonging  to  the 
snake  tribe,  is  considered,  by  the  majorily  of  fish  eaters,  as 
forming  a  very  savory  dish.  Those  that  inhabit  the  salt 
water,  are  sometimes  taken  of  a  very  large  size.     The  largest 


218 


THE    CHU: 


taken,  on  lecord,  was  caught  in  one  of  the  bays  in  Long  Isl- 
and, and  weighed  sixteen  and  a  lialf  pounds.  They  also,  in 
some  instances,  grow  very  large  in  fresh  water  sti-eams,  and 
have  been  taken  from  seven  to  ten  pounds  weight.  They 
are  not  game,  but  occasion  the  angler  much  trouble  wherever 
he  drops  his  line,  by  sucking  off  his  bait  or  insisting  upon 
being  hooked;  when,  with  all  care,  the  most  experienced 
sportsman  seldom  escapes  without  great  derangement  of 
tackle.  When  sought  after,  he  is  taken  (we  say  taken,  be- 
cause no  difficulty  is  ever  experienced  where  he  is)  with  any 
kind  of  tackle  and  any  bait.  The  most  common  mode,  how- 
ever, with  those  who  make  a  practice  of  taking  him,  is  with 
a  common  drop-line,  and  a  small  black-fish  or  eel  hook,  No. 
8  or  9. 

A  singular  and  beautiful  description  of  the  eel,  if  any 
beauty  can  be  attached  to  the  tribe,  is  found  in  some  of  our 
fresh  water  streams,  called  the  lamprey  or  seven-eyed  eel. 

OF  THE  CHUB. 

This  beautiful  fish  is  found,  according  to  Smith,  in  some 
of  the  western  sections  of  Massachusetts.  "  It  is  taken  with 
a  hook  baited  with  an  angle-worm.  In  winter  it  may  be 
caught  through  the  ice  by  baiting  with  cheese  and  Venice 
turpentine. 

"  The  head  is  large,  the  back  of  a  dusky  green,  the  sides 
silvery,  the  abdomen  white,  the  pectoral  fins  yellowish,  and 
the  ventral  and  anal  fins  tinged  with  red.  This  fish  seems 
to  be  very  timid,  and  the  angler  therefore,  in  fixing  himself 
in  a  good  position,  over  some  deep  hole,  where  the  chub 
conceals  himself  mider  projecting  long  roots  of  trees,  is  ob- 
liged to  move  very  cautiously,  or  he  will  frighten  it  away." 

He  is  also  taken  in  the  Passaic  river,  N.  J.,  Otsego  lake, 
FishkiU  creek,  and  many  other  parts  of  New-York  and  Peuu- 


THE       PERCH. 


THE       CHUB 


THE       EEL. 


THE   .":;ULL-HEAD,    SUCKEK,    &C.  219 

sylvania.  Their  length  is  not  usually  over  ten  inches,  and  the 
common  size  about  six.  In  England  and  Germany  they  are 
sometimes  taken  weighing  eight  pounds.  They  may  be  taken 
with  the  same  degree  of  caution,  and  with  the  same  kind  of 
tools  as  those  used  for  trout.  They  are  attracted  also  by 
similar  bait :  in  the  spring  they  will  take  the  worm,  and  later 
in  the  season,  the  grasshopper,  and  the  natural  and  artificial 
fly,  of  every  description.  In  the  fall  they  are  again  taken  at 
the  bottom,  in  the  deep  holes,  with  the  worm,  cheese,  or 
bread-paste,  salmon  roe,  &c.  They  yield  considerable  sport, 
and  are  worth  the  angler's  toil,  often  being  taken  and  placed 
as  an  edible  on  the  table — they  are  not  bad  to  take  with  the 
knife  and  fork. 

OF  THE  BULL-HEAD  AND  SUCKER. 

These  are  fish  usually  found  in  the  same  ponds  and  streams 
with  perch  and  pickerel.  They  are  sought  after  more  as  an 
object  of  sport,  among  the  boys,  than  as  forming  an  article 
of  food,  although  they  are  sometimes  cooked  for  the  table. 
The  sucker  is  also  speared  in  large  quantities  by  torch  light. 

OF  THE  BREAM,  ROACH,  DACE,  BLEAK,  AND 
GUDGEON. 

These  are  all  described  by  Smith  as  natives  of  the  waters 
of  the  Eastern  States.  They  are  quite  small  in  size,  are  all 
good  and  nutritious  food.  They  are  taken,  with  ordinary 
caution,  with  trout  and  perch  tackle ;  but  from  their  size, 
do  not  afibrd  much  sport.  They  grow  much  larger  in  Eng- 
land and  Scotand,  and  find  favor  as  a  game  fish,  in  English 
works  and  among  En 


OF  THE  HERRING. 
A  species  of  fish  called  herring,  is  taken  by  the  angler,  in 


220 


THE    HERRING,    WHITE-FISH,    &C, 


some  of  the  fresh  water  streams  of  New-Jersey  and  Delaware 
In  the  latter  state,  they  are  very  shy,  take  the  fly,  aiid  require 
long  rods  and  fine  tackle,  similar  to  that  used  for  trout.  In 
the  vicinity  of  Baltimore  they  fish  fine  and  far  off,  and  with 
rods  from  20  to  25  feet  long,  the  sportsman  experiencing  as 
much  pleasure  in  the  capture,  as  in  the  taking  basse,  trout  or 
salmon.     In  this  vicinity  they  ai-e  called  fall-fish. 

A  fish  similar  in  appearance  to  the  herring,  and  called  by 
the  same  name,  is  taken  in  the  bay  of  New-York,  oS"  Fort 
Lafayette.  They  jump  readily  at  a  white,  red,  or  fancy- 
colored  fly,  and  afibrd  capital  sport. 

OF  THE  WHITE-FISH. 

This  denomination  of  the  finny  tribe  is  taken  generally  in 
nets,  and  sometimes  by  the  basse  and  salmon  angler,  in  many 
of  the  lakes  in  the  western  part  of  the  state  of  New-York,  and 
affords  good  sport.  Asa  table  fish,  it  has  the  highest  enco- 
miums from  all  sorts  of  people  :  it  is  spoken  of  as  the  church- 
steeple  top  of  perfection,  superior  to  the  salmon  or  trout,  or 
any  other  fish  that  breathes  and  swims.  Those  who  have  en- 
joyed a  dish  of  white-fish,  will  allow  him  to  be  second  to  none. 

OF  THE  CAT-FISH. 
This  is  the  common  fish  of  the  western  waters,  and  is 
taken  by  western  sportsmen,  by  squid  and  fly  trolling,  and 
affords  capital  amusement.  They  take  their  name  from 
the  noise  they  make,  similar  to  the  purring  of  a  cat,  very  fa- 
miliar to  those  who  have  frequented  the  west.  They  are 
also  angled  for  with  a  stout  drop-line,  and  tackle  similar  to 
that  described  for  the  sheepshead.     They  are  fine  table  fish. 

We  might  go  on  ad  infinitum  in  our  list  of  the  fishes  of 
America,  but  we  trust  that  we  have  described  those  which 
generally  give  most  delight  to  the  angler,  and  must  here 
fasten  our  line. 


CHAPTER  XXII. 

CONCLUDING    REMARKS 


Wk  cannot  omit  inserting  the  following  elegant  and  appro- 
priate defence  of  our  art,  from  the  aspersions  cast  upon  it  by 
a  great  man,  by  a  mild  and  enthusiastic  amateur,  who  occa- 
sionally seeks  enjoyment,  from  the  cares  and  vexations  of 
business,  in  more  pleasant  pursuits. 

"  The  great  and  learned  Dr.  Johnson  satirically  described 
angling  thus :  '  A  stick  and  a  string,  with  a  worm  at  one  end 
and  a  fool  at  the  other.'  Dr.  Johnson  never  sat  in  a  boat, 
surrounded  by  a  beautiful  landscape,  playing  a  basse  of  three, 
four,  or  five  pounds ;  nor  stood  on  the  green  bank,  contend- 
ing with  a  trout  of  like  weight ;  nor  struck  an  Oswego  basse, 
one  hundred  feet  astern  of  his  trolling  boat,  in  Lake  George, 
or  he  would  never  have  penned  such  a  severe  though  stupid 
satire.  There  is  no  recreation  so  admirably  adapted  to  re- 
cruit the  body  and  mind  of  the  toiling  citizen,  as  angling. 
Breaking  away  from  his  confining  and  exhausting  toil  in  the 
counting-house,  office,  or  workshop,  leaving  all  care  behind, 


222 


CONCLUDING    REMARKS. 


the  angler  sallies  forth  to  the  river,  the  bay,  or  some  more 
distant  water;  and  there,  amid  the  most  beautiful  scenery 
of  nature,  plies  his  art.  The  absence  from  the  scene  of  toil 
and  care,  for  a  short  season;  the  breathing  the  fresh  and 
healthful  air  of  the  country ;  the  transit  to  and  from  the  place 
of  amusement,  and  the  exciting  and  delightful  exercise  of  the 
art;  all  combine  to  give  this  recreation  a  high  place  in  my 
estimation — and  as  a  christian,  I  certainly  say,  that  in  some 
of  my  solitary  rambles,  or  boat  excursions,  v^rith  my  rod,  I 
have  been  favored  with  most  devout  and  grateful  emotions 
of  the  heart,  in  contemplating  the  beauties  of  creation ;  and 
looking  up  from  the  works  of  my  Maker  around  me,  to  Him 
who  made  them  all,  my  meditations  on  the  Divine  goodness 
and  grace  have  been  most  sweet.  In  these  sentiments  I  fully 
accord  with  the  pious  old  angler,  Isaac  Walton,  who  expresses 
them  also  in  his  ancient  and  noble  work  on  angling." 

Finally,  and  to  conclude,  although  our  art  has  been  lighdy 
spoken  of  by  a  few  learned  and  well  meaning  men,  who  cer- 
tainly never  could  have  experienced  any  of  its  pleasures,  it 
has  the  sanction  of  the  great  and  learned  of  all  ages  and  of  all 
countries,  where  the  mild  and  effulgent  rays  of  the  sun  ad- 
mit of  the  growth  to  perfection  and  beauty,  of  the  inhabitants 
of  the  chrystal  waters ;  and  although  we  respect  the  learning 
and  talent  of  those  who  we  know  never  had  the  least  idea  of 
the  science  necessary  to  some  of  the  modes  adopted;  yet  when 
we  examine  the  Book  of  Books,  and  find  in  the  Book  of  Job, 
and  in  parts  of  the  New  Testament,  references  directly  made 
to  drawing  out  fish  with  a  ho(jk  ;*  when  we  look  at  it  as  in- 
ducing to  the  contemplation  of  the  works  of  the  Creator,  and 
leading  man  from  nature  up  to  nature's  God  ;  when  we  see, 
and  hear,  and  read  of  the  minister  of  religion,  the  philosopher, 

*"  Canst  thou  draw  out  the  Leviathan  with  a  hook,  or  his  tongue  with 
a  cord  which  thou  lettest  down  I     Canst  thou  put  a  hook  into  his  nose!" 


CONCLUDING    REMARKS.  223 

the  statesman,  and  the  poet,  however  officially  engaged,  de 
lighting  in  a  few  hours'  daily  recreation  in  the  art,  and  speak 
ing  and  writing  enthusiastically  in  its  favor,  finding 

"  Tongues  in  trees,  books  in  the  running  brooks, 
Sermons  in  stones ; 

we  think  the  objectors  might  as  well  have  tried  to  hold  a 
whale  with  the  thread  of  a  spider's  web  as  to  have  caused  any 
human  being  to  abandon  a  recreation  at  once  so  delightful, 
amusing,  and  beneficial,  by  their  aspersions ;  and  where  the 
light  and  airy  nothingness  of  ridicule  has  caused  a  doubt  in 
the  mind  of  one  of  its  followers,  the  silken  line  of  praise  has 
caused  thousands  to  pursue  and  defend  it. 

Let  all,  then,  who  belong  to  the  fraternity,  having  the 
great,  the  learned  and  the  good  for  their  example,  follow  in 
the  footsteps  of  their  illustrious  predecessors ;  and  that  they 
may  enjoy  many  a  day  of  delightful  pleasure  and  happiness, 
coupled  with  holy  and  contemplative  feeling,  binding  them 
by  the  cord  of  friendship  to  their  fellow  men ;  and  that 

"  Their  lines  may  always  fall  in  lucky  places," 

is  the  sincere  wish  of  an  ardent  admirer  of  the  art. 

As  the  peruser  of  the  foregoing  pages  might  possibly  be- 
come too  ardent  in  his  admiration  of  the  science  of  angling, 
we  close  by  inserting  one  more  effusion  of  the  objectors  to 
angling,  which,  from  the  dangers  seemingly  attending  the 
practice,  will  no  doubt  deter  him  from  pursuing  the  sport 

TO  A  FISH  OF  THE  BROOKE. 

Why  flyest  thou  away  with  fear? 
Trust  me,  there's  nought  of  danger  neart 
I  have  no  wicked  hooke, 


224 


CONCLUDING    REMARKS. 


All  covered  with  a  smartiug-  baite, 
Alas !  to  tempt  thee  to  thy  fate, 
And  dragge  thee  from  the  brooke. 

0  harmless  tenant  of  the  flood, 

1  do  not  wish  to  spill  thy  blood ; 
For  Nature  unto  thee 

Perchance  has  given  a  tender  wife, 
And  children  dear,  to  charme  thy  life, 
As  she  hath  done  to  me. 

Enjoy  thy  streame,  O  harmless  fish. 
And  when  an  Angler,  for  his  dish, 

Through  Gluttoney's  vile  sin 
Attempts— a  wretch— to  pull  thee  out, 
God  give  thee  strength,  O  gentle  Trout, 

To  pull  the  rascall  in  I  Dr.  WolcotT 


CONTENTS  OP  PART  11. 


TAOt 
PEEFACE 227 

FISH  AND  FISHIN&  OF   THE   UNITED  STATES 229 

OF  THE   KED   FISH   OR   SPOTTED   BASSE 235 

TKOLLINff   FOR   STRIPED  BASSE 237 

THE   MACKINAW  TROUT 240 

BASSE   FISHING   ON   THE   SHORES   OF   LONG  ISLAND     .      .      .      245 

THE   SMELT 247 

SPOON  BAIT 250 

BERGALL,   CHOCKSETT,  NIBBLER,  BLUE   PERCH,  OR   CUNNER  252 

BLACK   FISH  ANGLING  IN   SUFFOLK   COUNTY,  L.    I.     .      .      .  254 

THE    WHITE   LAKE   BASSE , 257 

SILKWORM   GUT,   KNOTS,  LOOPS,   &C 258 

GRISWOLD    SPRING   SNAP  HOOKS 262 

FISH   PONDS   AND   TRANSPORTATION  OF   FISH 264 

GUTTA   PERCHA   AND   INDIA    RUBBER   FLOATS 270 

WEAK   FISH   OR  BARB   ANGLING   IN   LONG   ISLAND   SOUND     .  272 

THE   EEL 274 

THE   HAKE 281 

WHITE   PERCH  AND   CAT    FISH    ANGLING    IN    THE  VICINITY 

OF   NEW  YORK 284 

OCEAN   ANGLING 288 

INHABITANTS   OF  THE  OREGON  AND  CALIFORNIA    WATERS  ,  292 


226  CONTENTS  OF  PART  H. 

rAGK 

OF   THE   WHITE  PERCH 294 

THE  YELLOW  PIKE  PERCH •      .      .  296 

BLACK  BASSE  ANGLING  IN  MICHIGAN 298 

THE  MUSKELLUNGE,  OR  LAKE  PIKE.      .     , 303 

THE  CAT  FISH 306 

THE  BLACK  TROUT 309 

MACKEREL 311 

THE  BUFFALO 313 

FLUKE,  PLAICE,   TURBOT,   &C.      .........  315 

THE  SUCKER 319 

TTINO  HOOKS,  REPAIRING  RODS,  &C 324 

INTERESTING  ITEMS  OF  INFORMATION 326 


PREFACE  TO  THE  SECOND  PART. 


The  same  want  of  complete  and  precise  information  in 
regard  to  a  perfect  knowledge  of  the  fishes  of  the  United 
Stales  that  existed  at  the  time  of  the  issue  of  the  first  edition, 
exists,  with  hardly  an  exception,  at  the  present  moment.  The 
completion  of  the  "  Natural  History  of  the  State  of  New 
YorK"  has  added  one  link  to  the  chain  of  information  on  the 
subject  of  natural  science,  which  will  one  day  extend  around 
and  Oind  together  a  mass  of  useful  information,  of  vast  import- 
ance to  future  generations.  Professor  Holbrook,  of  Charleston, 
is  now  engaged  on  a  work  on  the  Ichthyology  of  South 
Carolina,  Georgia,  and  Florida,  which  promises  to  be  one  of 
the  most  complete  and  beautiful  works  of  the  kind  ever  issued. 
Woula  iliat  other  states,  or  scientific  individuals,  might  follow 
m  the  lootsteps  ol  their  illustrious  predecessors !  and  that  the 
tenants  of  the  waters,  as  well  as  those  of  the  air,  had  their 
Wilson  or  Audubon. 

The  remarks  of  the  celebrated  and  learned  Dewitt  Clinton 
are  as  applicable  to  the  subject  now  as  at  the  time  they  were 
written :  "  The  energies  of  the  country  have  been  more 
directed  to  the  accumulation  of  wealth  than  to  the  acquisition  of 
knowledge.  But  lei  us  fervently  hope,  that  after  this  passion, 
so  energetic,  is  satiated  in  its  present  pursuit,  it  may  seek  more 
sublime  sources  of  gratification." 

«*  To  either  India  see  the  merchant  fly, 
Scared  at  the  spectre  of  pale  poverty  I 
See  him,  with  pains  of  body,  pangs  of  soul, 
Bum  through  the  tropic,  freeze  beneath  the  polel 
Wilt  thou  do  nothing  for  a  noble  end. 
Nothing  to  make  philosophy  thy  friend  ?" 
A 


*-crJsi>- 


PREFACE   TO   THE   SECOND   PART. 


But  the  temple  of  fame  is  yet  open,  and  the  name  of  the 
first  ichthyologist  of  America  is  yet  to  be  inscribed.*  As 
was  to  be  expected  of  a  first  attempt,  the  former  editions 
contained  many  errors,  but  none  of  particular  importance 
to  the  angler.  It  has  been  the  object  of  the  present  edi- 
tion to  revise  and  correct,  and  also  to  add  such  fiirther 
information  as  would  be  found  useful,  instructive,  and  interest- 
ing. The  author  returns  his  sincere  thanks  to  his  numerous 
friends  who,  with  the  true  liberality  of  gentlemen  and  sports- 
men, have  kindly  aided  him  in  this  undertaking.  The  writer 
considers  that  his  situation,  in  the  midst  of  the  piscatorial 
world,  is  one  that  affords  the  best  possible  opportunity  for 
collecting  practical  intelligence  of  interest  to  the  angling 
sportsman ;  and  since  he  has  become  known  to  some  ex- 
tent among  his  Waltonian  friends  throughout  the  country, 
concludes  to  subscribe  his  name,  and  solicit  from  those  inte- 
rested, such  information  as  will  be  of  value  "  to  all  true  men 
who  love  quiet,  and  go  an  angling." 

In  conclusion.  Gratefully  appreciating  the  proof  of  appro- 
bation given  him  by  the  success  attending  the  first  two  editions 
of  this  work,  and  asking  further  indulgence  for  imperfections 
and  omissions  (for  to  authorship  he  makes  no  pretensions), 
this  volume  is  respectfully  submitted  to  the  anglers  of  the 
United  States,  by  their  fellow  angler, 

JOHN  J.  BROWN. 

Jfao  York,  1849. 


•  Professor  Agassiz,  a  celebrated  German  naturalist,  is  now  engaged 
in  this  country  on  the  subject. 


THE  FISH  AND  FISHING 

OF   THE 

UNITED    STATES 


CHAPTER  I. 

••  I  love  the  babbling  brook,  the  placid  lake, 
Where  spotted  trout  and  pike  their  pastime  take ; 
I  love  tho  rocky  shore,  the  rushing  stream. 
Where  lordly  salmon  leap,  in  sunlight  gleam ; 
The  stately  river,  the  expansive  bay, 
Where  striped  basse  and  silver  squeteagae  play ; 
The  ocean's  distant  roar,  the  bounding  wave, 
Where  monsters  daily  bask  and  dolphins  lave ; 
These !  these !  I  love,  and  oft  away  from  home 
Truant  I  stray,  tempted  by  them  to  roam  ; 
These !  these  !  I  love,  and  never  can  forsake. 
For  all  the  gold  that  trade  or  toil  can  make." 

Anglers  of  the  western  world,  you,  as  the  lamented  Power 
would  have  said,  are  "  born  to  good  luck."  Your  lot  is  cast 
in  a  land  of  many  waters  and  many  fishes.  Loud  should  be 
your  paeans  of  praise,  profound  your  gratitude  to  the  giver  of  all 
good,  when  you  consider  the  many  advantages  you  enjoy  as 
anglers  of  the  United  States.  Were  you  to  traverse  the  circle 
of  the  globe  for  pleasure  with  the  rod,  you  would  return  with 
an  anxious  step  and  a  loving  heart  to  the 

"Land  of  the  free  and  the  home  of  the  brave, 


satiafied  that  no  country  you  had  visited  possessed  half  the 


TEE  FISH   AND  FISHINa 


sporting  advantages  of  your  own ;  for  it  would  occupy  an 
ordinary  lifetime,  were  a  man,  with  angling  implements, 
merely  to  explore  the  waters  and  make  acquaintance  with 
every  variety  of  fish  that  has  "  a  local  habitation  and  a  name" 
within  its  extended  boundaries. 

As  the  state  of  natural  science  in  regard  to  the  history  and 
habits  of  our  fishes  is  in  its  infancy,  so  also  are  the  contrivances 
and  arts  employed  in  taking  them,  yet  rude  and  undeveloped. 
But  we  are  rapidly  increasing  our  knowledge  and  refining  our 
methods  ;  as  we  must  do  when  pleasure,  and  not  profit,  is  the 
object  of  our  pursuit,  and  the  fi^h,  constantly  sought,  become 
wary,  and  yield  only  to  the  utmost  address  of  the  angler. 

Much  certainly  might  here  be  said  of  the  ordinary  and  ex- 
traordinary game  fish  inhabiting  the  waters  of  both  hemi- 
spheres, which  have  long  furnished  themes  to  cultivated  anglers 
and  practical  studies  of  the  art.  But  much  especially  deserves 
to  be  said  of  the  finny  inhabitants  of  our  own  bright  streams, 
which  are  unhappily  unknown  to  our  brotherhood  in  the  old 
world.  Who  that  ever  took  a  striped  basse  or  squeteague 
of  five  or  ten  pounds'  weight  can  ever  forget  the  pleasur- 
able excitement  and  ecstasy  of  the  moment ;  or  what  man, 
worthy  the  name,  whose  fortune  has  been  cast  among  the 
northern  lakes,  can  fail,  even  in  his  dreams,  to  remember  the 
intense  enjoyment  that  thrilled  his  soul  and  senses  as  he  trium- 
phantly drew  from  its  pellucid  waters,  after  a  long  skirmish 
and  a  doubtful  struggle,  a  three  foot  trout  or  a  large  black 
basse  1  Who,  too,  that  has  made  one  of  a  party  in  the  briny 
bay,  and  captured  a  mess  of  lively  barb,  or  the  noble  sheeps- 
head,  after  a  vigorous  contest  and  a  beautiful  play  with  rod 
and  reel,  wonders  at  the  enthusiasm  of  the  American  angler, 
surrounded  by  such  opportunities  of  enjoyment  ?  The  salmon, 
the  trout,  and  the  pike  are  almost  the  only  game  fish  of  Europe. 
It  is  true. 


L^riAfc 


OF  THE  UNITED  STATES.  331 

"Their  plenteous  streams  a  various  race  supply : 
The  bright  eyed  perch,  with  fins  of  Tyrian  dye, 
The  silver  eel,  in  shining  volumes  rolled, 
The  yellow  carp,  in  scales  bedropped  with  gold, 
Swift  trouts,  diversified  with  crimson  stains, 
And  pikes,  the  tyrants  of  the  watery  plains," 

but  we  have,  in  addition,  almost  innumerable  objects  of  sport. 
For  the  lover  of  the  breezy  ocean  there  is  the  invigorating 
pastime  of  trolling  for  blue  fish,  or  of  drawing  from  its 
populous  depths  the  valued  sea  basse,  porgie,  and  tautog.  In 
our  larger  rivers  and  lakes  abound  the  mighty  muskellunge, 
or  ponderous  cat-fish,  and  buflTalo  ;  and  last,  though  not  least, 
is  the  never-to-be-forgotten  red-fish,  which  tenants  the  bays 
and  mouths  of  our  southern  rivers.  Happy  and  grateful  then 
should  our  angler  be  that  his  lot  is  cast  in  such  a  land ! 

Surrounded  by  such  abundance  and  variety  of  "  finny 
attractions,"  is  it  wonderful  that  the  angler  falls  into  ecstasies, 
expatiating  on  his  favorite  subject  1  But  we  would  moderate 
any  pride  of  superiority  we  indulge  in  over  our  transatlantic 
brethren  in  respect  to  the  quantity  and  quality  of  our  game,  by 
reasoning  with  ourselves  and  inquiring.  Are  our  advantages  to 
last,  can  they  always  be?  You  who  have  trod  the  mossy 
bank  in  pursuit  of  trout,  and  warred  against  the  swift  current 
when  the  striped  basse  was  the  object  of  your  sport,  will 
answer  emphatically  no.  You  are  painfully  assured  that  the 
well  known  haunts  wherein  in  happy  boyhood  you  took  many 
a  "  silver  side,"  are  deserted,  and  the  overarching  banks  of  your 
favorite  streams  conceal  your  spotted  friends  no  longer.  You 
know  that  at  your  basse  grounds  you  take  few  and  still  fewer 
fish,  and  that  some  of  your  former  places  are  now  never 
visited  by  the  sought  for  game.  It  is  the  commonest  complaint 
of  the  old  anglers  that  fishing  nowadays  is  uncertain;  that 
It  is  much  more  difficult  to  take  a  mess  of  fish ;  there  are  too 

A» 


232 


THE   FISH  ANH  FISHINO 


many  after  them  ;  in  short,  that  "  times  are  not  as  they  used  to 
be,"  and  so  also  says  the  gunner  of  his  favorite  sort  of  game. 
Now,  what  are  the  causes  of  this  scarcity  and  disappearance  ; 
what  the  preventives  and  the  remedy  therefor  1 

The  causes  are  easily  seen,  and  almost  as  easily  remedied,  if 
those  interested  in  the  preservation  of  our  game  would  unite 
their  efforts  to  do  so.  The  haunts  of  our  favorite  fish  are 
netted  by  mercenary  fishermen,  who,  in  season  or  out  of 
season,  take  large  and  small  (for  all  is  fish  that  comes  to  their 
net)  to  the  nearest  city,  where  they  get  extravagant  prices  for 
their  unhallowed  spoil.  And  this  resurrectionism,  for  it  is 
little  better,  is  practised  nightly*  in  our  midst.  Another  reason 
is  the  indiscriminate  taking  of  fish  at  spawning  time  by  boys 
and  (what  is  worse)  ignorant  men,  and  also  by  market  fisher- 
men, who  take  them  in  great  numbers  from  their  icy  retreat 
and  spawning  grounds  in  tide  waters.  Add  to  this  the  wanton 
waste  of  fish  by  many  who  call  themselves  anglers,  who 
(angling  not  for  the  pleasure  of  fishing,  but  to  see  how  many 
they  can  take)  leave  them  to  gasp  and  die  by  the  stream  side, 
and  you  have  reasons  enough  for  the  depopulation  of  all  the 
waters  in  creation.  Trout  has  almost  become  extinct  in  those 
parts  of  New  York,  New  Jersey,  Pennsylvania,  and  many 
of  the  eastern  states,  that  are  adjacent  to  the  principal  cities 
and  towns,  and  are  abundant  only  in  the  less  populated  and 
accessible  portions,  and  even  there  are  fast  decreasing,  owing 
to  the  same  causes. 

Now  what  are  the  remedies  ?  The  rod  sportsman  has 
several  advantages  over  the  gunner.  Birds  fly  high,  are  as 
free  as  air,  and  so  are  those  that  pursue  them  ;  "  they  can  bo 
seen."     Every  boy  in  the  country  that  has  arrived  at  the  age 


*  Very  few  streams  where  anglers  mach  frequent  are  cared  for  in  the 
day  time  by  the  netters  ;  night  is  the  time  to  cover  their  dark  deeds. 


'"^^^^iSTTiVjC;- 


OF   THE   UNITED   STATES. 


233 


of  twelve  years  is  a  good  shot,  and  can  bag  his  game,  in 
season  or  out,  by  getting  out  of  hear-shot  distance ;  and  no 
obstacles  can  be  interposed  to  this  general  and  indiscriminate 
slaughter,  except  the  enforcement  of  rigid  laws,  and  the  severe 
discountenance  of  public  opinion. 

But  the  lover  of  the  finny  race  can  protect  his  game  with  more 
certainty.  Although  the  inhabitant  of  the  crystal  water  can 
often  be  seen,  there  is  no  certainty  of  taking  him,  except  it  be 
with  net  or  spear,  and  this  can  be  prevented.  A  gentleman 
who  had  a  fine  pond,  stocked  with  golden  carp,  was  asked  by 
a  dealer  in  fish  for  the  privilege  of  taking  some  fish  from  his 
pond.  The  gentleman,  having  been  in  a  former  instance  im- 
posed upon  by  the  inquirer,  answered,  that  he  might  come  and 
take  as  many  as  he  pleased ;  but  immediately  he  set  his 
men  to  work,  and  planted  stakes  throughout  the  pond.  Much 
time  was  spent  in  the  purchase  and  preparation  of  nets,  at 
considerable  expense  ;  the  netters  went,  but  returned  with  torn 
nets  and  no  fish,  and  a  flea  in  their  ear.  A  word  to  the  wise 
is  sufficient. 

Were  a  few  anglers  in  the  vicinity  of  water  netted  by 
poachers  to  club  together  to  protect  it,  and  see  that  the  ground 
was  properly  staked,  the  ponds  and  streams  could  in  a  measure 
be  preserved  from  the  depredations  of  such  barbarians.  Draw- 
nets  and  seines  are  the  most  injurious  ;  gill-nets  and  fykes 
cannot  be  used  with  much  effect  without  being  visible,  and 
can  be  watched  by  the  vigilant  angler. 

In  regard,  then,  to  the  protection  of  game,  we  have  the  same 
interest  with  the  fowler ;  and  as  there  are  many  who  pursue 
fish  and  fowl,  and  many  epicures  also 


Who  love  a  dish 
Of  birds  or  fish, 


concert  ol  action  among  them  could  not  fail  to  be  effectual. 


234 


THE  FISH   AND   FISHING   OF   THE   UNITED   STATES. 


Strong  laws  against  taking  or  vending  game  out  of  season, 
strictly  enforced  by  the  rigorous  prosecution  of  all  offenders, 
would  check,  if  not  stop  the  growing  evil. 

To  this  end  sporting  clubs  should  be  formed  in  the  different 
cities,  towns,  and  districts  of  country,  which  might  be  bene- 
fited by  such  laws  ;  and  vigilance  committees  formed  to  cor- 
respond with  and  visit  the  sporting  grounds,  and  see  that  every 
violation  of  the  statutes  is  thoroughly  dealt  with.  By  such  a 
course  of  procedure  our  game  grounds  could  be  preserved, 
our  pleasures  greatly  increased,  and  a  stock  of  nature's  "  best 
gift,  our  ever  new  delight,"  preserved  to  future  generations. 
We  can  do  more.  Where  ponds  and  streams  have  ceased  to  be 
tenanted  by  the  favorite  trout,  transportation  and  propagation 
can  be  carried  on  privately,  at  little  expense,  and  the  fish  left 
to  remain  many  years  with  safety  and  success.  Then  the 
streams  we  once  loved  may  be  made  lively  and  joyous  as  in 
the  days  of  our  youth.  There  appears  to  be  only  one  descrip- 
tion of  fish  that  we  are  destined  to  lose,  and  that  is  the  king  of 
the  tribe,  the  salmon.  The  majority  of  our  rivers  being  large 
enough  to  admit  of  all  kinds  of  navigation,  including  that 
enemy  of  fish  and  fishing,  the  steamboat,  we  shall  eventually 
have  to  bid  farewell  to  this  royal  visitor.  He  cannot  be  do- 
mesticated, but  roams  as  his  instinct  leads  him.  Other  descrip- 
tions of  game  are  ours,  and  in  our  keeping ;  and  it  behoves  us, 
as  true  men  and  faithful  anglers,  to  propagate  and  preserve 
them. 


CHAPTER  II. 

OP    THE    K£D    FISH,    OR    SPOTTED    BASSE. 
Corvina  Ocellata.—DsKA.Y. 


This  fish  is  an  inhabitant  of  our  more  southern  waters,  being 
found  in  great  abundance  on  the  Atlantic  coast,  in  most  of  the 
bays  that  set  in  south  of  Cape  Hatteras,  although  he  occasion- 
ally, in  limited  numbers,  roves  as  far  north  as  New  York. 
He  is,  however,  more  of  an  object  of  sport  in  the  southern 
bays,  and  is  taken  in  the  northern  part  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico, 
in  Lake  Borgne,  at  Pascagoula,  Pass  Christian,  Bay  of  Biloxi, 
Mobile,  Pensacola,  and  Apalachicola  bays.  At  the  south  he 
is  called  the  Red  Fish  (^Poisson  Rouge),  and  further  north,  at 
Charleston,  the  Basse,  or  Spotted  Basse.  He  varies  in  size 
from  one  to  four  feet.  When  first  taken  from  the  water  he  is 
of  a  beautiful  silver  color,  but  after  a  little  exposure  becomes 
dark  and  clouded  along  the  back,  like  many  others  of  his 
species.  In  death  he  changes  his  color  to  rainbow  hues. 
Beyond  the  caudal  fin  and  near  the  tail  he  has  a  very  singular 
and  peculiar  black  or  brown  spot,  bordered  with  white.  A 
single  spot  looks,  at  first  sight,  rather  unnatural,  and  one 
would  be  apt  to  suppose  it  the  work  of  art  or  accident.  The 
late  Dr.  Mitchell  says,  "  it  resembles  the  mark  left  by  a  heated 
iron,  which  has  given  rise  to  the  name  of  branded  drum." 
They  are  often  taken  having  two,  three,  or  even  four  of  these 
strange  looking  spots  clustered  together  in  the  same  situation. 

In  the  vicinity  of  Charleston  he  commences  taking  the  hook 
in  the  early  part  of  March,  and  is  caught  all  through  the 
season,  until  mid  winter,  at  which  time  he  is  taken  of  larger 
size  than  at  his  early  coming.     Along  the  more  southern  coast 


236 


OF  THE   KED   FISH,  OR   SPOTTED   BASSE. 


at  New  Orleans  and  Mobile,  he  seems  to  be  always  on  hand, 
and  furnishes  food  for  the  table  all  the  year  round.  He  runs  in 
shallow  water,  similar  to  the  striped  basse,  and  is  taken  mostly 
with  the  hand  line  with  a  small  sized  cod  hook,  baited  with 
shrimps  or  pieces  of  mullet.  He  is  a  strong,  powerful,  and  bold 
biting  fish,  and,  with  the  rod  and  reel,  affords  as  much  plea- 
sure in  his  capture  as  any  of  the  tribe. 

A  friend  relates  that  whilst  fishing  near  the  South  Pass,  Mis- 
sissippi River,  being  tired  and  inclined  to  snooze,  he  wound  his 
line  around  his  wrist,  and  resigned  himself  to  the  arms  of  Mor- 
pheus ;  but  before  his  nap  was  half  out  was  suddenly  awakened 
by  a  tug  at  his  line,  and  before  he  could  recover  himself  was 
pulled  overboard  by  the  extreme  strength  and  vigor  of  this  game 
fish. 

He  is  held  in  high  estimation  as  an  article  of  food,  and  is 
well  worth  the  angler's  toil  and  patience.  The  rod  and  reel 
angler  may  fish  for  him  in  the  same  manner  as  directed  for 
striped  basse  or  weak  fish,  using  always,  to  insure  success, 
twisted  gut  leaders,  and  No.  00  Limerick,  or  Kirby  hooks. 


CHAPTER  III. 

TKOLLINQ  FOR  STRIPED  BASSE. 


Those  who  prefer  the  more  active  and  invigorating  practice 
of  our  much  admired  art,  will  find  trolling  for  this  beautiful  game 
fish  as  exciting  a  recreation  as  any  that  comes  within  the  angler's 
reach.  It  has  two  advantages  over  the  ordinary  bridge  and  boat 
fishing  (always  allowing  that  the  angler  knows  his  ground 
well)  ;  one  is,  that,  as  in  the  scientific  pursuit  of  trout,  his  scene 
is  more  changeful  and  varied,  being  relieved  from  the  sometimes 
tedious  and  monotonous  stillness ;  and  the  other  is,  that  the 
game  is  more  likely  to  be  attracted  by  his  bait,  from  the  more 
continual  change  of  position,  than  it  could  be  by  the  usual 
mode  of  casting  and  drawing  from  the  boat's  side,  bridge's 
height,  or  projecting  bank. 

At  Harlem  river  and  Hurlgate,*  near  New  York,  they  are  taken 

*  Perhaps  it  were  better  to  give  this  place  its  original  and  more  appro 
priate  appellation  of  Hellgate.  No  angler  should  attempt  to  fish  there 
unless  with  an  experienced  hand  who  knows  the  ground ;  for  unruffled 
and  inviting  as  this  favorite  spot  appears  at  slack  water,  less  than  an  houi 
may  change  it  from  the  gentleness  of  the  lamb  to  the  raging  of  the  lion, 
and  before  he  be  aware  of  it  he  may  be  hurled  into  the  Pot,  among  the 
Hen  and  Chickens,  on  the  Hog's  Back,  Frying-pan,  or  Gridiron.  Wash- 
ington Irving,  in  his  celebrated  History  of  New  York,  says  : — 

"This  is  a  narrow  strait  in  the  Sound,  at  the  distance  of  six  miles 
above  New  York.  It  is  dangerous  to  shipping,  unless  under  the  care  of 
skilful  pilots,  by  reason  of  numerous  rocks,  shelves,  and  whirlpools. 
These  have  received  sundry  appellations,  such  as  the  Gridiron,  Frying- 
pan,  Hog's  Back,  Pot,  &c.  Certain  mealy-mouthed  men,  of  squeamish 
consciences,  who  are  loath  to  give  the  devil  his  due,  have  softened  the 
above  characteristic  name  into  Hurlgate,  forsooth !  Let  those  take  care 
how  they  venture  into  the  Gate,  or  they  may  be  hnrled  into  the  Pol 
before  they  are  aware  of  it." 


238 


TROLLING   FOR  STRIFED  BASSE. 


— 

-^ 

—        : 

^iL_ri 

^y^ 

3v= 

^='- 

-      

■ 

of  from  three  to  fifty  pounds'  weight,  with  a  natural  squid  or 
eel  for  bait.  The  line  most  proper  to  be  used  is  a  stout  flax  or 
cotton  line,  twenty-eight  fathoms  long  and  about  one-eighth 
of  an  inch  thick,  the  size  of  an  ordinary  cod  line.  The  angler, 
to  troll  properly,  should  have  a  portable  seat  (which  should  be 
placed  across  the  stern  of  the  boat),  and  sit  with  his  back  to  the 
person  propelling  him  along.  The  boat  should  be  rowed  gently, 
and  with  the  least  possible  noise,  with  muffled  row-locks. 

The  size  of  the  hook  is  about  the  same  as  that  used  in  taking 
the  ordinary  cod.  But  how  to  put  on  the  squid — by  the  way, 
brother  angler,  did  you  ever  see  a  squid  1  If  you  have  not,  you 
will  find  a  pretty  good  portrait  of  him  at  the  bottom  of  page 
239  ;  but  should  you  see  him  in  his  living  person,  you  will 
never  forget  him.  He  is  the  most  singular,  odd-looking  cus- 
tomer that  has  its  residence  beneath  tide  water.  His  oze  varies 
from  four  to  ten  inches  in  length. 

"  Gudgeons  in  rivers,  dragonet  in  weeds, 
Squid  'midst  the  roclcs,  in  open  water  feeds.'' 

He  is  not  known  to  bite  at  anythmg,  but  is  as  good  a  morsel 
for  a  hungry  basse  as  a  roast  turkey  for  us  of  the  fraternity  at  a 
Thanksgiving  dinner ;  and  is  as  hard  to  be  passed  by  the  nunble 
basse  as  would  be  a  gin  palace  by  a  regular  toper. 

To  attach  him  to  the  hook,  procure  a  stout  needle  and  a  good 
length  of  linen  thread.  This  tie  to  the  end  of  your  hook's 
length,  which  indispensable  to  your  success,  should  have  been 
fastened  with  a  strong  winding  of  waxed  thread  to  a  piece  of 
cord  of  the  same  thickness  as  your  line,  and  twelve  inches  in 
length.  Take  off  that  calico  spotted  uniform  that  he  wears, 
and  leave  him  pure  and  white  as  the  mountain  snow.  Divest 
him  of  that  singular-looking  transparent  article  called  his  back 
bone  ;  now  take  your  needle,  with  thread  and  hook  attached, 
enter  the  needle  at  the  opening  of  the  neck  from  which  yon 


TROLLINa  FOR  STRIFEI)   BASSE. 


239 


took  his  pellucid  spine ;  draw  the  hook  so  far  through,  that  the 
point  of  the  hook  will  pass  through  near  his  eye ;  enter  it 
there,  cut  off  your  thread,  and  commence  at  the  tail  by  sewing 
him  firmly  around  the  projecting  part  of  the  hook,  and  con- 
tinue to  stitch  him  nicely  and  firmly  all  the  way  down  to  his 
neck,  where  you  may,  after  a  few  turns  firmly  secured,  clip  off 
your  thread  and  consider  him  fixed  for  his  fate. 

There  are  very  few  persons  that  attempt  this  mode  of  fishing 
Lewis  Rogers  and  John  Hilliker,  who  keep  public -houses  near 
the  places  mentioned,  have  taken  some  very  large  fish  of  late 
years,  weighing  in  some  instances  as  high  as  sixty  pounds.  The 
best  time  for  taking  them  is  in  the  months  of  October  and 
November. 

Another  method  of  trolling  practised  is,  with  the  usual  basse 
tackle,  with  rod  and  reel,  and  with  spearing,  killy,  or  minnow 
for  bait.  The  latter  method  is  adopted  in  trolling  in  the  various 
creeks  that  run  into  the  Hudson  River.  In  these  places  they 
are  taken  from  one  to  ten  pounds  weight  both  in  the  spring  and 
autumn ;  but  the  best  time  is  in  the  month  of  October. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

THE   MACKINAW  TROUT,   OR   MACKINAW   SALMOK. 
Salmo  Amethystua. — Mitchill. 


This  appears  to  be  a  different  species  from  that  known  as 
the  common  Lake  Trout,  Salmo  Confinis,  Dekay.  It  is 
described  in  the  New  York  Fauna  as  follows : 

"  Color. — Dark  or  dusky  grey  above  ;  chin,  throat,  and  belly 
light  ash  grey  or  cream  color ;  the  back  and  sides  sprinkled 
with  numerous  irregular  lighter  grey  or  brown,  or  soiled  white 
spots,  which  do  not,  however,  as  in  the  preceding  species  (Lake 
Trout),  rise  upon  the  fins  ;  ventrals  and  pectorals  slightly  yel- 
lowish ;  irides  yellow  ;  the  teeth,  gums,  and  roof  of  the  mouth 
with  a  bright  purple  tinge  ;  length,  two  to  five  feet." 

"  This  magnificent  trout,  which  is  the  largest  hitherto  known 
of  Salmonidae,  exists  in  all  the  great  lakes  lying  between  the 
United  States  and  the  Arctic  Ocean,  is  exceedingly  voracious, 
feeding  upon  every  fish  within  its  reach,  and,  according  to  Dr. 
Mitchill,  is  sometimes  of  the  weight  of  120  pounds.  It  is  a 
favorite  article  of  food  with  the  Canadian  voyageurs,  who  fre- 
quently eat  it  raw.  Its  flesh  is  reddish.  Like  the  Salmo  Con- 
finis,  it  resorts  habitually  to  the  deepest  parts  of  the  lake,  and 
only  comes  near  the  shores  in  October  to  spawn,  when  the 
natives  spear  it  by  torchlight.  Lake  Huron  appears  to  be  it:^ 
most  southerly  range  in  any  considerable  number,  although  a 
few  are  taken  occasionally  in  Lake  Erie,  along  the  shores  of 
Ohio,  Pennsylvania,  and  New  York."  This  kind  is  much  supe- 
rior to  the  common  lake  trout  (with  which  it  is  often  con- 
founded), as  an  article  of  food ;  and  by  good  judges  of  good 
things  is  considered  equal  in  flavor  to  any  fish  that  swims. 


THE   MACKINAW  TROUT,  OR  MACKINAW  SALMON.  241 

They  are  mostly  taken  with  gill  nets  and  set  lines  in  deep  water. 
The  lines  used  are  as  large  as  the  largest  sized  cod  lines,  and  the 
hooks,  which  are  generally  made  by  the  blacksmiths  in  the 
vicinity  of  the  lakes,  are  equal  in  size  to  the  biggest  cod  hooks. 
The  bait  is,  pieces  of  the  lake  herring,  or  of  the  white  fish. 
When  the  lines  are  taken  up,  if  the  fish  are  large,  they  are  lifted 
into  the  boat  with  a  large  strong  gaff.  The  most  pleasant  and 
exciting  mode  of  capture  for  the  angler  is  that  of  trolling 
with  stout  line  and  hooks,  as  before  described,*  and  a  piece  of 
pork  attached,  or  the  spoon  bait,  or  brass  revolving  hook.  The 
best  places  for  this  kind  of  sport  are  in  Lakes  Huron,  Superior, 
and  the  Straits  of  Mackinaw.  He  affords  amusement  and 
exciting  exercise  to  the  inhabitants  near  the  lakes,  and  bites 
equally  as  sharp  at  the  baited  hook  as  Jack  Frost  does  at  the 
exposed  features  of  the  fisherman. 
A  friend  at  Detroit  says  : — 

"  During  the  winter,  trout  are  taken  in  great  numbers  through  ^^^3=   .  x 

the  ice,  in  Green  Bay  ;  and  the  markets  of  Chicago,  Galena,  %^^_  '  *•  v 

and  many  of  the  interior  towns  of  Wisconsm  are  thus  supplied.  ^~'^ 

The  bait  (herring)  are  caught  with  small  gill  nets  sunk  through  ^^  l~^_     ' 

the  ice.     A  hole  is  then  cut  over  twenty-five  or  thirty  fathom  ifc..     ^-S^Lj 

water,  and  the  hue,  which  is  kept  m  motion,  prevents  the  hole  ^i^       /  - 

from  freezing.     When  a  fisherman  has  a  bite,  and  strikes  the  ^'^A  / 

fish,  he  throws  the  line  over  his  shoulder  and  runs  off*,  drawing  .—?*/:-: 

the  fish  rapidly  up  to  the  hole  and  out  upon  the  ice,  where  it  is  -^ 

left  to  freeze.  In  this  manner  trout  are  taken  in  large  quanti- 
ties, and  transported  in  a  frozen  state  to  the  towns  above  named. 
Hundreds  of  barrels  of  them  are  salted  and  sold  in  the  spring." 
At  Peseco  Lake,  Lake  Louis,  and  Lake  Pleasant,  in 
Hamilton  County,  N.  Y.,  and  other  northern  lakes,  much  sport 
is  had  by  boat  trolling  with  the  rod  and  reel,  and  parties  are 

*  See  Lake  Trout,  page  64. 


242 


THE   MACKINAW   TKOUT, 


made  up  from  the  cities  of  New  York,  Albany,  Troy,  Roches- 
ter, and  places  in  the  vicinity  of  the  lakes,  for  a  two-weeks' 
tour  in  that  beautiful  wilderness  of  exuberant  nature.  A  visit 
to  that  lonely  sporting  region  will  richly  repay  the  money  and 
time  spent  '  in  sweet  communion  with  nature'  by  a  store  of 
health  and  contentment  exchanged  for  the  worn  frame  and  hag- 
gard countenance  caused  by  excessive  city  confinement. 

The  rod  proper  for  this  description  of  trolling  is  the  same 
as  that  used  for  striped  basse,  only  it  should  have  a  hollow  butt 
and  extra  top,  so  that  should  you  be  so  unfortunate  as  to  break 
a  top,  you  can  easily  replace  it  with  another.  Some  use  two 
rods  at  one  time  ;  but  it  requires  a  skilful  and  experienced  troller 
to  manage  two,  as  the  lines  are  apt  to  become  entangled.  To 
succeed  well,  you  must  have  an  experienced  oarsman,  who  has 
been  in  the  habit  of  trolling,  and  can  row  you  gently  and  quietly 
about  the  lake.  They  have  a  mode  of  rigging  hooks  to  the 
shiner  or  minnow  a  little  different  from  the  usual  Waltonian 
method,  and  that  recommended  by  Hofland,  at  page  87  ;  it  is 
called  a  train  of  hooks.  These  trains  of  hooks  are  made  on  a 
stout  strand  of  single  gut  in  the  following  manner.  Take  the 
largest  and  roundest  piece  of  gut  that  you  can  procure  ;  tie  two 
No.  5  Limerick  salmon  (or  No.  1  trout,  or  smaller,  according  to 
the  size  of  the  bait  you  expect  to  use)  hooks  to  the  end  of  it 
for  tail  hooks  ;  about  an  inch  further  up  place  two  others  of 
the  same  size  for  back  fin  hooks  ;  and  about  one  and  a  half 
inches  further  up  one  more,  for  a  lip  hook ;  apply  these  hooks 
to  your  shiner  in  their  regular  order,  fastening  them  through  the 
toughest  part  of  your  bait,  and  attach  them  to  your  leader,  and  you 
are  ready  for  your  game.  The  lip  hook  can  be  attached  with 
a  small  loop  so  as  to  slide  and  accommodate  itself  to  various 
sized  baits.  Some  prefer  more  hooks  to  their  train,  and  put 
three  at  the  tail  and  two  at  the  mouth,  making  seven  hooks  in 
all ;  others  prefer  to  use  one  large  Limerick  hook,  say  No.  1  or 


OR  MACKINAW   SALMON.  243 

0,  salmon,  after  the  Waltonian  method,  described  on  page  88  ; 
this  latter  method  is  more  simple  in  construction,  but  not  con- 
sidered as  sure  as  the  train  of  hooks.  Your  leader  should  be 
of  the  best  double  or  twisted  gut,  from  three  to  four  feet  in 
length,  and  should  you  wish  to  use  the  fly  (which  is  often  done), 
it  should  be  from  two  to  three  yards  in  length.  For  fly  fishing 
use  one  or  two  large  gaudy  salmon  flies,  made  on  No.  3  or 
4  salmon  hooks,  at  a  sufficient  distance  apart,  to  prevent  their 
interfering  with  each  other  or  the  shiner.  With  your  minnow 
and  fly  train  you  may  take  a  speckled  brook  trout  and  a  lake  trout 
at  the  same  time,  of  such  proportions  as  will  require  your  utmost 
skill  in  bringing  them  to  your  boat.  A  necessary  article  on  such 
an  excursion  is  a  good  sized  gaff"  for  securing  your  lake  trout ; 
your  brook  trout  may  be  handled  more  carefully.  When  you 
feel  a  bite,  lower  the  point  of  your  rod  so  as  to  give  your  fish 
a  chance  to  take  the  bait  further  in  his  mouth,  and  to  place 
yourself  and  rod  in  such  a  position  as  to  give  your  game  play 
in  case  he  needs  it.  Should  the  fish  you  seek  run  in  deep 
water,  plac6  a  light  swivel  sinker  on  your  line  before  your  -^^^^ 

leader.     In  all  cases  of  trolling,  use  one  or  two  swivels  to  _--:_:£§?^^ 

allow  free  spinning  of  your  minnow  and  prevent  your  tackle  ^i^^^^ 

from  entangling.  .  -^f' 

A  curious  way  of  taking  lake  trout,  practised  by  the  inhabit-  &^^^^' 

ants  living  near  the  lakes,  is  to  sink  in  some  part  of  the  lake  '^^ 

a  large  piece  of  bark  attached  to  a  pole,  some  twenty-five  or  v       ^=r 

thirty  feet  in  length,  to  which  heavy  weights  are  fastened  ;  this  ^  *  ZT 

is  called  an  anchor,  and  is  regularly  baited  two  or  three  times  -— ^^^ 

a  week,  with  small  fish.     A  number  of  anchors  may  be  set  in  _^-j^ 

this  manner  in  different  parts  of  the  lake.     These  are  kept  baited  ^^^^IL^    l 

for  several  weeks,  until  it  is  thought  that  the  trout  have  fairly  ^^^| 

got  into  the  habit  of  resorting  to  them.     A  fisherman  will  then  ^^^'/i 

tie  his  skiff"  to  the  end  of  the  pole,  and  commence  fishing  with  im 

a  common  drop  line,  using  a  very  large,  straight,  and  pointed  /^« 


244  THE   MACKINAW   TROUT,   OR   MACKINAW  SALMON. 

hook,  called  the  lake  hook.    This  method  is  called  fishing  at 
anchor. 

New  Yorkers  who  would  visit  the  sporting  lakes  of  Hamil- 
ton County,  will  reach  them  most  speedily  and  economically 
by  leaving  the  city  by  the  Monday  night's  boat  for  Albany,  and 
taking  the  cars  for  the  west  at  7  o'clock  next  morning.  At 
about  10  you  reach  Amsterdam,  where  you  take  the  stage  for 
Northville.  Here  stay  till  morning,  when  the  regular  mail 
conveyance,  which  leaves  but  once  a  week,  carries  you  to  Lake 
Pleasant,  the  first  of  the  series. 

Salmon  trout  are  there  taken  as  the  ice  breaks  up,  and  even 
in  winter  through  the  ice.  But  if  you  value  comfort,  and  have 
no  fancy  for  the  keen  air  of  those  elevated  regions  (where  the 
season  is  two  months  later  than  on  Long  Island),  the  four 
weeks  from  and  after  the  middle  of  May  are  infinitely  prefer- 
able, even  if  you  regard  the  quantity 'and  quality  of  the  fish. 
The  speckled  brook  trout  do  not  bite  until  the  end  of  May. 


CHAPTER  V. 

BASSE   FISHING   ON   THE   SHORES   OF  LONG  ISLAND. 
Kindly  furnished  for  this  edition  by  T.  D.  Lowther,  Esq. 


Off  the  south-east  shore  of  Long  Island,  during  the  fall 
months,  Basse  are  taken  in  considerable  numbers.  About  the 
middle  of  August,  fish  of  from  four  to  ten  pounds  begin  to  make 
along  the  coast  between  Montauk  Point  and  Fire  Island,  and 
enter  the  Inlets,  where  they  are  generally  taken  upon  the  bar, 
or  just  beyond  the  surf,  either  by  trolling,  or  by  "  heaving  and 
bawling"  from  the  shore.  The  latter  is  a  favorite  mode  of 
fishing,  but  rather  laborious,  requiring  both  physical  strength 
and  practical  skill.  The  squid  for  this  purpose  should  be  of 
block  tin,  full  six  ounces  weight,  with  large  hook  (no  kirb), 
size,  number  one  Cod.  This  attached  to  a  cotton  line,  full 
twenty  fathoms  long,  light  and  close  twisted,  is  made  to  gyrate 
around  the  head  until  it  acquires  sufficient  velocity  and  momen- 
tum, when  it  is  cast,  with  the  full  swing  of  the  arm,  into  the 
breakers,  carrying  after  it  the  line  that  is  held  loosely  coiled  in 
the  left  hand.  The  moment  the  squid  strikes  the  water,  it  is 
hauled  swiftly  to  shore  that  it  may  not  sink,  but  play  on  the 
surface,  and  imitate  the  motion  of  the  natural  fish.  At  Mon- 
tauk, they  wind  around  a  long  squid-lead  a  strip  of  fresh  skin 
from  the  belly  of  the  basse,  or  draw  and  tie  up  over  the  lead  the 
tail-skin  of  an  eel.  But  hungry  fish  will  snap  at  any  moving 
thing.  I  have  seen  taken  a  basse  of  twenty-five  pounds  that  bit 
at  a  rag. 

As  you  will  need  a  nimiber  of  squids  (for  some  will  get 
broken  and  lost  in  the  rocks),  take  various  kinds  if  you  please: 
— ^Fishermen  have  their  fancies  and  so  perhaps  have  fish  ;  but 


^-. 


246 


BASSE  FISHIN&  ON   THE  SHOEES   OF   LONG  ISLAKO. 


your  success  will  depend  much  more  on  the  reach  of  your  cast, 
than  on  the  sort  of  squid  you  employ. 

In  the  like  manner  and  place,  but  earlier  in  the  season,  Blue 
fish  are  sometimes  taken  in  large  numbers,  and  afford  to  the 
"  lucky  ones,"  for  a  few  brief  minutes,  an  exciting  sport  of  the 
tallest  kind.  The  capture  of  "  Mackerel"*  from  the  shore 
presents  to  even  the  most  passive  observer,  a  most  animating 
spectacle.  When  Blue  fish  are  announced  as  in  sight,  all  who 
can,  hurry  to  the  beach  and  take  stands  upon  some  elevation 
of  rock  or  platform,  with  coats  off  and  lines  ready,  eager  to 
receive  them.  Hovering  over  the  approaching  school  career 
clouds  of  Gulls,  screaming,  diving,  and  eddying  around  the 
wounded  Menhaden  and  fragments  of  fish  that  escape  from  the 
jaws  of  their  pursuers.  Nearer  they  come,  their  green  backs 
darkening  the  broken  water,  and  the  still  water  within  begins 
to  ripple  and  sparkle  and  foam,  till  the  sea  is  alive  with  fish, 
crowding  upon  the  shore.  A  leap,  a  splash — again  another — 
and  a  hundred  silver  sides  are  glancing  in  the  sun.  A  dozen 
lines  whiz  glistening  through  the  air,  cleaving  the  waters  in  the 
midst  of  the  school,  and  a  dozen  fish  are  instantly  struck,  and 
drawn  hand  over  hand,  swiftly  and  steadily  to  shore.  Vigor- 
ously the  fishers  ply  their  lines  with  various  chances  of  fortune, 
and  so  the  battle  rages  until  the  mackerel,  in  diminished  num- 
bers, retire  beyond  the  reach  of  their  cunning  enemies. 

*  The  name  for  the  Blue  fish  in  Siifiblk  County. 


:5 


r 


CHAPTER  VI. 

THE    SMELT. 
Osmerus  Viridesceris. 


This  beautiful,  almost  transparent,  and  prolific  little  fish,  as 
an  angle  fish  may  be  said  to  belong  almost  exclusively  to 
the  Bostonians,  in  whose  vicinity  it  is  found  and  caught  in 
large  quantities.  It  is  supposed  to  derive  its  name  from  its 
peculiar  smell  when  taken  out  of  the  water,  being  similar  in 
scent  to  the  cucumber.  It  is  called  the  dainty  of  Boston,  is 
taken  in  large  quantities  by  hook  and  net,  and  makes  quite  a 
desirable  article  for  the  palate  by  the  addition  of  a  frying-pan 
operation. 

"  Color. — Pale  olive  green  above  the  lateral  line ;  opercles 
and  sides  silvery  ;  obscure  traces  just  below  the  lateral  line,  of 
a  broad  satin-like  band,  extending  the  whole  length  of  the 
body  ;  the  place  of  the  ribs  indicates  unusually  lustrous  stripes, 
which  disappear  shortly  after  death  ;  upper  part  of  the  opercles, 
near  the  nape,  dark  green  ;  caudal  dark  at  the  base,  and  with 
an  obscure  marginal  band ;  dorsal  caudal  fins  light  green  ;  pec- 
torals, ventrals,  and  anal  light  colored,  tinged  faintly  with 
bluish ;  irides  silvery ;  bones  of  the  head  sub-diaphanous." — 
DeKay. 

In  habits  they  are  similar  to  the  salmon,  and  are  classed  by 
naturalists  among  that  species.  Their  average  size  is  from  six 
to  nine  inches  in  length,  and  are  occasionally  taken  as  long  as 
twelve  or  thirteen  inches.*     They  run  up  from  the  sea  into 

*  Narborough,  a  celebrated  voyager,  says.— "The  smelts  at  Monte 
Video  are  four  and-tweniy  inches  in  length  ;  they  are  semi-transparent, 
and  are  most  delicious  eating;  they  are  very  abundant,  and  may  be 
caught  with  the  hook.  They  are  also  to  be  taken  in  the  Straits  of 
Magellan,  twenty-nine  inches  in  length  and  eight  in  circumference." 


248  THE  SMELT. 

fresh  water  to  spawn,  in  the  months  of  March  and  April,  and 
return  home  in  the  month  of  May.  They  pay  their  return  visit 
for  the  benefit  of  the  angler  and  epicure,  and  bite  about  the 
same  time  with  Jack  Frost,  in  the  month  of  October  or  Novem- 
ber. In  the  vicinity  of  Boston  they  are  caught  all  through  tho 
winter  in  immense  quantities,  and  sent  to  the  markets.  As 
many  as  one  hundred  dozen  of  them  are  known  to  have  been 
taken  by  one  man  with  two  lines  in  one  day. 

The  usual  mode  of  fishing  for  them  through  the  ice,  is  with 
a  fixing  consisting  of  a  piece  of  brass  wire,  of  ten  or  fifteen 
inches  in  length,  passed  through  a  small  piece  of  lead  which 
answers  for  a  sinker  ;  to  each  end  of  this  is  attached  a  Lime- 
rick trout  hook,  about  No.  2  or  3,  tied  to  the  ordinary  length 
of  gut,  baited  with  shrimps,  or  small  pieces  of  minnow  or  frog. 
This  is  attached  to  a  sufficient  length  of  cotton  or  flax  line,  and 
finally  fastened  to  a  short  stick  of  live  oak,  ash,  or  some  other 
elastic  wood,  which  is  stuck  into  the  ice  through  a  hole  about 
eighteen  to  twenty-four  inches  in  diameter.  An  expert  hand  at 
this  business  can  attend  to  two  or  three  lines  of  this  description, 
amuse  himself  by  skating,  and  take  home  a  sufficient  quantity 
of  smelts  to  satisfy  a  craving  appetite  sharpened  by  exercise, 
excitement,  and  a  pure,  healthy  atmosphere. 

At  other  places,  and  in  other  seasons,  they  are  taken  with 
the  usual  trout  tackle,  with  the  exception  of  the  sinker,  which 
should  vary  in  size  according  to  the  strength  of  the  tide. 

This  fish  is  very  tenacious  of  life,  has  been  known  to  exist  a 
long  time  after  being  taken  out  of  water,  and  is  for  this  reason 
admirably  adapted  for  transportation.  They  have  been  trans- 
ferred successfully  into  fresh-water  ponds,  both  in  this  country 
and  England.     Yarrell,  in  his  "  British  Fishes,"  says : 

"  Smelts  were  kept  for  four  years  in  a  fresh-water  pond,  hav- 
ing no  communication  with  the  sea ;  they  continued  to  thrive, 
and  propagated  abundantly.    They  were  not  affected  by  freez- 


THE   SMELT. 


249 


ing  ;  as  the  whole  pond,  which  covered  about  three  acres,  was 
so  frozen  over  as  to  admit  of  skating.  When  the  pond  was 
drawn,  the  fishermen  considered  they  had  never  seen  so  fine  a 
lot  of  smelts." 

Several  years  since  the  same  experiment  was  tried  with 
almost  equal  success  at  Jamaica  Pond,  on  Long  Island,  with 
this  exception,  that  although  equal  in  flavor  and  quantity,  they 
do  not  grow  so  large  in  size. 

They  are  taken  in  considerable  quantities  in  the  rivers  and 
bays  that  run  up  from  the  eastern  coast,  and  also  in  the  Passaic, 
Hackensack,  and  other  small  rivers  of  New  Jersey,  from  which 
latter  place  the  New  York  market  is  supplied  during  winter. 


CHAPTER  Vn. 


POON      BAIT 


Dear  brother  of  the  rod,  unless  thou  wast  bom,  brought  up, 
or  been  fishing  in  the  northern  part  of  the  State  of  New  York, 
you  must  certainly  wonder  at  the  above  caption  as  a  name  for 
an  article  to  bait  fish  withal.  Shade  of  departed  Walton  ! 
could  you  but  imagine  a  sOver  plated  table-spoon  attached  to 
a  hook  to  lure  the  finny  tribe  with !  thou  wouldst  shrink  with 
utter  dismay  from  the  sight.  But  there  were  no  Yankees  in 
Walton's  days,  and  the  telegraph  and  spoon  bait  were  alike 
unknown.  This,  dear  reader,  is  a  good  trolling  bait  for  Black 
Basse,  Lake  Trout,  Pike,  and  Muskellunge. 

It  was  first  invented  and  used  by  a  gentleman  in  the  vicinity 
of  Saratoga  Lake  for  Black  Basse.  The  idea  occurred  to  him 
that  the  Lake  basse  would  bite  at  anything  bright  if  kept  in 
motion  ;  he  procured  the  bowl  of  an  old  silver  plated  spoon, 
scraped  off  the  silver  from  one  side,  cut  off  the  point,  flatted  the 
shape,  soldered  two  good  sized  hooks  in  the  small  end,  and 
attached  a  swivel  to  the  other.  It  worked  like  a  charm,  and  he 
took  more  fish  in  the  same  space  of  time  than  was  ever  done 
before  by  any  individual  in  the  neighborhood.  It  has  since 
been  made  up  in  various  styles,  with  one,  two,  and  three  hooks, 
and  is  made  with  silver  plate  or  brass  on  the  convex  side,  and 
painted  red  (decidedly  the  best  color)  on  the  concave.  They 
are  for  sale  at  the  fishing  tackle  shops  in  the  city  of  New  York, 
and  can  generally  be  had  in  the  vicinity  of  the  lakes.  It  is 
used  in  the  ordinary  manner  of  boat  trolling,  or  can  be  em- 
ployed in  hand  trolling  from  the  bank. 

It  would  be  well  to  try  it  for  other  descriptions  of  either 
fresh  or  salt  water  fish.    If  made  small  it  would  answer  very 


SPOOK  BAIT. 


S51 


well  for  the  usual  size  pickerel,*  and  perch,  and,  much  larger 
and  stronger,  it  would  answer  remarkably  well  for  blue  fish, 
or  any  of  the  more  ravenous  of  the  finny  tribe. 

It  is  difficult  to  tell  what  in  earth,  air,  or  water  the  spoon 
bait  with  its  hooks  and  swivel  looks  like  to  the  angler,  much 
less  what  the  deluded  and  ravenous  animal  thinks  of  it,  when 
making  after  it  with  such  extreme  impetuosity.  It  would  seem 
in  its  gyrations  through  the  water  to  resemble  the  shape 
and  motions  of  the  frog  more  than  anything  else  it  could  be 
likened  to,  and  certainly  goes  to  prove  that  a  moving  bait  is 
more  likely  to  take  fish  than  a  still  one.  The  practise  of  boat 
trolling  is  by  far  the  most  pleasant  mode  of  lake  fishing, 
and  the  spoon  bait  has  added  much  to  the  convenience  and 
economy  of  this  branch  of  the  angler's  delight. 

This  form  would  no  doubt  have  equally  as  "  taking  a  way" 
(if  made  larger  and  stronger)  for  the  Blue  Fish,  Bonita,  or  the 
other  inhabitants  of  the  ocean's  depths.     It  should  be  tried. 

♦  A  gentleman  informs  me  that  he  has  succeeded  in  taking  a  number 
of  PicJcerel  with  it  from  a  pond  in  the  northern  part  of  the  State  of  New 
York 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

BEROALL,  CHOCKSETT,  NIBBLER,   BLUE   PERCH, 
OR  CUNNER. 

Ctenolabrus  Cendeu8» 


This  fish,  although  usually  a  pest  to  the  Black  fish  angler,  is 
by  some  of  the  fraternity  at  Boston  and  New  York  considered 
a  worthy  object  of  sport.  It  is  usually  so  small  and  of  such 
little  capability  of  mouth,  as  to  be  a  continual  vexation  when 
fishing  for  black  fish  with  a  hook  of  the  usual  size.  Its  weight 
averages  from  4  to  16  ounces ;  but  a  3-4  lb.  Bergall  is  con- 
sidered a  large  fish.  Its  flavor  by  epicures,  and  those  who 
angle  for  the  pleasures  of  the  table,  is  considered  inferior  to  no 
fish  that  swims  ;  and  there  are  a  few,  who  really  love  angling  in 
its  perfection,  that  will  occasionally,  in  anticipation  of  a  rich 
repast,  spend  a  day  in  the  capture  of  these  little  fish  with  as 
much  zest  as  they  would  when  bagging  as  many  woodcock, 
snipe,  or  quail.  Its  range  is  from  the  Delaware  to  the  banks 
of  Newfoundland.  Of  its  color,  De  Kay  says :  There  is  scarcely 
any  fish  whose  colors  are  so  variable  as  this  species.  In  the 
smaller  individuals,  the  general  color  is  blue,  more  or  less  mixed 
vdth  browTi ;  and  faint,  dusky,  transverse  bars  may  be  frequently 
In  the  larger  specimens,  as  in  the  one  now  before  me, 
which  is  twelve  inches  long,  the  colors  are  bright  and  showy, 
a  light  orange  colored  tint  pervading  the  whole  body.  In  these 
also,  the  head  and  opercles  are  of  a  beautiful  chocolate,  mixed 
with  bright  blue  ;  the  fins  of  a  blue  more  or  less  brilliant." 

Smith  in  his  history  of  the  fishes  of  Massachusetts  says :  "  To 
all  appearance,  the  Perch,  or  Gunner,  is  the  Tautog  in  minia- 
ture, and  if  it  were  black,  it  would  be  supposed  the  young  of 
that  fish."    But  anglers  who  have  often  taken  both  descriptions 


BEKOALL,  CHOCZSETT,  KIBBLER,  BLXTE  PEECH,  OR  GUNNER.     253 

ol  the  same  size  and  weight,  could  not  be  deceived  in  this  re- 
spect. 

For  a  Tantog's  a  blactr  fish  the  universe  round, 

And  a  Gunner's  a  cunner  though  he  weigh  a  full  pound. 

No  difference  of  any  consequence  can  be  seen  between  a 
small  black  fish  and  a  large  one,  but  a  wide  difference  between 
a  Bergall  and  a  black  fish ;  and  to  us  of  the  fraternity,  why  the 
two  should  be  classed  as  relations  of  the  same  family  is  rather 
mysterious. 

The  most  successful  mode  of  taking  this  fish  is  with  the  usual 
black  fish  or  hand  line  tackle,  with  the  exception  of  the  hook, 
which  should  be  a  Limerick  trout,  of  either  number  2  or  3, 
attached  to  single  gut.  The  eye  and  hand  of  the  angler  should 
be  active.  A  moderate  but  steady  jerk  is  necessary  to  get  him 
out  of  his  element.  Those  who  know  how  he  tastes  after  being 
well  cooked,  recommend  the  following  method. 

Take  this  despised  little  animal  and  handle  him  as  though  he 
were  a  friend  ;  take  out  from  his  interior  the  parts  not  designed 
for  food,  and  cut  off  his  head,  tail,  and  fins  ;  then  (Eel  skinning 
fashion),  with  a  sharp  pointed  knife  commence  at  the  head  and 
strip  his  skin  entirely  off:  sprinkle  a  little  salt  over  to  harden, 
not  salt  his  flesh,  and  let  him  lie  a  sufficient  time  for  that  pur- 
pose. You  may  then  broil  him  on  the  gridiron  and  dish  him ; 
season  him  slightly  with  a  little  Cayenne  pepper,  and  pour  some 
spiced  claret  or  port  wine  over  him  ;  or  put  him  in  the  pan  and 
"  do  him  brown,"  with  butter  and  flour,  adding  the  seasoning 
and  wine.  A  little  celery  well  dressed  with  the  dish  adds  to 
the  perfection  of  the  meal.  Some  prefer  him  stewed ;  but  if 
properly  cooked  either  way,  one  trial  of  the  palate  will  give 
him  his  proper  rank  with  the  most  finished  epicurean. 


CHAPTER  IX. 


BLACK      FISH     ANGLING     IN    SUFFOLK    CO.    L.    Z. 
By  T.  D.  L. 


Either  shore  of  the  Sound  affords  fine  fishing,  but  the  reefe 
and  boulders  of  the  north  side  of  Long  Island,  especially,  are 
favorite  feeding  grounds  of  the  Black  Fish.  Off  Montauk  on 
a  calm  day,  after  the  clearing  up  of  a  southwest  storm,  may 
be  seen  a  hundred  to  a  hundred  and  fifty  sail  of  smacks,  busily 
employed  fishing,  and  they  generally  succeed  in  filling  their 
wells  in  a  tide  or  two,  at  most.  But  the  beautiful  and  pic- 
turesque north  shore,  anywhere  between  Port  Jeflferson  and 
Oyster  Pond  Point,  aflfords  the  true  angler  the  best  sport,  be- 
cause thereabouts  fish  are  neither  too  provokingly  scarce  nor 
disgustingly  abundant. 

Greenport,  the  eastern  terminus  of  the  L.  I.  Railroad,  is  most 
deservedly  a  favorite  resort  of  anglers  in  pursuit  of  health  and 
pleasure.  Having  the  Peconic  Bay  on  one  side,  and  the  Sound 
within  two  miles  on  the  other,  it  is  a  convenient  point  of  de- 
parture for  bay  or  sea  fishing,  as  you  incline,  or  wind  and 
weather  may  determine.  The  Sound  is  the  preferable  fishing 
ground,  for  it  always  affords  sport,  though  very  unequal.  A 
party  in  a  boat,  with  hand  lines,  and  bait  of  soft  clams,  or 
"  Fiddler"  (as  the  soldier  crab  is  called),  will  always  take  fish 
at  any  time,  because  able  to  follow  them  unto  water  too  deep 
or  too  swift  for  successful  rod  fishing.  But  there  pleasure  ends 
and  labor  begins.  One  skilful  angler,  who,  with  rod  and  reel, 
fishes  irom  a  good  rock,  between  half  tide  and  high  water, 
where  it  never  exceeds  three  fathoms,  will  not  only  have  more 
sport,  but  get  larger  and  better  game  than  any  ordinary  party. 


BLACK   FISH   ANGLINff   IN   SUFFOLK   CO.,  L.   I.  255 

who,  unrefined  and  unbelieving,  fish  in  the  common  inglorious 
way.  For  taking  Black  Fish,  as,  perhaps,  for  all  others,  the 
morning,  irrespective  of  tide,  is  generally  best.  But  in  fine 
weather,  when  high  water  happens  just  after  sundown, 
of  a  warm  summer  afternoon,  the  last  hour  of  flood 
is  worth  all  the  rest  of  the  day.  Then  the  large  "  tide  run- 
ners" leave  the  cool  deep  water,  and  come  in  shore  to  feed  on 
barnacles  that  grow  against  the  rocks  ;  and  then  often  may  be 
seen,  around  some  insulated  point  of  rock,  the  "  flukes"  of  large 
Black  Fish  feeding. 

The  average  size  of  the  fish  in  good  localities  may  be  from 
twenty  ounces  to  two  pounds.  Five  pounds  is  large,  and  such 
are  not  numerous,  though  I  have  caught  several  the  same  day. 
Very  rarely  one  of  ten,  even  twelve  honest  pounds,  is  taken. 
A  steel-yard,  which  I  always  carry,  is  a  wonderful  corrector 
of  the  judgment ;  it  is  a  weighty  sinker  to  the  buoyant  fancy, 
and  often  ungraciously  translates  the  poetic  quantities  of  the 
enthusiast  into  flat  and  scaly  prose. 

As  in  these  waters  the  angler  may  chance  to  strike  a  huge 
Dog  Fish,  Fluke,  or  other  ugly  "  varmint,"  he  should  be  pro- 
vided against  accidents  with  an  extra  basse  rod — the  best  kind 
for  this  fishing,  and  a  dozen  hollow  sinkers.  Hooks*  from  Nos. 
5  to  8  (much  smaller  than  those  usually  sold  with  hand  lines), 
should  be  strongly  bound  with  a  well- waxed  arming  to  a  flax 
line,  double  and  twisted  ;  for  stiffness,  as  well  as  strength,  is  most 
desirable  in  a  snell,  to  avoid  entanglement.  For  clear,  warm 
days,  when  the  fish  are  shy,  and  "  off*  their  feed,"  twisted  gut 
is  preferable.  Then  noiselessly  approach  a  rock,  gently  drop 
your  line,  and  let  it  slowly  float  into  the  eddy,  drawing  it 
along  the  leeward  side,  a  foot  above  the  bottom  weeds ;  and 
if  in  five  minutes  a  fish  does  not  bite,  or  quietly  draw  the  bait 
into  his  hole,  be  sure  there  is  no  fish  there.  You  can  often 
change  your  ground  with  advantage.  The  white-nosed  variety 
c* 


256 


BItACI   fish   ANGLINa   IN   SUFFOLK  CO.,  L.   I, 


feeds  everywhere,  comes  and  goes  with  the  tide.  But  the  com- 
mon Black  Fish — the  true  darkies — seem  to  have  "  local  habi- 
tations." The  rock  that  is  "fished  out,"  though  sometimes 
visited,  will  not  soon  have  other  finny  tenants,  unless  you  in- 
vite them  by  throwing  overboard  your  spare  bait,  which  often 
secures  you  next  day  an  hour's  good  fishing. 

In  baiting  with  "  Fiddler,"  pass  the  hook  through  the  belly, 
and  out  at  the  back  (careful  not  to  divide  the  shell),  and  take 
ofi*  the  large  claw.  If  Bergalls  (or  "  Gunners,"  as  they  are 
called)  trouble  you,  leave  the  claw  on,  and  the  crab,  in  self- 
defence,  will  nip  their  noses.  Whenever  Bergalls  suddenly 
stop  biting,  be  sure  a  Black  fish  or  sea  basse  is  near.  They  re- 
spect their  superiors,  and  keep  their  distance. 

*  A  small,  flat,  stout,  sharp  hook,  with  short  shank,  and  flat  head, 
fastened  by  a  double  hitch  to  a  flax  line,  armed  for  two  inches  above 
the  hook,  by  the  loose  end  being  twisted  around  it  and  knotted— smack 
man's  fashion— makes  so  superior  a  snell  that  none  other  should  be 
used  or  sold  for  hand  fishing.  At  the  Angler's  Depot,  N.  Y.,  they  can  be 
had,  from  one  who  is  an  old  salt  in  these  matters.  Verbum  sap.  Hooks 
made  of  light  wire  are  worthless.  The  Bottle,  or  Swell  Fish,  literally 
chew  them  up.  A  landing  net,  file,  knife,  and  thin  cotton  gloves,  are 
indispensable. 


CHAPTER  X. 

THE    WHITE    LAKE     BASSE 
Ldbrax  Albidua. 

This  is  another  species  of  the  universal  perch  family,  and  is 
found  in  many  of  the  lakes  in  the  northern  part  of  the  State  of 
New  York.  At  Buffalo  they  are  called  the  white  basse.  They 
do  not  partake  of  all  the  vigorous  qualities  of  the  black  basse, 
neither  do  they  attain  to  so  great  a  size,  but  are,  nevertheless,  a 
very  active  game  fish,  and  well  worth  the  angler's  patience  and 
perseverance.    A  northern  friend  says: 

"  The  white  basse  of  the  western  lakes  is  a  very  fine  fish, 
and  gives  good  sport  in  the  taking.  They  resemble  in  shape 
the  white  perch  of  the  Hudson  River,  but  are  much  larger, 
weighing  from  one  to  three  and  a  half  pounds.  In  color  they 
are  a  blackish  white  on  the  back,  and  white  on  the  sides  and 
belly,  with  a  few  dark,  parallel,  narrow  streaks  along  the  sides. 
The  live  minnow  is  an  excellent  bait  for  them,  but  should  be 
of  smaller  size  than  for  their  black  brethren,  as  they  are  not  so 
well  provided  for,  in  the  way  of  gape.  They  are  a  shy  fish, 
and  very  lively  on  the  hook.  Their  season  corresponds  with 
that  for  taking  the  black  basse.  They  run  in  schools,  and  you 
may  sometimes  take  a  dozen  in  half  an  hour." 


CHAPTER  XI. 

SILKWOEM     GUT,    KNOTS,    LOOPS,     &C 


■:--|:-T 

.= 

1  "^"~'- 

-'- 

■ 

^rrirr- 

"^^^^ 

^E=:- 

We  now  c^jme  to  a  knotty  question  in  our  line  of  discourse. 
Those  who  are  blest  for  the  first  time  in  their  lives  with  an 
opportunity  of  viewing  and  handling  the  beautiful  article  called 
silkworm  gut  (and  there  be  many,  even  anglers,  who  to  thia 
day  have  never  seen  it),  are  struck  with  perfect  astonishment 
when  they  are  told  that  this  beautiful  semi-transparent  sub- 
stance is  the  product  of  the  silkworm.*  It  is  not  actually  the 
gut  of  the  worm,  but  what  he  would  spin  out  into  silk  were  he 
allowed  to  take  the  due  course  of  nature.  A  few  days  before 
he  begins  to  spin,  the  worm  is  immersed  in  a  weak  acid  and 
left  to  soak  about  twelve  or  eighteen  hours,  after  which  he  is 
opened  and  two  pieces  of  the  substance  taken  from  him. 
These  are  drawn  out  with  great  care  and  stretched  to  their  full 
length  to  dry.  They  are  at  first  opake,  but  after  becoming 
dry  they  assume  their  transparent  appearance.  They  are  put 
together  in  bunches  of  100  strands,  and  the  useless  ends 
wrapped  around  with  red  twine,  and  exported  to  all  parts  of 
the  world. 

Those  who  first  form  an  acquaintance  with  it  for  the  purpose 
of  making  their  own  tackle,  are  apt  to  use  it  in  its  hard  dry 
state,  and  condemn  it  at  once  as  brittle  and  useless.  But  to 
work  well  and  handsomely,  it  should  be  soaked  in  moderate- 
ly warm  water  for  about  half  an  hour,  or  in  cold  water 
about  two  hours  before  using.  It  can  then  be  tied  or  twisted 
into  any  shape  to  suit  the  capricious  angler's  will. 

There  are  many  kinds  of  knots  used  by  the  fraternity  in 

•See  Parti.,  p.  31. 


8ILZW0RM   GUT,   KNOTS,   LOOPS,   &0. 


259 


t3dng  and  looping,  all  of  which  have  their  advocates  and 
contemners,  but  it  will  be  well  to  remember  that  in  all  modes 
of  tying,  the  simplest  in  construction,  and  freest  from  angles 
and  abrupt  turns,  is  the  best ;  all  turns  should  be  made  round  and 
not  short  and  quick  so  that  one  strand  cuts  the  other.  This 
doctrine  holds  good  not  only  in  regard  to  our  subject  matter, 
but  also  to  the  tying  or  putting  together  of  any  stiff  substance. 
The  best  knots  in  use  amongst  anglers  are  sailors'  knots,  which 
afford  the  simplest  and  surest  modes  of  rigging  any  line. 

One  of  the  simplest,  and  most  secure  is  the  double  knot, 
made  by  passing  the  ends  around  each  other  after  the  manner 
of  the  common  knot,  but  twice  instead  of  once.  For  leaders 
or  loops  gut  can  be  tied  together  at  the  ends,  as  in  the  draw- 
ings. The  ends  need  not  be  whipped  down,  but  can  be  cut 
close  off,  as  they  are  perfectly  secure,  and  not  liable  to  break. 


The  double  and  single  water  knots  for  tying  lengths  of  gut  to- 
gether are  approved  by  some,  and  are  made  after  the  following 
manner : 


the  single  is  found  to  be  sufficiently  secure,  and  being  smaller 
and  simpler,  is  more  used  than  the  double. 


___jiirJ,Wj..j.,. 


260 


SILKWORM    GUT,    K^OXS,    LOOPSj 


&C 


The  loop  knot  is  a  very  easy  way  of  tying  a  line  or  piece  of 
gut  to  a  loop,  and  is  made  thus. 


A  facile  mode  of  fastening  gut  together,  is  the  loop  hitch,  but 
observe  that  the  ends  must  be  whipped  down  with  silk.  The 
gut  in  this  case  is  not  knotted,  and  when  close  together  and 
properly  fastened,  it  forms  one  of  the  smallest  and  most  simple 
ties  ever  invented.  The  celebrated  Theophilus  South  in  his 
fly-fisher's  text  book,  recommends  it  above  all  others. 


Leaders  or  Bottom  Lengths. — These  useful  articles  of  tackle 
need  a  more  precise  explanation  than  that  given  in  former 
pages.  They  are  made  of  lengths  of  silkworm  gut,  tied  to- 
gether as  before  described  in  lengths  single,  double,  or  twisted, 
of  from  one  to  four  yards.  When  employed  for  trout  they  are 
invariably  used  singly ;  their  position  on  the  tackle  is  after 
your  swivel  or  sinker,  or  if  in  fly-fishing,  tied  immediately  to 
your  line.  The  usual  way  of  making  them  is  with  a  loop  at 
each  end. 

To  fasten  your  leader  to  your  other  tackle  pass  the  loop  of 
your  leader  through  the  loop  of  your  line,  sinker,  or  swivel, 
whichever  you  be  using,  so  that  it  will  draw  down  as  in  the 
last  mentioned  cut  above,  and  it  will  be  firmly  secured.  When 
through  your  sport  back  out  your  leader  and  separate  it  from 
your  line,  and  dispose  of  it  in  your  tackle  book.  When  fishing 
for  salmon,  basse,  or  other  large  fish,  use  your  leader  long  or 
short  according  to  your  depth  of   water,  single,  double,  or 


SILKWORM   GUT,   KNOTS,   LOOPS,   &.C. 


261 


twisted,  according  to  the  shjmess,  strength,  or  vigor  of  your 
game.  The  most  experienced  basse  anglers  fish  with  only 
one  hook ;  but  where  the  game  is  small,  many  fish  with  two  ; 
this  is  done  by  attaching  two  leaders,  one  of  one  yard  in 
length,  and  the  other  of  two,  so  that  one  hook  will  hang  about 
one  yard  from  the  other ;  or  use  one  leader  of  one  or  two  yards 
in  length,  doubling  it  at  about  one  third  the  length,  and  passing  it 
through  the  sinker  in  the  form  of  a  loop,  drawing  it  down  as 
before  described.  Your  leaders  being  rigged,  pass  the  looped 
end  of  your  hook  through  your  leader  and  draw  your  hook 
through.  Put  your  bait  on  your  hook,  and  you  are  rigged  for 
a  bite. 

Should  the  foregoing  be  not  found  sufficiently  explicit  for 
the  tyro,  he  will  find  at  the  fishing  tackle  store  these  articles  all 
ready  arranged,  which  will  give  him  more  practical  ideas  than 
he  can  possibly  get  on  paper,  by  which  to  arrange  his  tackle 
as  he  chooses. 

\ 


CHAPTER  XII. 

SPRING    SNAP    HOOES. 


**  A  WEAK  invention  of  the  enemy."  Why  the  humble  and 
gentle  piscator  should  be  called  the  enemy  of  the  finny  race,  or 
why  anglers,  in  speaking  of  their  exploits,  should  call  their 
finny  friends  their  enemies,  is  a  mystery  yet  to  be  explained. 
Such  cannot  certainly  pursue  their  sport  with  a  true  Waltonian 
spirit ;  for  the  father  of  anglers  never  used  the  word  enemy,  and 
always  spoke  in  the  most  mild  and  pleasant  manner  of  the  finny 
race.  "  Handle  him  as  though  you  loved  him,"  says  he,  when 
speaking  of  preparing  a  line  bait  for  the  hook.  The  piscato- 
rial world  was  for  generations  without  any  invention  for  taking 
their  game  other  than  the  ordinary  kerbed  steel  until  about  fifty 
years  ago,  when  the  spring  snap  hook  was  invented.  This  was 
in  general  use  until  a  few  years  since,  when  a  boy  by  the  name 
of  Griswold,  about  sixteen  years  of  age,  living  in  the  vicinity 
of  Schroon  Lake,  conceived  the  idea  of  inventing  a  spring  snap 
that  would  hold  the  fish  after  he  was  hooked.  He  succeeded 
in  making  the  hook  which  is  called  the  Griswold — see  plate  1. 
It  is  arranged  with  a  spring,  lever,  and  striking  hook.  The 
striking  hook  is  so  adjusted  that  when  set  it  lies  alongside  of 
the  main  hook,  and  is  retained  by  a  slide  at  the  top  ;  when  the 
fish  nibbles  the  striking  hook  descends  and  takes  him  on  the 
outside  of  the  head — see  plate  2.  By  an  improvement  patented 
by  Mr.  Ellis,  of  Naugatuck,  Conn.,  the  striking  hook  is  relieved 
fi:om  the  lever  instead  of  the  upper  part  of  the  hook. 

It  was  much  approved  of  at  the  time,  and  considered  an  aid  to 
the  angler.  Immediately  the  mechanical  genius  of  the  country 
was  put  in  motion,  and,  presto  !  at  least  a  dozen  inventions  of 
striking  hooks  of  various  descriptions  were  made  to  facilitate 


SPSma  SNAF  HOOKS. 


263 


the  taking  of  our  scaly  friends.  They  all  have  their  merits  or 
demerits,  a  diversity  of  opinion  existing  among  the  fraternity. 
Some  consider  them  "  a  weak  invention  of  the  enemy,"  very 
cruel,  and  those  unworthy  of  a  sportsman's  name  who  use 
them ;  others  highly  approve  of  them.  They  are  not  well 
adapted  for  salt-water  fishing  where  there  is  a  strong  tide,  as 
they  are  apt  to  spring  before  the  fish  bites.  They  are  better 
suited  to  lake  fishing  for  pike,  black  basse,  and  lake  trout. 
They  are  preferred  and  recommended  by  some  for  that  purpose, 
and  for  fish,  such  as  often  slip  the  hook,  will  always  be  used  to 
a  certain  extent.  Many  improvements  and  suggestions  have 
been  made,  but  none  to  alter  materially  the  character  of  the 
device. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

PISH   POND   AND   TK  AN  S  P  0  K  T  AT  I  0  N   OF   FISH. 


This  is  a  subject  of  great  importance,  not  only  to  the  angler, 
but  to  those  who  own  farms  or  property  in  the  country.  In 
Germany  and  France,  the  renting  of  fish  ponds  is  a  source  of 
large  income  to  the  owners  of  land,  and  an  acre  of  water  is 
considered  of  equal  value  to  an  acre  of  soil.  In  our  own  coun- 
try, a  small  sheet  of  water  is  considered  of  no  particular  advan- 
tage, except  it  be  to  keep  a  few  geese  or  ducks,  to  amuse  the 
children,  to  arouse  the  family  in  the  morning  by  their  incessant 
quack,  or  perhaps  remind  them  of  those  in  the  city  whose  per- 
formance is  the  same,  only  one  quacks  through  his  natural  in- 
strument, and  the  other  through  the  public  press.  Few  lovers 
of  the  beautiful  in  nature  ever  think  of  improving,  enlarging,  or 
adorning  a  natural  water  spot,  and  making  it  joyous  and  lively 
with  the  finny  brood.  Fewer  still  may  think  of  damming  a  natu- 
ral spring,  widening  a  valley,  making  an  outlet,  and  modifying 
nature  sufficient  to  allow  depth  of  water  capable  of  sustaining 
and  nourishing  an  animal  that  will  conduce  not  only  to  their 
pleasure  and  pastime,  but  also  to  their  bodily  comfort.  Every 
piece  of  ground  of  a  springy  or  marshy  description  is  imme- 
diately drained,  to  make  room  for  a  crop  of  corn  or  potatoes,  as 
though  it  were  intended  that  "  man  should  live  by  bread  alone." 

Many  reasons  might  be  urged  in  favor  of  artificial  fish  ponds, 
but  as  those  who  love  the  rod  are  largely  on  the  increase 
throughout  the  land,  the  necessity  of  these  additions  to  comfort, 
economy,  and  picturesque  beauty  as  well  as  recreation,  will 
soon  be  seen.  The  rearing  and  breeding  of  various  kinds 
of  cattle  and  feathered  creatures  for  food,  is  an  object  of  in- 
terest and  study  with  the  farmer,  but  the  propagation,  naturali- 


PISH  FOND  AND   TRANSPORTATION  OF  FISH. 


265 


zation,  or  transportation  of  the  scaly  tribe,  seems  to  be  with 
most  tenants  or  owners  of  land  beneath  or  beyond  their 
notice. 

As  an  article  of  food,  the  fish  is  given  to  us,  without  doubt, 
to  gratify  our  varied  tastes ;  and  in  some  seasons,  particularly  in 
the  early  spring  and  summer,  when  other  meats  are  out  of 
season  and  without  relish,  is  more  tasteful,  healthful,  and  desi- 
rable than  any  other  palate  delicacy.  Include  then  the  pleasure, 
excitement,  and  vigor  embraced  in  his  piscatorial  capture,  and 
we  have  a  means  of  happiness  which  should  be  improved  by  all 
who  study  the  pleasures  of  mind  and  body. 

Most  of  the  varieties  of  our  subject  can  be  transported  or 
propagated  with  very  little  trouble,  and  some  are  so  tenacious 
of  life  that  they  require  no  care  whatever. 

Perch,  Carp,  and  Pike  can  be  transported  a  long  distance, 
say  fifty  or  sixty  miles,  with  ordinary  carriage  conveyance,  and 
by  the  present  railroad  and  steamboat  conveyance,  hundreds 
of  miles,  Capt.  Henry  Robinson,  of  Newburgh,  N.  Y.,  in  the 
year  1832,  brought  some  six  or  seven  dozen  Carp  from  France, 
and  put  them  into  a  pond,  supplied  by  springs  of  clear  and  pure 
water,  on  his  farm,  where  they  increased  to  a  surprising  degree. 
He  has  supplied  many  friends  with  them,  who  have  distributed 
them  about  in  various  parts  of  the  country.  This  public -spirited 
gentleman  has  also  for  a  number  of  years  put  a  few  dozens  in 
the  Hudson  river.  They  grow  much  larger  in  the  river,  and 
have  increased  so  much  that  they  are  often  taken  by  the  fisher- 
men in  their  nets. 

The  Black  Basse  can  be  made  to  change  his  residence  by 
one  or  two  changes  of  water  for  the  same  distance.  This  latter 
fish  is  growing  in  favor  for  large  ponds,  and  will  in  the  course 
of  a  few  years  become  very  generally  distributed  throughout  the 
country.  He  is  well  worth  the  trouble  of  removing,  and  where 
a  few  gentlemen,  or  those  of  the  craft  join  together  in  the  ex- 


26b 


FISH  POND   AND   TRANSPORTATION  OF   FISH. 


pense,  the  amount  would  be  small  in  comparison  with  the  bene- 
fits which  would  accrue. 

The  Trout  is  the  most  delicate  and  difficult  fish  to  convey 
any  considerable  distance,  and  should  bp  narrowly  watched 
during  the  progress,  and  the  water  kept  clear  and  as  cool  as 
possible. 

Salt-water  fish  can  be  easily  transported  by  sea  in  cars,  or 
the  well-holes  of  fishing-smacks  adapted  for  keeping  them 
alive.  The  tautog,  many  years  since  unknown  in  the  harbor 
of  Boston,  is  now  found  there  in  great  abundance,  having  been 
taken  in  cars  from  Newport,  R.  I.  There  are  many  fish  that 
swim  the  southern  waters  that  would  thrive  equally  well  in 
more  northern  latitudes,  and  vice  versa. 

Several  years  since,  Mr.  Pell,  of  Pelham,  N.  Y.,  had  some 
shad  in  pairs  conveyed  from  the  Hudson  river  to  a  pond  on  his 
farm.  A  few  years  after  he  was  much  surprised  to  find,  con- 
trary to  his  expectation,  that  they  had  bred,  and  had  grown  to 
the  size  of  six  inches.  There  is  hardly  a  doubt  that  our  ele- 
gant striped  basse  of  the  salt  water  which  goes  up  into  the  fresh- 
water streams  to  spawn,  could  be  domesticated,  and  made  a 
tenant  of  fresh- water  ponds  that  are  supplied  with  fresh- water 
There  are  many  other  descriptions  worthy  a  trial. 

The  celebrated  Dr.  McCulloch,  of  Edinburgh,  succeeded  in 
naturalizing  eight  different  kinds  of  fish  from  salt  water  into 
fresh,  with  an  improvement  in  their  flavor ;  and  the  philosopher 
Bacon  says,  "  that  fish  used  to  the  salt  water  do  nevertheless 
delight  much  more  in  the  fresh."  Speakmg  of  the  salmon  and 
smelt,  he  says,  "  I  doubt  there  hath  been  sufficient  experiment 
made  of  putting  sea-fish  into  fresh- water  ponds  and  pools  ;  it  is 
a  thing  of  great  use,  for  so  you  have  them  new  at  a  great  dis- 
tance; besides,  fish  will  eat  the  pleasanter,  and  may  fall  to 
breed." 

"  Mr.  Arnold,  of  Guernsey,"  says  Pickermg,  in  his  "  Remi- 


FISH  POND  AND   TRANSPOETATIOK  OP  PISH.  267 

niscences,"  "  has  in  his  lake,  of  about  ten  acres,  chiefly  supplied 
with  fresh  water,  many  sea-fish  ;  all  have  improved  in  quality 
and  propagated.  The  lake,  which  before  was  worthless,  pro- 
ducing a  few  eels,  now  yields  a  large  rent.  The  bottom  of  the 
lake  is  various — ^muddy,  rocky,  and  gravelly,  and  since  the 
introduction  of  sea-fish,  the  eels  have  multiplied  a  thousand- 
fold." A  mode  of  culture  of  carp,  spoken  of  by  Daniel,  in  hia 
"  Rural  Sports,"  may  be  found  useftil  to  those  wishing  to  breed 
that  description  of  fish. 

"  It  is  supposed  that  ninety  brace  of  full-sized  carp,  and  forty 
of  tench,  are  a  good  stock  for  an  acre  of  water.  In  soma 
parts  of  Germany,  where  the  domestication  of  fish  is  practised.. 
a  suite  of  ponds  are  so  constructed,  that  they  can  empty  the 
water  and  fish  of  one  pond  into  another.  The  empty  one  is 
then  ploughed,  and  sown  with  barley.  When  the  grain  is  in 
the  ear,  the  water  and  its  inhabitants  are  again  admitted  ;  and 
by  feeding  on  the  com  are  more  expeditiously  fatted  than  by 
any  other  management." 

All  ponds  should  have  a  brook  or  rivulet  running  through 
them,  or  fresh  springs.  It  increases  the  feed  and  comfort  of  the 
fish  during  the  heat  of  summer,  and  counteracts  the  effects  of 
frost  daring  the  winter.  All  kinds  of  refuse  grain,  as  beans, 
peas,  &c.,  thrown  into  carp  ponds,  or  sown  in  the  mud  along 
the  edges  when  the  water  is  low,  will  serve  to  fatten  and  improve 
the  fish  very  much. 

The  following  method  of  making  artificial  fish-ponds,  from 
Best's  "  Art  of  Angling,"  will  be  found  useful. 

**  It  is  agreed  that  those  grounds  are  best  that  are  full  of 
springs,  and  apt  to  be  moorish :  the  one  breeds  them  well,  and 
the  other  preserves  them  from  being  stolen. 

"  The  situation  of  the  pond  is  also  to  be  considered,  and  the 
nature  of  the  currents  that  fall  into  it ;  likewise  that  it  be 
refreshed  with  a  little  brook,  or  with  rain-water  that  falls  Ironi 
»» 


268 


PISH  POND  AJTD  TRANSPORTATION  OF  FISH. 


the  adjacent  hilly  ground.  And  that  those  ponds  which  receive 
the  stale  and  dung  of  horses,  breed  the  largest  and  fattest  fishes. 

"  In  making  the  pond,  observe  that  the  head  be  at  the  lowest 
part  of  the  ground,  and  the  trench  of  the  flood-gate,  or  sluice, 
has  a  good  swift  fall,  that  it  may  not  be  long  in  emptying. 

**  If  the  pond  carries  six  feet  of  water  it  is  enough ;  but  it 
must  be  eight  feet  deep,  to  receive  the  freshes  and  rains  that 
should  fall  into  it. 

"  It  would  be  also  advantageous  to  have  shoals  on  the  sides, 
for  the  fishes  to  sun  themselves  in,  and  lay  their  spawn  on ; 
besides  in  other  places  certain  holes,  hollow  banks,  shelves, 
roots  of  trees,  islands,  &,c.,  to  serve  as  their  retiring  places. 

"  Reserve  some  great  waters  for  the  head -quarters  of  the  fishes, 
whence  you  may  take,  or  wherein  you  may  put,  any  quantity 
thereof.  And  be  sure  to  have  stews  and  other  auxiliary  waters, 
so  as  you  may  convey  any  part  of  the  stock  from  one  to  the 
other,  so  to  lose  no  time  in  the  growth  of  the  fishes,  but  employ 
your  water  as  you  do  your  land,  to  the  best  advantage.  View 
the  grounds,  and  find  out  some  fall  between  the  hills,  as  near  a 
flat  as  may  be,  so  as  to  leave  a  proper  current  for  the  water.  If 
there  be  any  difficulty  of  judging  of  such,  take  an  opportunity, 
after  some  sudden  rain,  or  breaking  up  of  a  great  snow  in  win- 
ter, and  you  will  plainly  see  which  way  the  ground  casts,  for 
the  water  will  take  the  true  fall,  and  run  accordingly. 

"  The  condition  of  the  place  must  determine  the  quantity  of 
the  ground  to  be  covenxi  with  water.  For  example,  I  may 
propose  in  all  fifteen  acros  in  three  ponds,  or  eight  acres  m  two, 
and  not  less  ;  and  these  ponds  should  be  placed  one  above 
another,  so  as  the  point  of  the  lower  may  almost  reach  the 
head  or  bank  of  the  uppej  which  contrivance  is  no  less  beau- 
tiful than  advantageous. 

"  The  head,  or  bank,  which,  by  stopping  the  current,  is  to 
raise  the  water,  and  so  make  a  pond,  must  be  built  with  the  clay 


FISH  POND  AND  TSANSPORTATION   OF   FISH. 


269 


or  earth  taken  out  of  the  pan  or  hollow  dug  in  the  lowest 
ground  above  the  bank ;  the  shape  of  the  pan  to  be  a  half  oval, 
whereof  the  flat  to  come  to  the  bank,  and  the  longer  diameter 
to  run  square  from  it. 

"  For  two  large  ponds,  of  three  or  four  acres  apiece,  it  is 
advisable  to  have  four  stews,  each  two  rods  wide  and  three  long. 
The  stews  are  usually  in  gardens,  or  near  the  house,  to  be  more 
handy  and  better  looked  to.  The  method  of  making  them,  is 
to  carry  the  bottom  in  a  continual  decline  from  one  end,  with 
a  mouth  to  favor  the  drawing  them  with  a  net. 

"  It  is  proper  to  cast  in  bavins  in  some  places  not  far  from 
the  sides,  in  the  most  sandy  spots,  for  the  fishes  to  spawn  upon, 
and  to  defend  the  young  fry,  especially  the  spawn  of  Carp  and 
Tench." 


CHAPTER   XIV. 


This  buoyant  article  of  our  fancy  has  been  of  late  much 
improved.  Patience  and  perseverance,  it  is  said,  will  work 
miracles ;  but  the  two  invaluable  substances,  Gutta  Percha  and 
India  rubber,  having  been  successfully  used  in  the  manufacture 
of  floats,  will  prove  to  be  of  great  importance  and  utility  to  the 
angler,  and  will  work  wonders,  as  to  the  durability  and  con- 
venience of  this  essential  article  of  his  equipment. 

The  great  objection  to  the  cork  float  was,  that  much  diflni- 
culty  was  experienced  in  keeping  it  in  order,  either  the  quill  or 
the  stem  becoming,  with  verj'  little  wear,  loose  and  unfit  for 


M 

ivW 

-  — 

"^1-^ 

..-^^ 

The  turned  hollow  float,  almost  as  light  as  air,  being  glued 
or  cemented  together  in  the  centre,  by  the  constant  action  of 
the  sun  and  water,  was  apt  to  part  in  the  centre,  or  by  its  ex- 
treme thinness,  liable  to  be  broken  almost  as  soon  as  a  soft 
boiled  egg,  particularly  if  the  gentle  Piscator,  in  his  boat  move- 
ments, happened  to  tread  too  hard  upon  it. 

In  the  manufacture  of  the  new  descriptions,  all  these  difficulties 
are  obviated,  and  the  angler  can  now  be  furnished  with  an  ar- 
ticle almost  as  light  as  air,  and  durable  as  time. 

Gutta  Percha  is  admirably  adapted  for  the  formation  of  this 
implement  of  tackle,  being,  from  its  nature,  very  tenacious, 
and  easily  worked  into  the  desired  shape.  Those  made  of 
this  substance  are  lighter  than  wood,  and  cannot  come  apart 
in  the  centre,  nor  break  at  the  ends,  except  by  extreme  hard 
usage  and  carelessness  ;  and  even  where  this  happens,  they  can 
be  repaired  by  the  angler  himself,  with  but  little  trouble.  The 
caoutchouc  float  is  made  in  the  usual  form  of  the  sheet  rubber, 


FLOATS. 


27i 


with  a  screw  valve  at  the  top,  and  can  be  put  in  the  vest  pocket, 
or  even  the  pocket-book,  and  inflated  for  use  at  the  pleasure  of 
the  possessor.  The  float  has  been  considered  the  most  incon- 
venient article  for  use  on  a  long  tour,  and  is  often  left  behind 
on  occasions  of  distant  excursions.  But  all  difficulties  of  this 
kind  vanish  in  the  convenience  of  the  rubber  float.  Those  of 
the  fraternity  who  find  it  difficult  to  keep  their  temper,  when 
not  in  the  usual  luck,  will  therefore  please  blow  up  their  floats 
instead  of  the  fish,  the  weather,  or  some  less  harmless  object  of 
their  displeasure. 


CHAPTER  XV. 

WEAK    FISH    OR    BARB     ANGLING    ON   LONG    ISLAND 
SOUND. 

By  T.  D.  L. 


Into  the  Peconic  Bay — that  most  noble  and  beautiful  har- 
bor— flow  a  number  of  small  streams,  brooks  deep  at  the 
mouth,  but  short,  shoaling  into  a  grassy  bottom,  full  of  crabs 
and  other  food  for  fish.  Up  into  these,  for  food  or  shelter,  run 
at  night,  tide  permitting.  Weak  Fish  (or  Cheecout),  and  Barb  or 
King  Fish  ( Tom  Cod  they  are  there  called) .  Across  these  creeks 
nets  are  sometimes  set,  which  yield  in  a  tide  perhaps  a  hundred 
weight  of  "  yellow  fins,"  from  two  to  five  pounds  each. 

The  south  shore  of  the  Great  Peconic  is  famous  ground,  and 
parties  often  take  boat  at  James  Port  or  Canoe  Place,  ior  a 
day's  fishing  there.  Let  the  angler  anchor  off  any  of  the 
larger  inlets  to  the  Shinnecock  Hills,  and  amuse  himself,  if  he 
please,  catching  pound  Porgies,  until  the  tide  is  well  up.  Then 
draw  in  towards  the  mouth  of  the  creek,  and  he  will  probably 
have  lively  sport  for  an  hour,  catching  King  or  Weak  Fish, 
enough  to  astonish  the  natives,  as  your  thorough-bred  angler 
generally  contrives  to  do.  When  the  Toad  Fish  begins  to  at- 
tack you,  the  game  is  up,  and  the  fish  gone.  For  Barb  use  a 
Kirb  hook,  about  No.  5  Salmon,  short  in  the  shank.  More 
good  fish  of  all  kinds  have  been  lost  by  using  a  long  shanked 
hook  (which  has  become  the  fashion),  than  by  any  want  of 
skill  in  the  angler.  The  wire  outside  the  mouth  often  acts  as 
a  lever,  and  enables  the  fish  to  throw  himself  off  in  the  strug- 
gle. For  Weak  Fish  crab  is  undoubtedly  the  best  bait,  but  I 
have  caught  more  Barb  with  shrimp — so  despised  in  those  parts 
— thaa  with  any  other  bait.     King  Fish  average  over  a  pound. 


WEAK  FISH   OK   BARB   ANGLINS. 


273 


fight  hard,  and  die  nobly — f*  die  like  demi-gods."  No  one  who 
takes  the  Weak  Fish  of  these  crystal  waters  and  clean  gravelly 
shores,  can  fail  to  see  the  propriety  of  its  nome  d'honneur, "  the 
salt  water  Trout."  The  brilliant  tints  that  spot  its  silver  sides 
render  it  indescribably  beautiful. 


^i 

Ete 

^^— — 

CHAPTER  XVI. 

THE     EEL. 
Anguilla  Vulgaris. 


"  Saw  you  that  snake,  sir  1" 
"No:  'twas  an  eel." 


This  crooked  subject  of  our  discourse  is  a  pest  to  the  regular 
angler.  As  an  object  of  sport  he  is  far  beneath  the  contempt 
of  a  regular  game  fisherman,  and  is  only  "  taken"  when  he 
cannot  be  "  shaken"  from  the  hook  by  all  the  arts  of  his  unfor- 
tunate possessor.  They  are  not  particular  as  to  their  meal. 
The  finest  worm  thrown  for  a  trout  will  often  bring  his  snake- 
ship  out.  The  best  shrimp  or  crab  bait  in  salt  water  is  good 
enough  for  him,  and  he  seizes  it  with  avidity  as  a  creature  of 
taste.  The  truly  patient  Waltonian  angler  dispatches  him 
without  complaint ;  and  if  he  happen  to  be  of  a  goodly  size,  is 
invited  to  partake  of  the  hospitalities  of  his  table.  There  are 
seven  or  eight  different  descriptions,  some  of  which  grow  to 
quite  a  large  size.  (See  page  217.)  The  eel  belongs  to  no 
particular  place  or  clime.  He  is  a  cosmopolite,  and  is  always 
where  water  flows  and  mud  grows.  He  is  a  warm-blooded 
animal,  and  has  been  known  to  climb  up  trees  and  poles,  but 
not  to  get  very  near  the  north  pole,  the  only  exception  to  their 
general  distribution  being  in  the  more  intensely  cold  latitudes. 
Says  Yarrell,  one  of  the  best  English  writers  on  the  subject, 
"  Eels  are  in  reality  a  valuable  description  of  fish  ;  their  flesh  is 
excellent  for  food  ;  the  various  species  are  hardy,  tenacious  of 
life,  and  very  easily  preserved.  They  are  in  great  esteem  for 
the  table,  and  the  consumption  in  our  large  cities  is  very  consi- 
derable. The  London  market  is  principally  supplied  from 
Holland,  by  Dutch  fishermen.     There  are  two  companies  in 


THE   EEL.  275 

Holland  having  five  vessels  each  ;  these  vessels  are  built  with  a 
capacious  well,  in  which  large  quantities  of  eels  are  preserved 
alive  until  wanted.  One  or  more  of  these  vessels  may  be  con- 
stantly seen  lying  off  Billingsgate ;  the  others  go  to  Holland 
for  fresh  supplies,  each  bringing  a  cargo  of  15,000  to  20,000 
pounds'  weight  of  live  eels,  for  which  the  Dutch  merchant  pays 
a  duty  of  jCIS  per  cargo  for  permission  to  sell." 

Their  serpentine  form  has  rendered  them  objects  of  dislike  in 
this  country  among  some  people.  The  fair  sex,  in  particular, 
have  a  great  aversion  to  them  from  their  resemblance  to  the 
snake.  But  all  objections  are  removed  when  they  are  brought 
upon  the  table  as  an  article  of  food.  The  New  York  market 
is  abundantly  supplied  by  the  fishermen  from  Long  Island  and 
adjacent  places.  Being  easily  taken,  and  found  in  great  abun- 
dance, they  furnish  a  cheap  and  healthy  food  for  the  poorer 
class  of  people.  In  some  parts  of  the  country  where  they  are 
taken  in  fresh  water,  they  are  held  in  high  estimation,  and  are 
made  the  object  of  sport  by  the  young  fishermen,  by  night  and 
day,  with  bobs,  eel  pots,  and  spears. 

A  singular  practice  was  in  vogue  at  Catherine  Market,  foot 
of  Catherine  Street,  New  York,  some  years  ago.  The  fish 
markets,  as  usual  in  large  cities,  were  open  on  Sunday  morning, 
in  the  summer  season,  for  a  few  hours  after  sunrise.     At  the  -^^^^ 

above-mentioned  market  the  negroes  used  to  gather  from  all  "'~~'^'M^.-^  i^ 

parts  of  the  city  to  the  skinning,  immense  quantities  being 
brought  in  for  that  purpose.  After  the  operation  was  performed 
and  the  fish  were  tied  into  bundles,  certain  lots  were  purchased 
by  the  lovers  of  fun,  to  be  danced  for  by  the  negroes.  The 
ceremony  of  dancing  for  eels  was  performed  with  great  skill 
and  dexterity  by  the  sons  of  Afric's  soil  upon  an  ordinary 
shingle,  brought  by  each  competitor  for  that  purpose.  The 
spectacle  was  witnessed  by  hundreds  of  lookers-on,  composed 
of  all  classes  of  people,  who  expressed  their  satisfaction  and 


276 


approbation  or  dissent  by  cheers,  claps,  or  groans.  There  were 
certain  rules  for  the  regulation  of  the  dance,  one  of  which  was 
that  the  individual  who  shuffled  off  the  shingle  lost  the  prize, 
and  was  considered  beaten.  On  some  occasions,  to  produce  more 
excitement  and  stimulate  them  to  greater  effort,  larger  bunches 
were  put  up  for  the  dance.  The  grotesque  appearance  of  the 
crowd,  with  the  negro  in  the  centre,  attired  in  a  white  or  check 
shirt,  little  the  worse  for  absence  from  the  wash-tub,  an  old 
straw  hat,  and  pantaloons  rolled  up  to  the  knees, 

"  Intense  emotion  glitter'd  in  tlieir  eyes, 
Each  eager  watciiing  for  ttie  slimy  prize," 

surrounded  by  the  fishermen  with  their  red  shirts  and  tarpaulin 
hats,  the  various  dark-skinned  polished  face  and  white-teeth 
competitors  with  shingle  in  hand,  watching  anxiously  their  turn, 
surrounding  the  inside  of  the  nng,  and  the  motley  laughing, 
joking,  and  betting  crowd  without,  furnished  a  scene  which  we 
believe  has  been  undeservedly  neglected  by  the  artist,  and 
belongs  to  the  history  of  New  York  as  it  was. 

The  discussions  of  naturalists  respecting  Eels,  have  been  as 
crooked  as  their  line  of  locomotion.  Ichthyologists  are  gene- 
rally of  opinion  that  Eels  make  two  migrations  in  each  year, 
one  in  the  autumn  to  the  sea,  and  one,  returning  up  the  rivers 
in  the  spring.  Yarrell  says,  "  I  am,  however,  of  opinion  that 
the  passage  of  adult  Eels  to  the  sea,  or  rather  to  the  brackish 
water  of  the  estuary,  is  an  exercise  of  choice,  and  not  a  matter 
of  necessity ;  and  that  the  parent  Eels  return  up  the  river  as 
well  as  the  fiy." 

There  are  several  different  kinds  of  these  fish  found  in  both 
fresh  and  salt  water ;  a  singular  description,  called  the  Syren 
Mud  Pup,  or  Rain  Eel,  is  taken  in  one  of  the  rivers  near 
Charleston,  S.  C.     Their  shape  is  similar  to  the  ordinary  Eel, 


THE    EEL.  277 

with  the  exception  of  two  paws  similar  to  a  dog's,  that  they 
cany  in  front,  to  scratch  their  way  in  the  mud,  to  avoid  their 
enemies. 

A  friend  who  lives  in  the  northern  part  of  the  state  of  New 
York,  says  he  has  observed  two  descriptions  of  fresh  water 
Eels.  "  One  having  a  small  sharp  head,  tapering  out  very  nar- 
row towards  the  mouth,  being  larger  according  to  their  weight, 
and  thicker  through  the  middle  than  the  common  Eel.  They 
generally  inhabit  clearer  water,  and  are  more  frequently  found 
above  waterfalls.  Their  flesh  is  a  lighter  color,  having  more 
the  appearance  of  fat  pork.  They  are  also  much  better,  and 
when  boiled  or  fried  are  a  great  relish."  The  other  description 
has  a  larger  head,  wider  mouth,  the  lower  jaw  projecting  beyond 
the  upper ;  they  are  largest  through  the  gills,  and  taper  to  the 
tail ;  their  flesh  of  a  bluish  color,  and  not  as  palatable  as  the 
former  description.  "  All  Eels  are  spawned  in  the  ocean  ;  the 
young  ones  commence  running  up  rivers  and  smaller  streams  the 
latter  part  of  April  or  beginning  of  May.  They  are  then  about 
the  size  of  large  needles ;  they  go  up  along  the  shores  and  the 
edges  of  streams,  and  also  up  wet  rocks  near  waterfalls,  and 
over  mill-dams,  by  exhaustmg  the  atmosphere  under  their 
bodies,  then  by  raising  their  flat  tail  over,  with  or  above  their 
head,  exhaust  the  atmosphere  under  that,  and  raise  their  head 
again  ;  in  this  way  they  ascend  the  swifter  streams,  and  reach 
the  remotest  lakes,  except  those  above  Niagara  Falls,  which 
they  are  never  known  to  ascend.  They  select  deep  still  water 
with  soft  bottom,  and  hibernate  where  old  deep  channels  are 
filling  up ;  at  this  time  they  are  taken  through  the  ice,  or  in 
boats  with  spears.  They  are  in  much  better  condition  at  this 
time  than  in  summer,  and  offer  more  inducement  to  the  angler 
with  the  spear,  than  when  taken  in  that  season  with  pot  or  line. 
They  never  spawn  in  lakes  or  rivers.     Take  theni  there  as 


278 


THE  EEL. 


large  as  you  will,  and  you  cannot  find  the  least  appearance  ol 
spawn ;  on  the  contrary,  take  a  sea  Eel  in  the  latter  part  of 
winter,  and  you  will  find  it  fiill  of  spawn.* 

Since,  then,  they  are  an  object  of  sport,  and  the  truly  scienti- 
fic angler,  when  in  want  of  excitement,  is  sometimes  seen  by 
torch  light,  with  spear  in  hand,  striking  for  him  in  the  depths 
below,  it  will  be  well  to  remark  on  some  of  the  methods  pur- 
sued in  his  capture. 

In  England  they  have  a  mode  of  taking  the  eel  called  snig- 
gling, which,  says  Blaine,  is  a  practice  so  ingenious  and  full  of 
artifice,  that  it  might  reconcile  the  sportsman  to  Eel  fishing. 
For  the  benefit  of  country  friends,  who  are  fond  of  Eel  fishing, 
the  following  description  of  the  tackle,  and  mode  of  operating 
is  here  given.  A  stick  two  yards  long,  with  a  cleft  at  each 
end,  a  strong  needle  whipped  to  a  small  whip-cord  line,  from 
the  eye  to  the  middle,  which,  with  a  lob-worm  stuck  on  the 
needle,  leaving  the  point  to  be  inserted  in  the  cleft  of  the  stick, 
constitutes  the  simple  apparatus.  The  art  consists  in  putting 
the  worm,  needle,  and  line  softly  into  the  mouth  of  the  Eel 
holes,  which  are  suffered  to  remain  until  taken  by  the  Eel, 
when  the  line  and  hook  are  again  reclaimed,  but  accompanied 
by  the  Eel  also.  The  most  common  modes  of  angling  for 
them  in  this  country  are  with  the  hook,  bob,  pot,  and  spear. 
For  hook  fishing,  take  an  ordinary  line,  such  as  used  for 
pickerel,  in  fresh  water,  or  black  fish  in  salt  water,  attach  by  a 
short  length  of  line,  gimp,  or  twisted  gut,  a  size  Black  fish  or 
Eel  hook,  suited  to  the  size  of  fish  expected,  and  a  sinker  ac- 


*  Dr.  Mitchill  says  the  roes  or  ovaria  of  Eels  may  be  seen  by  those 
who  will  look  for  them  in  the  proper  season,  like  other  fishes.  Yarrell 
also  remarks,  Eels  that  have  lived  in  brackish  water  all  the  winter, 
under  the  constant  influence  of  the  high  temperature  of  that  locality, 
probably  deposit  their  spawn  earlier  in  the  spring,  than  those  who  have 
passed  the  winter  in  places  from  which  there  existed  no  probable  egress. 


^'' 


THE  EEL.  279 

cording  to  the  tide  or  current ;  see  that  all  your  tackle  be 
strong,  and  you  are  rigged.  If  in  fresh  water,  bait  with  worms, 
pieces  of  fish,  frogs,  entrails  of  chicken  ;  for  salt  water,  pieces 
of  clams,  fish,  shrimp,  or  anything  else  you  think  they  will 
fancy.  The  largest  and  oldest  of  the  family  snake  along  the 
muddy  bottom  at  night,  and  perhaps  accommodating  you  with 
a  bite,  will  allow  you  to  draw  them  up,  of  a  size  such  as  may 
trouble  your  dreams.  Some  salt  water  anglers  take  them  with 
shedder  crab  and  shad  roe,  after  the  following  manner ;  they 
procure  some  white  horse  hairs,  and  work  them  into  the  shape 
of  a  bag,  and  within  place  their  bait,  or  wind  them  thoroughly 
around  a  good  size  bait.  They  attach  this  to  a  hand  line,  with 
a  sinker  of  sufficient  weight  to  sink  it  to  the  bottom.  The  Eel 
takes  hold,  and  soon  entangles  his  teeth  in  the  mesh  of  the  bag, 
and  is  brought  up  without  difficulty. 

The  bob  is  made  by  stringing  on  to  a  strong  piece  of  worsted 
yam  or  linen  thread,  a  large  number  of  worms,  wound  up  into 
a  ball,  and  by  attaching  your  line,  and  letting  it  down  with  an 
appropriate  sinker,  to  the  bottom  ;  when  you  feel  any  bites, 
give  a  little  time,  that  they  may  get  well  hold  ;  pull  up  mode- 
rately until  at  the  top  of  the  water,  then  give  a  jerk,  sudden  but 
steady,  and  you  will,  if  successful,  have  several  that  will  clear 
themselves  without  your  help. 

Pot  fishing  is  still  more  of  the  wholesale  kind,  and  is  much 
practised  in  the  country  streams.  The  pot  is  made  much  after 
the  fashion  of  an  Irish  potatoe  hamper,  but  of  the  commonest 
basket  materials,  and  the  end  like  the  entrance  to  a  mouse 
trap,  forming  an  inverted  cone,  with  an  elastic  hole,  large 
enough  for  the  animals  to  squeeze  their  way  through.  These 
ends  are  constructed  so  that  they  can  be  taken  off  to  bait,  or 
to  remove  the  fish.  They  are  usually  from  3  to  4  feet  in 
length,  and  6  to  8  inches  in  diameter.  The  bait,  con- 
sisting of  pieces  of  meat,  fish,  or  garbage  of  any  description, 

E* 


280 


THE  EEL. 


is  placed  in  the  inside,  with  a  weight  to  sink  it.  To  the 
centre  is  attached  a  strong  cord  or  rope.  When  ready,  it  is 
let  down  to  the  bottom  of  the  stream,  and  it  is  hauled  up  at 
turn  of  tide,  or  when  ite  weight  indicates  a  sufficient  quantity  of 
the  desired  fish. 

Last,  though  not  least,  and  probably  the  best  mode,  is  spear- 
ing. This  is  done  with  a  steel  spear,  made  with  five  or  six  flat 
or  square  prongs,  attached  by  a  socket  to  a  strong  ash  handle. 
They  can  be  had  at  the  fishing  tackle  stores,  or  made  to  order 
by  the  nearest  blacksmith.  These  are  forced  into  the  mud  from 
a  boat,  or  used  in  wading,  accompanied  by  an  assistant,  with  a 
basket,  to  receive  the  result  of  the  operator's  skill. 

They  make  a  capital  dish  for  eating,  by  either  stewing,  fry- 
ing, pyeing,  or  better,  according  to  Walton,  as  follows  :  "  First, 
wash  him  in  water  and  salt ;  then  pull  off  his  skin  below  his  newt 
or  navel,  and  not  much  further  ;  having  done  that,  take  out  his 
guts,  as  clean  as  you  can,  but  wash  him  not ;  then  give  him 
three  or  four  scotches  with  a  knife,  and  then  put  into  his  belly 
and  those  scotches  sweet  herbs,  an  anchovy,  and  a  little  nut- 
meg, grated  or  cut  very  small ;  and  your  herbs  and  anchovies 
must  also  be  cut  very  small,  and  mixed  with  good  batter  and 
salt ;  having  done  this,  then  pull  his  skin  over  him  all  but  his 
head,  which  you  are  to  cut  off,  to  the  end  that  you  may  tie 
his  skin  about  that  part  where  the  head  grew  ;  and  it  must  be 
so  tied  as  to  keep  all  moisture  within  his  skin,  and  having 
done  this,  tie  him  with  tape  or  packthread,  to  a  spit,  and  roast 
him  leisurely,  and  baste  him  with  water  and  salt  until  his  skin 
breaks,  and  then  with  butter,  and  having  roasted  him  enough, 
let  what  was  put  into  his  belly,  and  what  he  drips,  bo  his 
sauce."     Thus  endoth  the  chapter  on  Eels. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

THE    BAKE. 
Merbiciua  Midua.—DzKxr, 


This  fish  is  similar  in  appearance  to  the  Tom-Cod,  for  which 
it  is  often  mistaken  by  those  who  have  never  examined  the  two 
together.  They,  however,  belong  to  the  cod  family,  and  are 
classed  among  ichthyologists  as  being  related,  although  some- 
what distant,  to  that  species. 

They  are  found  in  great  abundance  in  England  and  France, 
where  they  are  caught  and  sold  in  immense  quantities.  They  are 
also  caught  of  very  large  size,  measuring  three  to  five  feet  in 
length.  Mr.  Yarrell  says,  that  they  are  "  so  abundant  in  the 
Bay  of  Galway  that  it  was  formerly  called  the  Bay  of  Hakes. 
On  that  part  of  the  N)miph  off*  the  coast  of  Waterford,  the  Hake 
is  also  so  plentiful,  that  one  thousand  have  been  taken  by  six 
men  with  lines  in  one  night.  It  is  a  voracious  fish,  as  its 
systematic  name  of  Merlucius,  sea-pike,  implies.  They  feed 
upon  a  description  of  fish  called  Pilchards,  on  which  they  glut 
themselves  to  their  heart's  desire.  I  have  seen  seventeen 
Pilchards  taken  from  the  stomach  of  a  Hake  of  ordinary  size. 
Their  digestion,  however,  is  quick,  so  that  they  speedily  get  rid 
of  their  load,  and  fishermen  observe  that  upon  being  hooked, 
the  Hake  presently  evacuates  the  contents  of  his  stomach  to 
facilitate  its  escape  ;  so  that  when  hundreds  are  taken  with  a 
line,  in  the  midst  of  prey,  not  one  will  have  anything  in  its 
stomach.  When  near  the  surface,  however,  this  rejection  does 
not  take  place  until  after  they  are  dragged  on  board." 

They  do  not  appear  to  be  so  generally  distributed  in  this 
country,  as  they  are  in  others,  neither  do  they  grow  to  so  large 
a  size,  and  although  not  a  game  fish  they  are  easily  taken  with 


282 


THE  HAEE. 


the  hook,  and  are  considered  very  palatable.  They  are  exceed- 
ingly common,  says  Dr.  J.  V.  C.  Smith,  though  not  taken  in  any 
quantity  in  Massachusetts.  The  largest  caught  here  seldom 
exceeds  two  feet.  They  are  denominated  Poor  Johns.  The 
best  hake  are  taken  off  Cape  Cod  and  sold  under  the  name  of 
stock  fish. 

When  very  hungry,  the  hake  exhibits  considerable  voracity, 
and  does  not  hesitate  to  seize  a  crab,  which,  in  self-defence, 
sometimes  fixes  its  shears  in  the  retractile  lips  of  the  enemy, 
who  whirls  it  through  the  water  with  surprising  velocity,  till  it 
is  finally  obliged  to  let  go  its  hold. 

DESCEiPTiON . — Dekay. 


Characteristics. — Reddish  brown  above ;  long,  acute,  pala- 
tine teeth  ;  lower  jaw  largest ;  length  one  to  two  feet. 

Color. — Reddish  brown,  with  golden  tints  towards  the 
shoulders ;  sides  of  the  opercle  silvery,  with  a  pinkish  lustre ; 
summits  of  the  head  dark  brown  ;  lower  part  of  the  body 
soiled  white  ;  lateral  hue  brownish  black ;  tongue,  surface  of 
the  bronchial  arches,  fauces,  and  interior  of  the  opercles,  deep 
bluish  black  ;  irides  golden,  mottled  with  brown  ;  dorsals  light 
brown,  the  rays  lighter ;  caudal  dark  brown ;  remaining  fins 
whitish,  minutely  punctate  with  brown. 

They  were  formerly  little  known  at  New  York,  but  of  late 
years  have  become  quite  abundant,  where  they  are  taken  at  the 
docks  generally  at  night  by  boys,  and  those  of  the  craft  that 
cannot  spare  time  during  the  day.  The  Hake,  like  the  Tom- 
Cod,  is  a  bottom  fish,  and  is  taken  generally  with  hand  lines, 
and  the  usual  black  fish  tackle.  Being  of  the  voracious  order, 
he  seems  to  love  the  eddies  and  currents,  and  is  better  taken 
when  the  tide  is  running  strong,  where  he  delights  to  feed  upon 
what  is  forced  in  its  way.    On  such  grounds  the  line  should  be 


THE  HAKE. 


283 


rigged  with  a  heavy  sinker,  and  a  hollow  one  if  it  can  be 
procured,  as  the  bite  is  much  easier  felt.  Some  prefer  instead 
of  a  black  fish  hook  a  Limerick,  about  No.  4  salmon.  He  is 
fond  of  shrimps,  crabs,  and  clams.  Economical  anglers 
universally  use  the  latter  bait,  considering  it  good  enough  to 
take  him  or  any  of  his  family. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

WHITE   PERCH   AND   CAT-FISH    ANGLING   IN   THE 
VICINITY   OF   NEW   YORK. 

By  T.  D.  L. 


Lake  fishing  lacks  one  element  of  interest  possessed  by  the 
salt  water,  namely,  the  condition  of  hopeful  uncertainty  respect- 
ing the  sort  and  size  of  your  game.  Between  the  humble 
Flounder  and  the  noble  Sheepshead  are  many  kinds  of  gamo 
fish,  and  greater  disparities  of  weight  and  value  than  exist 
between  the  fish  of  fresh  ponds,  which  are  less  various  and  more 
equal.  Moreover,  the  salt  water  tribe  come  and  go  with  sea- 
sons and  tides,  and  cannot,  like  their  inland  brethren,  always  be 
followed  and  found.  There  is  therefore  an  excitement  in  the 
doubtful  chances  of  sea-fishing  wanting  in  that  of  the  lakes 
which  presents  greater  uniformity  of  character  and  certainty  ol 
success. 

But  though  still  water  fishing,  as  compared  with  the  flowino 
salt,  is  inferior  in  interest,  perhaps  it  has  superiority  in  the  gene- 
ral satisfaction  it  affords.  In  the  numerous  lakelets  of  New 
York,  fish,  of  some  sort,  can  at  any  time  be  taken.  Not,  how- 
ever, always  with  equal  ease.  When  the  water  is  warm  and 
the  fish  well  fed,  the  angler  will  find  occasion  for  all  his  art ; — 
in  the  successful  exercise  of  which,  and  not  in  the  magnitude  of 
his  fishing,  lies,  after  all,  the  chief  satisfaction.  Perch,  large 
and  lively,  both  yellow  and  white  :  Sunfish,  sometimes  of  con- 
siderable size ;  Pickerel,  which  are  shy,  and  employ  all  your 
cunning  and  skill ;  Cat-fish,  whether  you  would  or  no  ;  are 
taken  in  our  hundred  little  lakes ;  and  the  angler,  with  light  rod 
and  fine  tackle  (which  are  indispensable  to  enjoyment),  will 
find  fishing  in  them  anything  but  a  dull  and  tame  affair. 


WHITE   PEECH  AOT)   OAT-FISH   ANGLING.  285 

The  baits  used  are  various:  live  bait,  as  woiin  or  fish,  is 
generally  best.    But  whatever  you  take 
"  To  bait  fish  withal," 

if  it  will  feed  nothing  else,  'twill  feed  Cat-fish,  which  are  omni- 
vorous. They  are  the  i'resh  water  Toad-fish,  and,  like  others 
of  the  family,  seem  to  subserve  the  purpose  of  purification,  by 
the  reconversion  into  life  of  corruptible  organic  matter.  Though 
esteemed  delicate  eating*  when  well  cooked,  they  are  not 
pleasant  to  take  raw ; — their  ugly  mouths,  slimy  skins,  and 
dangerous  horns,  causing  the  dainty  angler  to  avoid  their 
neighborhood.  This  he  can  do  only  by  fishing  some  feet  above 
bottom.  But  drop  below  that  discreet  distance,  and  he  will 
surely  damage  his  tackle  in  the  jaws  of  some  bull-headed  Man- 
darin, to  be  disengaged  only  with  infinite  difficulty  and  disgust. 
Fishing  for  them,  wnen  rightly  prepared,  is,  like  fishing  for  Eels, 
well  enough  and  quite  another  thing.  You  will  then  use  gimp, 
and  a  kirb  about  No.  3  Salmon,  upon  bottom.  The  best  time 
is  simdown,  and  after.  Then  they  bite  boldly,  and  are  a  sure 
fish.  Glove  your  left  hand  and  seize  them  fearlessly  but  firmly 
behind  the  horns  when  you  disgorge  the  hook.  Boys  with 
stick  and  string,  a  rusty  hook  and  piece  of  pork,  take  "  Bull- 
heads" (as  the  small  Cat-fish  are  called)  in  almost  every  pond 
and  fresh  stream  in  the  Northern  States. 

But  angling  for  the  White  or  Silver  Perch — the  graceful 
oright-eyed  Perch — with  pliant  rod  and  gossamer  thread  of  gut 
— this  is  no  boy's  play,  but  a  true  exhilarating  sport.  A  nimble, 
strong,  clean  fish,  that  springs  voraciously  at  the  bait,  struggles 
hard,  and  dies  game,  is  a  respectable  adversary,  and  occasions 

vou  to 

"  Know  the  fierce  joy  that  anglers  feel, 
In  fishes  worthy  of  their  steel.'* 

»  From  Philadelphia,  pleasure  parties  very  commonly  visit  the  falls  of 
ihe  Schuylkill,  to  despatch  them  with  knife  and  fork. 


286 


WHITE   PERCH   AND   CAT-FISH   ANGLINO. 


~- 

f^-. 

J^l 

^=rzr- 

~  — 

^'-^~ 

:-^- 

_ 

~^'jrz. 

m- 

Seen  at  daybreak  or  sundown,  playing  in  sparkling  schools  on 
the  sunny  side  of  some  lakelet,  he  is  an  object  of  attractive 
beauty  to  the  poetic  angler.  Perch  bite  best  in  early  morning 
and  evening  about  the  shallows  near  shore ;  but  at  mid-day, 
when  they  retire  to  bars  that  run  out  into  deeper  water,  they 
become  dainty,  yet  may,  however,  be  there  taken.  Worm,  upon 
a  Limerick  hook  (1  to  3  trout),  is  a  common  bait.  But  the 
"  killy,"  and  small  brook  shiner,  or  gold  fish,  are  better.  Pre- 
pared with  these,  I  generally  contrive  to  drift  with  the  wind,  if 
there  be  any,  outside  the  shadow  of  the  woods  and  beyond  the 
weeds,  trailing  a  light  float,  with  swivel  just  weighty  enough  to 
dip  it  and  balance  the  live  bait  swimming  at  half  depth.  This 
is  the  ground  and  mode  of  fishing,  good  alike  for  Perch  and  Pick- 
erel. Be  therefore  prepared  for  the  latter,  and  if  one  bite  give 
liim  no  quarter,  but  bring  him  in  steadily,  and  quickly,  if  you 
would  save  your  tackle.  His  bite  may  be  distinguished  from 
that  of  the  Perch.  His  is  a  long  pull,  holding  the  float  under  ; 
whereas  the  Perch  bite  is  comparatively  quick  and  short. 

Slowly  drifting,  then,  fishing  between  the  boat  and  shore,  and 
drawing  or  casting  my  line  into  every  likely  nook,  I  generally 
strike  upon  a  school  of  Perch,  when  I  quietly  drop  anchor. 
When  they  cease  biting  I  row  above,  float  down  again,  and 
commonly  take  more  in  the  same  place,  or  if  not,  continue  to 
drift  as  before.  Large  fish,  as  Perch  over  half  a  pound  may  be 
called,  are  more  solitary  in  their  habits ;  the  smaller  the  more 
gregarious,  as  though  instinctively  associating  for  mutual  pro- 
tection. I  choose  the  sunny  side,  because  I  think  the  Silver 
Perch  (other  circiunstances  equal)  prefer  the  strong  lights  to  the 
dark  waters  of  the  pond  ;  and  this  may  be  one  reason  why  they 
swim  nearer  the  surface  in  the  twilight  of  morning  and  evening. 
If  then  the  fish  don't  bite  freely,  examine  the  crop  of  one,  and 
suit  your  bait  to  its  apparent  food. 

The  White  Perch,  though  less  common  than  the  Yellow,  is 


WHITE   PERCH   AND   CAT   FISH   ANGLINO. 


287 


yet  widely  distributed  in  our  waters.  It  is  found  in  the  Hud- 
son and  tributary  streams.  The  Passaic  river  abounds  with  a 
small  size.  Very  fine  fish  are  taken  in  most  of  the  lakes  of 
Putnam  county  (accessible  by  the  Harlem  railroad),  and  in 
many  ponds  of  that  paradise  of  sportsmen,  Long  Island,  es- 
pecially in  Suffolk  County.  There,  a  short  ride  through  the 
pines  from  almost  any  point,  will  bring  you  to  some  quiet  spot, 
where  you  can  find  fair  sport  angling,  "  under  the  shade  of 
overhanging  boughs,"  yet  within  sound  of  the  ocoan  surf  The 
pine  woods,  interlaced  with  their  bright  sandy  avenues,  have  a 
peculiar  beauty,  and  to  fish  in  their  still  depths,  of  a  serene  day, 
in  a  light  skiff,  gently  gliding  over  some  mirrored  lake, 

•*  Fair  as  the  bosom  of  the  swan,* 

IS  a  luxury  they  can  best  appreciate  who  are  ennuiedhy  fashion, 
or  distempered  by  the  wear  and  tear  of  an  intense  business  life. 
To  minds  of  any  sensibility,  the  mere  repose  of  these  suburban 
solitudes  is  "  a  feeling"  of  beauty,  and  awakens  the  conscious- 
ness of  an  infinite  presence,  replete  with  religious  emotions. 


CHAPTER   XIX. 


OCEAN      ANGLIN 


Likeness  of  Heaven ! 

Agent  of  Power ! 
Man  is  thy  victim, 

Shipwreck's  thy  dower 
Spices  and  jewels 

From  valley  and  sea, 
Armies  and  banners 

Are  buried  in  thee ! 


The  art  we  love  being  admirably  adapted  to  recruit  the 
broken-down  or  enervated  constitution ;  and  the  pure  breath 
of  heaven,  as  it  comes  from  off  the  dark  blue  sea  and  the 
white  capped  wave,  being  a  more  potent  medicine  than 
that  prescribed  by  the  physician,  or  compounded  by  the 
apothecary,  no  excuse  need  here  be  offered  for  a  few 
remarks  on  a  subject  of  interest  to  those  who  may  cast 
their  first  line  from  the  side  of  a  ship.  Those  who  have 
never  been  to  sea  are  apt  to  think  that  such  a  large  pond 
was  only  made  for  the  leviathan  whale,  the  ponderous  shark, 
or  the  Nahant  Sea  Serpent,  but  a  little  reflection  would 
convince  the  most  sceptical  that  they  labor  under  a  delu- 
sion. 

The  depths  of  the  trackless  ocean,  wherein  the  mon- 
sters bask  in  broad  noon-day,  as  well  as  the  reefs  and  shal- 
lows nearer  land,  are  teeming  with  shoals  of  the  living 
brood  of  smaller  size,  which  are  designed  not  only  to  feed 
and  fatten  the  larger  majesties  of  their  own  species,  but  to 
minister  to  the  appetite,  comfort,  amusement,  and  support 
of  the  man  in  whose  power  they  are  placed.  The  poor  sailor, 
who  is  obliged  to  make  a  voyage  of  many  months,  is  ever 
on  the  alert  for  a  change  of  diet,  and  the  sight  of  a  school 


OCEAN  ANGLnro.  289 

of  fish  is  a  subject  of  gratification  to  the  whole  of  a  ship's 
company,  and  more  particularly  to  those  who  have  never  be- 
fore tempted  their  precious  souls  and  bodies  on  the  ocean 
wave. 

"And  now  approaching  near  the  lofty  stern, 
A  shoal  of  sportive  dolphins  they  discern. 
From  burnish'd  scales  ihey  beam  refulgent  rays, 
Till  all  the  glowing  ocean  seems  to  blaze 
Soon  to  the  sport  of  death  the  crew  repair, 
Dart  the  long  lance,  or  spread  the  baited  snare." 

The  ocean  is  supposed  to  have  as  many  tenants  as  the 
earth  or  the  air.     But  few  of  the  descriptions  are  much 
known  by  any  particular  names,  and  very  few  described  by 
naturalists.     The  Dolphin,  whose  fame  has  been  said  and 
sung   by   poet    and    philosopher,    is    worth   a  sea    voyage 
for  the  pleasure  of  his  capture,  and  the  satisfaction  of"  be- 
ing in  at  his  death  "     Their  usual  size  is  from  2  to  5  ft.  in  -=-^?"^*-     ^ 
length.      The    variableness    and    beauty    of    his    rainbow  - : ,-     ' ' 
colorings,    as    he    shuffles  off   his  mortal   coil,  is  a  sub-                 .  .      ^;       , 
ject  indescribable  by  pen  or  pencil.     He   is  not  a  hand-  I'^r    / 
some  fish  as  he  is  lifted  up  and  exposed  to  the  view  of  those               -.,        "" % 
who  make  his  acquaintance  for  the  first  time  ;  on  the  con- 
trary, his  proportions  and  appearance  as  to  beauty  are  ra- 
ther ordinary,  and  not  until  a  change  comes  o'er  the  spirit  of 
his  dream,  and  he  flaps  his  tail  upon  the  white  deck  of  the 
vessel,  and,  gasping,  dies,  is  his  beauty  acknowledged. 

"  What  radiant  changes  strike  the  astonish'd  sight 
What  glowing  hues  of  mingled  shade  and  light ! 
Not  equal  beauty  gilds  the  glowing  west, 
With  parting  beams  all  o'er  profusely  drest ; 
Nor  lovelier  colors  paint  the  vernal  dawn, 
When  orient  dews  impearl  th'  enamell'd  lawn, 
Than  from  his  sides  in  bright  suftusion  flow, 
That  now  with  gold  imperial  seem  to  glow ; 


290 


OCEAN  ANGLIKO. 


/ 


^ :, 

- 

„-  --- 

-Z"_^- 

fife- 

.v= 

^^', 

Now  \n  pellucid  sapphires  meet  the  view, 
And  imitate  the  soft,  celestial  hue  ; 
Now  beam  a  flaming  crimson  on  the  eye, 
And  now  assume  the  purple*s  deeper  dye. 
But  here  description  clouds  each  shining  ray ; 
What  terms  of  art  can  nature's  power  display  1'* 

He  that  would  prepare  himself  for  the  pleasure  and  excite- 
ment of  his  capture,  should  provide  himself  with  a  stout 
hawser-laid  cotton  or  hemp  line  of  28  or  30  fathoms  length, 
and  in  thickness  about  one-eighth  of  an  inch  ;  to  this 
should  be  attached  one  of  the  largest  size  Cod  hooks,  seized 
on  to  the  line  with  the  stoutest  kind  of  white,  black,  or 
colored  No.  1 2  thread,  or  small  fish  line,  well  waxed  with 
shoemaker's  wax  ;  fpr  bait,  use  a  large  piece  of  salt  pork, 
about  six  inches  in  length  by  2  or  3  wide,  made  well  fast. 
Fasten  your  line,  cast  your  baited  hook  overboard,  and 
troll  till  you  get  a  bite ;  pull  him  in  with  a  steady  line, 
stout  heart,  and  strong  nerve,  and  he  will  soon  repay 
the  trouble  of  his  capture,  both  by  the  excitement  of 
the  occasion,  and  the  table  exercise  with  the  instruments 
of  appetite.  You  will  not  find  his  meat  as  pleasant  to 
the  taste  as  some  others  of  the  tribe,  but  rather 
preferable  to  the  salt  pork  upon  which  he  expected 
to  dine  himself.  The  sailors  take  him  with  a  large  piece 
of  bone,  tin,  or  lead  attached  to  a  good  sized  hook ; 
but  you  will  find  a  much  better  article  called  an  artificial 
squid,  of  handsome  shape,  from  4  to  8  inches  in  length,  and 
composed  of  tin,  after  a  similar  manner,  at  the  general 
fishing  tackle  stores.  This  article  is  used  without  bait  in 
its  simple  form,  being  made  something  in  the  shape  of  a 
fish. 

There  are  other  fish  captured  in  the  same  way, 
on  sea  voyages ;  among  them  the  Bonita,  Barracouta,  and 
Skip  Jack.     Smaller  squids  are  employed,  similar  to  those 


OCEAN   ANGLINO. 


291 


in  trolling  for  blue  fish,  say  from  3  to  5  inches  in  length,  of 
tin  or  bone,  the  former  to  be  used  in  rough  water,  and  the 
latter  in  smooth ;  those  who  contemplate  going  to  sea,  to  be 
sure  of  success,  should  take  both  kinds.  The  Bonita  and 
Skip  Jack  vary  in  size  from  1  to  2  feet,  and  can  be  taken  with 
lighter  tackle ;  but  to  be  on  the  safe  side,  and  insure  success, 
employ  your  Dolphin  line  ;  and  should  you  use  beef  or  pork 
instead  of  the  artificial  squid,  attach  to  your  line  stout 
Kirby  sea  hooks,  the  size  of  1-G  or  2-0  Limerick.  In  pur- 
chasing and  rigging  your  sea  tackle,  see  that  it  is  well  made, 
and  perfectly  strong.  Let  not  parsimony  deter  you  from 
preparing  it  of  the  best  quality,  and  you  will  never  regret 
your  angling  enjoyments  on  the  ocean. 


CHAPTER  XX. 


INHABITANTS    OF    THE    OREGON   AND    CALIFORNIA 
WATERS. 


The  waters  of  California  are  alive  with  a  great  variety 
of  the  finny  race,  equal  in  value  to  the  angler  as  are  its 
golden  sands*  to  the  adventurer.  In  the  bay  and  harbor  of 
San  Francisco  are  found  the  Haddock,  the  Black  Fish  or 
Tautog,  the  Flounder,  the  Mackerel,  the  Weak  Fish  or  salt 
water  Trout  of  the  south,  the  Mullet,  and  the  Red  Fish,  or 
Spotted  Basse.  These  different  descriptions,which  are  taken 
with  rod  or  hand-tackle  in  the  usual  manner,  are  of  unusually 
large  size  and  of  very  fine  flavor.  The  Red  Fish  is  said  by 
those  who  have  tried  it  with  the  knife  and  fork  to  be 
superior  in  gastronomic  qualities  to  the  celebrated  fish  of 
the  same  name  at  New  Orleans  and  Charleston,  being  also 
much  finer  in  outward  appearance,  having  more  delicate  skin, 
smaller  scales,  and  its  superficial  surface  more  beautiful. 
They  bite  at  the  hook  baited  with  pieces  of  mullet,  beef, 
or  pork,  very  freely,  are  very  vigorous,  and  give  good 
play  with  the  rod  and  reel.  The  beautiful  Mullet  is  also 
found  here  in  all  its  glory,  and  grows  to  quite  a  large  size, 
being  taken  from  6  or  8  inches  to  2  or  4  feet  in  length 
in  seines  or  nets.  A  singular  description  of  fish  is  also 
taken  in  the  bay  called  the  Trigger  Fish.  This  member 
of  the  family  has  a  singular  projection  on  the  back,  similar 
in  appearance  to  the  trigger  of  a  gun,  from  which  much 
amusement  is  had  by  the  inhabitants  by  its  singular  motions, 


*  In  the  time  of  Cortes  gold  was  reported  to  be  so  plenty  in  Mexico, 
thfit  the  fishermen  used  gold  weights  to  their  nets.  Our  Salmon  anglers 
of  the  Sacramento  will  of  course  use  golden  Rods  and  Reels. 


INHABITANTS   OF   OREGON   AND   CALIFORNIA   WATERS.        293 

when  pulled  by  the  knowing  ones.  The  fresh  water  fish 
swarm  the  streams  and  lakes  in  abundance.  The  Salmon 
here  lord  their  way  through  the  Sacramento  and  Columbia 
rivers,  and  their  branches,  in  such  large  numbers,  that  they 
can  be  seen  in  immense  shoals  when  entering  the  rivers  in 
the  month  of  April,  and  are  speared,  or  captured  by  the 
Indians  with  a  wicker  basket,  with  much  ease.  The 
natives,  also,  set  fences  across  the  streams  where  they  go 
up,  and  confine  and  secure  them  in  large  quantities.  They 
take  the  fly  finely,  and  afford  good  sport  with  the  rod  and 
reel. 

The  lakes  and  inland  rivers,  also,  teem  with  an  abun- 
dance of  Catfish,  and  Salmon  Trout  of  the  finest  quality  and 
flavor.  Capt.  Fremont,  in  his  narrative  of  his  exploring 
expedition  to  California,  says,  in  speaking  of  those  of  the 
Salmon  Trout  River  :  "  Their  flavor  is  excellent — superior, 
in  fact,  to  any  fish  that  I  have  ever  known."  In  the  moun- 
tain streams,  the  Spotted  Trout  is  found  in  large  quantities, 
as  are  the  Yellow  Perch  and  many  other  smaller  descrip- 
tions of  fish.  The  River  Gila,  which  empties  into  the 
northern  extremity  of  the  Gulf  of  California,  contains  fish 
similar  in  shape,  general  appearance,  and  color  to  the  Trout.  =;^^|^^^gi^ 

"  At  a  little  distance,"  says  Lieut.  Emory,  "  they  seem 
covered  with  scales,  but  a  closer  examination  detects 
n( (thing  of  the  kind,  but  small  marks  of  a  scaly  ap- 
pearance, making  them  look  entirely  different  from  what 
they  seem.  Their  meat,  although  very  palatable,  is  rather 
soft,  and  not  equal  to  the  Spotted  Trout.  On  the  coast  are 
to  be  found  the  Green  Turtle,  Oysters,  Mussels,  Clams,  and 
other  kinds  of  shell-fish  of  the  largest  size,  and  o<'  the 
finest  flavorable  qualities.  Altogether  California  and  Ore- 
gon oflfer  great  inducements  to  the  angler  and  epicurean," 


CHAPTER  XXI. 


OF   THE   WHITE  FE£Ci 


This  fine  fish,  although  a  general  inhabitant  of  most  of  our 
fresh  water  ponds,  is  often  found  in  many  of  our  large  rivers, 
where  he  partakes  more  of  the  active  nature  of  the  striped,  or 
Black  Basse  (to  which  family  he  belongs),  than  of  that  of  his  more 
sluggish  but  less  active  and  nearer  relative,  the  Yellow  Perch. 

At  the  High  Bridge,  Harlem  River,  they  are  taken  in  large 
quantities,  and  sometimes  of  large  size,  all  through  the  summer 
season ;  they  also  abound  in  many  parts  of  the  Hudson,  Dela- 
ware, and  Schuylkill  rivers,  and  are  the  objects  of  much  sport 
in  many  parts  of  Connecticut,  the  large  ponds  of  Long  Island, 
and  the  streams  of  various  other  parts  of  the  United  States. 

They  are  generally  caught  with  the  usual  Trout,  or  Perch 
tackle,  except  when  found  in  the  more  rapid  rivers,  when  the 
angler  delights  to  master  him  with  his  Basse  rod,  stronger  bot- 
tom lengths,  and  hooks  in  proportion.  It  is  also  well  to  pre- 
pare in  this  manner,  in  order  to  be  in  readiness  for  larger  fish, 
w'lich  in  the  rivers  and  often  in  the  large  ponds,  give  conside- 
rable trouble.  A  Connecticut  friend,  who  was  once  almost 
mastered  by  a  large  pike,  whilst  angling  for  white  perch,  gives 
the  following  graphic  account  of  his  success. 

"  I  had  been  fishing  nearly  the  whole  afternoon ;  the  sun  had 
almost  set,  and  I  was  drifting  along  with  the  declining  wind, 
not  far  from  the  shore  of  a  lake,  near  the  southern  part  of  the 
state,  when  I  felt  a  most  violent  jerk  at  my  line,  which  imme- 
diately began  to  run  out  with  great  rapidity.  Supposing  my 
fiigitive  to  be  only  a  remarkably  vigorous  perch,  I  attempted  to 
check  him,  but  found  the  strain  so  great  as  to  convince  me  that 
I  had  encountered  a  more  powerful  opponent.  I  had  only  a 
slight  trouting-rod,  with  a  very  slender  silk  and  hair  Hne,  and 


OF  THE  WHITE  PERCH.  295 

a  very  fine  gut  bottom  with  a  number  6  trout  hook,  and  I  saw 
at  once  that  skill  and  patience  and  not  force,  must  win  the  day. 
I  accordingly  gave  out  plenty  of  line,  keeping  it  tight,  however, 
and  very  soon  my  antagonist  rose  to  the  surface,  while  I  reeled 
in  again  with  my  utmost  celerity.  He  then  leaped  with  extend- 
ed jaws  a  full  yard  from  the  water  and  immediately  plunged 
again  towards  the  bottom,  where  he  dug  along  until  he  very 
nearly  carried  out  40  yards  of  line,  when  luckily  he  turned 
once  more  and  came  directly  towards  the  boat.  After  a  con- 
test of  about  25  minutes,  sustained  with  great  strength  and  per- 
severance on  the  part  of  the  fish,  and  the  utmost  skill  I  could 
muster  on  my  own  part,  and  the  most  intense  excitement  on 
both  sides,  I  fairly  overcame  my  scaly  friend,  and  led  him, 
gasping  at  length  and  unresisting,  with  his  broad  green  sides 
gleaming  in  the  sunset,  to  the  side  of  my  boat,  placed  my  land- 
ing net  under  him,  and  in  an  instant  he  was  at  my  feet;  he 
proved  to  be  one  of  the  largest  pike  I  had  ever  taken  in  that 
water,  and  weighed  7  1-2  pounds."  The  same  gentleman 
fishes  for  Perch  in  the  following  manner.  "  My  common 
method  of  taking  w^hite  Perch,  is  w^ith  a  small  minnow  or 
shiner,  placed  upon  two  Limerick  hooks,  tied  about  an  inch 
apart,  on  a  bottom  length  of  five  or  six  i'eet  of  fine  single  gut, 
furnished  with  a  couple  of  swivels.  The  lower  hook  is  about 
No.  3,  and  the  other  No.  6,  according  to  the  arrangement  of 
hooks  in  the  Angler's  Guide.  I  row  my  boat  out  nearly  to  the 
middle  of  the  pond  and  then  allow  it  to  drift  before  the  wind, 
with  my  line  run  off"  the  reel  to  just  about  such  a  length  as  that 
the  motion  of  the  boat  will  keep  the  bait  near  the  surface  of  the 
water.  The  white  Perch  play  about  in  schools,  constantly 
leaping  above  the  water  in  a  fine  breezy  day,  and  often  in 
seizing  the  bait,  they  will  spring  entirely  from  the  surface,  as  a 
trout  does  in  taking  a  fly.  In  this  way,  with  two  rods,  I  have 
frequently  captured  from  80  to  100  in  a  few  hours." 


CHAPTER  XXII. 

THE     YELLOW    PIKE     PERCH. 
Lucioperca  Americana.     , 

This  is  a  very  fine  fish,  both  for  table  and  rod  exercise,  and 
seems  to  partake  of  the  nature  of  both  the  pike  and  perch 
family  ;  like  the  trout  he  loves  the  more  bold  and  rapid  parts 
of  rivers  and  lakes,  and  also  the  deep  holes,  and  under  weeds 
and  grass,  and  with  some  of  the  fraternity  is  considered  equal 
in  vigor  and  activity  to  the  favorite  trout.  A  friend  who  sent 
two  from  Albany  this  winter  (1849),  as  specimens,  says  they 
are  taken  in  Lake  Ontario,  and  also  in  the  Mohawk,  where 
they  are  called  Mohawk  Pike.  It  has  also  been  ascertained 
that  they  abound  in  the  Susquehanna  and  its  tributary  streams, 
where  the  true  pickerel  also  are  found.  They  grow  in  the 
above  mentioned  places  to  the  weight  of  ten  or  twelve  pounds, 
are  fearless  in  attack,  roaming  the  streams  a  terror  to  the  finny 
race,  often  endeavoring  to  gorge  more  than  they  can  swallow. 

Color. — "  Yellowish  olive  above  the  lateral  line  ;  lighter  on 
the  sides,  silvery  beneath  ;  head  and  gill  covers  mottled  with 
green,  brownish  and  white  ;  chin  pale  flesh  color  ;  pupil  dark 
and  vitreous  ;  sides  mottled  with  black  and  yellowish  ;  mem- 
brane of  the  spinous  dorsal  transparent,  with  a  few  dark  dashes ; 
the  upper  part  of  the  membrane  tipped  with  black  ;  the  posterior 
part  of  the  membrane,  including  the  two  last  rays,  black  ;  the 
soft  dorsal  fin  light  yellowish,  spotted  with  brown  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  form  irregular  longitudinal  dusky  bars  ;  pectoral 
fins  yellowish  olive,  with  maculated  brownish  bars ;  ventral 
fius  transparent  yellowish  ;  anal  fin  of  the  same  color,  with  a 
broad  whitish  margin  ;  caudal  fin  with  irregular  dusky  bars." 
— Dekay. 


THE    YELLOW    PIKE   PERCH. 


297 


**  This  is  the  common  Pike,  Pickerel,  Glass  Eye,  and  Yellow 
Pike  of  the  great  lakes  and  most  of  the  inland  lakes  of  the 
western  part  of  the  State.  In  Ohio  it  has  received  the  name  of 
Salmon.  The  ordinary  name  gives  no  correct  idea  of  its 
character.  It  is  a  true  perch,  although  its  form  and  habits 
suggest  very  naturally  the  idea  of  pike.  I  have,  therefore, 
applied  to  it  a  name  which  indicates  its  true  position,  and  is  a 
translation  of  its  classical  appellation." 

"  The  Pike-perch  is  exceedingly  voracious,  and  is  highly 
prized  for  food.  It  is  caught  readily  with  the  hook,  and 
appears  to  prefer  as  bait  the  common  fresh  water  cray-fish 
(Astacus  Bartoni).  According  to  Dr.  Rutland  it  is  one  of  the 
most  valuable  fish  for  the  table  found  in  the  western  waters, 
and  sells  readily  at  a  high  price.  It  is  found  in  such  quantities 
about  the  Maumee  River,  as  to  induce  the  fishermen  to  make 
it  an  article  of  commerce.  At  Lake  Huron  it  spawns  in  April 
or  May.  In  Chatauque  Lake  I  was  informed  of  one  which 
was  thirty  inches  long.  It  had  swallowed  a  duck,  which  had 
thrust  its  head  through  the  gill  openings  of  the  fish,  and  having 
thus  destroyed  it,  both  were  found  dead  upon  the  shores." 

The  best  arrangement  for  his  successful  capture  is  a  good 
size  basse  rod,  and  the  regular  basse  tackle,  with  the  exception 
of  the  hook,  which  should  be  about  the  size  of  that  used  for 
the  king  fish,  say  about  No.  4  salmon.  The  bait  most 
generally  used  is  the  minnow  or  shiner. 


CHAPTER   XXIII. 

BLACK    BASSE     ANGLING    IN    MICHIGAN. 
Kindly  famished  for  tills  work  by  a  friend  at  Detroit. 


Black  Basse  are  found  in  all  the  great  Western  lakes,  and 
in  all  the  rivers  connecting  them  or  tributary  to  them.  They 
abound  also  in  the  picturesque  and  beautiful  lakelets  with  which 
the  peninsula  of  Michigan  is  studded.  There  are  several  spe- 
cies of  fish  which  pass  by  the  general  name  of  Black  Basse,  but 
two  or  three  of  which  appear  to  be  described  by  naturalists-^ 
The  Black  Basse  {Huro  Nigricans)  of  Lake  Huron,  the  Black 
Basse  (Centrarchus  Fasciatus)  of  Lake  Erie  and  the  Ohio 
River,  and  Labrax  Nigricans,  or  Small  Black  Basse.  They 
differ  in  different  localities  in  form  as  well  as  in  color.  They 
all  belong  to  the  great  Perch  family,  and  are  a  game  fish,  afford- 
ing fine  sport  to  the  angler.  They,  with  the  White  Basse,  Pick- 
erel, Pike,  Yellow  Perch,  and  Catfish,  comprise  the  list  out  of 
which  the  Detroit  River  angler  is  to  find  his  sport ;  but  the  one 
which  will  most  reward  him  for  his  toil,  is  the  Black  Basse. 
He  is  shy  and  capricious,  yet  when  feeding  bold  and  voracious. 
In  size  and  shape  he  strongly  resembles  the  Blackfish  (Tautog) 
of  salt  water,  and  like  him  is  found  among  rocks  and  reefs,  and 
stones,  and  rapids,  and  eddies.*  In  weight  they  range  from 
one  to  five  pounds. 

On  the  eastern  coast  of  Lake  Michigan,  and  in  Green  Bay, 

*  Another  variety  of  this  species  does  not  appear  to  have  been  described 
by  naturalists.  It  is  never  black.  The  back  of  tlie  fish  is  a  dark  color, 
shading  gradually  into  green  on  the  sides,  and  from  that  into  a  whitish 
cream  color  on  the  belly.  The  characteristic  mark  of  this  variety  is  two 
broad  longitudinal  parallel  lines  running  the  whole  length  of  the  body. 
They  are  commonly  called  the  Green  Basse,  and  are  found  where  there 
is  grassy  bottom.    Their  weight  ranges  from  one  to  five  pounds. 


BLACK  BASSE  AKGLINa  IK  HICHiaAN.  299 

they  are  somewhat  larger.  In  color,  too,  at  times,  the  Black 
Basse  is  like  the  Tautog  ;  but  his  color  changes  with  the  sea- 
son, or  from  some  other  cause,  from  a  dingy  black  to  a  dark 
green.  Perhaps  these  varieties  of  color  are  the  result  of  age 
or  sex,  though  it  is  said  that  the  same  fish,  kept  in  a  vessel  of 
water,  will  change  its  color  repeatedly  in  a  short  space  of  time. 
The  Black  Basse  makes  his  appearance  in  the  Detroit  River 
about  the  latter  part  of  May  or  first  days  of  June,  as  the  season 
is  early  or  late.  He  is  then  in  fine  condition,  and  at  his  feeding 
time,  which  is  from  sunrise  till  half-past  seven  or  eight  o'clock 
A.  M.,  and  from  four  p.  m,  to  sunset,  will  give  good  sport  till  the 
last  of  July.  In  August  they  are  spawning  ;  and  though  the 
bait  be  cast  in  the  midst  of  "  a  crowd,"  as  it  sometimes  may  on 
a  gravelly  bank  over  which  the  water,  two  or  three  leet  deep, 
runs  rapidly  into  an  eddy  or  pool,  they  will  nose  it  about  in 
turn  as  disdainfully  as  though  they  were  innocent  of  ever  mas- 
ticating a  minnow.  If  you  do  succeed  by  artifice,  as  you  flat- 
ter yourself,  in  enticing  one  to  take  the  hook,  he  gives  but  little 
play,  and  comes  out  with  scarcely  a  struggle.  You  will  find 
him  hollow  over  the  eyes,  sharp  on  the  back,  thin  and  shrunk 
and  so  woe-begone  of  look,  suggestive  of  fishy  fever  and  ague, 
that  his  taking  the  hook,  you  are  convinced,  is  mere  desperation, 
in  fact  a  piscatory  suicide.  You  throw  him  back  into  his  native 
element,  and  he  swims  languidly  off"  with  an  air  which  plainly 
says  his  destiny  is  a  matter  of  indifference  to  him.  You 
may  succeed  during  the  month  of  August,  even  at  mid-day,  in 
taking  a  few  stout,  frisky  young  fellows  of  a  pound  or  a  pound 
and  a  half  in  Weighty  which  the  accomplished  fishing  corres- 
pondent of  the  "  Buffalo  Commercial"  calls  "  yearlings ;"  but 
there  your  sport  will  end.  Reel  up  then,  friend,  and  hie  thee  to 
the  edge  of  the  sedge,  to  inveigle  Yellow  Perch  or  a  stray  Pick- 
erel, and  leave  the  "  yearlings"  to  grow,  and  their  emaciated 
progenitors  to  recover  their  plumpness  and  vigor. 


300 


BLACK  BASSE   ANGLING  IN   MICHIGAN. 


\ 

I        \ 


It  is  said  that  at  this  time  they  will  greedily  take  the 
grasshopper  and  artificial  fly,  but  the  fish  are  not  generally 
good  ;  in  this  season  you  will  rarely  succeed  in  inducing  them 
to  rise  to  the  simulated  insect.  The  proper  months,  then,  for 
black  basse  fishing,  are  June  and  July,  and  from  the  beginning 
of  September  to  the  middle  and  last  of  October.  Basse  seldom 
lake  the  bait  during  the  prevalence  of  a  north-east  or  east  wind. 
In  the  latter  part  of  September  or  during  the  month  of  October, 
basse  may  be  taken  at  almost  any  time  of  day,  but  they  bite 
better  mornings  and  afternoons,  even  in  that  season. 

The  modes  of  taking  this  delicious  fish,  are  by  trolling,  and 
still  fishing  with  the  rod  and  reel. 

In  trolling,  the  spoon  may  be  used  with  success,  or  a  few 
white  feathers  fastened  around  the  shank  of  the  hook  with  a 
bit  of  red  woollen  yam  or  red  flannel.  White  deer  hair 
adorned  with  bright  red,  is  said  to  be  a  killing  trolling  bait ;  a 
tuft  of  hair,  two  and  a  half  inches  in  length,  and  nearly  the 
thickness  of  one's  finger,  is  laid  along  the  shank  of  the  hook 
and  securely  fastened  in  the  middle  by  binding  on  sewing  silk, 
which  is  covered  by  red  yarn  or  flannel.  As  it  is  drawn 
through  the  water,  the  ends  of  the  hairs  above  the  yarn  spread 
out  and  turn  back ;  this  bait  is  showy  and  said  to  be  very 
effective.  It  is  used  in  the  rapids  of  rivers,  and  for  trolling  in 
the  small  inland  lakes.  The  baits  used  with  the  rod  and  reel 
are  minnows,  small  frogs,  and  the  common  craw  fish,  or  little 
fresh  water  lobster.  The  live  minnow  is  the  best,  though 
there  are  times  when  their  voracity  will  prompt  them  to  take 
almost  any  bait.  The  bait,  whatever  it  may  be,  except  the 
angle  worm,  should  be  kept  in  motion,  by  drawing  it  through 
the  water  a  yard  or  two  at  a  time  ;  this  seems  to  act  as  a 
provocation,  and  they  will  dart  at  it,  when,  if  the  bait  be  dead 
and  stationary,  they  will  not  touch  it.  A  strong,  live  minnow 
of  three  inches  in  length  is  a  very  killing  bait.     Use  a  gut 


BLACK   BASSE   ANGLING   IN   MICHIGAN.  301 

leader  of  four  or  five  feet  in  length.  Pass  your  hook  through 
the  eyes  of  the  minnow,  taking  care  not  to  wound  the  brain,  and 
he  will  live  and  swim  about,  the  full  length  of  his  tether,  in  the 
most  natural  manner  possible.  With  this  description  of  bait,  and 
this  mode  of  adjusting  it,  you  cannot  fail  to  take  basse,  if  they 
are  in  the  mood  to  bite  at  all ;  whilst  others,  fishing  near  you 
with  portions  of  minnow  or  dead  bait,  will  meet  no  encourage- 
ment to  continue  their  sport. 

Basse  invariably  swallow  the  bait  head  first.  The  manner 
pursued  by  the  boys  living  near  the  small  lakes  in  Michigan, 
will  illustrate  the  superiority  of  live  bait  in  taking  Basse.  They 
take  a  small  live  sunfish,  and  after  running  a  hook  through  the 
extreme  end  of  his  nose,  conceal  its  point  with  an  angle  worm  ; 
then,  when  it  is  cast  overboard,  a  number  of  sunfish  gather  about 
it  attracted  by  the  worm  ;  the  collection  draws  the  attention  of 
a  basse,  who  straightway  darts  among  them — the  little  fellows 
"  all  immajiately  swim  away"  to  shallow  water,  leaving  the 
decoy  to  the  mercy  of  the  hungry  basse,  who  in  his  turn  becomes 
the  prisoner  of  the  ingenious  young  piscator.  But  Basse,  like 
others  of  the  finny  tribe,  are  not  always  caught  when  hooked. 
In  the  season  when  in  full  strength,  they  make  most  violent 
efforts  to  release  themselves  from  the  "  barbed  steel,"  and  will 
frequently,  after  making  a  burst  or  two,  throw  themselves  two 
or  three  feet  out  of  the  water  with  a  flutter,  shaking  their  heads 
most  intelligently  to  throw  out  the  hook.  This  is  a  ticklish 
time  for  the  angler,  and  unless  he  keeps  his  strain  upon  the  fish, 
and  drops  the  end  of  his  rod,  he  will  lose  his  prize.  This  ma- 
noeuvre, a  strong  basse  will  repeat  several  times.  The  angler 
who  wishes  to  have  a  day's  sport  for  Black  Basse,  should  catch 
his  minnows  the  afternoon  before,  keeping  them  in  a  vessel  per- 
forated with  small  holes  and  sunk  in  the  water.  At  early  dawn 
he  must  be  off"  for  the  ground.  If  he  has  selected  an  eddy, 
above  which  the  water  ripples  over  a  rocky  ledge  or  gravelly 


302 


BLACK   BASSE   ANGLING   IN   MICHIGAN. 


- 

l^=- 

~' 

ii~-_- 

^ 

=^- 



r^- 

bank,  he  should  not  go  straight  to  the  place,  splashing  the  water 
with  his  oars,  but  make  a  circuit  above,  and  drop  down  with 
the  current,  keeping  his  anchor  overboard  till  he  reaches  the 
proper  spot,  then  let  it  go  with  as  little  noise  as  possible.  Cast 
the  bait  well  out  into  the  stream,  and  let  it  swing  round  into 
the  eddy,  keeping  it  in  motion  by  drawing  it  towards  him  a 
yard  or  two  at  a  time,  and  letting  it  run  out  again  with  the 
stream.  My  word  for  it,  if  he  is  on  Basse  ground,  he'll  soon 
have  a  lusty  pull.  Now  care  is  necessary.  Cool  now !  Don't 
strike  too  quick,  for  the  scaly  rascals  like  to  mouthe  the  tempt- 
ing, struggling  morsel  a  bit  (and  they  have  to  swallow  it  head 
first,  you  know).  So  wait,  my  friend,  till  he  gives  another 
strong  decided  pull,  then  "have  at  him."  Now  caution  and 
steadiness  are  required — ^if  he  make  a  burst,  keep  your  drag 
upon  him,  but  not  too  strongly,  or  he'll  spring  from  the  water 
and  shake  the  hook  out  if  it  has  merely  gone  through  the 
membrane  which  lines  the  tough  cartilage  of  the  nose,  but 
steadily,  and  he'll  give  you  fine  play,  for  he  is  full  of  vigor.  Reel 
him  in  gently,  but  be  careful  he  don't  run  under  your  boat,  and 
foul  your  line  or  leader ;  there  he  is,  within  reach !  Now  the 
landing  net — and  voila !  the  stout  rogue,  flapping  in  the  bottom 
of  your  boat,  with  his  capacious  jaws  wide  spread,  and  the 
morning  sun  gilding  his  emerald  side. 

The  sportsman  on  a  western  angling  tour  will  find  Basse 
ground  in  the  Niagara  river,  at  and  near  Black  Rock,  a  few 
miles  from  Buffalo  ;  at  the  islands  near  the  head  of  Lake  Erie  ; 
at  many  points  in  the  Detroit  river ;  on  the  St.  Clair  flats,  or 
western  "  overslaugh,"  at  the  upper  end  of  Lake  St.  Clair  ;  and 
at  Fort  Gratiot  near  the  entrance  to  Lake  Huron. 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 

THB  MUSKELLUNffE,  MUSCALINGA,  OE  LAKE  PIKE. 
E3S9X  Eator. 


This  capital  fish,  from  his  size,  if  for  no  better  reason, 
deserves  more  attention  than  we  have  given  him  in  former 
pages.  By  some  naturalists  he  is  classed  as  a  distinct  species, 
and  different  from  the  ordinary  pike  or  pickerel  of  the  ponds 
and  rivers,  but  ichthyologists  generally  consider  him  nothing 
more  than  a  monstrous  fresh  water  pike,*  or  "  Jack"  as  he  is 
called  in  England.  While  on  this  subject,  it  may  be  well  to 
remark  that  there  are  in  some  ponds  and  small  creeks,  a 
species  of  stunted  pickerel  that  grow  to  about  the  size  of  from 
three  to  six  inches,  and  never  attain  to  a  greater  length ; 
they  seem  not  to  have  the  same  rapacious  habits  as  the  true 
pickerel  which  grows  to  pikehood,  and  are  often  found  in  trout 
streams,  where  they  are  said  to  be  harmless,  as  would  natural- 
ly be  the  case,  for  from  his  limited  dimensions  he  could  not  do 
much  harm.  The  appearance,  especially  when  large,  of  the 
various  inhabitants  of  the  waters,  they  being  more  coarse,  ill- 
shaped,  and  less  symmetrical,  leads  many  inexperienced  persons 
to  call  them  by  different  names,  and  consider  them  different 
species,  though,  in  fact,  often  the  same.  This  fish,  also,  in  his 
variety  of  size  and  age,  has  been  a  subject  of  much  discussion 
among  the  knowing  ones.  The  writer  recollects  the  many  re- 
marks made  upon  a  portrait  of  a  very  large  trout,  hung  in  a 
place  of  resort  for  the  fraternity.  With  some  his  head  was  too 
large  and  his  tail  too  small,  others  his  head  too  small  and  his  tail 
too  large ;  some  would  have  his  tail  more  square,  and  others 
more  forked ;  some  said  his  eyes  were  too  small,  and  others  the 

*  In  Ireland  and  Scotland  they  have  been  taken  weighing  eighty  and 
ninety  pounds. 

©» 


304         TEE    MFSKELLUNGE,    MT7SCALIN&A,    OK   LAKE    PIKB. 


reverse  ;  and  so  from  head  to  tail  not  excepting  his  fins,  which 
were  too  long  or  too  short,  too  wide  or  too  narrow,  or  too 
far  apart  or  too  close  together.  Some  would  have  him  a 
salmon  trout,  and  others  would  not  let  him  be  a  trout  at  all, 
and  still  others  said  he  was  a  salmon,  and  nothing  else.  And 
in  this  manner  was  this  correct  subject  of  the  painter's  study 
criticized,  because  he  happened,  like  the  Belgian  Giant  or 
Daddy  Lambert,  to  grow  higher  or  broader,  grosser  or  coa'-ser 
than  the  rest  of  his  species.  If  a  pike  in  his  youthful  days  must 
be  called  a  pickerel,  in  manhood  a  pike,  and  when  in  larger 
waters  he  enlarges  in  size,  or  increases  in  age,  a  muskellunge ; 
why  should  not  the  trout  or  basse  be  called  by  some  other  name 
when  he  comes  to  manhood  or  full  size  1  The  same  in 
regard  to  the  salmon ;  when  young,  he  has  some  half  dozen 
names,  such  as  parr,  grilse,  smelt,  smolt,  pink,  &c.  With 
equal  propriety  we  might  call  our  own  species  by  different 
names  in  different  stages  of  growth  and  forms  of  development. 
Brother  anglers,  let  us  simplify  instead  of  mystify,  and  avoid 
the  multiplication  of  names  that  only  serve  to  mislead  those 
who  would  otherwise  arrive  at  just  conclusions.  But  to  our 
subject. 

The  following  description  of  the  muskellunge  is  taken  from 
the  New  York  Fauna.  Body  cylindrical,  elongate,  somewhat 
quadrate ;  scales  thin,  small,  orbicular,  ascending  on  the 
cheeks;  the  upper  part  of  the  head  smooth;  snout  broad, 
rounded,  and  depressed  ;  head  covered  with  numerous  pores  on 
the  summit  and  sides  ;  an  oblong  cavity  between  the  orbit?  : 
mouth  very  large,  a  single  row  of  small  recurved  teeth  in  the 
anterior  part  of  the  upper  and  lower  jaw  ;  sides  of  the  lower 
jaw  with  long  acute  distant  teeth  ;  bonds  of  small  teeth  on  the 
vomer  and  palatines ;  a  series  of  minute  teeth  on  the  bronchial 
arches  ;  tongue  truncate,  with  asperities  on  its  base  ;  bronchial 
rays  eighteen  ;  the  dorsal  fin  with  twenty  rays,  of  which  the 


THE  MUSKELLUNGE,   MUSCALINGA,   OR  LAKE   PIKE.         305 


first  five  are  applied  closely  to  the  base  of  the  sixth  ;  anal 
similar  in  shape,  with  its  first  four  rays  similarly  applied  to  the 
fifth  ;  pectorals  small ;  ventral  on  the  middle  of  the  body,  and 
small ;  caudal  large,  lamellated  with  rounded  lobes. 

Color. — Deep  greenish  brown  ;  darker  on  the  back ;  pale  on 
the  sides,  with  numerous  rounded,  distinct,  pale  yellow  oj 
greyish  spots  on  the  sides.  These  spots  vary  in  size  from  two 
to  three-tenths  of  an  inch  in  diameter ;  they  become  occasion- 
ally confluent.  Each  scale  has  a  bright  quadrate  spot,  which 
reflects  brilliant  metallic  tints  of  various  colors.  Length  one  to 
three  feet. 

Like  the  smaller  denominations  of  his  tribe  his  propensities 
are  shark-like ;  he  feeds,  fattens  on,  and  makes  prey  of  every- 
thing that  comes  in  his  way  ;  he  is  in  no  respect  an  epicurean, 
but  seems  ready  to  dine,  breakfast,  or  lunch,  whenever  invited 
out.  A  slice  of  pork,  a  bundle  of  worms,  the  entrails  of  a 
fowl,  a  frog,  the  part  of  a  fish,  or  a  whole  one,  he  is  not 
particular,  if  his  capacious  jaws  can  be  extended  wide  enough. 
A  piece  of  beef,  an  artificial  tin  squid,  or  a  spoon  bait,  is  suf- 
ficient to  tempt  him  to  bite.  You  may  fish  for  him  as  for  a 
smaller  pike,  only  be  sure  that  your  tackle  is  strong  in  propor- 
tion to  the  size  of  your  game.  In  the  larger  lakes  a  good  size 
cod  line  is  not  too  large,  nor  the  largest  cod  hook  too  small  to 
attach  a  bait  of  sufficient  size  to  suit  his  extended  jaw  and  fill 
his  capacious  maw.  In  smaller  lakes  your  tackle  should  be 
proportionally  light.  His  successfiil  capture  requires  the 
utmost  vigilance,  and  sometimes  the  most  extreme  exertion  of 
the  physical  power  of  the  angler.  With  a  stiff"  breeze  upon  a 
large  lake,  with  the  waves  running  high,  one  can  readily  imagine 
himself  fishing  upon  the  ocean,  and  as  far  as  the  exercise  and 
excitement  is  concerned,  be  really  as  much  benefited.  He  is 
considered  one  of  the  best  fish  for  the  table  that  inhabits  the 
western  waters. 


CHAPTER  XXV. 

THE    CAT    FISH. 
Pimelodua  Catus. 


/Z^ 

3^^ 

IM 

--^ 

mm 

This  aquatic  family  is  as  large  as  any  that  comes  under  the 
notice  of  the  naturalist  or  the  pleasure  or  displeasure  of  the 
regular  angler.  There  are  eleven  different  species  described  in 
the  Natural  History  of  the  State  of  New  York.  They  are  a 
bottom  fish,  and  like  the  eel,  are  tenants  alike  of  the  smallest 
pond,  the  largest  river,  and  the  mighty  ocean.  They  occur  in 
most  of  the  fresh  w^ater  streams  and  ponds  from  Maine  to 
Florida,  and  vary  in  size  from  six  inches  in  length  to  the 
untold  length  and  weight  of  the  ponderous  inhabitant  of  the 
mighty  Mississippi,  or  the  "  Almighty  Ocean." 

In  some  parts  of  the  country  they  are  found  of  superior 
flavor,  and  highly  prized  as  an  article  of  food,  and  in  other 
places  they  are  not  respected  either  by  the  hook  or  the  cook, 
and  are  only  used  as  bait  to  catch  their  more  highly  prized 
brethren. 

Dr.  Dekay  says  of  the  brown  cat  fish  (Pimelodus  Pullus), 
"  This  is  very  common  in  Lake  Pleasant,  Lake  Janet,  and 
many  of  the  other  lakes  in  the  northern  districts  of  the  State  of 
New  York.  There  are  many  varieties  in  its  markings,  and  it 
occasionally  exceeds  a  foot  in  length.  Its  principal  use  in 
these  regions  appears  to  be  to  serve  as  a  bait  for  lake  trout." 

COMMON     CAT     FISH. 

Color. — Dusky,  with  a  deeper  shade  on  the  back  and  sum- 
mit of  the  head ;  sides  of  the  head  with  a  greenish  tint ; 
cupreous  on  the  sides ;  abdomen  pearl  grey  ;  fins  dusky.  After 
death  from  infiltration,  some  of  the  fins  become  tinged  with 
red ;  irides  white. — Dekay. 


307 


This  is  one  of  the  most  common  species,  and  makes  its  ap- 
pearance in  market  in  the  first  days  of  April.  A  peculiarity 
connected  with  this  species,  and  perhaps  with  others  of  the 
same  family,  is  that  it  occasionally  appears  without  any  ventral 
fins.  I  have  seen  two  thus  deprived  of  these  fins,  and  thus 
furnished  a  naturalist  with  an  opportunity  of  forming  a  new 
genus — Pimapterus.  The  specimen  thus  defective  agreed  in 
every  respect  to  the  minutest  particular  with  the  species  above 
described,  so  that  I  am  induced  to  conclude  that  it  was  entirely 
accidental. 


THE  GREAT   LAKE   CAT   FISH. — Pimelodus  Nigricans. 

Characteristics. — Large ;  deep  olive  brown ;  caudal  forked  ; 
anal  fin  with  twenty-five  or  twenty-six  rays ;  length  two  to 
four  feet. 

Color. — General  hue  olive  brown ;  the  upper  part  of  the  head 
and  cheeks  bluish ;  the  sides  of  the  body  towards  the  tail,  ash 
white,  vnth  occasional  large  confluent  black  spots ;  a  tew 
irregular  distant  round  spots  on  the  upper  part  of  the  body ; 
upper  lip  maculated  with  black;  all  beneath  bluish  white, 
varied  with  darker  ;  base  of  the  ventrals  and  pectorals  whitish  ; 
pupil  black  ;  irides  varied  with  blackish  and  golden. 

I  have  seen  them  weighing  from  twenty-five  to  thirty  pounds, 
and  have  heard  of  others  that  reached  the  weight  of  eighty 
pounds. 

Those  who  wish  to  capture  the  cat  fish,  whether  in  pond, 
river,  or  lake,  need  not  be  particular  as  to  the  size  or  appear- 
ance of  their  tackle,  provided  it  be  strong  enough  to  bring  the 
fish  to  land.  Of  course  the  hooks  and  lines  (which  should  be 
hand  lines,  although  some  prefer  the  rod)  should  be  in  propor 
tion  to  the  size  of  fish  expected.  Worms,  minnows,  insects,  or 
pieces  of  fish,  if  cast  within  his  reach,  are  certain  to  bring  out 
the  common  cat  fish  from  his  slimy  bed. 


308 


THE   CAT    FISH. 


An  esteemed  friend  who  would  infinitely  prefer  the  capture 
of  a  single  trout  or  black  basse,  to  the  taking  of  a  cart-load  of 
cat  fish,  thus  discourseth  of  his  first  and  last  lake  cat  fish. 

"  I  have  taken  the  cat  fish  but  once,  and ,  on  that  occasion 
used  a  long,  strong  hand  line,  heavy  sinker,  and  No.  1  Lime- 
rick salmon  hook.  I  baited,  as  one  would  a  mouse  trap,  with 
a  bit  of  toasted  cheese.  I  fished  at  night,  and  the  result  of  this 
scientific  procedure  was  a  cat  fish  weighing  seventeen  and  a 
half  pounds.  My  ambition  was  satisfied.  I  have  never 
repeated  the  experiment.  A  great  many  are  taken  by  the  dock 
fishers  at  night  in  this  manner  from  the  wharves  (Detroit), 
The  baits  are  toasted  cheese,  chicken  guts,  and  raw  liver,  or 
beef  The  latter,  impregnated  with  asafoetida,  is  said  by  the 
knowing  ones  to  be  the  best  of  the  lot.  These  fish  suck  the 
bait  in,  rather  than  bite,  giving  a  tremulous  motion  or  series 
of  little  jerks  to  the  line,  much  in  the  way  an  eel  takes  the  bait. 
They  are  vigorous,  exceedingly  tenacious  of  life,  and  when 
'  laid  to  the  land'  denote  their  satisfaction  by  frequent  groans 
and  grunts.  A  year  or  two  since  whilst  basse  fishing  (from 
the  government  wharf  at  Springwell's,  three  miles  below  the 
city  of  Detroit)  with  a  friend,  he  took  a  cat  fish  weighing 
twenty-two  pounds,  with  a  live  minnow,  on  a  single  gut ; 
subsequently  the  same  gentleman  caught  several  others  of  as 
great  weight  with  the  minnow,  by  casting  in  very  deep  water 
and  suffering  the  bait  to  lie  on  the  bottom. 

"  In  the  hands  of  an  experienced  cook  the  lake  cat  fish 
makes  a  dish  fit  for  the  gods!  It  should  be  parboiled  to 
extract  the  oil,  then  stuflTed  and  roasted  '  a  la  dindon.'" 


CHAPTER  XXVI. 

THE     BLACK     TKOUT. 


This  fish,  found  in  most  of  the  Southern  states,  is  a  trout  by 
name,  and  perhaps  by  nature,  but  not  in  appearance,  being  very 
unlike  the  beautiful,  bright  sided,  red  spotted,  lovely  creature  of 
the  North.  He  is  not  noticed  by  any  of  our  ichthyologists, 
but  is  classed  by  experienced  anglers  with  the  perch  family, 
where  he  no  doubt  properly  belongs.  In  appearance,  nature, 
and  habits,  he  is  similar  to  the  black  basse  of  the  Northern 
streams  and  lakes,  and  by  some  amateurs  in  the  art  is  believed 
to  be  the  same.  Like  other  species  of  which  we  discourse,  he 
varies  considerably  in  the  different  latitudes  in  which  he  is 
found,  and  in  some  parts  is  called  by  different  names.  His 
general  color  is  dark  on  the  back  running  into  white  on  the 
belly ;  the  fins  are  of  the  same  shape,  and  disposed  similar  to  those 
of  the  black  basse.  He  has  a  large  head  and  capacious  mouth, 
and  like  many  others  of  our  game  fish  has  a  projecting  under 
jaw.  When  boiled  (decidedly  the  best  way  of  cooking  him), 
the  color  of  his  flesh  (although  coarse)  is  as  white  as  that 
of  the  hahbut.  If  pat  into  the  pot  soon  after  bedng  brought 
from  his  element  he  makes  a  dish  worthy  of  the  angler's  toil. 

The  black  trout  commence  taking  the  hook  in  the  month  of 
April,  and  continue  biting  until  June.  In  the  months  of  July 
and  August  they  are  hard  to  take,  being  on  their  spawning 
beds.  But  in  September  and  October  they  are  again  on  hand 
for  a  bite  (at  which  they  are  pretty  good),  when  they  are  much 
sought  after.  They  delight  to  sun  themselves  near  the  surface, 
about  logs  and  lily  pads,  and  are  there  caught  (fishing  two  feet 
deep)  with  the  minnow,  killy,  or  what  is  better,  the  roach  ; 
♦*  a  dainty  dish  for  this  lively  fish,"  is  the  small  «  homy  head," 


310 


THE  BLAC£  T&OUT. 


a  small  species  of  fish,  which,  whea  well  secured  to  the  hook, 
is  a  killing  bait.  They  bite  only  when  the  water  is  clear ;  at 
all  other  times,  whether  from  defect  of  vision,  or  from  fear, 
they  caimot  be  persuaded  to  bite,  but  remain 

"  In  muddy  meditation,  fancy  firee." 

A  small  size  basse  rod,  with  light  basse  tackle,  is  a  good 
outfit,  and  will  enable  the  angler  to  capture  him  provided  he 
also  take  with  him  the  usual  skill  and  patience  required  in  the 
game  fish  of  the  same  name  at  the  north. 

There  is  another  mode  of  taking  this  fish.  A  fly  made  upon 
a  good  sized  salmon  hook  dressed  with  red  and  white  flannel 
or  feathers,  is  attached  to  a  short  line  and  southern  reed  pole, 
with  which  it  is  cast  and  whipped  to  and  fro  upon  the  water. 
A  good  rod,  and  reel  with  50  to  100  yards  of  line,  although 
not  much  used,  should  always  accompany  the  angler,  and 
indeed  is  not  only  a  convenient,  but  a  necessary  appendage  in 
the  full  enjoyment  of  a  refined  sport.  The  black  trout  is  well 
flavored,  but  like  most  other  fish,  his  character  is  in  the  hands 
and  at  the  mercy  of  the  cooks. 


f. 


^  I 


CHAPTER  XXVIL 

MACKEREL. 
ScoTiiber. 


This  world-renowned  fish,  although  not  much  sought  after 
by  sportsmen,  deserves  a  higher  place  in  the  catalogue  of  hooked 
fishes,  than  he  has  usually  received.  He  is  in  all  respects  a 
game  fish,  and  the  only  reason  why  he  does  not  receive  more 
attention  from  anglers  than  others  of  his  race  is  because  he 
prefers  to  remain  outside  on  the  coast,  instead  of  running  up 
the  bays  and  rivers.  The  fishermen  who  make  it  their  business 
to  take  him  for  a  living,  and  the  means  of  a  living,  delight  to 
tell  of  his  activity  and  beauty,  and  he  is  certainly  worthy  of  all 
praise  in  these  respects,  but  more  particularly  for  his  beauty. 
He  is  undoubtedly  the  handsomest  sea  fish  that  swims,  and  is 
worthy  of  the  title  he  sometimes  receives,  of  the  Adonis  of 
the  sea. 

Great  preparations  are  made  by  the  fishermen  for  the  coming 
of  the  mackerel,  which  happens  about  the  1st  of  May,  when 
those  who  are  fond  of  sea  fishing  should  leave  their  relations, 
take  a  smack  and  go  to  the  "  deep  deep  sea"  with  some  old 
salt  who  knows  the  whereabouts  of  the  fish.  They  are  found 
in  most  abundance  along  the  coast  of  Massachusetts,  and  near 
Sandy  Hook,  New  York.  At  the  former  place  they  are 
taken  in  immense  quantities,  salted,  packed,  and  sent  to  the 
four  quarters  of  the  globe.  In  the  year  1837,  says  Dr.  Storer, 
234,039  barrels  were  taken,  equal  to  $1,639,042.  They  vary 
in  size  from  fifteen  to  twenty  inches,  and  are  taken  with  a  line 
about  k  of  an  inch  thick  attached  to  a  stout  pole  about  twelve 
feet  long. 

The  hook  generally  used  is  called  the  mackerel  hook,  and  is 


313 


MACKEREL. 


about  the  same  size  as  No.  0  Limerick  salmon,  but  of  the  kirby 
pattern,  quite  stout,  much  smaller,  and  narrow  in  tlie  bend. 
Others  prefer  a  straight  short  bend,  black  fish  hook.  They 
love  the  bright  and  beautiful,  and  all  the  bait  necessary  for 
their  speedy  and  certain  capture  is  a  small  piece  of  red  cloth  or 
flannel,  firmly  tied  to  the  hook.  Like  the  blue  fish  they  can 
also  be  easily  taken  with  a  tin  squid,  or,  as  fishermen  call  it,  a 
jig ;  this  is  made  by  running  a  small  piece  of  block-tin  of  an 
oblong  form  on  a  long  shanked  hook  and  skittering  or  trolling 
it  about  in  the  water.  The  sport  is  preferable  to  that  of  cod 
fishing,  and  is  highly  relished  by  those  who  have  once  tried  it. 


CHAPTER  XXVIIL 

THE    BUFFALO, 
Catostomus  BabtUus. 


Is  a  singular  looking  fish  with  an  odd  name,  having  his  abid- 
ing place  in  the  waters  of  the  Mississippi,  Ohio,  and  many 
other  of  our  western  rivers. 

In  appearance  he  somewhat  resembles  the  porgy  of  salt 
water,  except  that  he  is  much  thicker  through  the  body.  The 
formation  of  his  mouth  is  similar  to  that  of  the  common  fresh 
water  sucker.  In  color  we  would  liken  him  to  the  salt  water 
sheepshead,  being  of  dull  silvery  and  smutty  hue.  He  varies 
in  size  from  one  to  four  feet  in  length,  although  he  is  sometimes 
taken  of  much  larger  dimensions. 

Mr.  Flint,  in  his  History  of  the  Mississippi  Valley,  describes 
the  several  different  species  as  follows : 

"  Catostomus  Niger,  Black  Buffalo  fish,  found  in  the  lower 
waters  of  the  Ohio,  and  in  the  waters  of  the  Mississippi.  Some- 
times weighs  fifty  pounds." 

"  Catostomus  Babulus,  brown  Buffalo  Fish. — One  of  the  best 
fishes  in  the  western  waters,  and  found  in  all  of  them.  Length 
from  two  to  three  feet,  and  weighing  from  ten  to  thirty  pounds. 

"  Buffalo  Carp  Sucker.  Found  on  the  lower  waters  of  the 
Ohio  ;  vulgar  name,  Buffalo  Perch :  one  foot  in  length.  One  of 
the  best  fishes  for  the  table." 

The  Buffalo  is  not  a  game  fish,  and  consequently  is  not  often 
an  object  of  sport  with  the  scientific  angler.  Nevertheless,  he 
is  much  sought  after  with  the  hook  and  line,  and  forms  a  staple 
commodity  in  the  markets  of  many  of  the  southern  and  western 
cities  and  towns. 

The  requirements  for  taking  him  are  not  very  extravagant  aa 


314 


THE   BUFFALO. 


to  quality.  A  line  about  the  size  of  an  ordinary  Black  fish 
(Tautog)  line  is  sufficiently  strong  to  land  him.  To  this  should 
be  attached  a  stout  kirby  or  round  bent  hook  of  about  the  size 
of  No.  1,  salmon,  with  a  sinker  of  sufficient  weight  to  suit  the 
current  of  the  water  and  take  your  bait  to  the  bottom,  and  you 
are  rigged.  Except  with  your  bait ;  and  what  shall  that  be  ? 
Nothing  that  is  used  or  heard  of  in  the  capture  of  others  of  the 
finny  tribe.  To  attract  him  then,  you  are  to  take  some  soft 
cheese  and  raw  cotton,  and  work  them  thoroughly  together. 
Bait  with  a  piece  of  such  a  size  as  you  think  will  suit  his  fancy  and 
cast  into  the  water,  and  you  will  hardly  fail  to  hook  a  Buffalo. 
He  is  prepared  in  various  ways  for  table  use,  and  makes  a 
fair  dish  for  a  hungry  man,  but  not  such  an  one  as  would  suit 
the  fastidious  epicure. 


CHAPTER  XXIX. 

FLUEE,  PLAICE,  TURBOT,   &C. 


These  flat  friends  of  ours  are  to  the  scientific  sportsman 
"stale  and  unprofitable"  as  regards  their  game  qualities,  but 
make  about  as  good  a  dish  as  the  angler  could  wish,  after  a 
few  hours'  exercise  with  squid  and  line,  or  rod  and  reel,  on  the 
ocean's  breezy  shore.  This  class  of  fish  belong  to  the  univer- 
sal flounder  family,  and  to  the  untutored  eye  appear  precisely 
the  same,  except  being  of  larger  size. 

The  fish  called  in  some  parts  of  the  country  the  Plaice,  is  taken 
mostly  along  the  white  shelving  shores  of  the  ocean,  from  Maine 
to  Florida.  The  species  known  by  the  same  name  to  the  in- 
habitants along  the  coast  near  Shrewsbury,  N.  J.,  is,  according 
to  Dr.  De  Kay,  related  to  the  general  tribe  of  Flounder,  and  is 
called  the  Oblong  Flounder — Platessa  Oblonga. 

Characteristics. — "  Oblong,  smooth,  nearly  uniform  brown  ; 
occasionally  with  spots.  Caudal  fin  angulated.  Length  fifteen 
to  twenty  inches. 

"  Color,  dark  olive-green,  with  somewhat  lighter  spots  on  the 
head  and  body ;  these  spots  are  occasionally  distinct,  but  oftener 
with  no  vestige  of  them.  Dorsal,  anal,  and  caudal,  dusky, 
tinged  with  sanguineous.  The  pectoral,  anal,  and  ventral  of  the 
under  side  reddish  ;  above,  dark  olive,  with  dusky  bars.  Bron- 
chial membrane  bright  olive.  The  lower  parts  white,  with  a 
faint  blush  of  pink.  Interior  of  the  mouth  rosaceous.  Pupils 
black ;  irides  yellow." 

The  Ichthyological  description  is  here  given,  in  order  to  set 
many  of  our  friends  aright,  and  enable  them  to  call  the  objects 
of  their  pleasure  by  their  right  names. 

It  is  during  the  summer  season,  when  Basse  and  Blue  Fish 


316 


FLUKE,  PLAICE,  TURBOT,  ETC. 


are  plenty,  and  anglers  seek  the  cool  retreat  of  the  sea-shore 
at  Shrewsbury  and  other  places,  that  these  fish  are  mostly  taken. 
There  the  sportsman,  standing  with  his  rod  in  hand  or  his  line 
and  squid  thrown  over  his  arm,  occasionally  casting  and  draw- 
ing, and  when  he  hopes  to  take  a  ten  pound  Basse,  he  is  obliged 
often  to  be  satisfied  with  the  more  humble  flounder. 


Hope  reigns  for  ever  in  the  angler's  breast, 
He  never  is,  but  always  to  be  blest. 
His  largest  fish  lies  hidden  in  the  deep, 
Often  he  takes  him  in  his  dreamy  sleep ; 
But  wakes,  and  opes  his  ever  eager  eyes, 
And  finds  the  game  is  yet  to  be  his  prize. 
The  liveliest  fish  that  weighs  a  pound  or  two, 
Is  small  to  that  within  his  fancy's  view ; 
Ten  pounds,  at  least,  he  always  hopes  to  reach, 
And  land  his  scaly  friend  upon  the  beach. 

Those  who  wish  to  fish  for  him,  may  take  him  with  the  above 
description  of  tackle,  with  crab  and  killy  bait,  on  good  sized 
kirby  or  Limerick  hook,  say  about  No.  1,  or  2,  salmon,  is 
necessary.  Bait  with  a  good  sized  piece  of  crab  or  a  killy,  and 
when  the  tide  is  coming  in  you  will  not  fail  to  catch  many  of 
them,  and  may  be  a  mess  of  Blue  Fish,  and  perhaps,  if  good 
luck  favor  you,  a  ten  pound  Basse.  When  you  fish  for  him  by 
casting  from  the  shore,  after  feeling  a  bite,  you  should  nui 
straight  back  on  the  shore  and  draw  your  prize  out  as  quickly 
Should  you  be  using  the  rod,  after  striking  your 
game,  you  must  take  a  backward  march,  keeping  the  point  of 
your  rod  down  ;  otherwise,  if  your  fish  be  a  heavy  one,  your  top 
will  stand  a  poor  chance. 

The  fish  taken  in  our  bays  and  rivers,  called  by  our  friends 
the  Fluke,  is  not  described  by  naturalists  as  a  species  distinct 
from  the  flounder.  Where  the  cognomen  Fluke  originated,  is 
not  known.     Dr.  Dekay  speaks  of  a  kind  denominated  the 


FLUKE,  PLAICE,  TURBOT,  ETC. 


317 


Rusty  Dab — Platessa  Ferrusinea,  which  comes  very  near  to 
that  known  as  the  fluke. 

"  Characteristics  —With  numerous  minute  rusty  spots  over 
the  body ;  Dextral.  A  series  of  four  white  distinct  rounded 
spots  along  the  dorsal  and  abdominal  outline  :  length  twelve  to 
twenty  inches." 

"  Color. — Head  and  body  greenish,  with  numerous  irregular, 
crowded,  chocolate  or  rust-colored  spots,  giving  a  rusty  hue  to 
the  animal.  These  spots  appear  to  be  confined  to  the  body 
alone,  not  extending  over  the  fins.  A  series  of  four  or  five  dis- 
tant obscure  rounded  spots  appear  along  the  dorsal,  and  a  simi- 
lar series  along  the  abdominal  outline.  When  held  up  to  the 
light,  these  spots  are  deep  black,  and  the  whole  body  pellucid. 
Beneath,  white,  except  the  lower  margins." 

The  angler  will  often,  when  fishing  in  deep  water  for  basse, 
be  favored  instead  with  a  bite  from  one  of  these,  which  will 
weigh  three  or  four  pounds.  When  fishing  with  a  rod,  if  you 
chance  to  hook  a  Dab,  you  should,  after  reeling  him  well  up 
(if  he  be  of  good  size),  take  hold  of  your  line  and  lift  him  into 
your  boat,  otherwise  he  may  give  a  flap  of  his  broad  white  belly 
and  break  the  top  of  your  rod,  as  often  happens  to  the  inexpe- 
rienced. Very  often  in  reeling  in  or  drawing  up  the  line,  you 
will  hook  one  of  these  fellows  in  the  belly  or  near  the  tail.  In  this 
case,  having  the  advantage,  he  will  give  you  some  play,  and  cause 
you  to  mistake  him  for  something  of  more  grit.  Should  you  get 
on  ground  where  you  can  catch  nothing  else,  take  oflT  your  light 
basse  tackle  and  put  on  good  sized  black  fish  hooks,  on  twisted 
gut. 

Another  description  called  the  Turbot,  Fleuronectes  Ma- 
culatus,  from  twelve  to  eighteen  inches  in  length,  is  rather  rare. 

It  is  called  also  the  Spotted  or  Watery  Turbot,  and  on  the 
coast  of  Massachusetts,  says  Dr.  Dekay,  it  is  called  the  English 
Turbot,  from  which,  however,  it  is  readily  distinguished  by  the 


M 


318 


FLUKE,  PLAICE,  TUKBOT,  ETC. 


absence  of  the  numerous  tubercles  on  the  colored  side,  which 
characterize  that  species. 

"  Color. — Dark  olive  brown  above,  with  rounded  deep  choco- 
late brown  spots  on  the  body,  becoming  larger  behind,  and 
oblong  on  the  fins ;  are  rather  of  a  lighter  color  than  the  body. 
When  held  up  to  the  light,  the  whole  animal  is  diaphanous, 
showing  the  position  of  the  viscera  in  the  abdominal  cavity. 
The  under  side  of  the  usual  bluish  white."  It  has  been  known 
to  weigh  twenty  pounds.  It  is  sometimes  called  the  Watery 
Flounder,  and  more  frequently  the  Sand  Flounder. 

All  of  this  singular  looking  flat  family  are  delicious  in  quality 
for  the  table,  and  worthy  the  angler's  toil.  They  are  best  when 
fried  in  flour  and  butter,  and  give  entire  satisfaction  to  the 
lovers  of  pan-fish. 


CHAPTER  XXX. 

THE    SUCKER. 
(Catostomus.) 


The  generality  of  the  tribe  are  not  of  much  importance 
to  the  angler,  as  they  do  not  often  bite  at  the  baited  hook. 
There  are,  however,  some  descriptions  that  will  take  the  hook 
readily.  Dr.  Dekay  mentions  fifteen  different  species  belonging 
to  this  family.  Those  which  will  not  bite,  are  either  taken  in 
nets,  speared,  or  noosed  with  a  wire.  They  inhabit  all  our 
fresh  water  places,  from  the  smallest  brook  to  the  largest  lake. 
They  are  called  in  different  parts  of  the  country  by  the  various 
names  of  Mullet,  Barbel,  Dace,  &c.  A  particular  reason  for 
giving  them  a  place  here  is,  that  they  may  get  a  proper  classifi- 
cation by  the  angler  as  well  as  ichthyologist. 

"  Common  Sucker.  Catostomus  Communis.  Characteris- 
tics— ^body  long,  rounded,  and  tapering ;  caudal  fin  lunate^ 
almost  furcate :  length  12  to  14  inches. 

"  Color. — Head  dark  green  above,  verging  to  black.  Cheeks 
bronze  and  golden.  Body  above  dark  purplish,  with  pink  and 
metallic  tints  on  the  body,  frequently  of  a  resplendent  golden 
hue,  extending  over  the  abdomen ;  beneath  white.  Pectoral, 
ventral,  and  anal,  orange-colored ;  dorsal,  light  brown ;  caudal, 
deep  brownish  or  blackish ;  irides  varied  with  brown  and  white." 

No  attempts  of  the  fisher  with  any  description  of  bait  have 
succeeded  in  getting  him  to  bite.  His  ingenious  and  never- 
tiring  pursuer,  however,  contrives  to  get  him  on  the  table,  where 
he  finds  much  favor,  by  the  means  of  a  wire  slip-noose,  or  by  a 
small  spear  made  from  a  large  size  Cod-hook,  straightened  for 
the  purpose,  and  secured  into  an  ash  pole.  A  friend  uses  the 
snare  after  the  following  manner :  To  the  end  of  a  very  stiff 


320 


THE  SUCKER. 


rod  fasten  a  short  line,  to  be  kept  straight  by  a  heavy  sinker, 
heavier  or  lighter  according  to  the  force  of  the  stream  ;  make 
the  noose  or  snare  of  fine  wire,  and  about  6  inches  diameter 
when  open  or  set,  which  should  be  a  circle,  and  attach  to  the 
lower  end  of  the  sinker ;  thus  equipped,  lower  the  snare  into  the 
water,  a  few  feet  above  the  fish  to  be  caught,  and  slowly  move 
it  down  the  stream,  passing  it  over  the  head,  and  jerk  quickly 
as  soon  as  it  passes  the  gills.  I  have  frequently  caught  suckers 
by  the  above  method,  weighing  from  1  lb.  to  1^,  in  the  various 
small  streams  running  into  the  Hudson  river,  particularly  in 
Dutchess  county.  N.  B.  Annealed  iron  wire  should  be  used  for 
the  snare,  as  those  made  of  brass  are  apt  to  startle  the  fish. 

The  Oneida  Sucker,  Catostomus  Oneida,  is  somewhat  simi- 
lar in  description,  and  taken  by  those  who  like  him  in  a  similar 
manner. 

"  Characteristics. — Back  gibbous,  with  two  short  sub-spinous 
rays  to  the  dorsal  fin,  head  smooth,  with  numerous  mucous 
pores.     Length  12  inches. 

"  Color. — Dark,  bluish-brown  above ;  lighter  on  the  sides, 
whitish  beneath.  Common  in  lake  Oneida,  where  it  is  called 
Mullet  and  Sucker." — Dekay. 

The  Horned  Sucker — Catostomus  Tuherculatus. — This  little 
fish  abounds  in  many  of  the  streams  throughout  the  country, 
and  has  about  as  many  names  as  he  has  relations.  He  does 
not  live  by  suction  alone  but  will  bite  at  a  baited  hook,  and 
consequently  receives  many  appellations  more  properly  belong- 
ing to  other  denominations  of  the  tribe. 

"  Characteristics. — Body  short  and  thick,  caudal  lunate  ; 
three  to  five  tubercles  on  each  side  of  the  snout.  Length  seven 
to  nine  inches. 

"  Color. — Head,  dark  olive  green.  Back  and  sides  of  the 
body  green,  with  purple  and  golden  reflections ;  sides  tinged 
with  yellow :  abdomen  yellowish,  with  a  faint  flesh  color.   Anal, 


THE  SUCKER.  321 

fin  dark  blacAibu-brown,  the  caudal  rather  lighter ;  the  remain- 
ing fins  light  olivaceous.     Base  of  the  pectorals  flesh-colored." 

"  The  Horned  Sucker  is  common  in  most  of  the  fresh-water 
streams  of  the  state  of  New  York,  and  is  also  found  in  New 
Hampshire,  Massachusetts,  Connecticut,  New  Jersey,  and  Penn- 
fiylvania.  It  is  known  under  the  various  popular  names  of  Bar- 
dCi,  Dace,  aiid  Horned  Dace.  It  is  considered  by  many  as  well 
«asted,  and  begins  to  bite  about  the  middle  of  April.  Dr. 
Storer  has  described  a  specimen  fourteen'  inches  long,  which  is 
anusually  large." 

The  tackle  required  is  the  same  as  that  used  for  trout  or 
perch.     The  bait  mostly  used  is  worms. 

Another  larger  and  more  beautiful  species  described  by  Dr. 
Dekay  is  called  the  Mullet  Sucker,  Catostomus  Aureolus. 

"  Characteristics. — With  four  or  five  longitudinal  stripes. 
Anal  extending  beyond  the  base  of  ihe  caudal  fin,  which  is  fur- 
cate.    Length  twelve  to  eighteen  inches. 

"  Color. — Greenish  above,  with  metallic  greenish  reflection 
when  viewed  in  certain  lights,  sides  lighter,  with  the  same  me- 
tallic reflections ;  beneath  white.  About  five  dusky  obsolete 
longitudinal  lines  on  each  side  above  ;  the  superior  pair  arising 
from  the  dorsal  fin,  diverging  and  then  uniting  beyond  the  neck ; 
gill-covers  with  metallic  brassy  reflections.  Upper  part  of  the 
head  and  snout  bluish  brown ;  pectorals,  ventrals,  and  anals, 
tinged  with  reddish ;  dorsal  and  caudal  bluish  brown ;  iridca 
golden,  varied  with  white." 

"  The  specimen  described  above  was  one  of  the  largest 
dimensions.  It  is  very  indifferent  food.  It  is  very  common  in 
Lake  Erie,  and  at  Buffalo  passes  under  the  various  names  of 
Mullet,  Golden  Mullet,  and  Red  Horse.  In  August  and  Sep- 
tember I  observed  them  to  be  full  of  worms.  The  dusky  lon- 
gitudinal lines,  which  are  distinctly  visible  in  the  newly  captured 


322 


THE  StrCKEi. 


-ZE^ 

==r 

■.-  = 

~=-^ 

~- 

=S^?^— . 

=X^=: 

fish,  disappear  almost  immediately  after  death.  It  is  a  very 
beautiful  and  distinct  species." 

This  fellow  may  not  live  altogether  by  suction,  as  he  is  known 
to  contain  worms.  A  hook  baited  with  worm  would  then  be 
a  sufficient  inducement  to  make  him  bite.  Should  you  wish 
to  take  him,  use  a  Limerick  salmon  hook,  No.  5,  attached 
to  stout  trout  tackle,  or  spear  him  or  noose,  which  you 
will. 

A  description  called  the  Black  Sucker,  length  about  13  inches, 
is  taken  in  Lake  Erie,  and  at  Walpole,  Mass.,.  where,  says 
Dekay,  it  is  frequently  called  by  the  whimsical  name  of  Shoe- 
maker, probably  in  allusion  to  its  being  something  of  the  color 
of  shoemaker's  pitch.  In  the  western  rivers  also,  there  is  a 
variety  of  the  Sucker  family,  some  of  which  bite  readily  at  the 
hook,  and  are  also  of  superior  quality  for  the  table. 

The  Kentucky  sucker,  Catostomus  Fluxuosus,  is  a  fine  fish, 
varying  in  size  from  6  to  12  inches  in  length,  and  bites  readily 
at  the  worm  baited  hook. 

The  Pittsburgh  sucker,  Catostomus  Duquesni,  grows  much 
larger,  and  is  found  in  the  Ohio  river  near  Pittsburgh ;  length 
from  fifteen  to  twenty-four  inches. 

A  very  pretty  fish  called  the  red  tail  sucker,  Catostomus  Ery- 
tarus,  is  taken  in  some  of  the  western  rivers.  In  some  place? 
he  is  called  the  Red  horse.  He  is  a  lively  fish,  takes  the  hook 
freely,  and  is  by  some  sportsmen  considered  game.  Length 
about  12  inches. 

There  are  two  other  descriptions  of  this  family  taken  in  the 
Ohio  River.  The  Long  Sucker,  Catostomus  Elongatus,  a  fine 
fish,  of  from  fifteen  to  twenty  inches  in  length,  and  the  Ohio 
Carp  sucker,  length  from  one  to  three  feet.  The  Carp  sucker 
bites  freely  at  the  baited  hook,  and  affords  some  sport.  In  the 
shallow,  clear  parts  of  the  streams,  at  certain  seasons,  he  is 


THE  ST7CEES. 


323 


taken  in  large  quantities  by  spearing.     They  are  both  highly 
prized  for  the  table,  when  properly  boiled  or  fried. 

In  the  Delaware  river  is  found  a  kind  known  by  the  name  of 
the  Large  Scaled  Sucker.  He  is  similar  in  appearance  to 
others  of  the  species,  except  that  he  has  larger  scales.  Some 
of  the  members  of  this  large  family  are  highly  esteemed  as  food, 
and  others  might  be,  if  properly  cooked.  They  are  undoubt- 
edly placed  in  the  fresh  water  streams,  where  the  monsters  rove 
not,  for  the  use  and  benefit  of  man,  and  not  made,  as  some 
others  of  the  tribe  are,  to  fatten  on  their  own  species.  The 
most  sport  is  had  by  spearing  them,  both  in  lakes,  ponds,  and 
rivers. 


CHAPTER  XXXI. 

TYING  HOOKS,  REPAIRINO  RODS,  &C. 

"  A  little  learning  is  a  dangerous  thing" 

But  what  is  here  set  down,  although  it  may  not  seem  of 
much  importance  to  those  unaccustomed  to  rig  their  own  tackle, 
may  at  some  future  time,  and  when  they  least  expect  it,  be 
made  available.  "  Accidents  will  happen  in  the  best  regulated 
families,"  and  so  will  they  to  the  angler,  be  he  ever  so  careful. 
When  the  tackle  maker  is  not  near  by  to  assist,  how  to  help 
oneself  may  be  a  secret  worth  knowing. 

To  tie  or  whip  a  hook  to  Gut  or  Line. — Prepare,  by  waxing 
with  shoemaker's  wax,  a  piece  of  strong  silk  or  thread :  take 
your  hook  in  your  leit  hand  between  your  thumb  and  forefinger, 
about  as  high  up  as  the  point  of  the  barb  or  a  little  higher,  as 
you  may  fancy  ;  place  the  end  of  your  silk  under  your  thumb, 
take  three  or  four  random  but  firm  turns  around  the  shank  of 
the  hook  until  you  reach  the  end  (for  the  purpose  of  prevent- 
ing the  gut  being  cut  by  the  hook,  and  moreover  that  your  gut 
may  stick  firmly  without  the  possibility  of  coming  off) ;  now 
lay  your  gut  or  line  (the  inside  of  the  hook,  up)  on  to  this 
winding,  holding  it  with  the  end  of  the  thumb,  and  commence 
whipping  it  around  firmly  and  closely,  occasionally  pressing  the 
turns  to  keep  them  even  ;  continue  this  operation  until  you  get 
within  three  or  four  turns  of  the  finishing  point ;  in  order  to 
fasten  firmly — give  three  loose  turns,  then  insert  the  end  of 
your  silk  under  them,  and  drawing  it  through,  you  have  a 
secure  fastening,  called  the  hidden  knot.  Another  method  of 
finishing  when  you  have  arrived  at  the  fastening  point,  is  to 
make  two  or  three  half  hitch  knots:  this  is  done  by  passing 


kirz. 


TTINS  HOOKS,  EEFAIRmS  RODS,  ETC.  325 

the  end  under  one  turn  of  the  silk,  making  a  loop,  and  drawing 
it  down.     The  hidden  knot  is  the  better  and  most  secure  mode. 

To  repair  a  broken  joint. — Should  you  be  so  unfortunate  aa 
to  break  a  top  or  joint,  which  misfortune,  brother  angler,  haa 
happened  to  many  a  more  careful  and  scientific  sportsman  be- 
fore you — ^proceed  in  this  manner.  Take  your  two  broken 
parts,  and  with  your  knife,  or  a  plane  if  you  can  get  one, 
smooth  down  each  part  in  an  oblique  direction,  fitting  them 
closely  together,  and  rubbing  some  shoemaker's  wax  on  to  the 
parfe  to  make  them  stick ;  now  take  a  long  length  of  waxed 
thread  or  silk  and  wind  it  around,  similar  to  the  commencement 
of  hook-tying,  merely  to  keep  the  parts  together,  continuing  it 
a  little  beyond  the  extreme  end  of  the  fracture ;  then  careiully 
and  firmly  whip  it  evenly  around  until  you  pass  the  other  end  of 
the  fracture :  here  halt,  and  wind  the  three  last  turns  on  the  fore- 
finger of  the  left  hand,  extended  for  that  purpose  ;  now  pass  the 
end  of  the  silk  or  thread  under  the  windings,  carefully  drawing 
out  your  finger,  and  pull  it  through,  and  you  have  the  hidden  or 
inverted  knot,  as  before  described.  Be  careful  in  finishing,  see 
that  your  thread  does  not  get  loose,  and  your  whippings  are 
firm  and  even.  In  all  cases  of  winding,  see  that  your  silk  is 
well  waxed.  Some  take  a  small  piece  of  wax  and  rub  it  evenly 
over  their  hook  or  rod  windings,  which  adds  somewhat  to  its 
security. 

To  splice  a  rod  properly  at  home,  when  you  can  have  Every- 
thing you  desire,  the  parts  should  be  sawed  with  a  fine  saw,  and 
afterwards  tiled  down  evenly  with  a  fine  file;  they  should 
then  be  well  glued,  and  left  to  dry  before  winding ;  to  finish 
neatly  after  vending,  take  a  round,  smooth  piece  of  wood  or 
bone  and  rub  down  the  surface  of  the  thread  j  then  give  it  a  coat 
or  two  of  thin  varnish. 


CHAPTER  XXXII. 

XISOBLLANEOUS   ITEMS   OF   SOME   INTEREST   TO 
THE   ANGLER. 


The  fin  of  a  trout  or  other  small  fish  is  successfully  used  in 
some  parts  of  Pennsylvania,  for  taking  the  trout.  It  is  used  by 
casting  and  drawing,  similar  to  roving  with  a  minnow,  or  in 
the  manner  of  throwing  the  fly. 

The  fleshy  part  of  the  shell-fish  called  the  Horsefoot  is  much 
used  in  some  parts  of  Long  Island,  and  considered  an  excellent 
bait  for  Black  fish. 

Night  fly-fishing  is  much  practised  in  the  northern  part  of  the 
state  of  New  York,  The  fly  used  is  of  light  color  if  the  night 
be  dark,  but  if  moonlight,  any  of  the  ordinary  colors  answers  the 
purpose.  Those  who  follow  this  method  say  that  they  bring 
out  the  older  and  larger  members  of  the  family,  who  are  not  so 
impmdent  as  to  venture  out  when  anglers  with  rods  are  seen 
walking  about. 

The  Horse  Mackerel,  or  small  blue  fish,  is  for  all  salt-wate 
fish  a  most  excellent  bait.  In  swift  water  use  the  tail,  leaving 
the  fin  on. 

A  simple  but  ingenious  way  of  taking  pickerel,  when  the> 
won't  bite,  as  practised  in  some  parts  of  the  country,  is  with  a 
running  noose  of  fine  brass  wire.  This,  fastened  to  the  end  of 
a  stick,  is  slily  slipped  under  and  around  the  body  of  the  fish, 
when,  with  a  jerk,  he  is  snared  and  secured,  and  brought  strug- 
gling to  land,  fairly  lassoed.  This  may  not  be  called  taking 
them  with  a  hook,  but  is  certainly  an  ingenious  mode  of  hook' 
ingfish. 


MISCELLANEOUS  ITEMS.  327 

Frogs,  as  bait  for  Pike,  are  much  used  in  some  parts  of  the 
country.  They  are  generally  employed  as  live  bait,  by  passing 
the  hook  through  the  skin  of  the  back  or  belly.  Some  use  the 
double  Limerick  Pickerel  hook,  attached  to  brass  wire,  making 
a  hole  through  the  skin  of  the  back  or  belly  with  a  baiting 
needle,  and  fastening  it  with  thread  to  prevent  its  getting  out  of 
place ;  others  pass  the  hook  through  the  lip  of  the  frog,  and 
some  again  through  the  back  muscle  of  the  hind  legs,  and  then 
tie  up  the  hmbs  to  conceal  the  hooks.  They  are  mostly  used 
on  the  top  of  the  water  (still-fishing,  or  trolling).  When  em- 
ployed in  mid  water,  or  near  bottom  with  a  float,  it  will  be 
necessaiy  to  use  a  good  size  sinker,  or  a  few  large  shot,  to  keep 
them  down.  In  all  cases,  in  live  bait  angling,  they  should  be 
allowed  to  come  to  the  top  occasionally  for  air ;  but  not  quite 
as  long  as  the  Virginia  abstractionist,  as  related  in  the  N.  Y. 
Spirit  of  the  Times,  who,  using  an  insufficient  weight,  or  giving 
his  line  too  much  freedom,  found,  after  fishing  all  the  morning 
without  a  bite  (whilst  taking  a  bite  at  his  12  o'clock  lunch), 
his  veritable  bait  sitting  on  a  stump  opposite,  looking  at  him. 
Frogs  are  very  tenacious  of  life,  the  piercing  of  the  skin  in  baiting 
doing  them  very  little  injury.  The  hind  legs  are  very  success- 
fully used  in  trolling,  and  make  a  bait,  when  skinned  and  placed 
on  the  double  or  single  hook,  perhaps  the  most  taking  in  the 
whole  list  of  pike  baits. 

The  gentler  sex  m  this  country  as  well  as  m  the  Old  World 
are  becoming  captivated  with,  and  enthusiastic  on  the  subject 
of  angling.  In  some  parts  of  our  trouting  districts  there  are 
many  ladies  that  can  throw  the  fly  with  as  much  dexterity  and 
grace  as  those  that  are  made  of  sterner  stuflC 

An  artificial  bait  called  the  Kill-devil,  which  has  been  in  use 
a  number  ol  years  in  England,  has  proved  very  successful  with 
some  of  our  sportsmen,  in  trolling  for  trout  or  pike.     In  appear- 
1* 


388  MISCELL4NE0US  ITEMS. 

ance  it  is  similar  to  a  caterpillar ;  the  body  is  composed  of 
coarse  thread  windings,  finished  over  with  the  most  gaudy  silk 
colors,  and  wound  with  silver  tinsel ;  the  hooks,  numbering 
seven,  are  arranged  according  to  the  usual  minfiow  rigging  ;  the 
tail  is  composed  of  tin  or  bright  metal,  split  up  or  bent  at  an 
angle,  to  insure  swift  spinning.  They  are  made  strong  and 
durable,  and  their  cost  is  trifling :  they  are  worth  a  trial. 


fT" 


An  odd  looking  hook,  and  to  make  a  home-\y  expression, 
odd  as  the  angler's  notion,  is  used  at  Baltimore,  Md.,  and 
vicinity,  called  by  some  the  Capt.  Jack  Thomas  hook,  but  more 
generally  known  as  the  Chestertown  pattern.  The  artist  has 
endeavored  to  give  a  proper  representation,  see  page  308,  which, 
by  a  careful  examination,  may,  to  an  experienced  eye,  appear 
sufficiently  explicit.  It  is  considered  a  very  sure  hook,  the 
advantages  being  its  singular  shape,  narrow  bend,  and  low 
point.  It  is  highly  approved  of  by  some  of  the  fraternity  at 
New  York  for  black  fish  angling. 

Care  of  Rods. — When  the  fishing  season  is  over,  this  essen- 
tial implement  of  equipment  should  not  be  thrown  carelessly  by, 
but  be  cleaned,  nicely  oiled,  and  put  away  in  a  cool  place, 
in  readiness  for  the  next  campaign.  The  best  of  wood  that  a 
rod  can  be  composed  of,  even  though  it  be  kiln-dried,  if  expos- 
ed a  length  of  time  in  a  dry  atmosphere  will  shrink  some,  caus- 
ing the  ferules  and  guides  to  become  loose.  A  moist  atmo- 
sphere is  preferable  to  a  dry  one.  When  rods  that  have  not  the 
ends  covered  where  the  joints  are  put  together,  become  by  a 
day's  service  swelled  and  difficult  to  separate,  hold  the  ferule 
over  a  candle  or  lighted  paper  until  it  become  sufficiently  hot 
to  dry  out  the  moisture,  and  the  parts  can  be  easily  separated. 
To  prevrent  this  annoyance,  occasionally  oil  the  wooden  part 
that  is  let  in  to  the  socket. 


-  Mjrui 


MISCELLANEOUS  ITEMS. 


329 


Preservation  and  care  of  Lines. — Many  adepts  in  the  art 
are  careless  and  neglectful  of  their  lines,  often  leaving  them 
(when  soaked  with  water)  on  their  reels,  in  which  wet  state,  if 
they  long  continue,  they  are  apt  to  mildew  and  rot.  Every  line, 
immediately  after  being  used,  should  be  run  off  from  the  reel 
and  laid  out  freely,  or  stretched  on  pegs  to  dry.  Should  they 
have  been  lying  by  for  any  length  of  time,  they  should  be 
thoroughly  examined  and  tried  in  every  part  before  used.  Lines 
will  chafe  and  fray  out  by  constant  wear,  and  many  large  fish 
are  often  lost  by  carelessness  in  these  small  but  important 
matters. 


The  scientific  and  graceful  art  of  throwing  the  artificial  fly  is 
a  beautiful  accomplishment,  but  not  so  difficult  as  is  generally 
imagined.  In  the  months  of  May  and  June,  the  raft  and  lum- 
bermen from  the  Delaware  and  rivers  of  Pennsylvania,  are  seen 
in  the  fishing-tackle  stores  of  New  York,  selecting  with  the  eyea 
of  professors  and  connoisseurs  the  red,  black,  and  grey  hackle 
flies,  which  they  use  with  astonishing  dexterity  on  the  wooded 
streams  of  their  mountain  homes.  Those,  therefore,  who  have 
never  tried  this  method  of  fishing,  with  such  untutored  examples 
before  them,  should  make  a  little  effort  towards  the  successful 
practice  of  this  branch  of  the  art. 


A  feeling  Angler. — A  New  Hampshire  fisherman  occasion- 
ally when  in  need  of  amusement  for  an  evening,  and  in  want 
of  fresh  fish  for  breakfast,  takes  a  blazing  torch  of  twisted  birch 
bark  in  his  left  hand,  and  goes  down  to  the  bank  of  the  stream 
at  the  time  when  the  fishes  dream,  and  cautiously  takes  out  his 
quantity  of  Trout  and  Perch,  with  his  right  hand,  assisted  in  his 
feeling  propensities  by  his  lighted  torch,  and  retires  to  his  home 
with  his  stolen  property. 


330 


MISCELLANEOUS  ITEMS. 


A  Mr.  Oliver,  an  experienced  fly-fisher  of  England,  con- 
trary to  the  opinion  of  many  of  his  brethren,  does  not  believe  in 
examining  the  stomach  of  a  Trout  to  find  the  successful  fly :  he 
says — "  I  have  often  known  a  red  hackle  or  a  dun  fly  take  trout 
when  they  would  not  look  at  either  the  artificial  or  natural 
May-fly,  though  hundreds  of  the  latter  were  at  the  time  skim- 
ming the  surface  of  the  water.  No  directions  for  fly-fishing  are 
better  than  the  following  rhyme  : — 

"  A  brown  red  fly  at  morning  grey, 
A  darker  dun  in  clearer  day ; 
When  summer  rains  have  swelled  the  flood 
The  hackle  red  and  worm  are  good  ; 
At  eve  when  twilight  shades  prevail, 
Try  the  hackle  white  and  snail ; 
Be  mindful  aye  your  fly  to  throw, 
Light  as  falls  the  flaky  snow." 

In  some  parts  of  Pennsylvania,  a  fly  called  the  Professor  is  used 
with  good  success.  It  is  made  on  a  number  4  Trout  hook,  and 
is  dressed  with  a  bright  yellow  worsted  or  silk  body,  and  a 
light-grey  mottled  wing. 

On  Long  Island  and  in  the  northern  part  of  the  state  of  New 
York,  a  bright  red  fly  is  often  in  favor.  Red  body,  red  wing, 
and  red  tail.  A  fly  called  the  grey  drake,  with  grey  wings,  and 
a  transparent  body  similar  to  the  appearance  of  a  worm,  is  also 
used  at  the  above  mentioned  places. 

Trout  are  certainly  very  capricious  in  their  tastes,  and  there 
is  no  accounting  for  their  desires  or  fancies,  any  more  than  for 
the  changeable  notions  of  the  angler  who  pursues  them.  The 
best  way  is  to  be  well  prepared,  and  ii plain  bread  (red  Hackle) 
won't  suit  them,  try  them  with  plum  pudding,  a  fly  composed 
of  a  variety  of  bright  colors. 


MISCELLANEOUS  ITEMS.  331 

In  the  St.  John's  river,  Florida,  a  fine  game  fish  called  the 
Trout,  but  belonging  to  the  Perch  family,  is  taken  by  trolling, 
or  heaving  and  hauling,  with  a  piece  of  deer's  tail.  Like  the 
common  trout  of  the  south  they  give  great  play,  and  afford  the 
highest  perfection  of  sport  with  the  rod  and  reel.  The  striped 
Basse  or  Rock  fish  are  also  found  along  the  coast,  and  in  most 
of  the  streams  running  up  therefrom.  They  are  taken  of  large 
size,  and  are  as  active  when  hooked  as  those  of  the  more 
northern  latitudes. 

The  most  daring  and  exciting  sport  in  the  world  that  is  called 
fishing,  is  the  capture  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  **  deep,  deep  sea." 
Of  this  description  are  Shark  and  Devil  fishing.  Parties  are 
made  up  in  the  hot  summer  months  from  the  cities  of  the  Atlan- 
tic coast,  to  take  a  shark  or  catch  the  devil.  For  shark  fishing 
the  nearest  ship-chandler's  store  furnishes  the  line,  which  should 
be  a  rope  large  and  strong  enough  to  hold  him,  and  the  nearest 
blacksmith's  shop  will  get  ready  to  order  a  large  hook  and  chain 
with  swivel  attached,  sufficient  sometimes  to  hold  him.  The 
hook  is  baited  with  a  large  piece  of  beef  or  pork,  and  thrown  over- 
board from  a  good  sized  row  boat.  The  line  is  fastened  to  the 
Btem  of  the  boat,  which  is  propelled  rapidly  along  by  good 
oarsmen,  until  you  get  a  bite.  Any  lover  of  ocean  sport  may 
imagine  that  when  such  an  event  happens,  if  the  monster 
be  well  hooked,  how  many  knots  he  will  go  an  hour,  what 
will  be  the  course  pursued,  and  what  the  amount  of  excitement. 

Catching  the  devil  is  practised  by  the  sturdy,  athletic  sons  of 
the  south  along  the  sea  coast,  but  principally  in  Port  Royal 
Sound,  near  Beaufort,  S.  C.  Great  preparations  are  made 
when  the  devil  fish,  or  "  Vampire  of  the  Ocean,"  begins  to  school 
around  the  sound:  large  parties  of  strong  men,  in  large  and 
strong  boats,  with  from  four  to  eight  oars,  big  ropes  of  great 
length,  long  and  strong  harpoons,  hatchets,  muskets,  rifles,  &c.. 


332 


MISCELLANEOUS    ITEMS. 


make  up  the  party,  and  its  equipments.  These  monsters  of  the 
deep  are  captured  of  immense  size,  measuring  often  from  sixteen 
to  thirty  feet  across  the  back.  They  will  tow  a  party  about  for 
many  miles,  and  often  succeed  in  breaking  away,  after  two  or 
three  hours'  play. 

Our  line  of  discourse  on  the  different  modes  of  taking  the 
variety  of  the  finny  inhabitants  might  be  extended  a cZ  infinitum, 
but  the  length  already  exceeds  the  design ;  we  shall,  therefore, 
brother  anglers,  make  a  half-hitch  here,  to  be  extended  per- 
haps more  profitably  and  pleasantly  on  some  other  occasion. 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 
or  to  the 
NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
BIdg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

•  2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 
(510)642-6753 

•  1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing 
books  to  NRLF 

•  Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4 
days  prior  to  due  date. 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


NOV  15  2001 


12,000(11/95) 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELEY 

FORM  NO.  DD6,  60m,  1  1  /78  BERKELEY  CA  94720 

[_  '  ®s 


/yr 


7 


VC   12467 

U.C.BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


C0S71DS64fi 


